265008640-Service-Manual-L550-L580-2plus2.pdf
August 18, 2020 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
Short Description
Download 265008640-Service-Manual-L550-L580-2plus2.pdf...
Description
en
Service Manual (20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2 (10
en
Service Manual (20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2 (10
Address Address:
LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH Dr. Hans Liebherr – Straße 4 A – 5500 BISCHOFSHOFEN
Product ID Manufacturer: Product group: Type: Production number: Serial number:
LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH Wheel loader L550 L556 L566 L576 L580 456 454 460 457 459 16978 15653 14171 14171 14171
Document ID Order number: Author: Document version: Manual number: Owner:
1035 3357 LBH / Technical Documentation Department 01
Preface
Intended readership
Contents
This service manual is addressed to anyone whose task it is to ensure that the machines are ready for everyday use. This especially includes mechanics and workshop staff of Liebherr dealers and branches. The first chapter contains information on safety regulations and on the special tools needed for maintenance and repairs. Chapter 2 gives you an overview of all the most important technical data of the machine as a whole and its individual assemblies. Next comes the maintenance chapter, with the maintenance and inspection schedule, the testing and adjustment checklists, lubrication charts, description of maintenance tasks, testing and adjustment tasks and specifications of fuel and lubricants. The technical description of the machine is in the following chapters, structured according to fifteen function groups. The layout, function and technical data of the groups, components and parts are explained. Chapter 19 contains information on troubleshooting, the service code table and a description of the “SCULI” service software. Chapter 20 will be gradually updated with the latest options.
Instructions on use
This manual describes several types and versions of machines. The information generally applies to the types and serial numbers stated at the bottom of the page. The exception to this is information which only applies to specific types and serial numbers, which are stated at the beginning of the section concerned (for example technical data of parts). Where possible, the ID numbers of parts and components are stated in the heading. This manual is available in German, English, French, Spanish and Italian.
Working instructions
Always follow the safety regulations whenever you work on the machine. You will find a reference to this in the “General Information” section. In order to perform these tasks you need a complete set of basic tools andcertain special tools, all in perfect working order. All tasks require absolute cleanliness. Replace seals such as O-rings and surface seals during repairs.
General information
1
Product description
2
Maintenance
3
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear
4
Cooling system
5
Travel hydraulics
6
Working hydraulics
7
Steering system
8
Brake system
9
Electrical system
10
Transfer gear
11
Axles and cardan shaft
12
Machine frame and ballast weight
13
Central lubrication system
14
Coverings and access
15
Cab, heating and air-conditioning
16
Lift arms and quick-change device
17
Equipment and accessories
18
Service codes and diagnosis
19
Options
20
1 General Informations 1.0 Chapter contents 1
General Informations........................................................... 1.0-1 1.1
Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1 1.1.1
Introduction...........................................................................1.1-1
1.1.2
Overview of the safety regulations .......................................1.1-2
1.2
Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1 Special tools in general ........................................................1.2-1
1.2.2
Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines..............................1.2-2
1.2.3
Special tools for hydraulic cylinders .....................................1.2-3
1.2.4
Special tools for electronics..................................................1.2-3
1.2.5
Special tools for axles...........................................................1.2-3
1.2.6
Special tools for the transmission.........................................1.2-5
1.2.7
Central lubrication system ....................................................1.2-5
1.2.8
Special tools for the air conditioning system ........................1.2-5
1.2.9
Special tools for cab windows ..............................................1.2-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
General Informations
1.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
General Informations Safety regulations
1.1 Safety regulations Working on the machine poses safety risks to the operator, driver or maintenance engineers. You can prevent risks and accidents by regularly reading and observing the various safety instructions. This is especially important for personnel who only occasionally work on the machine, for example, carrying out rigging or maintenance work. The safety regulations listed below, if conscientiously followed, will ensure your own safety and that of others, and will prevent the machine from being damaged. Whenever tasks which could cause danger to personnel or damage to the machine are described, the necessary safety precautions are explained in this manual. These are indicated by the headings Danger, Warning or Caution.
1.1.1
Introduction 1. The symbols below have the following meanings: Danger Risk of personal injury. Denotes an impending dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury or death if not avoided. ! Note the warning.
Warning Risk of personal injury. Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury or death if not avoided. ! Note the warning.
Caution Risk of personal injury. Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to slight injury if not avoided. ! Note the warning.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Caution Risk of damage to the machine. Denotes actions or circumstances which may result in damage to the machine. ! Note the warning.
Note Useful information Denotes information on correctly handling the machine and the lubricants and fuels used. ! Observe the instructions.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.1-1 o f 2
General Informations
Service Manual
Safety regulations
2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following any additional rules and guidelines that may apply The following should also be observed: – The safety rules in force at the operating site – Legally enforceable road traffic regulations – Guidelines issued by trade associations
1.1.2
Overview of the safety regulations A detailed description of these can be read in the relevant section of the safety regulations chapter in the operating manual. The following sections are included in the operating manual: 1
Introduction
2
General safety regulations
3
Proper use
4
Decals on the machine
5
Instructions on preventing crushing injuries and burns
6
Instructions on preventing fires and explosions
7
Safety instructions for start-up
8
Safety precautions during start-up
9
Instructions for safe working
10
Safety instructions for driving on slopes
11
Parking safely
12
Transporting the machine safely
13
Towing the machine safely
14
Measures for ensuring safe maintenance Safety instructions for working on machines with hydro accumulators
16
Safety instructions for welding work on the machine
17
Instructions for working safely on the working attachment
18
Safety instructions for transporting the machine by crane
19
Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines
20
Attachments and accessories
21
Protection against vibrations
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
15
1.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
General Informations Special tools for maintenance and repair work
1.2 Special tools for maintenance and repair work 1.2.1
ID no.
Use
Anti-freeze and battery tester
7408922
All wheel loaders
24 volt vacuum pump Filling and testing device with case Manometer 0 - 40 bar Manometer 0 - 250 bar Manometer 0 - 600 bar Manometer connection High pressure hose 1500 mm High pressure hose 4000 mm Screw connection M 10 x 1 Draining hose Drain piece
7408148
All wheel loaders
Remarks For checking the acid concentration (battery charging state) and anti-freeze For preventing oil loss
8145359
All wheel loaders
For checking the hydro accumulator
7361288 5002932 5002866 7002436 7002475 7009134 5005180 7005660 7402657
All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders
Safety cap 10 mm
7009315
All wheel loaders
Safety cap 13 mm Safety cap 17 mm Safety cap 19 mm
7615515 7615589 7009317
All wheel loaders All wheel loaders All wheel loaders
Safety cap 17 mm
7622068
All wheel loaders
USB dongle
10333608
L550 - L580
Diagnostic data cable
10035410
L550 - L580
Adapter cable RS232USB
693190714 All wheel loaders
SDCF-03 memory card adapter
10223098
L550 - L580
Compact flash card
10223095
L550 - L580
For checking the hydraulic pressure For checking the hydraulic pressure For checking the hydraulic pressure Connection for the manometer High pressure hose for manometer High pressure hose for manometer For checking the hydraulic pressure For draining oil via a drain valve For the drain hose For securing the valves on the variable adjustment motor For securing the valves on the pumps For securing the valves on the pumps For securing the valves on the pumps For securing the valves on the control block With SERVICE authorisation For adjusting the travel hydraulics, and testing the electrical system and options For communicating with the wheel loader electronics if there is an error with the RS232 interface on the notebook. For writing to the compact flash card Blank compact flash card. Data medium for application software.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Description
Special tools in general
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-1 o f 6
General Informations
Service Manual
Special tools for maintenance and repair work
Description
Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines ID no.
Use
Mandrel
9078118
L550 - L556 engine
Mandrel
9078119
L550 - L556 engine
Rotary angle device
0524062
L550 - L580 engine
Holder
0528464
L550 - L580 engine
Dial gauge holder
10023885
L550 - L580 engine
Compression tester Compression tester insert Adapter Claw
8008782 10012817 10297211 10117612
L550 - L580 engine L550 - L580 engine L550 - L580 engine L550 - L580 engine
Engine turner
0524045
L550 - L580 engine
Holder
0528464
L550 - L580 engine
Piston strap
8000592
L550 - L580 engine
Rotary angle device
0524062
L550 - L580 engine
Piston ring tongs
7009319
L550 - L580 engine
Extractor tool
0526855
L550 - L580 engine
Extractor tool
0528462
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528470
L550 - L580 engine
Hook and lever
7019858
L550 - L580 engine
Inserter
10116249
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528470
L550 - L580 engine
Inserter
10116250
L550 - L580 engine
Special spanner
10020852
L550 - L580 engine
Adapter
0524029
L550 - L580 engine
Adapter
10220689
L550 - L580 engine
Hammer puller
0524072
L550 - L580 engine
Pusher tube
10289319
L550 - L580 engine
Pusher tube
10289320
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528472
L550 - L580 engine
1.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Remarks For installing the mass equalisation shafts (D 934) For installing the mass equalisation shafts (D 934) For installing and removing the cylinder head For checking projection of the cylinder bushings For checking projection of the cylinder bushings For checking the compression For checking the compression For checking the compression For checking the compression For installing and removing the pistons and rods For installing and removing the pistons and rods For installing and removing the pistons and rods For installing and removing the pistons and rods For installing and removing the piston rings For installing and removing the cylinder bushing For installing and removing the cylinder bushing For installing and removing crankshaft attachments For installing and removing the front crankshaft seal For installing and removing the front crankshaft seal For installing and removing the flywheel For installing and removing the rear crankshaft seal For installing and removing the injection line For installing and removing the pressure pipe port and injection nozzles For installing and removing the pressure pipe port and injection nozzles For installing and removing the pressure pipe port and injection nozzles For installing and removing the injection pump and roller tappet For installing and removing the injection pump and roller tappet For installing and removing the exhaust pipe
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2.2
Service Manual
General Informations Safety regulations
1.2.3 Description Assembly sleeve 80 mm
ID no. 9227165
Assembly sleeve 90 mm
9227161
Assembly sleeve 130 mm
9998624
Assembly sleeve 150 mm
9998622
Assembly sleeve 170 mm Expansion sleeve 80 mm
9107931 9227166
Expansion sleeve 90 mm
9227162
Expansion sleeve 130 mm
9110408
Expansion sleeve 150 mm
9110410
Expansion sleeve 170 mm Bearing head assembly spanner 70/8 mm Bearing head assembly spanner 75/12 mm
9110412
Use L550, L556 steering cylinder L566, L576, L580 steering cylinder L550, L556 lift cylinder L550, L556 tilt cylinder L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder L550, L556 steering cylinder L566, L576, L580 steering cylinder L550, L556 lift cylinder L550, L556 tilt cylinder L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder
9210219
L550, L556 steering cylinder
For fitting the piston rod bearing
9239572
L566, L576, L580 steering cylinder
For fitting the piston rod bearing
1.2.4 Description
8502956
Test probe, red Test probe, black Magnet tester Stripping and crimping pliers 0.5 – 6.0 mm2 Crimping pliers Wedge extractor tool Extraction tool size 12 for pin and bushing Extraction tool size 16 for pin and bushing Extraction tool size 20 for pin and bushing
Use
For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals For fitting the seals
Remarks For measuring voltage, current, resistance and frequency For testing DEUTSCH connectors For testing DEUTSCH connectors For checking solenoid valves
All wheel loaders
884191214 All wheel loaders 884191114 All wheel loaders 8145743 All wheel loaders 8460263
All wheel loaders
For MATE-N-LOK connectors
8503647 7026267
All wheel loaders All wheel loaders
For DEUTSCH connectors For DEUTSCH connectors
8145674
All wheel loaders
For DEUTSCH connectors
8145673
All wheel loaders
For DEUTSCH connectors
8503630
All wheel loaders
For DEUTSCH connectors
1.2.5
Special tools for axles
Description
ID no.
Hand pump
8145835
L550 - L580 axles
Collet
7009536
L550 - L576 axles
Spring hook
8145767
L550 - L576 axles
Slip bushing 260 mm
7017559
Slip bushing 315 mm
7017556
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Remarks For fitting the seals
Special tools for electronics
ID no.
Digital multimeter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Special tools for hydraulic cylinders
Use
Remarks For finding leaks on disc brakes For installing and removing the snap ring in the planetary drive For attaching and detaching the return springs
L556 front axle L556 rear axle L566, L576 front axle L566, L576 rear axle
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
For fitting the brake piston For fitting the brake piston
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-3 o f 6
General Informations
Service Manual
Special tools for maintenance and repair work
Use
Remarks
7017558
L556 rear axle
For fitting ring gear carriers
7017557
L556 front axle L566, L576 rear axle
For fitting ring gear carriers
7017555
L566, L576 front axle
For fitting ring gear carriers
7017566 7011518 7017563
Handle for mounting tool Handle for various mounting tools For fitting cartridge seal ring
7011522 7013922
L550 - L576 axles L550 - L576 axles L556 rear axle L556, L566, L576 front axle; L566, L576 rear axle L556 - L576 axles L556 rear axle L556 front axle L566, L576 rear axle L566, L576 front axle L556 front axle L556, L566, L576 rear axle L566, L576, L580 front axle; L580 rear axle L556 - L580 axles L556 - L580 axles
Mounting tool
7017560
Centring bracket Groove nut spanner 111 mm
7013775 7009537
Groove nut spanner 140 mm
7011251
Groove nut spanner 169 mm Measuring screw M 16 x 1.5 Measuring screw M 16 x 1.5 Clamp fork Mounting tool Slotted nut spanner 81 mm Mounting tool (used with grip 7011518)
7013774
10017840
L550 - L576 axles
7624271
L550 axles, MT-L 3085
Mounting tool
7624272
L550 axles, MT-L 3085
Centring bracket
10008138
Socket wrench
10008139
Socket wrench
10218794
Clamp fork
10008140
L550 MT-L 3085 axles
10286181
L580 Hercules axles
10286183
L580 Hercules axles
10286186
L580 Hercules axles
Grip for seal driver and shell
10286788
L580 Hercules axles
Driver for inner lip seal
10286189
L580 Hercules axles
Driver for wear bushing with guide
10286190
L580 Hercules axles
Grooved nut socket
10286192
L580 Hercules axles
Seal holder installation tool Driver for oil bearing casings, bevel gear
10286193
L580 Hercules axles
10286194
L580 Hercules axles
Special tool kit for Hercules axles Driver for lubrication and oil seal 3“ bushing driver with guide and grip
1.2-4 o f 6
ID no.
7019556 8145771
L550 - L576 axles MT-L 3085-3105 L550 MT-L 3085 axles L556 rear axle L550 MT-L 3085 front axle L556 - L576 axles
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
For fitting cartridge seal ring For groove nut spanner For fitting the grooved nuts For fitting the grooved nuts For fitting the grooved nuts For measuring wear on the brake discs For measuring wear on the brake discs For fitting the drive flange For fitting the shaft seal ring For fitting the grooved nuts on the axle shaft For fitting the dust protection axle insert For fitting the shaft seal ring axle insert For detaching the output For detaching the output For detaching the output For removing and fitting the drive pinion Contains the following items: 10286183 - 10286198 For fitting the lubrication and oil seal, to be used with grip 10286788 For installing bushing, including grip 10286788 For fitting the outer lip seal, to be used with appropriate driver For fitting the inner lip seal, to be used with grip 10286788 For installing the wear bushing For removing and fitting the grooved nuts For fitting the seal holder For installing the bearing casings, bevel gear
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Description Slip bushing M 90 x 1.5 mm Slip bushing M 110 x 1.5 mm Slip bushing M 130 x 1.5 mm Handle Handle Mounting tool
Service Manual
General Informations Safety regulations
Description Driver for grease seal and disc
ID no. 10286195
L580 Hercules axles
Rolling apparatus
10286196
L580 Hercules axles
Lifting tackle Installation tool for Lifetime seal
10286197
L580 Hercules axles
Remarks For fitting the grease seal and disc, to be used with grip 10286788 For testing the rolling torque of the wheel hubs For removing the wheel hub
10286198
L580 Hercules axles
For fitting the Lifetime seal
1.2.6 Description
Special tools for the transmission ID no.
Use
Fixing spanner
10016179
L550 - L580
Special socket
10016180
L550 - L580
Mounting tool
10016181
L550 - L580
1.2.7 Description
Remarks For loosening and tightening the grooved nut on the coupling 1 For loosening and tightening the grooved nut on the coupling 1 For removing and attaching the snap ring on the couplings
Central lubrication system ID no.
Use
BEKA Max filling press
10009239
All wheel loaders
Groeneveld filling press
10333342
All wheel loaders
Filling connection Gröneveld central lubrication data cable
7029283
All wheel loaders
7624289
All wheel loaders
7624290
All wheel loaders
Gröneveld central lubrication plug adapter
1.2.8 Description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Use
Remarks For quickly filling the BEKA Max reservoir For quickly filling the Groeneveld reservoir For filling the reservoir For inspecting the central lubrication system For inspecting the central lubrication system
Special tools for the air conditioning system ID no.
Use
Remarks
Vacuum pump
7027552
All wheel loaders
For evacuating the air conditioning system
4-valve test fitting
7027558
All wheel loaders
For testing, evacuating and filling the air conditioning system
Filling hose, blue 1500 mm
7027553
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
Filling hose, yellow 1500 mm
7027554
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
Filling hose, red 1500 mm
7027555
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
Car coupling 253a
7027556
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
Car coupling 254a
7027557
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
1.2.9 Description Complete tool box with suction pads
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Special tools for cab windows ID no.
10021147
Use
Remarks
All wheel loaders
For installing and removing windows
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-5 o f 6
General Informations
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Special tools for maintenance and repair work
1.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
2 Production description 2.0 Chapter contents 2
Production description......................................................... 2.0-1 2.1
Technical data ................................................................................2.1-1 Complete machine................................................................2.1-1
2.1.2
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear..............................2.1-8
2.1.3
Cooling system ...................................................................2.1-12
2.1.4
Travel hydraulics ................................................................2.1-13
2.1.5
Working hydraulics .............................................................2.1-16
2.1.6
Steering system..................................................................2.1-20
2.1.7
Brake system......................................................................2.1-22
2.1.8
Electrical system.................................................................2.1-24
2.1.9
Transmission ......................................................................2.1-25
2.1.10
Axles and cardan shaft .......................................................2.1-26
2.1.11
Machine frame and ballast weight......................................2.1-30
2.1.12
Automatic central lubrication system..................................2.1-30
2.1.13
Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................2.1-32
2.1.14
Lift arms and quick-change device.....................................2.1-33
2.1.15
Equipment and accessories ...............................................2.1-36
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2.1.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Production description
2.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
2.1 Technical data 2.1.1
Complete machine Wheel loader with Z lift arms
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine: – With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device. – With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres. – Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/ FOPS cab and driver.
Description
Value Unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546 Bucket width Specific material weight A Dump height at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle B Dumping height C Maximum bucket base height D Maximum bucket pivot height E Maximum bucket top edge height
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.2 2700 1.8 2882
m³ mm t/m³ mm
3500 3645 3915 5395
mm mm mm mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
1095 mm
G Digging depth H Height above cab I Height above exhaust J Ground clearance K Wheel base L Overall length Turning radius over bucket outer edge
85 3365 2985 530 3280 8220 6420
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
2.1-1 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Lifting force (SAE) Breakout force (SAE) Tipping load when straight Tipping load articulated at 37° Tipping load articulated at 40° Angle of articulation (to each side) Operating weight Tractive force Travel speed in travel range 1, forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range 2, forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range A1-2 (automatic), forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range A1-3 (automatic), forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range A2-3 (automatic), forward and reverse Sound pressure level in cab in L pA according to ISO 6396
185 125 13205 11865 11650 40 16525 122.6 0 - 10
kN kN kg kg kg ° kg kN km/h
0 - 20 km/h 0 - 20 km/h 0 - 40 km/h 0 - 40 km/h 69 dB(A)
Wheel loader with Z lift arms Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine: – With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device. – With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres. – Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/ FOPS cab and driver.
2.1-2 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546 Bucket width
2700 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
A Dump height at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
2850 mm
B Dumping height
3500 mm
C Maximum bucket base height
3645 mm
D Maximum bucket pivot height
3915 mm
E Maximum bucket top edge height
5460 mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
1160 mm
G Digging depth
85 mm
H Height above cab
3365 mm
I Height above exhaust
2985 mm
J Ground clearance
530 mm
K Wheel base
3280 mm
L Overall length
8240 mm
Turning radius over bucket outer edge
6440 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
185 kN
Breakout force (SAE)
130 kN
Tipping load when straight
14890 kg
Tipping load articulated at 37°
13350 kg
Tipping load articulated at 40°
13140 kg
Angle of articulation (to each side)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
3.6 m³
40 °
Operating weight
17270 kg
Tractive force
136.42 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, forward and reverse
0 - 10 km/h
Travel speed in travel range 2. forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-2 (automatic), forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range A1-3 (automatic), forward and reverse Travel speed in travel range A2-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA according to ISO 6396
0 - 40 km/h 0 - 40 km/h 69 dB(A)
Wheel loader with Z lift arms Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine: – With Z lift arms (2920 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device. – With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres. – Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/ FOPS cab and driver. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-3 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Bucket capacity as per DIN 7546 Bucket width
3000 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
A Dump height at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
3240 mm
B Dumping height
3900 mm
C Maximum bucket base height
4050 mm
D Maximum bucket pivot height
4360 mm
E Maximum bucket top edge height
5870 mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
1180 mm
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
I Height above exhaust
3100 mm 565 mm
K Wheel base
3580 mm
L Overall length
8912 mm
Turning radius over bucket outer edge
7096 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
264 kN
Breakout force (SAE)
200 kN
Tipping load when straight
17690 kg
Tipping load articulated at 37°
15850 kg
Tipping load articulated at 40°
15550 kg
Angle of articulation (to each side)
40 °
Operating weight
22500 kg
Tractive force
173.31 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, forward and reverse Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
0 - 10 km/h
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
J Ground clearance
2.1-4 o f 3 8
4.0 m³
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Travel speed in travel range 2, forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-2 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A2-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA according to ISO 6396
69 dB(A)
Wheel loader with Z lift arms Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine: – With Z lift arms (2920 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device. – With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres. – Tipping loads and weights include, all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/ FOPS cab and driver.
Description
Value Unit
Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546 Bucket width
3000 mm
Specific material weight
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
4.5 m³ 1.8 t/m³
A Dump height at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
3187 mm
B Dumping height
3900 mm
C Maximum bucket base height
4050 mm
D Maximum bucket pivot height
4360 mm
E Maximum bucket top edge height
5960 mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and
1233 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-5 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description 45° tilt-out angle
Value Unit
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
I Height above exhaust
3100 mm
J Ground clearance
565 mm
K Wheel base
3580 mm
L Overall length
8992 mm
Turning radius over bucket outer edge
7110 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
264 kN
Breakout force (SAE)
190 kN
Tipping load when straight
19570 kg
Tipping load articulated at 37°
17530 kg
Tipping load articulated at 40°
17200 kg
Angle of articulation (to each side)
40 °
Operating weight
24260 kg
Tractive force
173.3 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, forward and reverse
0 - 10 km/h
Travel speed in travel range 2, forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-2 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A2-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA according to ISO 6396
69 dB(A)
Wheel loader with Z lift arms L580 - 459 / from 14171
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine: – With Z lift arms (3050 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device. – With 26.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres. – Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/ FOPS cab and driver.
2.1-6 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546 Bucket width
3300 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
A Dump height at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
3320 mm
B Dumping height
4100 mm
C Maximum bucket base height
4270 mm
D Maximum bucket pivot height
4580 mm
E Maximum bucket top edge height
6340 mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and 45° tilt-out angle
1150 mm
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
I Height above exhaust
3100 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
J Ground clearance
565 mm
K Wheel base
3700 mm
L Overall length
9300 mm
Turning radius over bucket outer edge
7420 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
250 kN
Breakout force (SAE)
175 kN
Tipping load when straight
20390 kg
Tipping load articulated at 37°
18409 kg
Tipping load articulated at 40°
18000 kg
Angle of articulation (to each side)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
5.0 m³
40 °
Operating weight
24580 kg
Tractive force
173.3 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, forward and reverse
0 - 10 km/h
Travel speed in travel range 2, forward
0 - 20 km/h
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-7 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description and reverse
Value Unit
Travel speed in travel range A1-2 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A1-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Travel speed in travel range A2-3 (automatic), forward and reverse
0 - 40 km/h
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA according to ISO 6396
2.1.2
69 dB(A)
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear Diesel engine L550 - 456 / from 16978; ID 9080542
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D934 S A6
Number of cylinders
4
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Capacity
6360 cm³
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
136 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249
130 / 190 kW / PS 2000 min-1
Rated speed Maximum torque at 1500 min-1
828 Nm
Lower idle speed
900±10 min-1
Upper idle speed
2065±10 min-1
Start of delivery before TDC
See type plate °
Combustion pressure
20 - 28 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure
315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold)
0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold)
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel
Anticlockwise
Number of teeth on flywheel gear
147
Control thermostat
79 °C
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability
45 / 45 °
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LHECU PLD
Starter operating voltage
24 V
Starter power consumption
6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output
28 V
Alternator current output
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
Auxiliary power take-off transmission
1 : 1.1515
Weight
800 kg
Emission thresholds comply with
2.1-8 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
EU – RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 10116679
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D934 L A6
Number of cylinders
4
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Capacity
7010 cm³
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249
140 / 177 kW / PS 2000 min-1
Rated speed Maximum torque at 1300 min-1
900 Nm
Lower idle speed
900±10 min-1
Upper idle speed
2065±10 min-1
Start of delivery before TDC
See type plate °
Combustion pressure
22 - 34 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure
315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold)
0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold)
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel
Anticlockwise
Number of teeth on flywheel gear
147
Control thermostat
83 °C
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability
45 / 45 °
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
Starter operating voltage
24 V
Starter power consumption
6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output
28 V
Alternator current output
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
Auxiliary power take-off transmission
1 : 1.1515
Weight
980 kg
Emission thresholds comply with LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
EU – RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
L566 - 460 / from 14171; ID 9079516
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D936 L A6
Number of cylinders
6
Firing order
1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity
10520 cm³
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249 Rated speed
2000 min-1
Maximum torque at 1300 min-1
1230 Nm 900±10 min-1
Lower idle speed L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
190 / 259 kW / PS
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-9 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit 2065±10 min-1
Upper idle speed Start of delivery before TDC
See type plate °
Combustion pressure
22 - 34 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure
315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold)
0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold)
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel
Anticlockwise
Number of teeth on flywheel gear
147
Control thermostat
83 °C
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability
45 / 45 °
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
Starter operating voltage
24 V
Starter power consumption
6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output
28 V
Alternator current output
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
Auxiliary power take-off transmission
1 : 1.1515
Weight
1180 kg
Emission thresholds comply with
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10116961
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D936 L A6
Number of cylinders
6
Firing order
1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity
10520 cm³
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249 Rated speed
2000 min-1
Maximum torque at 1300 min-1
1320 Nm
Lower idle speed
900±10 min-1
Upper idle speed
2065±10 min-1
Start of delivery before TDC Combustion pressure
See type plate ° 22 – 34 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure
315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold)
0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold)
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel Number of teeth on flywheel gear Control thermostat Injectors Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Anticlockwise 147 83 °C
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability
2.1-10 o f 3 8
200 / 272 kW / PS
45 / 45 ° UP20PLD
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
EU – RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
Starter operating voltage
24 V
Starter power consumption
6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output
28 V
Alternator current output
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K29
Auxiliary power take-off transmission
1 : 1.1515
Weight
1180 kg
Emission thresholds comply with
EU – RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
Fuel system Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Tank capacity, FULL
300 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE Valid for:
50 l
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Tank capacity, FULL
400 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE
70 l
Fuel separator Description
Value Unit
Filter insert grade
10 µm
Fuel fine filter Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
2 µm
Refuelling pump (optional) LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Flow rate
50 l/min
Current consumption
15 A
Power
360 W
Protection class
IP 44
Max. duty cycle
15 minutes
Fuse
20 A
Max. suction height
4 m
Air filter vacuum switch Description
Value Unit
Air filter contamination vacuum switch activation point L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
50 mbar
2.1-11 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Coupling Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
466/233 NGT
Coupling Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
345/254 NGT
Pump distributor gear L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
PVG 300 B 341
Input direction
Clockwise
Output direction
Valid for:
Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel hydraulics pump
0.7868
Transmission ratio for working and steering hydraulics pump
0.7868
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
PVG 350 B 384
Input direction
Clockwise
Output direction
2.1.3
Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel hydraulics pump
0.808
Transmission ratio for working and steering hydraulics pump
0.865
Cooling system Gear pump Description
Value Unit
Capacity
14 cm³
Rotary speed at rated engine speed
3030 min-1
Gear motor Description
Value Unit
Gear motor displacement Gear motor direction of rotation (looking towards shaft) Coil resistance Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Clockwise 175 ±10 bar
Pressure relief valve
2.1-12 o f 3 8
19 cm³
4.7 Ohm L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Value Unit 124 ±41 Nm
Screw tightening torque Spanner size
41 mm
Temperature sensor Description
Value Unit
Measuring range
min. -30 °C max. 130 °C
Resistance at 0 °C
1000 Ohm
Resistance at 20 °C
1112 Ohm
Resistance at 30 °C
1171 Ohm
Resistance at 55 °C
1322 Ohm
Resistance at 73 °C
1437 Ohm
Resistance at 78 °C
1469 Ohm
Resistance at 84 °C
1509 Ohm
Resistance at 94 °C
1577 Ohm
Resistance at 102 °C
1632 Ohm
Screw thread
M 14 x 1.5
Protection class
IP 65
Max. tightening torque
30 Nm
Plug connection
2.1.4
Bosch Jet plug, 2-pin (Gold contacts)
Travel hydraulics Variable displacement pump
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EZ
Maximum capacity
90 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
222 l/min
Maximum swivel angle (both sides)
20 ° 2542 min-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Speed (at rated speed) Power
L550
111 kW
Power
L556
122 kW
Replenishing pump capacity Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)
46 l/min
Inlet restrictor ∅
1.8 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage
24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption
1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance
22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance
14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed High pressure at 1400 min-1 L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
19.6 cm³
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
31±1 bar 350±10 bar
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-13 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit -1
High pressure at 1200 min
290±10 bar
High pressure at 930 min-1
50±10 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves
470±10 bar 430±5 bar
Pressure cut-off Weight Valid for:
60 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EZ
Maximum capacity
125 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
300 l/min
Maximum swivel angle (both sides)
20 ° 2475 min-1
Speed (at rated speed) Power
L566
160 kW
Power
L576, L580
171 kW
Replenishing pump capacity
28.3 cm³
Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)
62 l/min
Inlet restrictor ∅
2.2 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage
24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption
1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance
22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance
14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed
34±1 bar
-1
High pressure at 1400 min
330±10 bar
High pressure at 1200 min-1
230±10 bar
High pressure at 930 min-1
50±10 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves
470±10 bar 430±5 bar
Pressure cut-off Weight
75 kg
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
80 cm³
Maximum swivel angel
25 °
Minimum swivel angle
0 ° 5900 min-1
Maximum speed
489 Nm
Torque (Δp 400 bar)
2.1-14 o f 3 8
Maximum discharge valve capacity
20 l/min
Discharge valve orifice diameter
3.0 mm
Weight
34 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Variable displacement motor 1
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
107 cm³
Maximum swivel angel
25 °
Minimum swivel angle
0 ° 5292 min-1
Maximum speed
653 Nm
Torque (Δp 400 bar) Maximum discharge valve capacity
20 l/min
Discharge valve orifice diameter
3.0 mm
Weight
47 kg
Variable displacement motor 2 Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
80 cm³
Maximum swivel angel
25 °
Minimum swivel angle
0 ° 5900 min-1
Maximum speed
489 Nm
Torque (Δp 400 bar) Weight Valid for:
34 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
107 cm³
Maximum swivel angel
25 °
Minimum swivel angle
0 ° 5292 min-1
Maximum speed
653 Nm
Torque (Δp 400 bar) Weight Valid for:
47 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
140 cm³
Maximum swivel angel
25 °
Minimum swivel angle
0 ° 4950 min-1
Maximum speed
855 Nm
Torque (Δp 400 bar)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maximum discharge valve capacity
10 l/min
Discharge valve orifice diameter
2.0 mm
Weight
60 kg
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-15 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Motor scavenging pump Description
Value Unit
Capacity
11 cm³ 3030 min-1
Speed at rated speed
2.1.5
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
LRDS
Maximum capacity
95 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
234 l/min 2542 min-1
Speed at rated speed Power
70 KW 22±2 bar
Flow regulator (delta p) Power controller start of regulation Weight Valid for:
180±10 bar 53 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Control type
LRDS
Capacity
130 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
290 l/min 2312 min-1
Speed at rated speed Power
87 kW 22±2 bar
Flow regulator (delta p) Power controller start of regulation Weight
180±10 bar 66 kg
Control block L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Spool valve diameter
25 mm
Piston stroke, both sides
11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow
240 / 160 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow
160 / 210 l/min
Primary pressure relief valve
360±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt in
380±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out
380±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift
380±5 bar
LS pressure cut-off
290±5 bar 330±5 bar
L550 L556
Pressure relief valve pre-tension
2.1-16 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
8±1 bar L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
Float position/ride control solenoid valve resistance
30 Ohm
Weight
40 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Spool valve diameter
25 mm
Piston stroke, both sides
11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow
300 / 170 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow
180 / 200 l/min
Primary pressure relief valve
380±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt-in
400±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out
400±5 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift
420±5 bar
LS pressure cut-off
350±5 bar
Pressure relief valve pre-tension
8±1 bar
Float position/ride control solenoid valve resistance
30 Ohm
Weight
40 kg
Pilot control device Description
Value Unit
Retaining solenoid voltage
12 V
Retaining solenoid current consumption
0.35 A
Retaining solenoid resistance
70 Ohm
Weight
5.7 kg
Pilot control solenoid valve Description
Value Unit
Current consumption
0.9 A
Resistance
30 Ohm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Pilot control hydro accumulator Valid for:
ID 7622 448
Description
Value Unit
Hydro accumulator volume
320 cm³
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
15 bar
Float position pressure switch Valid for:
ID 6905 893
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open 23±1 bar
Switch point, rising Thread L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
M 12 x 1.5 mm Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-17 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Stabilisation module Valid for:
ID 1003 0852
Description
Value Unit
Control piston diameter
16 mm
Cut-off pressure (LFD off)
120±20 bar
Safety valve
330±10 bar
Restrictor check valve diameter
2.0 / 0.4 mm
Solenoid valve current consumption
0.6 A
Solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm
Weight
13 kg
Ride control hydro accumulator Description
Value Unit
Number of hydro accumulators L550, L556
2 Qty.
Number of hydro accumulators L566, L566, L576
3 Qty.
Hydro accumulator volume
2000 cm³
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
25±2 bar
Oil filling
350 cm³
Ride control pressure switch Valid for:
ID 6905 893
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
N/C 10 ±1 bar
Switch point, rising Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Lift cylinder L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 458
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
130 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
745 mm
Minimum installation length
2.1-18 o f 3 8
1245 mm
Weight
136 kg
Lifting at rated load
5.6 seconds
Lowering empty
2.7 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex screws)
285 Nm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L574 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9959 881
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
150 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
790 mm
Minimum installation length
1320 mm
Weight
165 kg
Lifting at rated load
5.6 seconds
Lowering empty
3.5 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex screws)
285 Nm
Tilt cylinder Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9954 056
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
Valid for:
150 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
455 mm
Minimum installation length
860 mm
Weight
127 kg
Tilting out at rated load
2.3 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex screws)
565 Nm
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 9248 203
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
170 mm
Rod diameter
90 mm
Stroke length
555 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Minimum installation length
Valid for:
1050 mm
Weight
188 kg
Tilting out at rated load
2.0 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex screws)
970 Nm
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9903 394
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
170 mm
Rod diameter
90 mm
Stroke length
555 mm
Minimum installation length
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
1185 mm
Weight
198 kg
Tilting out at rated load
2.0 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex screws)
970 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-19 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Return suction filter Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
10 µm
Pre-tension valve
0.3 bar
Replenishing valve
0.04 bar
Replenishing strainer
160 µm
Bypass valve
3.0 bar
Return strainer
80 µm
Bleeder filter Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
10 μm
Inlet opening pressure
2.1.6
0.03 bar
Outlet opening pressure
0.5 bar
Thread
3/4 inch
Steering system Steering pump L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 5716 846
Description
Value Unit
Control type
DFR
Maximum capacity
45 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
111 l/min
Swivel angle
min. 0° max. 15.6° 2542 min-1
Speed at rated speed Power
39 kW 22±2 bar
Flow regulator (delta p)
210±5 bar
Pressure cut-off Weight Valid for:
21 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 5716828
Description
Value Unit
Control type
DFR
Maximum capacity
71 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
160 l/min
Swivel angle
min. 0° max. 15.6° 2312 min-1
Speed at rated speed Power
56 kW 22±2 bar
Flow regulator (delta p)
210±5 bar
Pressure cut-off Weight
2.1-20 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
33 kg L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Servostat Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 1011 3336
Description
Value Unit
Displacement
Valid for:
462 cm³
Secondary pressure relief
285±10 bar
Flow booster
1 : 1.6
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10113338
Description
Value Unit
Displacement
588 cm³
Secondary pressure relief
285±10 bar
Flow booster
1 : 1.6
Steering cylinder Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 461
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
Piston diameter
80 mm
Rod diameter
40 mm
Stroke length
405 mm
Minimum installation length
730 mm
Piston rod bearing tightening torque
1000 Nm
Weight
26.2 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9246849
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
90 mm
Rod diameter
40 mm
Stroke length
455 mm
Minimum installation length
780 mm
Piston rod bearing tightening torque
1000 Nm
Weight
29.5 kg
Steering damper hydro accumulator Valid for:
ID 7623 934
Description
Value Unit
Hydro accumulator volume
320 cm³
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling) Oil filling
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
30 bar 180 cm³
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-21 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Emergency steering pump Valid for:
ID 1000 7930
Description
Value Unit
Capacity
11 cm³ 55±5 bar
Pressure relief valve Protection class
IP 66
Maximum current consumption
150 A
Weight
10 kg
Emergency steering pressure switch Valid for:
ID 1029 4440
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open 16±2 bar
Switching point Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Emergency steering check pressure switch Valid for:
ID 1029 4440
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open 16±2 bar
Switching point Thread
2.1.7
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Brake system Brake system gear pump Description
Value Unit
Capacity
4 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
12.1 l/min
Speed at rated speed
3030 min-1
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 1029 2360
Description
Value Unit
Accumulator charge valve activation pressure
180±5 bar
Accumulator charge valve deactivation pressure
210±5 bar
Parking brake solenoid valve current consumption
0.6 A
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm
Maximum service brake pressure
2.1-22 o f 3 8
95±5 bar
Pedal start angle
42°
Pedal stop angle
15°
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Compact brake valve
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 1029 5965
Description
Value Unit
Accumulator charge valve activation pressure
180±5 bar
Accumulator charge valve deactivation pressure
210±5 bar
Parking brake solenoid valve current consumption
0.6 A
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm 70±5 bar
Maximum service brake pressure Pedal start angle
42°
Pedal stop angle
15°
Service brake hydro accumulator Valid for:
ID 1003 8487
Description
Value Unit
Number of hydro accumulators
4 Qty.
Hydro accumulator volume
1400 cm³
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
95 bar
Brake light button Valid for:
ID 6905 535
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open 5±0.5 bar
Switch point, rising Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Accumulator charge pressure switch Valid for:
ID 1003 6072
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
N/C 120 ±5 bar
Switching point, falling LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Disc brake
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Gap
1.0±0.5 mm
Brake lining thickness, NEW
4.5 mm
Minimum brake lining thickness
1.0 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-23 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Parking brake hydro accumulator Valid for:
ID 1028 8602
Description
Value Unit
Hydro accumulator volume
320 cm³
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
80 bar
Overspeed protection solenoid valve Description
2.1.8
Value Unit
Current consumption
0.9 A
Resistance
30 Ohm
Electrical system Description
Value Unit
System voltage
24 V
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 6002 886
Description
Value Unit
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery capacity
143 Ah
Acid density of charged battery Cold test current (at -18 °C EN 60095-1) Valid for:
1.26-1.28 kg/l 950 A
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 6132 03208
Description
Value Unit
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery capacity
170 Ah
Acid density of charged battery Cold test current (at -18 °C EN 60095-1)
1.26-1.28 kg/l 1000 A
Input / Output - module Description
Value Unit
Protection class (with connector plugged in) Power supply (logical unit)
7.0 to 48.0 VDC
Operating temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Operation at ambient air pressure Weight
2.1-24 o f 3 8
IP6K9K
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
500 to 1100 mbar 1.77 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Main electronics (master) Description
Value Unit
Protection class (with connector plugged in) Computing power
266 MHz
Power supply (logical unit)
9.0 to 60.0 VDC
Operating temperature
-40 to +85 °C
Operation at ambient air pressure Weight
2.1.9
IP 65
500 to 1100 mbar 3.5 kg
Transmission Transmission Description
Value Unit
Number of gears
3
Transfer ratio in 1st gear
6.103
Transfer ratio in 2nd gear
3.033
Transfer ratio in 3rd gear
1.342
Weight (without oil)
285 kg
Drive shaft flange tightening torque Tightening torque Control valve block fastening screws
340 - 400 Nm 30 - 35 Nm
Gear shifting solenoid valves Description
Value Unit
Voltage
24 V 300±50 mA
Current consumption
93±6 Ohm
Resistance
Speed sensors Description
Value Unit 1050±100 Ohm
Resistance
0.3±0.2 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Distance Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 1
60
Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 2
60
Number of teeth on power take-off speed sensor
128
Gear pump Description
Value Unit
Capacity
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
16 cm³
Flow rate at rated speed
40.8 l/min
Speed at rated speed
2550 min-1
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-25 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.10
Axles and cardan shaft Front axle L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085 -
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque Wheel lug spanner size
3.89
Wheel hub transmission
6.0 23.33 816 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3095
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque Wheel lug spanner size
700 Nm 3000+500 Nm 750 Nm 30 mm
Differential transmission
3.89
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
23.33
Weight
924 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 473 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L3105
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2230 mm
Differential nut tightening torque Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
2.1-26 o f 3 8
750 Nm
Differential transmission
Weight
Valid for:
2000+500 Nm 30 mm
Overall transmission
Valid for:
700 Nm
700 Nm 3000+500 Nm 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
30 mm
Differential transmission
4.1
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
24.66
Weight
1174 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit SA 197 337 43 R 175
Type Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2230 mm
Differential nut tightening torque
1200 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
2000+200 Nm 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
32 mm
Differential transmission
4.1
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
24.60
Weight
1180 kg
Rear axle Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085 -
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
30 mm
Differential transmission
3.89
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
23.33
Weight
816 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque
1200 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
2000+500 Nm 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
30 mm
Differential transmission
3.89
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
23.33
Weight
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
2000+500 Nm 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
Valid for:
700 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
816 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-27 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3095 -
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2230 mm
Differential nut tightening torque
1200 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
30 mm
Differential transmission
4.1
Wheel hub transmission
6.0 24.66
Swing angle
13 °
Weight
975 kg
L576 - 473 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3105 -
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2230 mm
Differential nut tightening torque
1200 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
750 Nm 30 mm
Differential transmission
4.1
Wheel hub transmission
6.0 24.66
Swing angle
13 °
Weight
1174 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit SA 197 478 37 R 118
Type Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2230 mm
Differential nut tightening torque
1200 Nm
Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque Wheel lug tightening torque
1300+200 Nm 750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
32 mm
Differential transmission
4.1
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
Overall transmission
24.60
Swing angle
13 °
Weight
2.1-28 o f 3 8
3000+500 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
Overall transmission
Valid for:
750 Nm
Wheel lug spanner size
Overall transmission
Valid for:
3000+500 Nm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1090 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Front drive shaft Valid for:
L550 - 4456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1310 mm
Max. length
1500 mm
Flange tightening torque
125 Nm
Weight Valid for:
38 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1430 mm
Max. length
1440 mm
Flange tightening torque
285 Nm
Weight Valid for:
72 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1500 mm
Max. length
1610 mm
Flange tightening torque
285 Nm
Weight Valid for:
73 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1545 mm
Max. length
1555 mm
Flange tightening torque
285 Nm
Weight
75 kg
Rear drive shaft Valid for:
L550 - 4456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
600 mm
Max. length
710 mm
Flange tightening torque
125 Nm
Weight Valid for:
16 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
765 mm
Max. length
875 mm
Flange tightening torque
125 Nm
Weight
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
24 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-29 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.11
Machine frame and ballast weight Ballast weight
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Weight per ballast weight
614 kg
Material
GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque Valid for:
960 Nm
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Weight per ballast weight
901 kg
Material
GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque Valid for:
960 Nm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Weight per ballast weight
950 kg
Material
GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque Valid for:
960 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Weight per ballast weight
1540 kg
Material
GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque
2.1.12
960 Nm
Automatic central lubrication system Central lubrication pump EP1 Description
Value Unit 120 mm³ Greases up to NLGI class 2
Transfer medium Maximum flow pressure
280 bar
Operating temperature
min. - 35 °C max. + 80 °C
Power supply
24 V
Protection class
IP 65
Container size
2.1-30 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Flow per stroke
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Progressive distributor MX-F Description
Value Unit
Maximum operating pressure at input Temperature range
300 bar min. -35 °C max. +100 °C Greases up to NLGI class 2
Transfer medium
MX-F 25 Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
25 mm³
Flow per element
50 mm³
Piston diameter
3 mm
MX-F 45 Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
45 mm³
Flow per element
90 mm³
Piston diameter
4 mm
MX-F 75 Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
75 mm³
Flow per element
150 mm³
Piston diameter
5 mm
MX-F 105 Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
105 mm³
Flow per element
210 mm³
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Piston diameter
6 mm
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 Description
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Value Unit
Default lubrication (cycles)
24 Cycles
Default cycle time 75%
40 min
Default cycle time 100%
30 min
Default cycle time 125%
20 min
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-31 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.13
Cab, heating and air-conditioning Heating and ventilation Description
Value Unit
Rated voltage
24 V
Number of blower levels
6
Maximum fan current consumption
15.7 A
Maximum air flow
600 m³/h
Heating power
11 kW
Air conditioning system Description
Value Unit
Refrigerant
R134a
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil)
ZXL 100 PG
Coolant quantity
1250+50 g
Cooling power
9.7±10% kW
Air conditioning compressor Description
Value Unit
Type
SD7H15
Capacity
154.9 cm³ ZXL 100 PG (SP 10)
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil) Filling quantity
200 cm³
Maximum current consumption
2.63 A
Weight without oil
6.9 kg
Condenser Description
Value Unit
Maximum air flow
4000 m³/h
Heating power
9.7±1 kW 35 bar
Dryer collector unit Description
Value Unit
Contents
0.70 l
Filtration grade
7 µm
Leak test
30 bar
Dryer water consumption
16 g
Burst pressure
2.1-32 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
130 bar
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Test pressure
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Pressure switch Description
Value Unit
Low pressure OFF
1.5±0.5 bar
Low pressure ON
3.5 bar
High pressure OFF
25±2 bar
High pressure ON
18±1.5 bar
Evaporator Description
Value Unit
Cooling power
2.1.14
9.7 kW ±10%
Temperature sensor activation temperature
5.5
Temperature sensor deactivation temperature
4.5±10% °C
°C
Lift arms and quick-change device Lift arm
Main dimensions LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 – bucket arm
2600 mm
Length 2 – linkage
1267 mm
Length 3 – connecting link assembly Weight of complete lift arms (without cylinder)
1380 kg
Bucket arm weight
928 kg
Linkage weight
318 kg
Weight of connecting link assembly
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
718 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
56 kg
2.1-33 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 – bucket arm
2920 mm
Length 2 – linkage
1267 mm
Length 3 – connecting link assembly Weight of complete lift arms (without cylinder)
2090 kg
Bucket arm weight
1345 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg
Weight of connecting link assembly Valid for:
80 kg
L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 – bucket arm
2920 mm
Length 2 – linkage
1401 mm
Length 3 – connecting link assembly
855 mm
Weight of complete lift arms (without cylinder)
2200 kg
Bucket arm weight
1435 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg
Weight of connecting link assembly Valid for:
718 mm
80 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 – bucket arm
3050 mm
Length 2 – linkage
1401 mm
Length 3 – connecting link assembly
855 mm
Weight of complete lift arms (without cylinder)
2250 kg
Bucket arm weight
1500 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg 80 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Weight of connecting link assembly
2.1-34 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Quick-change device
Main dimensions Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
A – system connection size
1000 mm
B – width
1200 mm
H – height
820 mm
T – depth
450 mm
Weight
430 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 4573 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit 1100 mm
B – width
1370 mm
H – height
1100 mm
T – depth
620 mm
Weight
830 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
A – system connection size
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-35 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.15
Equipment and accessories Standard bucket
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
B – bucket width
2700 mm
H – height
1475 mm
L – length with teeth
1630 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
Bucket capacity
3.2 m³
Weight
1305 kg
Teeth – UNI-Z-2000 III Valid for:
8 Pc.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
B – bucket width
2700 mm
H – height
1520 mm
L – length with teeth
1630 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
Bucket capacity
3.6 m³
Weight
1365 kg
Teeth – UNI-Z-2000 III Valid for:
8 Pc.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B – bucket width
3000 mm
H – height
1610 mm
L – length with teeth
1805 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
Bucket capacity
4.0 m³
Weight
2080 kg
Teeth – UNI-Z-2000 IV
2.1-36 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9 Pc.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Production description Technical data
Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B – bucket width
3000 mm
H – height
1575 mm
L – length with teeth
1905 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
Bucket capacity
4.5 m³
Weight
2150 kg
Teeth – UNI-Z-2000 IV Valid for:
9 Pc.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B – bucket width
3300 mm
H – height
1675 mm
L – length with teeth
1900 mm
Specific material weight
1.8 t/m³
Bucket capacity
5.0 m³
Weight
2340 kg
Teeth – UNI-Z-2000 IV
9 Pc.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Forklift
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Prong length
1500 mm
L – Length (fork carrier + prongs)
1860 mm
K – Fork carrier width
2000 mm
H – Height (fork carrier + prongs)
1040 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs) Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
740 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Prong length
1800 mm
L – Length (fork carrier + prongs)
2220 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-37 o f 3 8
Production description
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit 2050 mm
H – Height (fork carrier + prongs)
1270 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs)
1160 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
K – Fork carrier width
2.1-38 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Maintenance 3.0 Chapter contents 3
Maintenance........................................................................ 3.0-1 3.1
Maintenance and inspection schedule ...........................................3.1-1
3.2
Testing and adjustment plan...........................................................3.2-1
3.3
Testing and adjustment checklists..................................................3.3-1
3.4
Lubrication chart and filling quantities ............................................3.4-1 3.4.1
Table of filling quantities .......................................................3.4-1
3.4.2
Lubrication charts .................................................................3.4-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks..........................................................................3.5-1 3.5.1
Preparatory tasks for maintenance ......................................3.5-1
3.5.2
Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine ................................................................................3.5-5
3.5.3
Checking the machine for external damage.........................3.5-6
3.5.4
Making sure the bolted connections are tight.......................3.5-6
3.5.5
Sealing leaks ........................................................................3.5-6
3.5.6
Checking the engine oil level................................................3.5-6
3.5.7
Changing the engine oil........................................................3.5-7
3.5.8
Changing the diesel engine oil filter .....................................3.5-8
3.5.9
Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt .................................3.5-9
3.5.10
Checking / adjusting the engine valve play ..........................3.5-9
3.5.11
Checking the diesel engine heating flange ........................3.5-11
3.5.12
Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel .......3.5-12
3.5.13
Changing the engine oil separator filter insert....................3.5-12
3.5.14
Checking the bearings and condition of the engine control units ........................................................................3.5-13
3.5.15
Checking the state of sensors and cable connections .......3.5-13
3.5.16
Changing the fuel pre-filter .................................................3.5-13
3.5.17
Changing the fuel fine filter.................................................3.5-15
3.5.18
Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the corresponding service code appears) ................................3.5-16
3.5.19
Bleeding the fuel system ....................................................3.5-16
3.5.20
Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank .....................................................................................3.5-18
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.0-1 o f 4
3.0-2 o f 4
Service Manual 3.5.21
Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve................................................................................... 3.5-19
3.5.22
Testing the air filter vacuum switch ................................... 3.5-19
3.5.23
Changing the air filter primary element when indicated by the vacuum switch ........................................................ 3.5-20
3.5.24
Changing the air filter secondary element ......................... 3.5-21
3.5.25
Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting .... 3.5-22
3.5.26
Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting ........ 3.5-22
3.5.27
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear................. 3.5-23
3.5.28
Changing the splitter box oil .............................................. 3.5-24
3.5.29
Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages............................................ 3.5-24
3.5.30
Checking and draining the soot particle filter condensate separator ........................................................ 3.5-25
3.5.31
Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator ..... 3.5-26
3.5.32
Cleaning the soot particle filter .......................................... 3.5-27
3.5.33
Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor concentration ..................................................................... 3.5-28
3.5.34
Cleaning the cooling system.............................................. 3.5-32
3.5.35
Changing the coolant......................................................... 3.5-33
3.5.36
Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank........................ 3.5-35
3.5.37
Draining off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.38
Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the return strainer..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.39
Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-37
3.5.40
Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter ............... 3.5-38
3.5.41
Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter ......................... 3.5-38
3.5.42
Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets............................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.43
Testing the steering ........................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.44
Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders ... 3.5-39
3.5.45
Testing the service brake and parking brake..................... 3.5-40
3.5.46
Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings.. 3.5-41
3.5.47
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting ......................... 3.5-42
3.5.48
Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals ............... 3.5-43
3.5.49
Checking the transmission oil level ................................... 3.5-44
3.5.50
Changing the transmission oil............................................ 3.5-44
3.5.51
Changing the transmission oil filter.................................... 3.5-44
3.5.52
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h)................................................................... 3.5-45
3.5.53
Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-45
3.5.54
Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-46
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance 3.5.55
Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-46
3.5.56
Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-47
3.5.57
Lubricating the bevel gear seal ..........................................3.5-48
3.5.58
Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft ....................3.5-48
3.5.59
Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft.....................3.5-48
3.5.60
Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's use and attachments ..........................................................3.5-49
3.5.61
Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing...............................................................3.5-49
3.5.62
Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level .....3.5-50
3.5.63
Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.64
Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.65
Lubricating the door hinges ................................................3.5-51
3.5.66
Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter..................3.5-51
3.5.67
Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter ................3.5-53
3.5.68
Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit ....3.5-54
3.5.69
Lubricating the lift arms and attachment ............................3.5-54
3.5.70
Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms.....................................................3.5-55
3.5.71
Check the lift arms and bucket stops .................................3.5-57
3.5.72
Testing the quick-change device (optional)........................3.5-58
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment tasks .........................................................3.6-1 3.6.1
Preparing for testing and adjustment ...................................3.6-1
3.6.2
Safety precautions for testing and adjustment .....................3.6-1
3.6.3
Bringing the machine up to operating temperature ..............3.6-2
3.6.4
Checking the diesel engine speed .......................................3.6-2
3.6.5
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve .....................................................................................3.6-3
3.6.6
Calibrating the pedals...........................................................3.6-4
3.6.7
Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-5
3.6.8
Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement pump...........................................3.6-5
3.6.9
Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-6
3.6.10
Calibrating the block curve ...................................................3.6-7
3.6.11
Calibrating the variable displacement motors ......................3.6-8
3.6.12
Checking the engine output..................................................3.6-9
3.6.13
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump .................................................................3.6-10
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.0-3 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual 3.6.14
Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump ................................................... 3.6-10
3.6.15
Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block....................................................................... 3.6-11
3.6.16
Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the control block....................................................................... 3.6-12
3.6.17
Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block...... 3.6-12
3.6.18
Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators .. 3.6-13
3.6.19
Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module ............................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.20
Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.21
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump............... 3.6-14
3.6.22
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump .................................................................................. 3.6-14
3.6.23
Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake valve................................................................................... 3.6-15
3.6.24
Checking the brake pressure at the axles ......................... 3.6-15
3.6.25
Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator............... 3.6-16
3.6.26
Checking the accumulator charge pressure ...................... 3.6-17
3.6.27
Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake lights................................................................................... 3.6-17
3.6.28
Checking the transmission shift pressure.......................... 3.6-17
3.6.29
Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-18
3.7
Lubricants and fuels ....................................................................... 3.7-1 Diesel fuels .......................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.2
Lubricating oils for diesel engines ....................................... 3.7-3
3.7.3
Coolant for the diesel engine ............................................... 3.7-5
3.7.4
Hydraulic oils........................................................................ 3.7-8
3.7.5
Lubricating oils for the transmission .................................... 3.7-9
3.7.6
Grease for general lubrication points................................... 3.7-9 LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.7.1
3.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance and inspection schedule
3.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule The following abbreviations are used in this section: h = service hours Various symbols (solid or empty circles, boxes and stars) are used to indicate the maintenance tasks, which fall into two main types. The symbols have the following meanings: Table with solid circle, box or star – Responsibility for carrying out the maintenance work lies with the machine operator or his maintenance personnel. This affects the maintenance intervals every 10 and 50 service hours (h) and non-scheduled intervals. The symbols have the following meanings: Table with empty circle, box or star, or service hours (h) – The maintenance and inspection work must be performed or supervised by authorised engineers from LIEBHERR or its authorised dealers. This affects the maintenance intervals on delivery, every 500, 1000, 2000 service hours (h), and at unscheduled times.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
You will find a list of the spare parts needed for maintenance and inspection work in the service package of the spare parts list.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1-1 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance and inspection schedule
Customer: ……………………
Machine type: ………...…
Serial no.: …….…… Service hours: ………..……… Date: ………..……………
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after service hours
z z
z z
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED By maintenance staff Once-only activity zRepeat interval As necessary 7Annually before the winter
By authorised specialist staff Once-only activity Repeat interval As necessary
Have the driver lubricate the machine in accordance with the lubrication chart and instruct him on proper maintenance Instruct the driver in the operation of all functions Remove loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine Check the machine for external damage Make sure the bolted connections are tight Seal any leaks Check the hydraulic pressure according to the testing and adjustment plan
z
z
7
z
z z z
z
3.1-2 o f 4
Check the engine oil level Change the engine oil (at least once a year): CAUTION See the section on lubricants and fuels for the engine oil quality and complicating factors. Change the engine oil filter (at least once a year) Check the V-ribbed belt and replace it if necessary Check / adjust the engine valve play Check the diesel engine heating flange Lightly grease the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel Change the engine oil separator filter insert Check the bearings and and condition of the engine control units Check the state of sensors and cable connections Replace the fuel pre-filter (or in the event of a lack of output) Replace the fuel fine filter (or in the event of a lack of output) Drain off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (or if the corresponding service code appears) Bleed air from fuel system (CAUTION: do not loosen injection lines) Drain off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank Clean the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve Test the air filter vacuum switch Change the main air filter element when indicated by the vacuum switch (or every year at the latest) Clean or replace the air filter secondary element (after replacing the main element 3 times or every year at the latest) Check the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting Check the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear Change the splitter box oil
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance and inspection schedule
Customer: ……………………
Machine type: …………… Serial no.: ……....… Service hours: …….…………
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after service hours
Date: ………..……………
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED By maintenance staff Once-only activity Repeat interval As necessary 7 Annually before the winter
By authorised specialist staff Once-only activity Repeat interval As necessary
Diesel particle filter (optional)
Check the diesel particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages Check and drain the diesel particle filter condensate separator Change the diesel particle filter condensate separator Clean the diesel particle filter (at least once a year):
Cooling system
7 3000
Check the coolant antifreeze concentration Clean the cooling system Replace the coolant (at least every 2 years) Working hydraulics
z
z
250
Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank Drain off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank Change the oil in the hydraulic tank and check the return strainer Check the oil in the hydraulic tank (affects all environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids) Check and clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank Change the hydraulic tank return suction filter insert Change the hydraulic tank bleeder filter Lubricate the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets Steering system
z
z z
Test the steering Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders Brake system
z
z
Check the service brake and parking brake Check the gap and wear on the parking brake linings
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/26/02/2007
Electrical system
z
z
Check the indicator lamps and lighting Check the batteries, fluid level and terminals Transmission
z
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Check the transmission oil level Change the transmission oil Change the transmission oil filter
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1-3 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance and inspection schedule
Customer: ………………………
Machine type: ………...…
Serial no.: ……....… Service hours: ………..……… Date: ………..……………
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after service hours
By maintenance staff Once-only activity zRepeat interval As necessary 7Annually before the winter
By authorised specialist staff Once-only activity Repeat interval As necessary
Axles and tyres
z
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h) Checking the axle oil levels Changing the axle oil Lubricate the bevel gear seal on the front and rear axles (if necessary, for example, if used in water every day) (only applies to L580 - 459) Check and lubricate the cardan shaft(s) Check the tyre pressure Machine frame and ballast weight
z
Lubricate the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing Grease the rear section cover lower hinges Lubrication system (optional)
z z
z
Check the lubrication system grease reservoir level Check the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system Check whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication system Cab, heating and air-conditioning
Grease the cab door hinges Clean the fresh air and recirculated air filter Change the fresh air and recirculated air filter Check the indicator and filling level beads in the dryer-collector unit of the air conditioner
z
z
z
3.1-4 o f 4
Lubricate the lift arms and attachment Check the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms Check the lift arms and bucket stops Lubricate and test the quick-change device
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment plan
3.2 Testing and adjustment plan The tasks in the testing and adjustment plan may only be carried out by authorised specialist staff of LIEBHERR or its contractual agents. You can find brief instructions on performing these tasks in the section on testing and adjustment checklists.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Detailed instructions can be found in the section on testing and adjustment tasks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.2-1 o f 2
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment plan
Machine type: ………...…
Serial no.: …….…… Service hours: …….…………
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after service hours
Cooling system Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Travel hydraulics Synchronise pedals Check the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement pump Check the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump Calibrate the block curve Calibrate the variable displacement motors Check the engine output Working hydraulics Check the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump Check the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump Check the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block Check the primary pressure relief valves on the control block Check the LS pressure cut-off on the control block Check the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module Check the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator
Steering system Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump Check the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump
Brake system Check the opening and closing pressure of the compact brake valve Check the brake pressure of the compact brake valve Check the capacity of the brake accumulator Check the accumulator charge pressure Check the brake light pressure switch and brake lights Transmission Check the transmission shift pressure Check the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator
3.2-2 o f 2
By authorised specialist staff Once-only activity Repeat interval As necessary Diesel engine Check the diesel engine speed
Date: ………..……………
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Customer: ………………………
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment checklists
3.3 Testing and adjustment checklists
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The testing and adjustment checklists contain all testing and adjustment tasks. You can find detailed descriptions of each activity in the section on testing and adjustment tasks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3-1 o f 2
L550, L556 Ser. Nr.
Customer:
/
Operating hours: Type of application: Checked by:
Job site:
Check / Adjustment
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Checked on date: Unit
Adjust. values
°C
58±
Value before adjust.
Value after adjust.
Adjust. point
Test point
Operating temperature Operating temperature (Temperature sensor – hydraulic oil)
5
Cooling system Cooling System (fan control) Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / Sensor unplugged
bar
110±
10
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / Prop. solenoid valve current less
bar
220±
10
P 1
P
Diesel engine S C U L I
Adjustment - pedals Gas pedal – angle sensor Inching pedal – angle sensor Diesel engine RPM Low idle RPM High idle RPM
min
-1
900±
min
-1
2065±
10 10
Travel hydraulic Replenishing pressure At high idle RPM
1
3
G
10
2
MA
±10
4
MB
5
1
MA (MB)
bar
31±
Forward
bar
470±
Reverse
bar
470
bar
430±
High pressure relief valves
Pressure cut off High pressure Engine speed drop, max. difference to high idle RPM
min
-1
Display
30
-1
Block curve at 930 min Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure Block curve at 1200 min
bar
930 50±
930
930
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure Block curve at 1400 min
-1
-1
bar
1200 290±
1200
1200
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
-1
bar
1400 350
1400
1400
±10
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
Adjustment var. displ. motor Automatically adjustment of the variable displacement motors Engine performance at 13 km/h High pressure
L550
bar
300±
10
MA
High pressure
L556
bar
330±
10
MA
Diesel engine RPM
min
-1
1980
±30
= Blocked Machine
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L576 - 454 / from 15653
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Check / Adjustment
Unit
Adjust. values
Value before adjust.
Value after adjust.
Adjust. point
Test point
Working hydraulic Control valve block 5
3
P
±5
4
P
5
6
P
±5
5
P
10
7
P
±10
7
P
10
1
M / M1
2
2
M / LS
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift
bar
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in
bar
380
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out
bar
380±
Primary pressure relief valve
380±
bar
360
290±
Control valve block LS-Pressure cut off
L550
bar
LS-Pressure cut off
L556
bar
330
bar
180±
bar
22±
bar
120±
bar
25±
Working hydraulic pump Power regulator Working hydraulic pump Flow regulator-Pressure difference Stabilization module Shut off pressure (LFD – turned off)
20
MX
Hydro accumulator LFD Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)
2
9
9
2
P
1
P / LS
5
1
M3
±5
1
M3
2
M4 / M5
Steering system Variable displacement pump Pressure cut off
bar
210±
bar
22±
5
Variable displacement pump Flow regulator – Pressure difference
2
Brake system Compact brake valve Cut in pressure
bar
Cut out pressure
bar
Brake pressure in axles
bar
95
bar
> 50
bar
120±
180± 210
±5
Accumulator After 9 braking actions
M4 / M5
Pressure switch - brake system Switching point
5
M3
Transfer gear Transfer gear Switching pressure
bar
20±
3
P
bar
12±
2
1
Transmission - hydro accumulator Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
Remarks:
Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566, L576, L580 Ser. Nr.
Customer:
/
Operating hours: Type of application: Checked by:
Job site:
Check / Adjustment
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Checked on date: Unit
Adjust. values
°C
58±
Value before adjust.
Value after adjust.
Adjust. point
Test point
Operating temperature Operating temperature (Temperature sensor – hydraulic oil)
5
Cooling system Cooling System (fan control) Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / Sensor unplugged
bar
165±
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM / Prop. solenoid valve current less
bar
220±
5
P
10
1
P
Diesel engine Adjustment - pedals
S C U L I
Gas pedal – angle sensor Inching pedal – angle sensor Diesel engine RPM Low idle RPM High idle RPM
min
-1
min
-1
900± 2065
10
±10
Travel hydraulic Replenishing pressure At high idle RPM
bar
34±
bar
470±
1
3
G
10
2
MA
±10
4
MB
1
MA (MB)
High pressure relief valves Forward Reverse
bar
470
bar
430±
Pressure cut off High pressure Engine speed drop, max. difference to high idle RPM
min
-1
min
-1
5
Display
30
-1
Block curve at 930 min Diesel engine RPM High pressure
Block curve at 1200 min
bar
50
930
930
±10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure Block curve at 1400 min
930
-1
bar
1200 230
1200
1200
±10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
-1
bar
1400 330±
1400
1400
10
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
MA (MB)
S C U L I
Adjustment var. displ. motor Automatically adjustment of the variable displacement motors Engine performance at 13 km/h High pressure
L566
High pressure
L576, L580
Diesel engine RPM
bar bar min
-1
340± 350
10
MA
±10
MA
1980
±30
= Blocked Machine
L566 - 460 / ab 14171 L576 - 456 / ab 14171 L580 - 459 / ab 14171
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Check / Adjustment
Unit
Adjust. values
Value before adjust.
Value after adjust.
Adjust. point
Test point
5
3
P
±5
Working hydraulic Control valve block Secondary pressure relief valve, lift
bar
420±
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in
bar
400
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out
bar
400±
Primary pressure relief valve
4
P
5
6
P
±5
5
P
5
7
P
10
1
M / M1
2
2
M / LS
bar
380
bar
350±
bar
180±
bar
22±
bar
120±
bar
25±
Control valve block LS-Pressure cut off Working hydraulic pump Power regulator Working hydraulic pump Flow regulator-Pressure difference Stabilization module Shut off pressure (LFD – turned off)
20
MX
Hydro accumulator LFD Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)
2
9
9
2
P
2
1
P / LS
180±
5
1
M3
±5
1
M3
2
M4 / M5
2
M4 / M5
Steering system Variable displacement pump Pressure cut off
bar
210±
bar
22±
5
Variable displacement pump Flow regulator – Pressure difference
Brake system Compact brake valve Cut in pressure
bar
Cut out pressure
bar
210
Brake pressure in axles
L566, L576
bar
95
Brake pressure in axles
L580
bar
70±
bar
> 50
M4 / M5
bar
120±
M3
±5 5
Accumulator After 9 braking actions Pressure switch - brake system Switching point
5
Transfer gear Transfer gear Switching pressure
bar
20±
3
P
bar
12±
2
1
Transmission - hydro accumulator Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
Remarks:
Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / ab 14171 L576 - 457 / ab 14171 L580 - 459 / ab 14171
Maintenance
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Testing and adjustment checklists
3.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubrication chart and filling quantities
3.4 Lubrication chart and filling quantities 3.4.1
Table of filling quantities Specifications in the medium column: – The standard lubricants and fuels required for central European climate conditions are stated here. – Before you change or top up the oil in the hydraulic system (hydraulic tank), always check if it is filled with petroleum or bio oil. – For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels. Specifications in the dosage column: – The values stated for the filling quantities in the table are only guidelines. – The dipstick and level markings are always mandatory. – Each time the oil is replaced or topped up, check the level in the unit in question.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Medium
Hydraulic system Total capacity
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
240 l
Diesel engine (with filter change)
Engine oil SAE 10W - 40
31 l
Pump distributor gear
Gear oil SAE 90
2.5 l
Cooling system Diesel engine
Coolant
45 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
30 l
Rear axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
30 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant R 134a
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dosage Unit
300 l
1250+50 g
3.4-1 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit
Hydraulic system Total capacity
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
240 l
Diesel engine (with filter change)
Engine oil SAE 10W - 40
31 l
Pump distributor gear
Gear oil SAE 90
2.5 l
Cooling system Diesel engine
Coolant
45.0 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
38 l
Rear axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
30 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant R 134a
300 l
1250+50 g
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
3.4-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubrication chart and filling quantities
Valid for:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit
Diesel engine (with filter change)
Engine oil SAE 10W - 40
Pump distributor gear
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling system total capacity
Coolant
52.0 l
Hydraulic system Total capacity
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
260 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
47.0 l
Rear axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
L566: 45.0 l L576: 47.0 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant R 134a
43.0 l
2.5 l
400 l
1250+50 g
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Medium
Diesel engine (with filter change)
Engine oil SAE 10W - 40
Pump distributor gear
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling system Total capacity
Coolant
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dosage
Unit 43.0 l
2.5 l
52.0 l
3.4-3 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit
Hydraulic system Total capacity
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
260 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
48.0 l
Rear axle
Gear oil SAE 90 LS
50.0 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
400 l
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant R 134a
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1250+50 g
3.4-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubrication chart and filling quantities
3.4.2
Lubrication charts The lubrication chart provides an overview of the location of the maintenance points on the machine and of the maintenance intervals. You will find detailed information in the maintenance and inspection schedule, as well as in the individual descriptions in the section on maintenance tasks. For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels. For information about the required filling quantities, see the tables of filling quantities. Key: 1 = transmission 2 = front axle 3 = rear axle 1) = central lubricating rail, front section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
2) = central lubricating rail, rear section
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4-5 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
Symbol
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 1565 L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;
Description
Symbol
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
Description
General lubrication points
Lubrication
Check the oil level
Oil change
First oil change
3.4-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubrication chart and filling quantities
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
Symbol
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Symbol
Description
General lubrication points
Lubrication
Check the oil level
Oil change
First oil change
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4-7 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
3.4-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5 Maintenance tasks On completion of servicing, the machine should be returned to the operating position.
Make sure you are wearing safe working clothing. Certain jobs not only require a hard hat and safety boots, but also goggles and safety gloves.
3.5.1
Preparatory tasks for maintenance Before performing the various maintenance tasks, move the machine to maintenance position unless otherwise explicitly specified in the description. The various maintenance tasks include: – Lubricating the lift arms – Checking the oil level or changing the oil in the engine, gears, axles, hydraulic tank, etc. – Replacing filters as well as adjustment and repair work on the hydraulic system Safety precautions for maintenance Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work. Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and maintenance personnel is always maintained.
Visual contact Danger There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel. The presence of unauthorised persons on the machine can place the maintenance personnel in extreme danger.
! Never enter a dangerous area of the machine without making your preLBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
sence known.
Wheel wedges
• Make sure you can be clearly seen before entering one of the machine's danger areas. • Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges. Maintenance positions The maintenance position depends on the maintenance task to be performed. The two basic maintenance positions 1 and 2 are described below. They enable you to access the individual maintenance points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-1 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Maintenance position 1
To move the machine into maintenance position 1 proceed as follows.
• • • • • • Maintenance position 2
Maintenance position 1 Park the machine on level ground. Lower the lift arms. Set the bucket down flat on the ground. Engage the parking brake. Turn off the diesel engine. Take out the ignition key.
To move the machine into maintenance position 2 proceed as follows.
Maintenance position 2 Park the machine on level ground. Engage the articulation lock. Lower the lift arms. Tilt the bucket out and set it down on the ground on its teeth or cutting edge. • Engage the parking brake. • Turn off the diesel engine. • Take out the ignition key. • • • •
Opening the service hatches, doors and hoods Open the door if you need to access the following units or components: – Hydraulic pumps – Hydraulic tank – Hydraulic tank shut-off valve – Air filter – Battery main switch
Engine compartment hatch 1 Engine compartment hatch 2 Handle with lock
3.5-2 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3 Gas-filled springs
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Opening the engine compartment hatch
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Warning There is a risk of injury if the engine compartment door falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open. • Open the lock with the ignition key. • Completely open the hatch 1 using the handle 2. Two gas-filled springs 3 hold the opened hatch in this position. Opening the engine compartment hatch
When the hood is open, you can access the following units: – Diesel engine – Pump distributor gear – Cooling system – Hydraulic tank
•
Engine compartment hatch and hood cable Open the engine compartment hatch.
Warning Engine parts which are in motion can cause injury. Rotating or moving engine parts, such as the fan blades or V-belts, can cause injury.
! Only open the engine compartment hood when the engine is shut down.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Pull the cable 1 for unlocking the engine compartment hood until the lock is open.
Engine compartment hood 1 Engine compartment hood 2 Gas-filled springs 3 Engine compartment hatch L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Cable lock 5 Hydraulic tank cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-3 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The lock 4 unlocks the engine compartment hood 1. The hood is automatically opened and held in position by two gas-filled springs 2.
• Turn the securing pipe 2 in the direction of the arrow (position shown). The gas-filled spring 1 is now blocked. The engine compartment hood cannot be opened. Warning There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open. • Check the function. • Open the hydraulic tank over 5 as required. Unlock the cover and open it. Opening the engine compartment hatch
When the hood is open, you can access the cooling system. Make sure that the cab door is closed. • When opening or closing the hood, climb onto the machine via the cab access, making sure that you have secure footing.
1 Left cooling system hood 3 Gas-filled springs 2 Right cooling system hood 4 Handle • Completely open the hood 1 and/or 2 by pulling up the handle. The hood is held in this position by the gas-filled spring 3. Warning There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that gas-filled spring holds it completely open. • Check the function.
3.5-4 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cooling system hood
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Turning off the battery main switch The battery main switch is located at the rear left of the engine compartment. For certain maintenance jobs, the battery main switch must first be turned off. Find out from the descriptions of the relevant maintenance tasks whether the battery main switch must be turned on or off. See the section on maintenance tasks. Switch on the battery main switch after completing these maintenance tasks. Caution There is a risk of damaging the electrical system. ! Do not turn off the battery main switch while the engine is running.
Battery main switch 1 Battery main switch
2 Main switch key
Danger There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel. If unauthorised people are on the machine it can put the maintenance personnel in extreme danger.
! For safety reasons, it is essential that the battery main switch is turned off. ! Pull out the key for safety reasons. • Turn off the battery main switch 1 by turning the key 2 to the 0 position.
3.5.2
Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure Note To ensure safe machine transport and easy maintenance: Clean the machine after everyday work and before starting maintenance tasks.
! Remove any loose parts, coarse dirt, mud, ice, snow etc. •
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Be careful when cleaning the machine with a high-pressure cleaner. See the section on cleaning the machine.
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-5 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.3
Checking the machine for external damage Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Before starting up the machine, check for external damage which might impair safe operation. • Repair any damage with safety implications immediately.
3.5.4
Making sure the bolted connections are tight Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 2. – The service doors and hoods are open. Procedure • Check that all bolts and screws are tight. • Tighten any loose screws or bolts with the required tightening torque.
3.5.5
Sealing leaks Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 2. – The service doors and hoods are open. Procedure • • • •
3.5.6
Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks. Replace any damaged hydraulic seals. Tighten any loose hydraulic couplings. See also the section on safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines.
Checking the engine oil level Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – The engine is level and has not been running for 2 - 3 minutes.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Diesel engine • Pull out the dipstick 1, wipe it clean, and re-insert it. • Pull out the dipstick once again and read off the oil level. The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
3.5-6 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• If the oil level is too low: Remove the sealing cap from the filler neck 2 and top up with oil. For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels. • Clean the sealing cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
3.5.7
Changing the engine oil Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – The engine is level. – The engine is warm. – A suitable receptacle, an oil drain hose and the specified engine oil are at hand. See the table of filling quantities for the required capacity of the receptacle. Procedure
• • • • •
1 Oil drain hose 3 Oil drain valve 2 Cap Unscrew the cap of the oil drain valve on the oil pan. Screw the oil drain hose to the oil drain valve. Drain off the oil into the receptacle. Unscrew the oil drain hose. Screw the cap onto the oil drain valve.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
When changing the engine oil and the oil filter: Change the filter as described in the section on changing the engine oil filter.
• • • • •
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine Pour the new oil into the filler neck 2 to between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick 1. Clean the filler cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it. Start the engine and check the oil pressure. Turn off the engine and after 1 or 2 minutes and check the oil level on the dipstick. Top up with oil if necessary.
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-7 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.8
Changing the diesel engine oil filter Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – The engine oil has been drained off. – A strap wrench and a suitable container are in place. – Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts (2 oil filter cartridges). Procedure
• Place a suitable container under the diesel engine.
• Release the filter cartridges 1 with a strap wrench and unscrew them. • Clean the seals on the filter bracket. • Lightly coat the rubber gaskets on the new oil filter cartridges with engine oil. • Screw on the new oil filter cartridge until the sealing ring touches the filter bracket. • When the sealing ring touches the filter bracket: Tighten the oil filter cartridge by a half to three-quarter turn. (Do not use a tool for tightening). • Start the diesel engine: Check the oil pressure in the engine oil pressure display (see display unit). • Shut down the diesel engine: Check the seals on the oil filters and the oil level. • After 2 to 3 minutes, check the oil level on the dipstick.
3.5-8 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note Protect the V-ribbed-belt against emerging oil when changing the oil filter cartridge. ! After changing the oil filter, remove all traces of oil on the diesel engine, also behind the vibration damper so that this is not diagnosed as a leak in the leakage in the radial shaft seal at a later stage.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.9
Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt The V-ribbed belt is on the front of the engine, protected by a cover. The engine has a tensioning device for the V-ribbed belt. This tensions itself and requires no maintenance. Check the V-ribbed belt for wear. Checking the V-ribbed belt • Take off the V-ribbed belt guard. • Check the V-ribbed belt for damage. Damage to the V-ribbed belt can include: – Torn belt – Tears in several ribs – Lumps of rubber on the base of the belt – Accumulations of dirt and grit – Ribs coming loose from the belt base – Cracks on the back
V-ribbed belt guard
Replacing the V-ribbed belt Make sure you have a DIN 3122 D 12.5 mm (1/2") ratchet wrench and a new V-ribbed belt. • Pull back the tensioning device 5 against the spring force anticlockwise as far as it will go and take off the belt. • With the tensioning device 5 swung back, put the new belt on the pulleys of the crankshaft 6, air conditioning compressor 1, alternator 3 and deflector roller 2, 4. Then return the tensioning device 5 to the tensioning position.
Belt run
Note When changing the belt, make sure the deflector roller 2, 4 and the tensioning roller 5 move freely. If the tensioning roller or ! deflector roller is defective, replace it.
3.5.10
Checking / adjusting the engine valve play
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Check the valve play with the engine cold. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood and door are open. – You have the special cranking device, a feeler gauge and cylinder head seals ready.
Valve overlap cranking device L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-9 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
• Unscrew the service cap from the flywheel housing. • Remove the valve cover, attach the cranking device (ID no. 0524045) to the flywheel housing and insert a standard ratchet. • For reasons of space, use extensions on the cranking device to the rear towards the ratchet. • Turn the crankshaft in the direction of rotation until the valves of the cylinder to be adjusted overlap (see the table).
Cylinder valves A Outlet valve
E Inlet valve
Engine D 934
Engine D 936
Cylinder
Cylinder Adjust
Overlap
Adjust
4
1
6
1
2
3
2
5
1
4
4
3
3
2
1
6
5
2
3
4 LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Overlap
Checking and adjusting the inlet valve play
3.5-10 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Checking and adjusting the outlet valve play • Push a feeler gauge between the valve and the rocker arm and check the valve play. Valve play Inlet valve (cold)
0.30 mm
Outlet valve (cold)
0.40 mm
• If it is not correct: Loosen the nut on the adjusting bolt for the rocker arm and adjust it. • Tighten the counter nut to 40 Nm. • Check the adjustment again. • After checking and adjusting all the valves, put on the cylinder head covers with new seals. • Remove the cranking device.
3.5.11
Checking the diesel engine heating flange Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – You have an ohmmeter or a multimeter ready.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
• Turn off the battery main switch. • Disconnect the electric connection cable 2 on the heating flange 1. • Connect the ohmmeter or multimeter to the terminal and check the resistance (0.25 Ohm +/-10% at 20 °C). • Disconnect the electric connection cable on the heating flange. • Turn on the battery main switch
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-11 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.12
Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel The service cap is on the right side of the engine, on the flywheel housing. Make sure that: – The engine is in the maintenance position.
Starter ring gear service cap • Unscrew the service cap 1 from the flywheel housing. • Only grease the starter ring gear 2; there may not be any grease on the sensor gear ring 3. Check the ring gear and apply a light coating of standard grease if necessary. • Screw on the service cap again.
3.5.13
Changing the engine oil separator filter insert
Oil separator • Carefully clean the oil separator and the area around it. • Unscrew the oil separator cap and take it off, using a screwdriver if necessary.
3.5-12 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The oil separator is on the flywheel side, on the right side of the engine. Make sure that: – The engine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil separator filter insert ready.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.14
Checking the bearings and condition of the engine control units Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Check that the bearings are properly seated and undamaged. • If you find damaged bearings: do not start the engine, replace all the bearings
3.5.15
Checking the state of sensors and cable connections Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Check that all the sensors and cable connections are properly seated and in good condition. • Check that none of the cables and wiring harnesses are damaged, rub or not properly fastened. If you find any damaged cables, wiring harnesses or sensors: • Do not start the engine until you have replaced the defective parts.
3.5.16
Changing the fuel pre-filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
On the right side of the diesel engine you can find: – The fuel pre-filter with water separator and – depending on the engine type – fuel pre-heater (optional) – Water level probe – Integrated fuel hand pump Bleeding the water of the fuel prefilter must be conducted after the water level probe activates. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – You have a suitable receptacle ready. – Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts. (1 fuel pre-filter cartridge) Procedure Danger There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke. ! Avoid naked flames. ! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down. • Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter. • Carefully clean the fuel pre-filter and the area around it.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-13 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3.5-14 o f 5 8
Fuel water separator container Unscrew the water separator container 4 from the filter cartridge 3. Dispose of the old filter cartridge. Wash the water separator container and dry it with compressed air. Lightly oil the O-ring 9 of the water separator container. Screw the water separator container to the new filter cartridge until the O-ring touches the filter cartridge. Tighten the water separator container half a turn by hand. Screw in the drain plug 5. Check the filter head is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly in the filter head. If the filter head is dirty: Clean the filter head. Lubricate the sealing ring 10 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel. Fill the filter cartridge via the holes on the outside and screw it on until the sealing ring lies on the filter head. Tighten the filter cartridge 3 half a turn by hand. Reconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the fuel preheater 7 (optional). Close the bleeder screw 6.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Fuel prefilter cartridge • Disconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the fuel preheater 7 (optional). • Drain the fuel: Unscrew the bleeder screw 6 and drain plug 5. • Release the filter cartridge 3 with a strap wrench or similar tools and unscrew it.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• Bleed the fuel system. See the section on bleeding the fuel system.
3.5.17
Changing the fuel fine filter Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – You have a suitable receptacle ready. – Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts. (1 fuel filter cartridge) Procedure Danger There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke. ! Avoid naked flames. ! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Place a receptacle under the fuel fine filter. • Carefully clean the fuel fine filter and the area around it. • Unscrew the fuel fine filter 1. (Use a suitable filter strap) • Dispose of the old filter cartridge. • Check the filter base is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly in the filter base. • If the filter base is dirty: Clean the filter base. • Lubricate the sealing ring 2 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel. • Fill the filter cartridge and screw it on until the sealing ring lies on the filter head. • Tighten the filter cartridge 1/2 a revolution by hand with a filter wrench. • Bleed the fuel system. See the section on bleeding the fuel system.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-15 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.18
Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the corresponding service code appears) After integrated water level probe in the fuel pre-filter activates (service code on the display), the water collector tank must be drained. Danger There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke. ! Avoid naked flames. ! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Draining the fuel pre-filter • Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter. If necessary attach a drainage hose. • Open the drain plug, drain the water until fuel emerges without bubbles. • When fuel emerges: Tighten the drain plug. • Bleed the fuel system. See the section on bleeding the fuel system.
3.5.19
Bleeding the fuel system Danger There is a risk of fire and explosions.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
! Do not smoke. ! Avoid naked flames. ! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel prefilter • Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel prefilter by 2 to 3 turns.
3.5-16 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• Operate the hand pump 2. • If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles: Tighten the bleeder screw 1. • Continue to operate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel fine filter • Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel fine filter by 2 to 3 turns. • Operate the hand pump 2. • If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles: Tighten the bleeder screw 1. • Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Bleeder screw on the crankcase • Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the crankcase (if present) by 2 to 3 revolutions. • Operate the hand pump 2. • If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles: Tighten the bleeder screw 1. • Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance. Bleeding the fuel filter with the engine bleeding function It is necessary when the fuel tank has run completely empty. When the fuel tank is empty there is air in the fuel system. You can remove some of the air from the fuel system by bleeding the fuel filter. You can bleed the air between the injection pump and the injection nozzle by activating engine bleeding mode.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-17 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure Danger There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke. ! Avoid naked flames. ! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down. • Bleed the fuel filter: See the section on bleeding the fuel filter. • Activate the engine bleeding function. Activation sequence: – Turn the ignition on – With the engine not running, press the button for 10 seconds. – All 3 LEDs on the button light up when the engine bleeding function is activated. • Turn the ignition key to position II and keep it in there until the engine starts. • Do not hold the key in the starting position for more than 20 seconds at a time. The ECU ends the engine bleeding function automatically as soon as the engine starts again. If the engine does not start: • Wait a minute and repeat the procedure. In the meantime, continue to operate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
3.5.20
Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
• Unscrew the sealing cap 1 on the drain valve 2 on the bottom of the diesel tank. • Screw the drain hose 3 onto the drain valve 2. • Drain the condensation and sediment into a suitable receptacle until clean fuel begins to flow. • Unscrew the oil drain hose. • Screw the cap 1 onto the drain valve 2 and tighten it.
3.5-18 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.21
Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve Note If the valve is damaged, the dust extraction function is impaired and the filters become clogged more quickly.
! With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air pulsating at the dust extraction valve.
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hatch is open. – The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is removed. Cleaning the dust extraction valve
• Press the rubber seal on the dust extraction valve 5 several times to remove the dust from the service cap 3. • When working in dusty conditions, check and empty the dust extraction valve 5 more often. • If the dust extraction valve is damaged or stays open: • Replace the dust extraction valve. Cleaning the service cap • Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off. • Clean the service cap 3. • Put the service cap 3 back on the filter housing 6. The dust extraction valve 5 must face down. • Make sure the cap is placed properly on the filter housing 6. Close the fixing clips 4.
3.5.22
Testing the air filter vacuum switch
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a big enough plate available.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-19 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
• • • • •
3.5.23
Testing the vacuum switch Take the rain cap 1 off the intake pipe 2 of the filter housing. Start the engine. Slowly and carefully push the plate over the opening of the intake pipe. At the same time, check whether the indicator lamp in the cab lights up or the warning buzzer sounds. If you hear or see no warning signal when the intake pipe is just sealed, check the vacuum switch and the wiring, and replace it if necessary.
Changing the air filter primary element when indicated by the vacuum switch The primary element 2 should be replaced when the air filter contamination symbol field on the display unit lights up. If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also be replaced. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Air filter 1 Secondary element 2 Primary element 3 Service cap
4 Fixing clips 5 Dust extraction valve 6 Air filter housing
• Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off. • Remove the primary element 2. To do this pull or turn the element gently upwards, downwards or to the side in order to release the seal.
3.5-20 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a new filter element. The secondary element 1 should be replaced every third time the primary element 2 is replaced. • Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the primary element 2 this is on the inside, for the secondary element 1 on the outside). Re-insert filter elements 1 and 2 and make sure that they are correctly fitted. • Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust extraction valve 5 facing down. Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the fixing clips without excessive force. • Close the fixing clips 4.
3.5.24
Changing the air filter secondary element If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also be replaced. Change the secondary element: – After replacing the primary element three times – Otherwise, at least once a year Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment door is open. – The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is removed. Procedure
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Secondary element 4 Fixing clips 2 Primary element 5 Dust extraction valve 3 Service cap 6 Air filter housing • Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off. • Remove the secondary element 1. To loosen the seal: Pull or twist the element slightly up, down or sideways. • Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a new or cleaned filter element. • Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the secondary element 1 this is the outside). • Re-insert the filter elements 1 make sure that it is correctly fitted. • Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust extraction valve 5 facing down. Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the fixing clips without excessive force. • Close the fixing clips 4. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-21 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.25
Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Turbo hose 1 between the air filter and the turbocharger You can check the air intake hose 1 for cracks from the inside after removing the air filter. It is not possible to check the air intake hose all round from outside. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment door is open. – The battery main switch is turned off. Procedure Caution A damaged or leaky air hose will damage the engine. ! Check the air hose for cracks or pitting. • Take the service cap off the air filter housing, then take the primary and secondary elements out of the air filter housing. • Check the air hose all the way round for cracks and pitting. Use a torch to light up the hose. • Check the clip fastenings on the air intake hose.
3.5.26
Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open.
3.5-22 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
If you find cracks or pitting on the hose: • Replace the hose.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Procedure
• Check that the fixing screws 1 and clip 3 on the exhaust pipe between the turbocharger and the silencer are tightly fastened and do not leak. • Check that the flexible pipe 2 of the exhaust pipe is laid straight. • Check that the spacer 3 is tight. • Check that the fastening clip 6 of the tail pipe 7 is tight.
3.5.27
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear The dipstick 3 and the oil filling tube 2 are located in the engine compartment directly beside the hydraulic tank. Access is from above the engine on the right-hand side. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Pump distributor gear • Pull out the dipstick 3, wipe it clean, and re-insert it. • Pull out the dipstick 3 once again and read off the oil level. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-23 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings. • If the oil level is too low: Remove the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with oil. For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels. • Clean the sealing cap for the oil filling tube 2, put it on the oil filling tube 2 on the splitter box, and then tighten it up.
3.5.28
Changing the splitter box oil Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – The cover plate under the engine is open. – You have a suitable oil receptacle (capacity approx. 3 l) and the drain hose with valve connection ready. – For the oil quality and quantity, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
• Pull out the dipstick 3 slightly (to read off the oil level more easily). • Unscrew the sealing cap on the oil drain valve 5 and screw the drain hose onto the oil drain valve 5. • Drain the oil into the receptacle. • Unscrew the drain hose from the oil drain valve 5 and screw on the sealing cap. • Unscrew the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with fresh oil. • Clean the sealing cap 2, screw it on and tighten it. • Check the oil level on the dipstick 3. The oil level must be up to the MAX mark.
3.5.29
Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages This equipment is optional. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open.
3.5-24 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
1 Soot particle filter 2 Temperature sensor
3 Counterpressure line connection
Procedure • Unscrew the counterpressure line from the DPX particle filter at position 3 and blow air into it with a compressed air gun. There must be sufficient distance to the entrance of the counterpressure line, so that the counterpressure of 150 mbar or 200 mbar is only slightly exceeded. Caution First adjust the air pressure down to no more than 0.5 bar, as otherwise the electronic counterpressure monitor will be irreparably damaged. • Check the electronic counterpressure monitor while blowing in air.
3.5.30
Checking and draining the soot particle filter condensate separator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
This equipment is optional. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. Procedure The condensate separator is mounted on the rear left in the engine compartment.
Main components L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-25 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
1 2 3 4 • • • • • • •
Filter/drain unit 5 Exhaust gas counterpressure Counterpressure line display line Condensate container 6 Data logger line Drain plug At regular intervals (daily or as required): Check the filling level of the filter/drain unit. If the condensate container is over half full with condensation water: Drain off the accumulated condensation water. To do this, open the drain plug 4 of the condensate container 3. Drain the water from the condensate container. Tighten the drain plug 4 again. Check the filter insert (visible in the sight glass) of the filter/drain unit 1 for dirt. If the filter insert is too dirty: The filter insert must be replaced.
Note The condensate separator should be completely replaced after 1000 operating hours. ! This must be done when cleaning the filter (every 1000 operating hours as prescribed).
3.5.31
Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
This equipment is optional. The condensate separator must be changed when cleaning the filter (every 1000 operating hours as prescribed). Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. The condensate separator 1 is mounted on the rear left in the engine compartment on the fuse panel.
1 Condensate separator 2 PDL data logger
3.5-26 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3 Fuse panel
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Procedure • Release the hose connections of the counterpressure line of the condensate separator 1. • Unscrew the condensate separator 1 from the fuse panel 3. • Screw the new condensate separator 1 into the fuse panel 3 and fasten the two hose connections back onto the condensate separator.
3.5.32
Cleaning the soot particle filter This equipment is optional. The cleaning process removes oil residue from the filter module. This oil residue comes from the combustion of engine oil and is visible as white ash (metal oxide). Before cleaning, completely regenerate the particle filter (operate the wheel loader for at least 10 minutes at the maximum possible engine load to burn off any soot sediment on the filter surface). Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. – You have a suitable extraction system or industrial vacuum cleaner.
Compressed air cleaning
Procedure Caution Running at full load makes the filter housing very hot! ! When removing and cleaning it, always wear gloves, a dust mask and goggles. • Remove the filter module by releasing the V clips. • Clean the inlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum cleaning system. Caution Protect the filter module from external contamination. - Never clean the filter module with steam or cleaning agents. - Use non-oiled compressed air for cleaning. • Clean the outlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum cleaning system. Aim the air jet at each channel of the outlet side, until you cannot see any more particles. • Install the filter module again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note If the machine has been idling too long to regenerate the particle filter, the filter must be burned out. ! Put it in a furnace for at least 5 hours at 680 °C or use a hot air blower.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-27 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.33
Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor concentration
Coolant equalizing reservoir 1 Filler neck 2 Cap
3 Coolant equalizing reservoir 4 Coolant level sensor
All year round, the coolant must contain at least 50% by volume of concentrated antifreeze, but not more than 60% by volume. This protects against freezing down to around -37 °C. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have the optical density tester kit or antifreeze tester ready. Checking the antifreeze concentration
• See the coolant temperature on the display unit. The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display. • Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1. • Take a sample of the coolant and check the antifreeze concentration using the test tool. • If the antifreeze concentration is too low: Refill with pure antifreeze until the required value is attained. See the section on correcting the antifreeze concentration.
3.5-28 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure. ! Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down. ! Check the coolant temperature.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Correcting the antifreeze concentration
1 Cooler drain valve 2 Diesel engine drain plug • If the antifreeze concentration is too low: Drain off the coolant and top up with pure antifreeze according to the following diagram.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution There is a risk of damage to the diesel engine. Too much antifreeze and corrosion protection agent impairs the cooling effect. This eventually causes damage to the diesel engine. ! Never use more than 60% antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-29 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
1 Amount of pure antifreeze to be added in litres 2 Identified line - top-up quantity
3 Help line(s) – example -15 °C 4 Measured coolant freezing point in °C
5 Total capacity of cooling system in litres (example 25 litres)
Example procedure Assumption: 25 litres total filling quantity of the cooling system -15 °C coolant temperature, measured in the cooling system • In the diagram, go to the line showing the overall cooling system filling quantity 5 at 25 litres, and move vertically upwards. • Carry on along the help line 3, starting from the temperature -15 °C, and move diagonally to the bottom left. • Finally, starting from the point where the lines cross, go horizontally along the (identified) line 2 to the far left.
3.5-30 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Selection for antifreeze concentration
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
This gives you the topping up quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion protection agent 1 (7.6 litres in this example) to be added in order to achieve protection down to -37 °C. • To restore the correct mixing ratio, you must drain off at least the previously calculated quantity (the top-up quantity) from the cooling system. • Top up with the correct quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion protection agent. • The coolant previously drained off can be used if necessary to restore the required coolant level. Using anti-corrosion agent without antifreeze In exceptional cases and when outside temperatures never fall below freezing, such as tropical zones, where it is demonstrable that no approved antifreeze and corrosion protection agent is available, corrosion inhibitors may be used. The coolant must be changed once a year. The mixing ratio must consist of 7.5% corrosion inhibitor and 92.5% water. The Gefo 2710 refractometer is recommended for testing. Checking the coolant and anti-corrosion concentration
Caution There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure. Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down. ! Check the coolant temperature. • See the coolant temperature on the display unit. The coolant temperature display should be in the bottom third of the display. • Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck. • Check the antifreeze concentration with a 2710 refractometer from the GEFO company.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the mixing ratio with a refractometer
Gefro refractometer no. 2710 1 Refractometer 2 Eyepiece Brix value: The measure for soluble dry substance in a liquid. • Clean the cover and the prism carefully. • Place 1 or 2 drops of test fluid on the prism. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-31 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The fluid is distributed by closing the prism. • Look through the eyepiece 2 against a light background and focus the scale. The focus is set by turning the eyepiece 2. • Read off the value on the blue line in the eyepiece.
Conversion diagram from Brix to corrosion inhibitor concentration (%vol) • Convert the Brix value using the conversion diagram to find the actual corrosion inhibitor concentration.
3.5.34
Cleaning the cooling system
Cooling system hood 3 Gas-filled springs
Clean the cooler whenever necessary in order to ensure proper cooling. In dusty environments, check the cooler every day and clean it if necessary. Dirty cooler units result in overheating. The consequence is an audible and visual warning with simultaneous power reduction of the travel drive. Dust and other contaminants can be removed from the cooling fins with water jets, steam or compressed air. Compressed air is preferable. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The left and right cooling system hoods are open.
3.5-32 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Left cooling system hood 2 Right cooling system hood
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system • Swing out the condenser 1. • Swing out the fuel cooler 2. Caution Risk of damage to the cooling system Careless handling can damage the cooler fins.
! Do not use hard objects or excessive water pressure for cleaning. • • • • •
3.5.35
Clean the cooler units with compressed air, steam or water. Close the condenser 1 again. Close the fuel cooler 2 again. Close any cab doors which are open. Close the cooling system hood(s) (left/right) again.
Changing the coolant Use clean, fresh water with a Ph value between 6.5 and 8.5 and a low sulphate / chlorine content for preparing the coolant. The coolant must be prepared outside the cooling system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Always dispose of any coolant which you have drained off but no longer need according to the applicable regulations. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – A receptacle with a minimum capacity of 25 litres is available for the used coolant, along with a drain hose. – The mixing ratio of the new coolant must be correct. See also the section on checking the coolant antifreeze concentration. – The shut-off valves on the heating hoses are open.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-33 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system 1 Filler neck 2 Coolant equalizing reservoir 3 Coolant level sensor
4 Diesel engine drain plug 5 Cooler drain valve
• See the coolant temperature on the display unit. The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display. • Open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1. • Unscrew the sealing cap on the cooler drain valve 5 and unscrew the drain hose. Drain the coolant into the receptacle. • Take off the drain hose, screw the sealing cap onto the cooler drain valve 5 and tighten it. • Also drain the coolant from the diesel engine: Open the drain plug 4 and let the coolant flow into the receptacle. • Screw the drain plug 4 back in and tighten it.
3.5-34 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure. Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down. ! Check the coolant temperature.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Cooling system equalizing reservoir
• • • • • • •
3.5.36
1 Cap 3 Filler neck 2 Coolant equalizing reservoir Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the coolant in the filler neck 3. Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3. Start the engine. Allow the engine to run at lower idling speed. Set the heater to warm. Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the coolant in the filler neck 3. If the coolant level is correct: Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank Note When using bio oil, take an oil sample every 500 hours. ! See the hydraulic oil section under lubricants and fuels.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that: – The machine is cold. – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. Checking the hydraulic oil level
Hydraulic tank L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-35 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The red maximum oil level marking shows the correct oil level. • Check the oil level in the sight glass 1. • If the oil level is too low: Top up with hydraulic oil. Topping up with hydraulic oil
• Connect the plug 3 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism). The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released. • Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 2 on the hydraulic tank by two turns. Note The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer. ! For oil specifications, see the section on lubricants and fuels. • • • •
3.5.37
Open the cover 1 of the return strainer. Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 4. Put the cover 1 on the housing and tighten it up. Screw on the bleeder filter 2 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it somewhere safe).
Draining off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank Make sure that: – The machine has not been used for at least 3 hours. – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment door is open. – You have a receptacle ready for water and oil.
3.5.38
Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the return strainer Make sure that: – The machine is at operating temperature. – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood and door are open. – You have a receptacle of around 200 l capacity for the used oil.
3.5-36 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure • Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the hydraulic tank by two turns. • Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve. • Connect the drain hose 3 and let the water and sediment flow into the receptacle. • Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve. • Screw in the bleeder filter 1.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Procedure • Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the hydraulic tank by two turns. • Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve. • Connect the drain hose 3 and let the oil flow into the receptacle. • Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve. • Open the cover 4 of the return strainer. • Take the snap ring 5 off the return strainer. • Take out the return strainer 6 and check it for dirt (clean it if necessary).
Note Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the return strainer may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it. The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer. • Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 3. • Put the cover 2 on the housing and tighten it up. • Screw in the bleeder filter 1. • Start the diesel engine and let it run briefly at low idling speed. • Turn off the diesel engine and then check the oil level in the sight glass, topping up if necessary.
3.5.39
Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
• Connect the plug 4 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism). The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released. • Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 3 on the hydraulic tank by two turns. • Unscrew the plug 2. The oil level sinks. • Release the bolts on the lid and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod 1. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-37 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Note Serious contamination or large metal fragments on the magnetic rod may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it. • Carefully clean the magnetic rod 1. • After cleaning: Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing. • Tighten the screws on the cover. • Screw in the plug 2. • Screw on the bleeder filter 4 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it somewhere safe).
3.5.40
Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. Procedure • Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the hydraulic tank by two turns. • Unscrew the plug 2 (the oil level sinks). • Release the bolts on the lid 3 and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod. • Take out the filter element 4. • Put in a new filter element. • Carefully clean the magnetic rod. • Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing and tighten the screws on the cover. • Screw in the plug 2. • Screw in the bleeder filter 1. Note Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the filter element or on the magnetic rod may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it. Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5.41
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The engine compartment hood is open. Procedure
3.5-38 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
You cannot clean the bleeder filter. The bleeder filter 1 and its plastic housing must be changed at the intervals in the maintenance schedule. • Connect the plug 2 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism). The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released. • Unscrew the old bleeder filter. • Screw in the new bleeder filter and remove the connector 2 (keep it somewhere safe).
3.5.42
Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Take the rubber sleeve 5 of the control lever off the retaining plate 4. • Move the control lever in the appropriate direction for better access. • Clean the retaining solenoids 1 with a brush. • Lubricate the universal joints 2 and the discs 3 with a brush. • Start the machine and check the retaining function of the solenoids. Fit the rubber sleeve of the control lever on the retaining plate.
3.5.43
Testing the steering Make sure that: – The working attachment is in the transport position. – The articulation lock is open. – There is enough space to test the steering. Procedure Warning Beware of accidents
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are being conducted.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
• Start the engine. • Without moving the machine, turn the steering in both directions and check that it is functioning properly.
3.5.44
Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The articulation lock is engaged if possible.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-39 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
1 Lubrication point at base of right3 Lubrication point on the piston rod hand steering cylinder end of left-hand steering cylinder 2 Lubrication point at base of left4 Lubrication point on the piston rod hand steering cylinder end of right-hand steering cylinder • Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders.
3.5.45
Testing the service brake and parking brake Make sure that there is enough room to check the service brake and parking brake. Warning Beware of running over bystanders or obstacles.
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are being conducted.
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
1 Inch/brake pedal 3 Braking range 2 Inching range • Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 8 km/h. • Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down. The machine must come to an abrupt stop. Checking the parking brake • Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 5 km/h. • Press the parking brake button while travelling. The machine must come to an abrupt halt.
3.5-40 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the service brake
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.46
Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings Friction can change the gap X1 and X2 and the thickness of the brake lining. Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 2. Procedure
Warning There is a risk of injuries due to machine rolling away.
! Make sure that the machine is secured against rolling away when carrying out work on the parking brake.
• Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.
Disc brake (shown in open position) 1 2 3 4 5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• • • • • • • • • • • •
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Lock nut 6 Counter nut Plug 7 Hex bolt Adjusting screw 8 X1 Gap Brake disc 9 X2 Gap Brake lining Start the diesel engine and press the button to release the parking brake. Test the brake lining thickness: If the brake linings are thinner than 1.0 mm, they must be replaced. Check the gap X1 and X2: If the gap X1 + X2 is more than 1.5 mm: Adjust the gap. Loosen the counter nut 6 and adjust the gap X1 to 0.3 mm using an allen key 7. Tighten the counter nut 6. Unscrew the sealing cap 2 and loosen the lock nut 1. Use the adjusting screw 3 to set the gap X2 to 0.3 mm. Tighten the lock nut 1. Engage the parking brake several times and test it again. Screw on the sealing cap 2 and tighten it.
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-41 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.47
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The machine's electrical system is switched on. Checking the indicator lamps and lighting – When you switch on the ignition, the lamps on the display unit are tested. – All symbol fields light up for three seconds.
• Switch on the ignition. • Check that the symbol fields on the display unit light up. • Check that all lights are working. Adjusting the working floodlights Note: The front working floodlights cannot be adjusted. The rear working floodlights are optional. Adjust the rear working floodlights as required: – Either for close range lighting – or for long range lighting.
1 Floodlight 4 Bracket 2 Fixing screw 5 Adjusting screw 3 Fixing screws Horizontal Y axis adjustment: • Loosen the screw 2. • Move the left and right floodlights as required. • Tighten the screw again. Vertical X axis adjustment: • Loosen the screw 5. • Move the left and right floodlights as required. • Tighten the screw again.
3.5-42 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Rear working floodlights
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.48
Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals
The batteries are housed in the right ballast weight and can be accessed by opening the covers. The batteries must always be in perfect condition in order for the machine to work reliably. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is taken out. – The covers on the ballast are bolted on. Warning Batteries give off explosive gases. Battery acid is highly corrosive.
! Do not smoke. Avoid naked flames when handling, servicing or recharging batteries.
Caution Beware of sparks and explosions!
! Use a special terminal brush.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Wipe the battery with a clean cloth. • Clean the terminals and the connectors. • To guarantee a good connection, check that the connectors are tight on the terminals, and tighten them if necessary. • Smear the terminals and connectors with acid-proof grease such as vaseline. At very high temperatures, the acid level in the individual cells can drop due to different rates of evaporation. • Open the plugs on each cell and check the acid level. • Check the charge using an acid density tester. • If the charge is too low (acid density below 1.26 kg/l): Recharge the batteries. If there is a risk of frost, it is important that the batteries are not discharged. Otherwise the electrolyte can freeze and irreparably damage the battery. • If the acid level is too low: Top up with distilled water to around 10 mm above the plates. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-43 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.49
Checking the transmission oil level Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The articulation lock is engaged. Procedure Check the oil level with the engine running and at a gear oil temperature of 20±10 °C. • Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. • Check the oil level in the sight glasses 3 and 4. The oil level must be within the bottom sight glass 4. • If the oil level is too low: Switch off the engine and top up with the required amount of gear oil. For the oil quality, see the section gear lubricants in the lubricants and fuels section. • Repeat the check. • If the oil level is too high: Have LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE identify the problem and rectify it.
3.5.50
Changing the transmission oil Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a sufficient quantity of the gear oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels. – The oil in the gearbox is warm. – You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal. Procedure
3.5.51
Changing the transmission oil filter Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil cartridge ready. Procedure • Start the engine. Turn and steer the machine to the left as far as it will go. • Turn off the diesel engine. • Release the filter cartridge with a strap wrench and unscrew it. • Clean the seals on the filter bracket. • Lightly coat the rubber seal ring on the new oil filter cartridge with gear oil. • Screw the new filter cartridge onto the filter bracket and tighten it by hand.
3.5-44 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Open the cap on the filler neck. • Open the plug 1 on the gearbox and drain the oil into a suitable receptacle. • Then screw the plug 1 in again. • Top up gear oil the filler neck of the plug 2. • Replace the gear oil filter as described in the separate instructions. • Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the section on checking the oil level in the transmission). • Check the oil filter for leaks.
3.5.52
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h) Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – A torque wrench with a measuring range of over 650 Nm is available.
Procedure Note Check the tightness of the wheels according to the specified intervals. ! This one-off maintenance task scheduled for 50, 100 and 250 service hours must be performed every time the wheels are changed. • Check that the nuts on all four wheels have been tightened with the required torque of 750 Nm.
3.5.53 Valid for:
Checking the axle oil level L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system. Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
• Open the plug 4 and check the oil level in the axle. • If the oil level is too low: Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-45 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.54 Valid for:
Checking the axle oil level L580 - 459 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system. Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure
• Open the plug 1 and check the oil level in the axle. • If the oil level is too low: Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
3.5.55 Valid for:
Changing the axle oil L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Draining oil Caution Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot! ! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles. • Open the plugs 2 and 4. • Open the plugs 1 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into a receptacle. • Close the plugs 1 and 3 again.
3.5-46 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels. – You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
Topping up oil The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs. • Top up oil at the filling inlet 2 up to the plug 4. • Check the oil level at the plug 4 and top up if necessary. • Close the plugs 2 and 4 again.
3.5.56 Valid for:
Changing the axle oil L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels. – You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal. Draining oil
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot! ! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-47 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
• Open the plug 1. • Open the plugs 2 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into a receptacle. • Close the plugs 2 and 3 again. Topping up oil The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs. • Top up oil at the filling inlet 1. • Check the oil level at the filling inlet 1 and top up if necessary. • Close the plug 1 again.
3.5.57 Valid for:
Lubricating the bevel gear seal L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Lubricate at the grease fitting 1 on the front and rear axles. If necessary, such as when operating the machine in water, lubricate every day.
3.5.58
Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints. • Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings. • Check the rubber sleeve for leaks and damage.
3.5.59
Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints. • Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
3.5-48 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.60
Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's use and attachments Make sure the air pressure in the tyres on both axles is correct for the tyre type, the way the machine is used and the working attachments fitted. The reference values can be found in the operating manual, in the technical data section. Procedure The air pressure in the tyres has a significant influence on the overall operating performance of the machine. Warning Exploding tyres can cause serious injury. If the tyre inflation equipment is incorrectly or carelessly used or if the tyre pressure is too high, the tyres may burst or the rims may come off, causing severe, or possibly even fatal injuries. ! Use a sufficiently long hose with a self-locking adapter for pumping the tyres. ! Always keep outside the danger zone when tyres are being pumped up. • Check the air pressure in all the tyres and correct it if necessary.
3.5.61
Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 1. – The articulation lock is engaged.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubricating the articulation bearing
Articulation bearing lubrication points 1 Top articulation bearing 2 Bottom articulation bearing • Lubricate the articulation bearing lubrication points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-49 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Lubricating the rear oscillating bearing
Lubricating points on the rear oscillating bearing, right central lubrication rail 1 Rear axle oscillating bearing 2 Front axle oscillating bearing • Lubricate the lubricating points on the rear axle oscillating bearing.
3.5.62
Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure
It the grease in the reservoir container is too low, all 3 LEDs on the central lubrication system button light up. Caution There is a risk of damaging the system. ! Pay attention to cleanliness when filling. • If necessary, fill the reservoir via the filling coupling 1 (fast filling) or the grease fitting 2. Grease specifications: See the lubricants and fuels listed in chapter 5.
3.5-50 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir. Stay within the minimum and maximum lubricant levels. The reservoir has a sight glass where the rubber stripper on the agitator can be seen. • Look through the sight glass to check the level in the grease reservoir.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.63
Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Visually examine the hose lines for defects. • In case of any defects, locate and rectify the problem.
3.5.64
Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication system Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Procedure • Visually examine whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points. • If the bearing points are not sufficiently lubricated, locate the problem and rectify it. Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir. See the section on checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level,
3.5.65
Lubricating the door hinges Procedure • Lubricate the door hinges with a grease gun.
3.5.66
Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cleaning the fresh air filter
Fresh air filter 1 Door 3 Ventilation lint filter 2 Fresh air filter • Open the door 1. • Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-51 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Fresh air filter • Clean (blow out) or replace the fresh air filter 2. • Remove the lint filter 3. • Clean (blow out or wash) the lint filter or change it if necessary.
Fresh air filter • Insert the cleaned or new filters, making sure they are correctly fitted (the arrows moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in). • Close the door again.
Recirculation filter
• • • • •
3.5-52 o f 5 8
1 Door 3 Recirculation filter 2 Pin Remove the pin 2. Open the door 1. Take out the recirculated air filter 3 and clean it (blow it out) or replace it. Put in a clean or new filter. Close the door again.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cleaning the recirculated air filter
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
3.5.67
Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1. Changing the fresh air filter
Fresh air filter 1 Door 3 Ventilation lint filter 2 Fresh air filter • Open the door 1. • Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
Fresh air filter • Insert the new filter 1, making sure it is correctly fitted (the arrows moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in). • Close the door again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Changing the recirculated air filter
Recirculation filter 1 Door 2 Pin • Remove the pin 2. • Open the door 1. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Recirculation filter
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-53 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
• Take out the recirculated air filter 3. • Put in a new filter. • Close the door again.
3.5.68
Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit The dryer-collector unit is located on the right under the cooling system hood.
Sight glass in the dryer-collector unit • Check the orange bead 2 (moisture indicator). • If the orange bead 2 has turned transparent: There is moisture in the refrigerant circuit. You must replace the dryercollector and the compressor oil and refill the system. • The white bead 1 shows the filling level of R134a refrigerant in the circuit and acts as an indicator during initial filling. The white bead 1 must be at the top of the sight glass. The filling level can vary due to temperature fluctuations. It also sinks in time due to natural leakage. This does not impair operation. If the cooling performance deteriorates, one of the causes can be a low refrigerant level. In normal circumstances, one filling lasts for three to five years.
3.5.69
Lubricating the lift arms and attachment This also applies to optional equipment, for example: – High dump bucket, timber grabber etc. Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 2.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubricating standard lift arms and attachment
Bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms • Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
3.5-54 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• • • • •
Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges. Grease all the bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms. If fitted, lubricate the quick-change device. If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the attachment. The lower bucket bearings should be lubricated daily if necessary.
Lubricating the tilt cylinder support for timber transfer This equipment is optional.
Tilt cylinder support 1 Grease fitting 3 Lubricating line 2 Distributor block • Grease the lubrication points via the grease fitting 1. The lubricant is pumped via the distributor block 2 and the lubricating lines 3 to the lubricating points. • If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the timber grabber. For detailed information on maintenance for the attachment, see the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.70
Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms Checking the bucket bearing seal The bucket bearing seal 3 prevents dirt from entering the bearing, thus increasing the lifetime of the bearing bushings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Depending on the type of application, wear occurs on the sealing lips 5 and on the dirt guard 6. If the bucket bearing seal 3 is in any way damaged or worn, it must be replaced.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-55 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Checking the bucket bearing seal 1 Bucket bearing plate 2 Bucket arm
3 Bucket bearing seal 4 Bearing bushing
5 Sealing lips 6 Dirt guard
• Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown. • Clean the bucket bearing seals 3 using a steam jet. • Visually check whether the sealing lips 5 touch the sides of the lift arms and the bucket. • If there is a gap between the sealing lips 5 and the bucket arm 2 or the bucket bearing plate 1, or if the bucket bearing seal is damaged: Replace the bucket bearing seal as described in section 17.2.5. Checking the bearing bushings for wear
Replace the bearing bushings in good time to prevent damage to the material of the bucket arm.
3.5-56 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Dirt or insufficient lubrication can cause wear on the bearing bushings. The increased play between the pin and bearing bushing causes noises.
Service Manual
Maintenance Maintenance tasks
• Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown. • Gently and rapidly tilt the bucket in and out, and check the bearing points for noise and play. • If there is significant play at the bearing points or loud noise: Replace the bearing bushings as described in section 17.2.4.
3.5.71
Check the lift arms and bucket stops There are two ways to attach the equipment to the lift arms: directly or using the quick-change device. It is important that the limits stops and the sequence of stops are as specified. Failure to comply can reduce the lifetime of the equipment and the lift arms. Checking the bucket stops without a quick-change device This is how to check the bucket stops properly: • Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or wheel wedges). • Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown. • Retract the tilt cylinders until the bucket stops 1 touch the bucket arm. • Check the dimension 2 according to the following table. Dimensions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Description Dimensions L550 - L580
Dimension 1 0
Dimension 2 Unit mm 3±2
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer service about corrective action. Checking the bucket stops with a quick-change device This is how to check the bucket stops properly: • Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or wheel wedges). • Move the lift arms and the quick-change device to the position shown. • Retract the tilt cylinders until the linkage stop touches the cross tube stop. • Check the dimension 1 according to the following table.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-57 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Dimensions Description Dimensions L550 - L580
Dimension 1 5
±3
Dimension 2
Unit
0
mm
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer service about corrective action.
3.5.72
Testing the quick-change device (optional) Make sure that: – The lift arms have been lowered. – The working attachment is tilted in. Procedure The operation of the quick-change device can vary according to the version or the type of machine. • To check that it is working properly: Unlock the quick-change device and lock it again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
This prevents the locking pins from jamming and preventing the quickchange device from being released. • To make sure, check: That the quick-change device is properly locked again.
3.5-58 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6 Testing and adjustment tasks 3.6.1
Preparing for testing and adjustment During the warranty period, only trained and authorised specialist staff may carry out adjustments on the machine. Make sure that: – The machine is in maintenance position 2. – The machine is at operating temperature (except when testing the air conditioning). – The adjustment data for the machine is available or known. – Seals and safety caps are at hand. – The following special tools are available. Special tools Number Description USB dongle for SCULI 1
3.6.2
ID no. 1033 3608
1
Data lead for SCULI
1003 5410
2
Manometer, 0 - 40 bar, class 1.0
7361 288
2
Manometer, 0 - 600 bar, class 1.0
5002 866
2
4000 mm test leads
7009 134
2
1500 mm test leads
7002 475
Safety precautions for testing and adjustment Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work. See the safety regulations section for measures to ensure safe maintenance. Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and maintenance personnel is always maintained. Only carry out adjustments on valves etc. with the machine not running.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Visual contact
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-1 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.3
Bringing the machine up to operating temperature During testing and adjustment, the machine must be at an operating temperature of 58±5 °C. The temperature is measured by the hydraulic oil sensor and can be seen in SCULI. Procedure • Insert a piece of card or similar material between the fuel cooler 1 and the hydraulic oil cooler 2. • Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment Block Curve folder. • The cooling system - temperature hydraulic oil variable shows the hydraulic oil temperature during the adjustment.
58.1
Bring the machine up to operating temperature as follows: – Run the engine at around 2000 rpm. – Activate the tilt-in function as far as it will go and hold the control lever in this position. – At the same time, move the lift arms up and down with the lever halfway out. – Operate the travel hydraulics in fixed gear 1. • Bring the machine up to operating temperature until the hydraulic oil temperature is 58±5 °C. • When working on the hydraulic system, the hydraulic oil temperature must be within the prescribed range. • After finishing the adjustment, take the piece of card out of the oil cooler.
Checking the diesel engine speed You can read the engine speed from the RPM segment indicator in the display unit or use a standard engine speed tester. The engine speed cannot be mechanically adjusted; it is determined directly by the engine control unit.
Cab display unit
Procedure • Start up the engine. • Check that the top and bottom engine speeds are correct. • If it is not correct: Calibrate the gas pedal using the SCULI program and service the engine. • Check the top and bottom idle speeds again.
3.6-2 o f 1 8
Description
Value Unit
Lower idle speed
900±10 min-1
Upper idle speed
2065±10 min-1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.4
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.5
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve Make the following checks on the fan motor: These tests must be performed at upper engine speed. – Test the fan according to the temperature (temperature sensor 1 or 2 disconnected). – Test the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (with the plug on the proportional valve disconnected).
Fan drive components 1 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 2 Coolant temperature sensor 3 Fan pressure test connection
4 Fan gear pump 5 Fan gear motor 6 Fan proportional valve cap
7 Fan proportional valve 8 Fan proportional solenoid 9 Proportional solenoid connector
You can check the fan using the system pressure, measured at the test connection 3 of the gear pump 4. Make sure that: – The hydraulic oil temperature is less than 88 °C. – The coolant temperature is below 97 °C. If the hydraulic temperature is over 88 °C or the coolant temperature is above 97 °C, the fan speeds up. This makes it impossible to test the fan control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the fan according to the temperature The fan speed (system pressure) is tested here in the stated temperature range. • Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear pump 4. • Disconnect the hydraulic oil temperature sensor 1 or coolant temperature sensor 2. • Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed. • Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed. Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
110±10 bar 1650 min-1
Fan speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-3 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
175±10 bar 1400 min-1
Fan speed • If it is not correct: Check the fan motor pressure relief valve. Checking the fan motor pressure relief valve
• Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear pump 4. • Pull out the plug 9 on the proportional solenoid 8. • Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed. • Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed. • If it is not correct: Adjust the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (using the adjusting screw and a 5 mm open-end spanner - the lock nut is a round nut). Turn clockwise to increase the pressure and anticlockwise to reduce it. • Remove the cap 6. • Adjust the screw on the proportional valve. Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
220±10 bar approx. 2050 min-1
Fan speed Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
220±10 bar approx. 1600 min-1
Fan speed • Plug in the disconnected plug again.
3.6.6
Calibrating the pedals The pedals can only be calibrated using the SCULI software. During calibration, the MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal and inch pedal are stored in the master electronics.
• Connect your laptop, turn on the start switch and run the SCULI program. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment Pedals folder. • Set Throttle - start adjustment to 1. • Push the gas pedal all the way down. The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds the value automatically returns to 0 Æ and calibration is finished. • Check that Throttle - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not pressed and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
3.6-4 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19/03/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
• Set Inch pedal - start adjustment to 1. • Push the inch pedal all the way down. The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds the value automatically returns to 0 Æ and calibration is finished. • Check that Inch pedal - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not pressed and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
3.6.7
Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump Measure the replenishing pressure at the test connection G. Procedure • • • •
Valid for:
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection G. Start the machine and let the engine run at top idling speed. Check that the replenishing pressure is correct. If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the replenishing pressure relief valve 1 until the replenishing pressure is correct.
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit 31±1 bar
Replenishing pressure Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit 34±1 bar
Replenishing pressure
3.6.8
Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The pressure relief and replenishing valves protect the variable displacement pump from pressure peaks. These can occur when braking the machine. When a pressure peak occurs, oil flows from the high pressure side via the pressure relief and replenishing valve to the low pressure side in a closed circuit. Procedure To attain the set value for the pressure relief and replenishing valves, the pressure cut-off must be set to a higher value. • Screw in the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections MA and MB. • Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 Æ the inching function is disabled.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-5 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 2 for forward travel on the manometer MA. Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 3 for reverse travel on the manometer MB. • Select fixed gear 2 and forward or reverse travel, and hold the machine in the blocked condition using the service brake. Caution Heat is quickly generated when you test the pressure relief and replenishing valves. Excessive heat can irreparably damage the pump.
! Only test the pressure relief and replenishing valves for a short time. • In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum. • Check that the high pressure at the two pressure relief and replenishing valves is correct. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure relief and replenishing valve until the high pressure is correct. • Loosen the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn and check the pressure cut-off. • Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 Æ the inching function is enabled.
3.6.9
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
470±10 bar
Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump The pressure cut-off limits the maximum pressure of the variable displacement pump. When this pressure is reached, the pump flow is automatically reduced in order to maintain the maximum permitted pressure.
• Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA. • Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 Æ the inching function is disabled. • Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked condition using the service brake. • In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum. • Check that the high pressure on the manometer MA is correct. • Check that the engine suppression is below the threshold. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off 1 until the manometer MA reaches the correct value. • Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 Æ the inching function is enabled. Description
Value Unit
High pressure
430±5 bar
Maximum engine suppression at top idle speed
3.6-6 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
30 min-1
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.10
Calibrating the block curve The block curve can only be calibrated using the SCULI software. During calibration, the current to the proportional valve on the variable displacement pump is adjusted so that the pump reaches a set pressure at a set engine speed. Procedure • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA. • Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment Block Curve folder. • Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 Æ the inching function is disabled. • Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked condition using the service brake. • Increase the engine speed to the levels shown in the table (930 min-1, 1200 min-1, 1400 min-1) and test the high pressure. • If it is not correct: Adjust the parameter Travel pump - current at 930, 1200, 1400 rpm until the set value is reached. • Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 Æ the inching function is enabled.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit -1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
High pressure at 930 min engine speed
50±10 bar
High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed
290±10 bar
High pressure at 1400 min-1 engine speed
350±10 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit -1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
High pressure at 930 min engine speed
50±10 bar
High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed
230±10 bar
High pressure at 1400 min-1 engine speed
330±10 bar
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-7 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.11
Calibrating the variable displacement motors The variable displacement motors are calibrated automatically by the master electronics. Automatically calibrating the variable displacement motors • Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment Travel motor folder. • Set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment to 1. The engine speed is automatically increased to 1000 min-1. After this the motors are successively calibrated across the entire speed range. After calibration, set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment back to 0.
Note: Once the automatic calibration of the motors is complete, a service code appears in the display. This can happen if the variable displacement motor current is too high or low. In this case, the variable displacement motors must be manually checked and adjusted to 600±30 mA. Setting VG max manually
Adjusting variable displacement motor 1: • In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar. • Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current until the manometer at M1 shows 15±5 bar less than manometer MA. • When the manometers MA and M1 show the correct levels, increase the current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current by 10 mA. Adjusting variable displacement motor 2: • In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar. • Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current until the manometer at M1 shows 15±5 bar less than manometer MA. • When the manometers MA and M2 show the correct levels, increase the current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current by 10 mA.
3.6-8 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections M1 and M2. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment Travel motor folder. • Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 Æ the inching function is disabled. • Select fixed gear 1 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked condition using the service brake.
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
Note: The current for both motors must be in the range of 600±30 mA. If there is any deviation, correct it using the adjusting screws 1 or 2. • Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 Æ the inching function is enabled. • Repeat the automatically calibration of the variable displacement motors.
3.6.12
Checking the engine output Before you check the power of the engine, you must carry out the following tasks: – Tasks in maintenance schedule (air filter, fuel filter etc.) – Check the operating pressures according to the adjustment checklist – The machine must be at operating temperature. At maximum engine power consumption, the variable displacement motor power limiting control is activated. It regulates the pivot angle of the motors so that the engine runs at rated speed. This results in a set high pressure in the closed circuit. – If the high pressure is is above the set value, the engine power is good. – If the high pressure is is below the set value, the engine power is poor. If the engine speed reaches the set value, power limiting control is working correctly. Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA. • In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Check Dieselengine folder. • Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 Æ the inching function is disabled. • Start the machine, select fixed gear 2 and forward travel direction. • Hold the machine with the service brake and run it at full throttle. • Slowly release the service brake until the machine moves at 13 km/h. Check that the set values are reached. • If they are not correct: Troubleshoot the engine: air filters, fuel filters etc. Troubleshoot the travel hydraulics: check the operating pressure etc.
• Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 Æ the inching function is enabled. Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
300±10 bar 1980±30 min-1
Diesel engine speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-9 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
330±10 bar 1980±30 min-1
Diesel engine speed Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
340±10 bar 1980±30 min-1
Diesel engine speed Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
340±10 bar 1980±30 min-1
Diesel engine speed
3.6.13
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors for the range up to 600 bar. Procedure Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS. You can measure the differential pressure, for example by slowly raising the lift arms. • Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS. • Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. • Slowly raise the lift arms and check whether the differential pressure is correct. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential pressure is correct. Description
Value Unit 22±2 bar
Differential pressure
Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump The flow controller determines the maximum output of the variable displacement pump. At the start of delivers, the indicator on the manometer M1 moves away from 0 bar. The set value on the manometer P should be reached. Procedure • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the variable displacement pump at test connections M1 and P. • Start the engine, tilt the bucket all the way out and move the lift arms to the bottom position. • At idle speed, raise the lift arms all the way and check that the start of delivery shown on the manometer M1 is correct. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the power controller 1 until the pressure is correct.
3.6-10 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.14
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.15
Description
Value Unit
Start of regulation
180±10 bar
Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block Procedure To check the secondary pressure relief valve, you must increase the setting of the LS pressure cut-off 5 and the primary pressure relief valve 3. • Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control block by two turns. • Tighten the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 by two turns. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P on the control block. Caution The pump can be irreparably damaged if you lower the lift arms. This function has no secondary pressure relief valve. ! Do not lower the lift arms. Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed. Raise the lift arms, tilt out the bucket and tilt in the bucket, each to the limit. Check that the pressure at each secondary pressure relief valve is correct. If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the secondary pressure relief valve until it is correct. • Adjust the primary pressure relief valve 3 and the LS pressure cut off 5 back to the set value. See the sections on testing the primary pressure relief valve and LS pressure cut-off.
• • • •
Valid for:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Tilt-in function (2)
380±5 bar
Tilt-out function (4)
380±5 bar
Lifting function (1)
380±5 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Tilt-in function (2)
400±5 bar
Tilt-out function (4)
400±5 bar
Lifting function (1)
420±5 bar
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-11 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.16
Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the control block Procedure To check the primary pressure relief valve 3, you must increase the setting of the LS pressure cut-off 5. • Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control block by two turns. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P. • Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed. • Raise the lift arms to the limit. • Check that the pressure is correct. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 until the pressure is correct. • Return the LS pressure cut-off 5 to its normal value. See the section on testing the LS pressure cut-off.
Valid for:
Valid for:
3.6.17
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Primary valve (3)
360±5 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Primary valve (3)
380±5 bar
Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block Procedure • • • • •
Valid for:
Valid for:
3.6-12 o f 1 8
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
LS pressure cut-off (5)
290±5 bar
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
LS pressure cut-off (5)
330±5 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
LS pressure cut-off (5)
350±5 bar
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P. Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed. Raise the lift arms to the limit. Check that the pressure is correct. If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 until the pressure is correct.
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.18
Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators You must depressurise the system before checking and filling the hydro accumulators or making repairs to the ride control system. This is how to depressurise the ride control system: Procedure Caution: Perform the following actions in the correct sequence. • Put the machine and the lift arms in maintenance position 2. The working attachment and lift arms must lie on the ground under their own weight. • Turn off the diesel engine. • Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection M4 on the front axle. • Connect the same test line to the test connection MX. The pressure can then be relieved through this line to the tank. This takes around 10 minutes. • After 10 minutes, take the test line off test connection M4 and drain the remaining fluid into a suitable receptacle. Leave the test line connected during the testing and repair work. • After servicing, remove the test line from test connection MX.
3.6.19
Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module The cut-off function limits the pressure in the hydro accumulators when ride control is deactivated. This is how to check and correct the cut-off pressure: The cut-off pressure is fixed by the spring force. This means the cut-off pressure cannot be adjusted. Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MX on the stabilisation module. • Start the diesel engine (with ride control deactivated). • With the engine idling, raise the lift arms to their full height and accumulate pressure. • Check that the high pressure on the manometer is correct (reading the highest value). • If it is not correct: Find the cause and rectify the fault.
3.6.20
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
120±20 bar
Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a nitrogen bottle. The hydro accumulators can only be tested or filled when they are depressurised. Note: The nitrogen chamber of the hydro accumulator has around 350 cm³ of oil in it to protect the membrane.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-13 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
Procedure • Depressurise the ride control system as described in the section on depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators.
• Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator using a 6 mm allen key. • Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator you want to test. • Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct. • If it is not correct: Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the pressure is correct. You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air. Description
Value
Hydro accumulator temperature
Unit
0
Nitrogen for filling the hydro accumulator Minimum hydro accumulator nitrogen filling
3.6.21
10
25
±2
23
±2
26
±2
24
±2
20 27 25
±2 ±2
30
°C
28
±2
bar
26
±2
bar
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump Procedure
3.6.22
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P. Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. Turn the steering fully to the left or right. Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct. If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure controller 2 until the pressure is correct.
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
210±5 bar
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors for the range up to 600 bar. Procedure Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS. You can only measure the differential pressure when the flow controller is activated. This is best done when slowly steering. • Fit a test connection between the hose line and the connection LS. • Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS. • Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. • Slowly steer the machine to the left or right and check whether the differential pressure on the measuring device is correct.
3.6-14 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• • • • •
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
• If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential pressure is correct. Description
Value Unit 22 ±2 bar
Differential pressure
3.6.23
Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake valve The compact brake valve fills the brake accumulator until the shut-off pressure is reached. When you repeatedly press the inch-brake pedal, the pressure in the brake accumulators falls until the opening pressure is reached. The brake accumulator charging function then begins. Procedure You can check the cut-off pressure of the brake accumulator charging function using the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test connection MA. • Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. • Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times. • Look at the manometer M3 to check that the correct opening pressure is reached. When the opening pressure is reached, the pressure on the manometer begins to rise. The pressure then increases to the closing pressure. • Check the test connection M3 to see if the closing pressure is correct. • If it is not correct: Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the compact brake valve until the closing pressure is correct.
3.6.24
Description
Value Unit
Opening pressure
180±5 bar
Closing pressure
210±5 bar
Checking the brake pressure at the axles You can check the brake pressure on the wet disk brakes in the wheel hubs at the test connection M4 on the front axle 1 and M5 on the cut-in block 2.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
• • • • •
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5. Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed. Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down. Check that the pressure on both manometers is correct. If it is not correct: Adjust the pedal stop screw 3 so that the brake pressure is correct when
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-15 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
the pedal is all the way down. Remove the seal 4, loosen the counter nut and adjust the bottom screw. Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Brake pressure with the pedal fully pressed Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Brake pressure with the pedal fully pressed
3.6.25
95 ±5 bar
70 ±5 bar
Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator Test the capacity of the brake accumulators 1 and 2 for the front and rear axles respectively by pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times. Before the test, the pressure in the brake accumulators must be 180 bar. After pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times, the pressure should not be below the correct level.
• Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve. • Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5 on the cut-in block 2. • Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times to lower the brake accumulator pressure to 180 bar. • Slowly press the inch/brake all the way down nine times, keeping it down the final time. • Check that the correct pressure is reached on the manometers M4 and M5. • If the brake pressure on either manometer falls below the correct level: Replace the brake accumulator if necessary. Description
Value Unit
Lower brake pressure tolerance
3.6-16 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
50 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.26
Checking the accumulator charge pressure The pressure switch generates a warning if the brake accumulator pressure is too low. When the pressure in the brake accumulators is reached, the symbol field 2 goes out and the brake system is ready for operation. Procedure You can check the switching point of the pressure switch 1 using the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve and the symbol field 2 on the display unit. • Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test connection MA. • Turn on the starter switch. • Gently push the inch/brake pedal to slowly lower the pressure in the brake accumulators. • Check that the symbol field 2 lights up when the correct pressure is shown on the manometer M3. • If it is not correct: Replace the brake accumulator pressure switch 1.
3.6.27
Description
Value Unit
Pressure switch activation point
120±5 bar
Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake lights This check tests the brake lights. Procedure • Turn on the starter switch. • Slowly and gently press the inch/brake pedal and watch the brake lights light up. • If the brake lights do not light up: Check the brake lights; replace the brake light pressure switch 1 if necessary.
3.6.28
Checking the transmission shift pressure Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
• • • •
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection P. Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed. Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct. If it is not correct: The shift pressure relief valve is inside the control valve block. You can only adjust the shift pressure by adding or removing shims. For a sectional view view of the control valve block, see section on electrohydraulic pressure modulation.
Description
Value Unit 20 ±3 bar
Shift pressure
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-17 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6.29
Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a nitrogen bottle.
Procedure • Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator using a 6 mm allen key. • Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator. • Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct. • If it is not correct: Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the nitrogen pressure is correct. You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air. Description
Value Unit 12±2 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Nitrogen filling
3.6-18 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubricants and fuels
3.7 Lubricants and fuels Conscientious observance of the regulations for handling lubricants and fuels will increase the reliability and service life of the machine. It is especially important that the specified lubricant qualities are observed. You can find the various specifications about the prescribed intervals in the maintenance and inspection schedule and the lubrication chart. You can find details on lubrication, checking the oil level and changing operating fluids in the maintenance section under maintenance tasks. Follow the rules on handling lubricants and fuels, especially the environmental regulations. Filling quantities and specifications: – The filling quantities listed in the tables are only guidelines. The dipstick and level markings are always mandatory. – Each time the lubricant or fuel is replaced or topped up, check the level in the unit in question. – For more detailed information about the required lubricants, fuels and filling quantities, see the filling quantities in the lubrication chart and the section on lubricants and fuels.
Environmental protection • Always implement and observe environmental protection measures. • Observe national regulations. • Ensure that liquids can be properly disposed of before draining them.
Disposing of used materials This applies to the following types of used materials and hazardous waste: – Oils, lubricants, brake fluids, etc. – Coolant – Fuels – Filters, oil cartridges etc. – Rubber, tyres, insulating materials etc. – Batteries
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Note Environmental and health hazard ! Observe the local regulations for protecting the environment when disposing of used materials! • Always collect and store used materials separately in suitable containers. • Dispose of used materials properly at the official collection points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-1 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubricants and fuels
Converting the hydraulic system from petroleum to environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids For the operation of LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46. Machines filled at factory with environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids have an appropriate sign (CAUTION) attached to the driver's cab and hydraulic tank. Procedure for conversion: Caution Beware of damaging the machine's hydraulic system. Mixing environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oils produces a vigorous reaction that can damage the hydraulic system.
! Do not mix environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oil. • If you intend to convert the machine to environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluid, you must first consult LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE. • Ask LIEBHERR for the instruction sheet and conversion guidelines and be sure to follow them.
3.7.1 Specification
Diesel fuels The diesel fuels must comply with the minimum requirements of the fuel specifications prescribed as follows. Authorised fuel specifications: – DIN EN 590 – ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D Further fuel specifications only upon consultation with the Diesel Engine Development Department, LIEBHERR Machines Bulle S.A.
Sulphur content in the diesel fuel
For worldwide markets except the USA: In DIN EN 590 the maximum sulphur content is 50 mg/kg = max. 0.005 % by weight. For the USA: In ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D, the maximum sulphur content is 10 ppm.
The diesel fuel lubricating proficiency must be a max. 460 µm in accordance with the HFRR (60) test. For diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than 0.5 weight%, the oil-change intervals are to be halved. Diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than 1 weight% are not permissible.
3.7-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Low-sulphur diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content of below / less than 0.05 weight% are only applicable if lubricity can be ensured with the admixture of additives.
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubricants and fuels
Note In some cases, approval may be given, depending on the quality of the diesel engine lubricating oil. ! Fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not stipulate that fuels must pass a fuellubricity test. A written confirmation of the fuel supplier must be requested. The additives should be added by the supplier in his capacity as agent responsible for fuel quality. The addition of secondary-lubricity-additives by the customer is not recommended. – A cetane number of at least 45 is required for fuels in accordance with ASTM D975. A cetane number above 50 is preferable, especially with temperatures below 0°C. Diesel fuel at low temperatures (winter operation)
Diesel fuel precipitates paraffin crystals as the temperature drops. This increases flow-resistance in the fuel filter to such an extent that a sufficient supply of fuel to the diesel engine can no longer be guaranteed. In temperate climates, cold flow is guaranteed up to: 0 °C from 15/04. to 30/09 -10 °C from 01/10. to 14/11 / 1.3. - 14.04. -20 °C from 16/11 to 29/02 according to DIN EN 590. If the cold-flow properties of the diesel fuel are insufficient or with lower ambient temperatures than -20°C, we recommend using a fuel filter heater. Other approved diesel fuels: Diesel fuel complying with DIN EN 590 with up to 5% vol. FAME.
3.7.2 Lube oil specifications
Lubricating oils for diesel engines Only high-alloy lube-oils are used nowadays for modern diesel engines. They are comprised of base oils which feature combined admixtures (additives). The lubricating oil regulation for LIEBHERR diesel engines is based on the following specifications and regulations. Description
Specification
ACEA classification (Association des E4, E5, E6, E7 Constructeurs Européens de Caution: particle filter operation is l'Automobile) only possible with E6
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
API classification (American Petroleum Institute)
CH-4, CI-4, CJ-4 observe special oilchange interval Caution: observe the reduced oilchange interval
Lube-oil viscosity
Selection of lube-oil viscosity in accordance with the SAE-classification (Society of Automotive Engineers). The ambient temperature is definitive for the correct selection of the SAE-class. Selection of the SAE-classification gives no indication of the quality of a lube-oil. Too high a viscosity can lead to starting difficulties, and too low a viscosity could jeopardise the lubricating efficiency. The temperature ranges specified in the diagram are guidelines and can be briefly exceeded or fallen short of.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-3 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubricants and fuels
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class The following engine oil is recommended (for outside temperatures of -20°C to +45°C): Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40 Specification ACEA E4 Liebherr Motoroil low ash Specification ACEA E6 Lube-oil change intervals
Changing intervals: – Oil change and filter replacement: see the maintenance and inspection schedule – Oil-change respective of climatic zone, sulphur content in the fuel and oil quality in accordance with the following table. If the prescribed operating hours (h) have not expired within one year, the diesel engine oil and filter must be replaced at least once a year.
Difficulty factors
Various difficulty factors or more difficult operating conditions reduce maintenance intervals. Difficulty factors or difficult conditions include for example.: – frequent cold-starts – sulphur content in the fuel over 0.5% – Outside operating temperatures below -10 °C Should difficulty factors or tougher operating conditions arise, oil-change and filter replacement must be carried out in accordance with the specifications in the following table. Difficulty factor
Oil quality CH-4 CJ-4 E4 E5 E6 E7
Outside temperature
Sulphur content in the fuel
Normal climate, up to -10 °C
up to 0.5%
250 h
500 h
over 0.5%
125 h
250 h
up to 0.5%
125 h
250 h
over 0.5%
not permissible
125 h
Below -10 °C
Interval
Oil-change intervals in operating hours (h)
3.7-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
CI-4
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubricants and fuels
3.7.3 General recommendations
Coolant for the diesel engine The cooling system will only function reliably if it is working under pressure. It is therefore imperative that it is kept clean and watertight, that the radiator cap valve and working valves are functioning correctly and the necessary coolant level is maintained. The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze authorised by LIEBHERR guarantees sufficient protection against cold, corrosion and cavitation, do not corrode seals and hoses and do not foam up. Coolants which contain inadequate or ill-prepared corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze could cause a malfunctioning of aggregates or parts in the cooling circuit as a result of cavitational or corrosive damage. Furthermore, heatinsulating sedimentation can result at heat-exchanging parts, leading to overheating, and then to malfunctioning, of the engine. Note Emulsifiable corrosion inhibition oils may are impermissible. ! In special cases, it is permissible to use corrosion inhibitors.
Water (fresh water)
Suitable water is colourless, clear, free of mechanical contamination, drinkable tap water featuring the following restricted analysis values. Sea water, brackish water, salt water and industrial waste water is not suitable. Fresh water quality Description
Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)
0.6 to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20°d)
pH value at 20 °C
6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content
max. 100 mg/l
Fresh water quality when using DCA 4 Description
Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)
0.6 to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15°d)
pH value at 20 °C
6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Water analyses can be applied for from the communal authorities responsible.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
All year roundto
°C
°F
Water %
Corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze %
Outside temperature
-37
-34
50
50
Outside temperature
-50
-58
40
60
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-5 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubricants and fuels
Temperature-dependent selection of mix ratio for corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze A = ratio of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze in the coolant as a percentage Product designation
Manufacturer
Liebherr Antifreeze Concentrate
Country
Liebherr
D
Addinol Antifreeze Super
Addinol Lube Oil GmbH, Leuna
D
Agip Antifreeze Plus
Aral AG, BochumEni S.p.A., Rome
I
Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz
Eni S.p.A., Würzburg
D
Antigel DB 486
Sotragal SA, St-Priest
F
Aral Antifreeze Extra
Aral AG, Hamburg
D
Avia Antifreeze APN G48
Avia Mineralöl AG, Munich
D
BP Isocool
BP p.l.c. London
GB
Caltex Extended Life Coolant
Chevron Texaco
*
Castrol Antifreeze NF
Castrol, London
GB
Chevron Extended Life Coolant
Chevron Texaco
*
DEUTZ Kühlerschutzmittel 0101 1490
DEUTZ Service International GmbH, Cologne
D
ESA Frostschutz G48
ESA Burgdorf
Fuchs Fricofin Kühlerfrostschutz
Fuchs Petrolub AG, Mannheim
D
Glacelf Auto Supra (antifreeze)
Total, Paris
F
GlycoShell Longlife
Shell International Petroleum Company, London
GB
GlycoShell N
Shell International Petroleum Company, London
GB
Glysantin G48
BASF AG, Ludwigshafen/Germany
D
Havoline Extendend Life Antifreeze / Coolant
Chevron Texaco
*
Havoline XLC
Arteco
B
Motorex Antifreeze Protect G48
Bucher AG, Langenthal
Motul Inugel Optimal Ultra
Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex
F
OMV Kühlerfrostschutz / Coolant Plus
OMV Refining & Marketing GmbH, Vienna
A
CH
CH
Do not mix products with one another! * = global / worldwide
3.7-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze permitted for diesel engine cooling syst
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubricants and fuels
Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze premixes (50% water: 50% corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze) permitted for diesel engine cooling systems
Product designation
Manufacturer
Country
Liebherr Antifreeze Mix
Liebherr
D
Caltex Extended Life Coolant Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-touse version)
Chevron Texaco
*
Chevron DEX-COOL Extended Life Pre-Diluted 50/50 Antifreeze Coolant
Chevron Texaco
*
Coolelf Auto Supra -37 °C
Total, Paris
F
Havoline XLC, 50/50
Arteco
B
Havoline DEX-COOL Extended Life Pre-Diluted 50/50 Antifreeze Coolant
Chevron Texaco
*
Do not mix products with one another! * = global / worldwide Corrosion inhibitors without antifreeze
In exceptional cases and if outside temperatures constantly remain above freezing, for example in the tropics, where it can be proven that no approved corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze is available, the following may be used as coolant: Product DC4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4) Product Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total When carrying out maintenance tasks, the concentration must be tested and rectified as necessary. The coolant must be changed once a year. Note The entire amount of coolant must be drained. ! When changing from corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze to pure corrosion inhibitor, or vice versa.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Approved water-soluble corrosion inhibitors (concentrates) for diesel engine cooling systems
Product designation
Manufacturer
Countr y
DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives
Fleetguard / Cummins Filtration
*
Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate
Chevron Texaco
*
Chevron Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Free (ELC)
Chevron Texaco
*
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI)
Chevron Texaco
*
Total WT Supra
Total, Paris
F
Do not mix products with one another! * = global / worldwide
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-7 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubricants and fuels
3.7.4
Specification
Hydraulic oils
Only engine oils (mineral oils) meeting the following specifications and regulations are permitted. Description
Specification
API classification (American Petroleum Institute)
CF-4, CG-4, CH-4
ACEA classification (Association des Constructeurs Européens de E2 , E3 , E4 l'Automobile) Specifications and regulations for hydraulic oil Viscosity
The viscosity is selected according to the SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) classification. The decisive factor for the selection of the correct SAE class is the ambient temperature. The selection of the SAE classification has no bearing on the quality of a hydraulic oil. The temperature ranges presented in the diagram are merely guidelines.
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class For temperatures up to 10 °C below the specified limit: – Adjust the diesel engine to roughly half speed after starting. – Activate the hydraulic cylinders and engines and briefly move the cyliners to their stops. – Warming up takes roughly 10 minutes. At even lower temperatures: – Before starting the engine, prewarm the oil tank. Environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids
When operating LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids, we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46 with the viscosity specified by LIEBHERR. Converting the hydraulic system to environmentally harmless hydraulic fluid: – See the section on conversion from mineral oils to environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids. Note Environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluids must be checked every 500 operating hours at regular intervals. ! LIEBHERR recommends that oil analysis is carried out by WEAR-CHECK.
3.7-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Warming up
Service Manual
Maintenance Lubricants and fuels
Oil change: – At the interval stated in the maintenance and inspection schedule. – At the interval specified by WEAR-CHECK. Note Do not mix environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluid from different manufacturers or with mineral oils. ! See also the customer service information. Monitoring hydraulic oil - changing according to oil samples - analysis and laboratory report:
Oil change intervals according to sample analysis and laboratory report 1 Service hours 2 First oil sample
3.7.5
Pump distributor gear and axles
3 Second oil sample 4 Further oil samples every 500 operating hours
Lubricating oils for the transmission Gear oils must comply with the API GL-5 and MIL-L 2105 B, C or D specifications and the viscosity class SAE 90 LS *. * = Gear oil with limited slip additives for disc brakes and self-locking differentials. LS = limited slip additive: – Not required for pump distributor gears – Required for axles For the viscosity class SAE 90 LS, an oil of the viscosity class SAE 80 W 90 LS can also be used.
Transmission
An ATF oil compliant with the DEXTRON II D specification should be used as lubrication oil for the transmission.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Factory filling: ATF 86 AVIA-FLUID DEXRON II D
3.7.6
Description
ID no.
Quantity
ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D
861012601
210 l
ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D
10009964
20 l
Grease for general lubrication points This grease must meet the KP2k specification – consistency 2 of the NL GI class according to DIN 51818 and DIN 51825 or EP 2 according to NF-T-60 132. The grease must be made of a lithium complex with a four ball tester (VKA) value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D 2596. Application: – Grease for all lubrication points (according to the lubrication schedule) – Lubricant grease for bolt fitting – Lubricant grease for automatic central lubrication systems
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-9 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Lubricants and fuels
Approved greases
LIEBHERR 9610 special grease is a milling-resistant, ageing-resistant lithium grease, providing protection against corrosion with excellent lubricity over a wide temperature range. Its molecular composition yields high degrees of shearing and milling stability and good flow properties in long pipes. Description
Lubricant grease for automatic central lubrication systems
ID no.
Quantity
LH 9610 special grease 861302908
400 g (cartridge)
LH 9610 special grease 861301308
10 kg (drum)
LH 9610 special grease 861304508
25 kg (drum)
Greases with high-pressure additives (EP greases) are recommended. Only use greases with the same type of saponification.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note Greases with solid lubricant particles such as graphite are not suitable. ! Do not use this type of grease.
3.7-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Diesel engine, Splitter box 4.0 Chapter contents 4
Diesel engine, Splitter box................................................... 4.1-1 4.1
Diesel engine ..................................................................................4.1-1 4.1.1
Electrical engine components ..............................................4.1-6
4.1.2
Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors – B711/B712................4.1-7
4.1.3
Camshaft speed sensor – B713 ...........................................4.1-8
4.1.4
Coolant temperature sensor – B708 Fuel temperature sensor – B709 ......................................................................4.1-9
4.1.5
Charge air temperature sensor – B707 ..............................4.1-10
4.1.6
Charge air pressure sensor – B703 ...................................4.1-11
4.1.7
Oil pressure sensor – B701................................................4.1-12
4.2
Fuel system.....................................................................................4.2-1 4.2.1
Fuel level sensor ..................................................................4.2-2
4.2.2
Fuel pre-filter ........................................................................4.2-3
4.2.3
Fuel fine filter ........................................................................4.2-4
4.2.4
Refuelling pump (optional) ...................................................4.2-5
4.3
Air filter system ...............................................................................4.3-1 4.3.1
Air filter .................................................................................4.3-1
4.3.2
Vacuum switch .....................................................................4.3-2 Coupling..........................................................................................4.4-1
4.5
Splitter box ......................................................................................4.5-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4.4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-1 o f 2
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Diesel engine, Splitter box
4.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
4.1
Diesel engine Technical data See section 2.1
Design The diesel engine is a water-cooled, four-stroke in-line engine with pumpline-nozzle (PLD) direct injection, turbocharging and charge air cooling. The engine is fitted lengthways in the rear section and elastically supported on rubber elements. The flywheel end faces to the rear. Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Diesel engine components / right view
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Flywheel housing Flywheel Opening for cranking device Auxiliary drives Fuel pre-filter Crankcase bleeder Bleeder filter with oil separator Hand pump Cylinder head Fuel fine filter Charge air pipe Lube oil filler neck Air intake pipe
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
14 Flame glow plug 15 Engine electronics (LH-ECU) 16 Air conditioning compressor 17 Alternator 18 Fuel line connections 19 Auxiliary drive 20 Engine block 21 Dipstick 22 Oil separator return line 23 Oil pan 24 Fuel pump
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-1 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view Water pump Belt drive cover Thermostat housing Oil filter Charge air pipe Housing bleeder Turbocharger compressor
8 9 10 11 12 13
Turbocharger turbine Starter Oil cooler Cooling water supply to cooler Cooling water return from cooler Crankshaft / vibration damper
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4.1-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Diesel engine components / right view Flywheel Flywheel housing Opening for cranking device Auxiliary drives Crankcase bleeder Bleeder filter with oil separator Cylinder head Lube oil filler neck Combustion air intake manifold Flame glow plug Air conditioning compressor Pump element with magnetic coil
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Alternator Engine electronics (LH-ECU) Auxiliary drive Hand pump Fuel pre-filter Fuel line connections Fuel fine filter Engine bearing Oil pan Engine block Fuel pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-3 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view Water pump Tension pulley apparatus Oil filter Air intake pipe Housing bleeder Charge air pipe Turbocharger compressor
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Turbocharger turbine Crankcase Exhaust pipe Cooling water supply to cooler Cooling water return from cooler Thermostat housing Crankshaft / vibration damper
Design features of the diesel engine: – Water-cooled four-stroke diesel engine with pump-line-nozzle (PLD) direct injection – Turbocharger and charge air cooling – Maintenance-free gear drive for camshaft, fuel pump, lubricant pump on flywheel end and coolant pump on motor end, as well as power take-off for gear pumps – Individual cylinder heads with cast integral vortex intake duct – Replaceable wet bushings – Small number of parts due to lubricant and coolant lines integrated in crankcase – Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of light alloy (D934S) Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of monotherm steel (D934L/D936L) – Engine oil cooler – Double lube oil filter – Large, tilt-proof oil pan – 5-bearing (4-cylinder) or 7-bearing (6-cylinder) steel crankshaft with forged counterweights and diagonal “cracked” piston rods. Lead bronze triple composite bearings.
4.1-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
Function description Basic function The diesel engine converts the chemical energy in the fuel into kinetic energy, which it provides to the flywheel via the torsion absorber and the pump distributor gear to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics and steering hydraulics pumps. A small portion of the power is taken off at the accessory drive side of the diesel engine to drive the gear pumps.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
These are the single gear pump for the transmission shift pressure, and the triple gear pump for the hydrostatically driven fan, the accumulator pressure brake system and the leak oil scavenging in the variable displacement motor.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-5 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.1
Electrical engine components Design
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
Electrical engine components 7 Alternator – G700 8 Engine electronics (LH-ECU) – A700 9 Pump element magnetic coil Y711 – Y716 10 Water sensor on fuel pre-filter – B710 11 Oil pressure sensor – B701
12 Crankshaft 2 flywheel speed sensor – B712 13 Camshaft speed sensor – B713 14 Crankshaft 1 flywheel speed sensor – B711
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Heating flange – R701 2 Starter – M700 3 Coolant temperature indicator + thermostat – B708 4 Charge air pressure sensor – B703 5 Charge air temperature sensor – B707 6 Air conditioning compressor magnetic coupling – M710
4.1-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
4.1.2
Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors – B711/B712 For safety reasons, two identical speed sensors are used on the crankshaft. The two speed sensors, B711 and B712, are attached to the engine flywheel housing and their job is to record the speed and position of the crankshaft. The first sensor (B711) is the working sensor; if it fails, the system automatically switches to the second – backup – sensor (B712). The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used for: – Controlling the fan drive – Starting the emergency steering pump check – Controlling the diesel engine – Indicating the engine speed – Power limiting control – Overspeed protection – 0-inching control
Design The speed sensors are Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC). The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed. Distance “a” = 0.5 - 2 mm
Function description Speed sensor location
Basic function If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to the engine electronics as a frequency signal. Attention Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display. Plug assignment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Weight 2 Frequency signal (output voltage) 3 12 V power supply
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-7 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.3
Camshaft speed sensor – B713 The speed sensor B713 is attached to the crankshaft housing of the engine; its job is to detect the phase of the engine while starting. If the camshaft sensor fails while the engine is running, the engine continues turning. When the engine is turned off and started again, its running is restricted. The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used for: – Controlling the diesel engine
Design The speed sensor is a Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC). The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed. Distance “a” = 0.5 - 2 mm
Function description Speed sensor location
Basic function If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to the engine electronics as a frequency signal. Attention Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display. Plug assignment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Weight 2 Frequency signal (output voltage) 3 12 V power supply
4.1-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
4.1.4
Coolant temperature sensor – B708 Fuel temperature sensor – B709 The coolant temperature sensor B708 is attached to the thermostat housing of the engine, while the fuel temperature sensor B709 is fitted in the fuel supply line. Both have the task of signalling the temperature to the engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU uses this signal for: Coolant temperature: – Indicating the coolant temperature in the cab – Controlling the fan drive – Preglow control – Engine power limiting control Coolant temperature [°C] Power reduction [%]
-100
-15
100
101
120
150
10
0
0
4
50
50
– Controlling the engine to increase the idling speed Coolant temperature [°C]
-100
-90
-40
-10
20
0
200
200
100
0
Idling speed increase [rpm] Fuel temperature: – Controlling the fan drive – Engine power limiting control Fuel temperature [°C]
-100
-5
0
75
80
85
100
Power reduction [%]
10
3
0
0
3
10
30
Design The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Function description Basic function The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of -100 °C is assumed. Coolant resistance characteristic B708
Temperature (°C)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Coolant and fuel temperature sensor
105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Resistance (kOhm )
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-9 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.5
Charge air temperature sensor – B707 The charge air temperature sensor B707 is attached to the air intake pipe of the engine and has the task of signalling the charge air temperature to the engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU uses this signal for: – Controlling the fan drive – Preglow control – Engine power limiting control Charge air temperature [°C] Power reduction [%]
-100
-15
75
80
85
100
10
0
0
0
10
30
Design The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Function description Basic function Charge air temperature sensor
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of 100 °C is assumed.
Temperature (°C)
Charge air resistance characteristic B707 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Resistance (kOhm )
4.1-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Diesel engine
4.1.6
Charge air pressure sensor – B703 The charge air pressure sensor B703 is attached to the air intake pipe of the engine and has the task of signalling the charge air pressure to the engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for: – Engine power limiting control Power reduction (%)
Atmospheric pressure (mbar) Height above sea level* (m)
Speed (rpm) 1000
1300
1600
1900
2100
550 4850*
23.1
24.1
24.4
24.4
23.3
620 3950*
19.5
19.6
19.1
19.1
18.0
690 3100*
14.2
14.8
13.9
13.6
12.6
770 2250*
10.0
10.1
8.9
8.4
7.2
840 1550*
0.0
0.0
0.0
Design The charge air pressure sensor is an absolute pressure sensor with a membrane and an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, an absolute pressure sensor is subject to approximately 1 bar (at sea level 1030 mbar). 1 Electrical connections 2 Evaluation circuit 3 Membrane with sensor element 4 Pressure port 5 Fixing thread
Function description Basic function Cross section of speed sensor
The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V. Attention Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-11 o f 1 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.7
Oil pressure sensor – B701 The oil pressure sensor B701 is attached to the crankcase of the engine and has the task of signalling the oil pressure to the engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for: – Indication in the cab – Controlling the engine as a function of the safety curve: 300
1000
1400
1800
2100
Design The oil pressure sensor is a relative pressure sensor with a membrane and an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, a relative pressure sensor is subject to 0 bar. 1 Electrical connections 2 Evaluation circuit 3 Membrane with sensor element 4 Pressure port 5 Fixing thread
Function description
Cross section of speed sensor
Basic function The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply. This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V. Attention Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.
4.1-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Fuel system
4.2
Fuel system Technical data See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The fuel tank is located behind the right cab access.
Fuel system 1 2 3 4
Tank cap Filler strainer Fuel level sensor Distributor port
5 Intake line 6 Return line 7 Diesel engine
8 Fuel cooler 9 Drain valve 10 Fuel tank
Function description The fuel is drawn up by the fuel pump via the intake line and fuel pre-filter (water and dirt separator) and is delivered to the injection elements via a fine filter.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-1 o f 6
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Fuel system
4.2.1
Fuel level sensor Design The fuel level sensor is fitted vertically in the tank. It is connected via a lead and plugs to the display unit. The sensor tube contains two electrodes to transmit the fuel level in the tank.
Function description The fuel level sensor tube 2 contains electrodes 3 which measure the fuel level using a capacitive resistor. The electronics in the head of the fuel level sensor 1 transmit a corresponding voltage signal of 1 V – 4 V to input module 1 – A16a pin 23. Input module 1 converts the signal to a digital signal and forwards it via the master electronics to the fuel level display in the display unit A13. The fuel level sensor is earthed via input module 1 – pin 65.
Fuel level display The lower the fuel level the higher the voltage and thus the level shown on the fuel level display.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The “reserve” fuel level is shown by the fuel level symbol field flashing.
4.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Fuel system
4.2.2
Fuel pre-filter The fuel pre-filter protects the engine's fuel system (pump, pump elements, injection valves, valves and pistons) from dirt and water penetration.
Design The fuel pre-filter acts as both a water separator and a filter. It is fitted in the fuel intake line between the engine control unit and the fuel pump. The intake line is connected via the engine control unit (cooler) to the fuel tank. The outlet line is connected to the fuel pump. The water probe in the water collector monitors the condensate in the fuel pre-filter; if the water level is too high, it generates a service code via the engine control unit to the display unit.
Fuel pre-filter 1 Hand pump 2 Filter head 3 Filter cartridge
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4 Water collector 5 Drain cock 6 Water sensor
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-3 o f 6
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Fuel system
4.2.3
Fuel fine filter Technical data See section 2.1
The filter can be serviced without any tools. The filter can be removed and replaced by hand during a service.
Design The fuel filter is a fine filter with a water drain valve and is fitted between the fuel pump and the injection pump. It has a disposable filter cartridge which must be replaced each time it is serviced.
Fuel fine filter 1 Filter head
2 Filter cartridge
Function description The fuel fine filter protects the fuel system from contamination.
The pressure of the fuel pump forces the fuel through the filter membrane. The filtered fuel then flows through the outlet in the filter head via the fuel line to the injection pump. The water in the fuel system is separated by the impregnation of the filter insert, and then settles in the filter at the bottom. The filter can be emptied during maintenance by opening the drain valve.
4.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The diesel fuel is pumped under pressure from the fuel pump through the filter intake into the filter insert.
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Fuel system
4.2.4
Refuelling pump (optional) Technical data See section 2.1
The refuelling pump is mounted on the right of the rear section. The refuelling pump is only suitable for diesel fuel. The refuelling system is designed to assist filling the diesel fuel from the container to the fuel tank.
Design
Main components of the refuelling pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Intake connection 2 Pressure port 3 Supply pump
4 DC motor 5 Electrical connection
Components of the refuelling pump 1 2 3 4
Snap ring Check valve Intake housing Impeller
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
5 6 7 8
Seal Discharge housing Feather key DC motor
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
9 Electrical connection 10 Carbon brush
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-5 o f 6
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Fuel system
Function description Refuelling system
Refuelling pump The refuelling pump 5 is a rotary vane pump which draws in fuel via the intake line 6 and the intake line extension 7 with suction strainer 8, from the container 9 and pumps it through the discharge line 4 to the fuel tank 3 of the machine. The refuelling pump 5 can be switched on and off using the removable key 2. The refuelling pump 5 is filled with fuel via the discharge line before it is first used. This means it is self-priming. The diesel fuel also lubricates the mechanical seals in the pump. A check valve in the intake port prevents the refuelling pump 5 from running empty. This means the pump remains self-priming. The DC motor does not have internal thermal protection; it is designed to run for a maximum of 15 minutes.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The external 20 amp fuse F05 (fitted in the instrument panel) protects the pump from short-circuits and overload.
4.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Air filter system
4.3
Air filter system Design
Air filter system 1 Rain cap 2 Fixing clips 3 Air filter
4 Vacuum switch 5 Filtered air intake manifold 6 Fixing clips
Function description The engine takes in fresh air via the rain cap 3 and the air filter 5. The filtered air is provided to the engine via the turbocharger.
4.3.1
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Design
Air filter 1 Secondary element 2 Primary element 3 Service cap
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Fixing clips 5 Dust extraction valve 6 Air filter housing
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.3-1 o f 2
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Air filter system
Function description Air filter unit The primary element 2 and the secondary element 1 of the dry air filter are designed to ensure maximum protection for the engine at very long service intervals. The primary element 2 with radial sealing at the filtered air connection in the filter housing 6 is subject to scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance. The secondary element 1 acts as a back-up if the primary element 2 is damaged. The secondary element 1 is not a service filter. It must be replaced if necessary. The dust extraction valve 5 automatically removes dust from the service cap 3. The tangential arrangement of the intake port sets the air into fast rotation, so that large dust particles are thrown by centrifugal force against the housing and accumulate in the service cap 3 due to the air flow. At idle speed, the accumulated dust particles in the service cap 3 are carried outside via the dust extraction valve 5 by the vibrations in the intake air. The service cap 3 must be fitted so that the dust extraction valve 5 points down. With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air pulsating at the dust extraction valve 5.
4.3.2
Vacuum switch (ID 6906001)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Vacuum switch arrangement 2 Air filter
Function description The vacuum switch 1 monitors the pressure ratio between the turbocharger and the air filter 2. If the filters are dirty (excessive vacuum) it activates the air contamination symbol field on the display unit.
4.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Vacuum switch
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Coupling
4.4
Coupling Technical data See section 2.1
Design The coupling is an elastic torsion and vibration absorber between the flywheel on the engine and the splitter box.
Position of the coupling LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Torsion absorber
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
2 Flywheel
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.4-1 o f 4
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Coupling
1 2 3 4
Torsion absorber assembly Hub Pressure springs Disc
5 6 7 8
Disc Fixing screw Flywheel housing Flywheel
The disc 5 is bolted to the flywheel 8 of the engine. The hub 2 is axially guided by circular discs riveted to the hub. The hub 2 can move radially on the disc 4. The springs 3 are arranged in a ring and form an elastic connection which transfers the torque between the disc 5 and the hub 2. The drive shaft of the splitter box is connected to the hub 2 by a spline shaft gearing.
4.4-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Main components of the torsion absorber
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Coupling
Function description Basic function The coupling is an elastic connection which also absorbs torque peaks between the engine and the driven splitter box. The coupling transmits the engine torque to the splitter box.
Power transmission The following components transmit the engine torque to the splitter box: – Flywheel 8 – Fixing screws 6 – Discs 4 and 5 – Pressure springs 3 – Hub 2
Damping
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The springs 3 absorb load fluctuations and torque peaks on the engine crankshaft. The vibrations of the crankshaft are greatly reduced as torque is transmitted to the splitter box.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.4-3 o f 4
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Coupling
4.4-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Splitter box
4.5
Splitter box Technical data See section 2.1
Design The splitter box is a single-stage spur gear transmission attached to the flywheel housing of the diesel engine.
Location of the splitter box
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Working hydraulics pump 2 Steering hydraulics pump
3 Travel hydraulics pump 4 Pump distributor gear
Splitter box, rear view 1 2 3 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Housing Dipstick Oil filler tube Pump connection for working and steering hydraulics
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Pump connection for travel hydraulics 6 Oil drain valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.5-1 o f 4
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Splitter box
Splitter box, front view Housing Dipstick Oil filler tube Pump connection for working and steering hydraulics
5 Oil drain valve 6 Pump connection for travel hydraulics
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4
4.5-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Diesel engine, Splitter box Splitter box
Cross section of the splitter box
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Housing Stud screw Disc Hex nut O-ring Ball bearing Spur gear for working and steering pump Bearing flange O-ring Cylindrical roller bearing Bearing flange O-ring Spur gear for travel pump
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Ball bearing O-ring Stud screw Hex nut Disc Ball bearing Cylindrical roller bearing Drive shaft Shaft seal ring Bearing flange O-ring Ball bearing
4.5-3 o f 4
Diesel engine, Splitter box
Service manual
Splitter box
Function description Power transmission The splitter box transfers and distributes the engine torque to the hydraulic pumps for: – Travel hydraulics – Working hydraulics – Steering hydraulics
Input
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The splitter box is directly driven by the flywheel of the engine via the elastic coupling.
4.5-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Cooling system 5.0 5
Cooling system.................................................................... 5.0-1 Gear pump ......................................................................................5.1-1
5.2
Gear motor......................................................................................5.2-1
5.3
Temperature sensor .......................................................................5.3-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
5.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-1 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Cooling system
5.0-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system Cooling system
Design The cooling system is fitted on the rear section between the diesel engine and the driver's cab.
Cooler unit components Air conditioning condenser Diesel fuel cooler Hydraulic oil cooler Gear oil cooler Water cooler
6 Intercooler 7 Cooler support, cooler unit frame 8 Fan motor with proportional pressure relief valve 9 Fan blade
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-3 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Cooling system components 4 5 6 7 8
Fan motor pressure line Fan pump intake line Fan pump Hydraulic tank Fan blade
9 Suction and return filter 10 Fan motor leak oil line / variable displacement motor bearing lubrication 11 Variable displacement motor 2 12 Cooler unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve 2 Fan motor in-line filter 3 Fan motor shaft seal leak oil line relief
5.0-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system Cooling system
Function description Basic function The fan takes in air from the outside of the cooler units, and blows it over the cooling fins of the cooler units, through the engine and out again. The cooler system cools: – The engine coolant – The hydraulic oil – The engine charge air – The air conditioning condenser – The gear oil – The diesel fuel
Hydraulic fan speed control
Hydraulic plan of fan drive 1 2 3 4
Cooler unit Fan Gear motor Proportional pressure relief valve assembly
5 6 7 8 9
Triple pump Return strainer Ventilation and bleeder filter Suction and return filter Hydraulic tank
10 11 12 13 14
Bearing lubrication orifice Variable displacement motor 2 Bearing lubrication orifice Variable displacement motor 1 Collector pipe with safety valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The speed of the hydrostatically driven fan depends on the engine speed (pump flow) and the fluid temperatures or the status of the air conditioning system.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-5 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Electric fan speed control
Block diagram of cooling system 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Engine electronics (LH-ECU) Input module 1 Main electronics (master) Output module 1 Cooler unit Gear motor in-line filter Fan
8 Proportional pressure relief valve Y13 9 Gear motor 10 Coolant temperature sensor (B708) 11 Gear pump
12 Diesel engine 13 Charge air temperature sensor (B707) 14 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor (B8) 15 Hydraulic tank
The main electronics (master) A15 process the following parameters: – The values of the hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8 – The values of the coolant temperature sensor B708 – The values of the charge air temperature sensor B707 The signals are provided by the engine controller (LH-ECU) and input module 1 of the main electronics (master) A15 via CAN bus. The main electronics (master) A15 calculate the current for the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 and generate a signal via output module 1. When the air conditioning system is on, the main electronics (master) A15 regulate the fan current to the value set using SCULI. This current controls the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear motor and therefore the fan speed. A high temperature means a low current at the proportional pressure relief valve Y13.
5.0-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The fan speed is controlled by: – The charge air temperature sensor B707 in the intake pipe – The coolant temperature sensor B708 in the cooling water circuit – The hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8 in the hydraulic oil circuit – The proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear motor – The status of the air conditioning system – The main electronics (master) A15
Service manual
Cooling system Cooling system
If the hydraulic oil sensor B8 records overheating, the following functions are activated: – Above 88 °C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed. – Above 90 °C the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone sounds every 10 seconds and the hydraulic oil overheating warning lamp H23 is activated. – From 90 °C to 100 °C the current to the control pressure proportional valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction). If the coolant sensor B708 records overheating, the following functions are activated: – Above 97 °C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed. In addition, the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone sounds every 10 seconds and the coolant overheating symbol field (H13) is activated. – From 100 °C to 105 °C the current to the control pressure proportional valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction). If the charge air sensor B707 records overheating, the following functions are activated: – Above 75 °C the service code E6001 appears in the display unit, accompanied by a warning tone. The engine power is reduced in increments.
Diagram of electric current and fan speed
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 2 3 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fan speed Current to proportional valve (mA) Engine speed Fan speed (rated speed)
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Fan speed with no current to proportional pressure relief valve Y13 6 Fan speed at low temperature (minimum speed)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-7 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Tables of system pressure, electric current and fan speed Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 14171; L556 - 454 / from 14171;
Fan control At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil up to 55 °C, coolant up to 88 °C At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 °C, coolant 88 - 93 °C At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 °C, coolant 93 - 97 °C Temperature sensor unplugged At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 °C, coolant above 97 °C, proportional solenoid de-energised. Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
System pressure
Current
Fan speed
30 bar
900 mA
500 rpm
30 - 110 bar
900 - 580 mA
500 - 1650 rpm
110 ±10 bar
580 mA
1650 rpm
220 ±10 bar
De-energised
2050 rpm
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor coupling is on, the current is reduced from 900 mA to 750 mA. Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 457 / from 14171
Fan control At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil up to 55 °C, coolant up to 88 °C At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 °C, coolant 88 - 93 °C At upper engine speed Hydraulic oil 73 - 88 °C, coolant 93 - 97 °C Temperature sensor unplugged At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 °C, coolant above 97 °C, proportional solenoid de-energised. Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
System pressure
Current
Fan speed
40 bar
850 mA
250 rpm
40 - 175 bar
850 - 360 mA
250 - 1400 rpm
175 ±10 bar
360 mA
1400 rpm
220 ±10 bar
De-energised
1600 rpm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19.03.2007
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor coupling is on, the current is reduced from 850 mA to 650 mA.
5.0-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system Gear pump
5.1 Gear pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Gear pump arrangement 1 Fan circuit test connection 2 Cooling system gear pump
3 Brake system gear pump 4 Motor scavenging pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The pumps are connected to each other on the shaft via actuator rings. The pumps are sealed against each other. The intake side of the cooler gear pump 2 is connected to the hydraulic tank, and the discharge side is connected to the gear motor on the fan housing.
Gear pump components 1 2 3 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Shaft seal ring Flange Seals Bearing bushings
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Gears 6 Housing 7 Housing cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.1-1 o f 2
Cooling system
Service manual
Gear pump
Function description Basic function The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing. One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the other driven by the gear teeth (driven gear). The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The cooling system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure relief valve on the gear motor.
5.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system Gear motor
5.2 Gear motor Technical data See section 2.1
The gear motor is fitted to the fan housing. The gear motor drives the fan blades via a shaft. The proportional pressure relief valve attached to the gear motor controls the fan speed.
Design
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 Gear motor 2 Fan drive shaft
3 Proportional pressure relief valve
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve 1 2 3 4 5 6
Bearing cover Seal kit Bearing bushing Gears Bearing bushing Motor housing
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
7 Seal kit 8 Proportional pressure relief valve connecting housing 9 Proportional pressure relief valve 10 O-ring
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
11 12 13 14 15
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
O-ring Shaft Roller bearing Shaft seal ring Bearing cover
5.2-1 o f 4
Cooling system
Service manual
Gear motor
Proportional pressure relief valve 1 2 3 4 5
Pressure relief adjusting screw Counter nut Cap Electromagnet Electromagnet connection
6 7 8 9
Secondary spring Housing Secondary piston Secondary restrictor
10 11 12 13
Housing Primary spring Main piston Primary restrictor
Function description Basic function The gear motor 1 is powered by the current from the gear pump.
Diagram of fan motor 1 Gear motor 2 Proportional pressure relief valve assembly 3 Proportional pressure relief valve 4 Main piston
5.2-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
P Pump intake T1 Return line to variable displacement motors (bearing flushing) T2 Relief seal (return to tank)
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The gear motor 1 has a proportional pressure relief valve 3, which controls the speed of the gear motor and therefore the fan speed.
Service manual
Cooling system Gear motor
Pressure regulation by the proportional pressure relief valve
How the proportional pressure relief valve works When the solenoid 1 is not energised, the proportional pressure relief valve acts like a pilot-controlled pressure relief valve. The pressure acting at “P” passes through the primary restrictor 8 to the spring chamber of the main piston 7 and acts via the secondary restrictor 5 on the secondary piston 4. The pressure equalisation on the main piston 7 causes the primary spring 6 to close it. If the pressure on the secondary piston 4 becomes so high that the set force of the secondary spring 2 is exceeded, the secondary piston 4 opens, allowing oil to flow into the tank chamber. This gives rise to a difference in pressure in front of and behind the main piston 7, causing it to open. If the solenoid 1 is energised, a magnetic force is generated depending on the current. The magnetic force acts on the iron core 3, pulling it back according to the current strength. This magnetic force reduces the set spring force of the secondary spring 2 accordingly. This causes the proportional valve to open at a lower system pressure.
Fan speed regulation The proportional pressure relief valve acts as a bypass on the gear motor. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
At low temperature the bypass is almost fully open. Most of the pump flow goes through the bypass valve to the tank. The fan turns at low speed (minimum speed = dragging speed). As the temperature rises, the bypass valve closes proportionally. The gear motor turns the fan faster.
Failsafe function The failsafe function is as follows: if the power supply to the proportionally controlled pressure relief valve fails, the bypass closes. The full flow of the gear pump drives the gear motor. The fan turns at maximum speed.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.2-3 o f 4
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Gear motor
5.2-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system Temperature sensor
5.3 Temperature sensor (ID 10043264)
Technical data See section 2.1
The temperature sensor is used for measuring the temperature of the hydraulic oil.
Design The sensor element of the temperature sensor consists of an encapsulated thin-layer nickel resistor.
Temperature sensor
Function description Temperature measurement
Temperature/resistance curve The sensor is a temperature sensor with an NTC characteristic. This means, the resistance in the sensor rises along with the temperature.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The resistance curve of the temperature sensor is almost linear. For the coolant and charge air temperature sensors, see the section on the ENGINE.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.3-1 o f 2
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Temperature sensor
5.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 Travel Hydraulics 6.0 Chapter contents 6
Travel Hydraulics ................................................................ 6.0-1 6.0.1
Travel hydraulics – L550, L556 ............................................6.0-1
6.0.2
Travel hydraulics – L566, L576, L580 ..................................6.0-9
6.1
Variable displacement pump ..........................................................6.1-1
6.2
Variable displacement motors ........................................................6.2-1 Variable adjustment motor ...................................................6.2-3
6.2.2
Motor scavenging pump .......................................................6.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
6.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics 6.0.1 Valid for:
Travel hydraulics – L550, L556 L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the travel hydraulics 1 2 3 4
Hydraulic tank Variable displacement pump Overspeed protection solenoid valve Collector pipe
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
5 Oil cooler 6 Variable displacement motor 1 7 Variable displacement motor 2
8 Scavenging pump 9 Fan pump 10 Fan motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-1 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics
6.0-2 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Hydraulic tank Bleeder filter Return strainer Bypass valve Return suction filter Pre-tension valve Replenishing valve with strainer Working hydraulics pump leak oil Solenoid valve block return oil Compact brake pump leak oil Control block return oil Shut-off valve Working hydraulics pump intake port Steering pump intake port Emergency steering pump intake port Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Gear pump fan Brake system gear pump Motor scavenging pump Variable displacement pump assembly Axial piston pump Travel direction valve
Travel Hydraulics
23 Servo cylinder 24 Restrictor ∅ 1.8 mm 25 Pressure relief and replenishing valve A 26 Pressure relief and replenishing valve B 27 Replenishing pressure relief valve 28 Pressure cut-off 29 Control pressure proportional valve 30 Replenishing pump 31 To working hydraulics pilot control 32 Bypass valve 33 Variable displacement motor 1 assembly 34 Axial piston drive unit 35 Check valves 36 Proportional valve and piston rod 37 Servo piston 40 Variable displacement motor 2 assembly 41 Axial piston drive unit 42 Check valves 43 Proportional valve and piston rod 44 Servo piston 45 Discharge valve
46 Pressure relief valve with orifice 47 Orifice ∅ 4.2 mm 50 Fan motor assembly 51 Main piston 52 Pressure relief and proportional valve 53 Gear motor 54 Fan blade 55 Oil cooler 56 Bypass valve 57 Collector pipe 58 Return oil from servostat Test connections: PST Control pressure / variable displacement pump G Replenishing pressure MA High pressure / forward travel direction MB High pressure / reverse travel direction M1 Servo pressure / variable displacement motor 1 M2 Servo pressure / variable displacement motor 2 P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement motors 33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump. 1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards. 2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0°. Motor 40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. 3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0°. Motor 33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15°.
Variable displacement pump LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump. The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and therefore the pump flow. At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction forces from the high pressure. The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine. The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the closed circuit. The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-3 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump. Variable displacement pump regulation The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump. The following parameters affect the control of the pump: – Gas pedal position – Inching function – Tractive force control – Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature – Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Gas pedal position
When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out. The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value according to the engine speed.
Inching function
When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic braking takes place. At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill. If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated within 20 seconds.
Tractive force adjustment
If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the tractive force to the set level. The following parameters are required for tractive force control: – The tractive force control button must be switched on – The machine must be moving forward – The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown) You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a range of 100% to 70%.
Overheating
If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 °C) or the coolant (90 - 100 °C) overheats, the main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level. The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when the temperature falls back below the threshold.
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to 200 mA. At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing pressure from the variable displacement pump.
6.0-4 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3 to 4 km/h.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement motors The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle and pressure.
The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure. The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition. The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motor 2 is employed in the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil. Variable displacement motor regulation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors. The following parameters affect the control of the motors: – Road speed – Gas pedal position – Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive engine suppression) – Inching function – Tempomat – Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Road speed
The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed. The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This accelerates the machine.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-5 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motor power limiting control
Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally operating the working hydraulics or steering. The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors then pivot out again.
Inching function
When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master) increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking takes place.
Vmax function
With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced. The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second fixed gear. The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine then reaches this speed at full throttle.
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is activated. The rear axle is braked. Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement motors overrev.
During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot oil is pumped out. The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors. The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.
6.0-6 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Variable displacement motor bearing flushing
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.
Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved. The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler. The oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-7 o f 1 6
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-8 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics 6.0.2 Valid for:
Travel hydraulics – L566, L576, L580 L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 457 / from 14171
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the travel hydraulics 1 2 3 4
Hydraulic tank Variable displacement pump Overspeed protection solenoid valve Collector pipe
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Oil cooler 6 Variable displacement motor 1 7 Variable displacement motor 2
8 Scavenging pump 9 Fan pump 10 Fan motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-9 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics PowerPoint
Service Manual Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics
6.0-10 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Hydraulic tank Bleeder filter Return strainer Bypass valve Return suction filter Pre-tension valve Replenishing valve with strainer Working hydraulics pump leak oil Solenoid valve block return oil Compact brake pump leak oil Control block return oil Shut-off valve Working hydraulics pump intake port Steering pump intake port Emergency steering pump intake port Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Gear pump fan Brake system gear pump Motor scavenging pump Variable displacement pump assembly Axial piston pump Travel direction valve Servo cylinder
Travel Hydraulics
24 Restrictor ∅ 1.8 mm 25 Pressure relief and replenishing valve A 26 Pressure relief and replenishing valve B 27 Replenishing pressure relief valve 28 Pressure cut-off 29 Control pressure proportional valve 30 Replenishing pump 31 To working hydraulics pilot control 32 Bypass valve 33 Variable displacement motor 1 assembly 34 Axial piston drive unit 35 Check valves 36 Proportional valve and piston rod 37 Servo piston 38 Discharge valve 39 Pressure relief valve with orifice 40 Variable displacement motor 2 assembly 41 Axial piston drive unit 42 Check valves 43 Proportional valve and piston rod 44 Servo piston
45 Discharge valve 46 Pressure relief valve with orifice 47 Orifice ∅ 4.2 mm 50 Fan motor assembly 51 Main piston 52 Pressure relief and proportional valve 53 Gear motor 54 Fan blade 55 Oil cooler 56 Bypass valve 57 Collector pipe 58 Return oil from servostat Test connections: PST Control pressure / variable displacement pump G Replenishing pressure MA High pressure / forward travel direction MB High pressure / reverse travel direction M1 Servo pressure / variable displacement motor 1 M2 Servo pressure / variable displacement motor 2 P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement motors 33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump. 1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards. 2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0°. Motor 40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. 3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0°. Motor 33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15°.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Variable displacement pump The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump. The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and therefore the pump flow. At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction forces from the high pressure. The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine. The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the closed circuit. L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-11 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks. See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump. Variable displacement pump regulation The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump. The following parameters affect the control of the pump: – Gas pedal position – Inching function – Tractive force control – Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature – Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Gas pedal position
When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out. The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value according to the engine speed.
Inching function
When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic braking takes place. At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill. If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated within 20 seconds.
Tractive force adjustment
If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the tractive force to the set level. The following parameters are required for tractive force control: – The tractive force control button must be switched on – The machine must be moving forward – The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown) You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a range of 100% to 70%.
Overheating
If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 °C) or the coolant (90 - 100 °C) overheats, the main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level. The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when the temperature falls back below the threshold.
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to 200 mA. At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing pressure from the variable displacement pump.
6.0-12 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3 to 4 km/h.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement motors The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle and pressure.
The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure. The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition. The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motors 1 and 2 is employed in the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil. Variable displacement motor regulation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors. The following parameters affect the control of the motors: – Road speed – Gas pedal position – Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive engine suppression) – Inching function – Tempomat – Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Road speed
The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed. The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This accelerates the machine.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-13 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motor power limiting control
Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally operating the working hydraulics or steering. The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors then pivot out again.
Inching function
When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master) increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking takes place.
Vmax function
With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced. The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second fixed gear. The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine then reaches this speed at full throttle.
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is activated. The rear axle is braked. Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement motors overrev.
During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot oil is pumped out. The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors. The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.
6.0-14 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Variable displacement motor bearing flushing
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.
Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved. The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler. The oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-15 o f 1 6
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-16 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement pump
6.1 Variable displacement pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement pump 1 Drive shaft 2 Pump housing 3 Servo cylinder
4 Travel direction valve 5 Connection housing
The variable displacement pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is driven by the diesel engine via this unit. The variable displacement pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The variable displacement pump contains proportional valves for the control pressure and pressure cut-off, as well as a replenishing pressure valve, pressure relief and replenishing valve, and a replenishing pump.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The following diagrams illustrate the design of the variable displacement pump:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-1 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement pump
Components of the variable displacement pump, side view Drive shaft Shaft seal ring Snap ring Pump housing Servo piston Travel direction valve Control pressure proportional valve Pressure cut-off Connection housing Disc Replenishing pump housing Coupling hub
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Bearing bushing Internal gear External gear Bearing bushing Bearing bushing Bushing Control lens Snap ring Pressure spring Bushing Cylinder
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Piston Return ball Return plate Glide shoe Disc springs Swash plate Guide pin Pin Swash plate bearing Roller bearing Snap ring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6.1-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement pump
Components of the variable displacement pump, servo cylinder and servo valve view Servo piston Pump housing Spring cup Pressure spring Pressure spring Turcon-Glyd seal Guide ring Solenoid
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Pressure cut-off Travel direction valve Control pressure proportional valve Connection housing Pressure relief and replenishing valve Replenishing pressure relief valve Twist screw Solenoid
17 Receptacle ring 18 Adjusting screw for the pump zero position 19 Counter nut 20 Spring cup 21 Snap ring 22 Cover
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-3 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement pump
Components of the variable displacement pump, front view 4 Restrictor 5 Plug 6 Replenishing pressure relief valve
7 Pressure relief and replenishing valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Pressure cut-off 2 Connection housing 3 Pressure relief and replenishing valve
6.1-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump 1 2 3 4 5
Variable displacement pump Servo cylinder Travel direction valve Restrictor Pressure relief and replenishing valve A 6 Pressure relief and replenishing valve B
7 Replenishing pressure relief valve 8 Pressure cut-off 9 Control pressure proportional valve 10 Replenishing pump 11 Suction line from replenishing pump 12 To working hydraulics pilot control 13 To the oil cooler
The variable displacement pump is designed for hydrostatic drives in a closed circuit. The pump delivers directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the motors is fed back to the opposite side of the pump. The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 9 is activated by the main electronics (master). The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and therefore the pump flow. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction forces from the high pressure. The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the displacement pump operates and the travel direction of the machine. The pressure relief and replenishing valves A and B protect the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks. At the same time, the valves act as replenishing valves for the closed circuit. The pressure cut-off limits the maximum operating pressure within the closed circuit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-5 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement pump
Control of the pump The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve is activated by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and therefore the pump flow. The following parameters affect the control of the pump: – Gas pedal position – Inching function – Tractive force control – Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature – Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Control pressure proportional valve Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve is activated by the main electronics (master). The valve reduces the pressure in the PST channel in proportion to the magnet current. It operates largely independently of the PSP control pressure.
In the de-energised state, the PST control pressure duct is connected to the tank T. The more the current increases, the higher the control pressure. The maximum level is limited by the replenishing pressure. Depending on the current to the proportional valve 3, the control piston 2 is moved closer to or further from the regulating springs 1. This adjusts the pressure in the PST duct.
Servo piston and swash plate
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The servo piston 3 turns the swash plate 2 mounted on roller bearings and thus changes the pump flow rate of the pump.
Servo piston and swash plate
6.1-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement pump
1 Swash plate bearing 2 Swash plate
3 Servo piston 4 Cylinder with piston
As the swivel angle increases, the pump flow is increased. The drive torque is increased. When the swivel angle is reduced, the flow rate of the pump is also reduced. The drive torque is reduced. When in the zero position, the pump flow is also zero. The strong spring centring in the servo cylinder keeps the swash plate in the zero position if no control signals are present. The zero position can be mechanically adjusted.
Sectional view of the servo cylinder 1 2 3 4
Pump housing Pressure spring Servo cylinder Forward travel direction servo oil supply
5 Reverse travel direction servo oil supply 6 Pressure spring 7 Zero position adjusting screw
On traversing the zero position, the flow direction of the hydraulic oil is smoothly reversed.
Travel direction valve The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the pump swivels out.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The travel direction valve directs the control pressure into one of the two servo chambers in the servo cylinder. The opposite chamber remains connected to the drain.
Sectional view of the travel direction valve 1 2 3 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Forward travel direction solenoid Servo oil supply Reverse travel direction solenoid Forward travel direction servo oil supply
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Reverse travel direction servo oil supply 6 Servo piston
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-7 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement pump
Replenishing pump The replenishing pump is an internal gear pump. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank. The delivery volume of the pump is proportional to the drive speed.
Front view of the replenishing pump 1 Internal gear pump
2 Suction side of the replenishing pump
The replenishing pump supplies the closed circuit with fresh, cooled oil. The replenishing pump also provides oil for the control circuit (control pressure). The maximum replenishing pressure is limited by the replenishing pressure relief valve.
Replenishing pressure relief valve
Cross section of the replenishing pressure relief valve 1 Tank outlet 2 Oil from the replenishing pump 3 Adjusting screw
4 Oil to the pressure relief and replenishing valve 5 Valve piston
Excess oil that is not fed into the closed circuit flows via the replenishing pressure relief valve to the pump housing. At the same time, this oil cools the rotary group of the variable displacement pump.
6.1-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
This directly actuated pressure relief valve protects the replenishing pump against excess pressure.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement pump
Pressure cut-off The pressure cut-off valve limits the operating pressure in the closed circuit. When the maximum operating pressure is reached, the flow of the variable displacement pump is reduced so that the maximum operating pressure is just maintained.
Hydraulic diagram of active/inactive pressure cut-off 1 Variable displacement pump 2 Travel direction valve 3 Control pressure proportional valve
4 Pressure cut-off 5 Nozzle 6 Replenishing pump
Pressure cut-off active: when the maximum operating pressure is reached in the closed circuit, the pressure cut-off is activated. Control oil flows into the tank duct. Sufficient oil from the replenishing pump 6 can no longer flow through the nozzle 5. Up to the nozzle 5 the replenishing pressure acts; after it, only the reduced control pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Pressure cut-off inactive: the control pressure acts in the duct up to the control pressure proportional valve 3 and the pressure cut-off 4.
Sectional view of the pressure cut-off 1 2 3 4
Pressure spring Valve piston Servo oil supply Control edge
5 Tank outlet 6 Tappet 7 Low pressure / closed circuit
8 Check valve 9 Bore hole 10 High pressure / closed circuit
The operating pressure controls the valve. When the maximum operating pressure has been reached, the tappet 6 and the valve piston 2 are pushed against the pressure spring 1. The control pressure channel 3 is linked to the tank outlet 5, and servo oil drains off. The control pressure drops and the variable displacement pump swivels to a smaller flow rate. The variable displacement pump then delivers just enough oil to attain the maximum pressure.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-9 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement pump
Pressure relief and replenishing valve The pilot-controlled pressure relief and replenishing valves prevent excess pressure from forming in the closed circuit. The high pressure from the system acts via the nozzle 6 on the pilot control piston 2. It the set value is exceeded, the pilot control piston opens. The rear piston chamber 3 is opened via the relief duct 8 to the low pressure side. The main piston 4 then opens and the high pressure oil can flow to the low pressure side 5.
Pressure relief and replenishing valve at high pressure 1 2 3 4
Pressure spring Pilot control piston Rear piston chamber Main piston
5 6 7 8
Low pressure side Nozzle High pressure Relief duct
At the same time, the valves act as replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
Pressure relief and replenishing valve during replenishment 1 Main piston 2 Pressure spring 3 Main piston control edge
6.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 Replenishing oil intake 5 Closed circuit replenishment
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Oil leaks in the closed circuit reduce the pressure on the low pressure side. This opens the main piston and oil from the replenishing pump can flow into the closed circuit.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement motors
6.2 Variable displacement motors Function description Basic function
Variable displacement motor arrangement 1 2
Variable displacement motor 2 Variable displacement motor 1
3 4
Proportional valve Discharge valve
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle and pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.
Regulation of the variable displacement motors during acceleration 1st gear: At low speed, both motors pivot to a 25° angle. The greatest torque is transferred to the transmission. If the travel speed is increased, the motors simultaneously pivot inwards. The shift range is reached at around 6 km/h. Motor 1 moves back towards 0° and motor 2 towards 23°. Motor 1 reduces its torque and motor 2 increases its torque. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-1 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motors
Once motor 1 reaches an angle of 0°, the coupling 1 opens in a loadfree condition. 2nd gear: In 2nd gear, only variable displacement motor 2 is active. Motor 1 is uncoupled and at an angle of 0°. As the speed is increased, motor 2 gradually reduces its angle. The next shift range is reached at around 17 km/h. Motor 1 is coupled again and moves to a wide angle. At the same time, motor 2 moves to 0°. Motor 2 is then uncoupled. 3rd gear: In 3rd gear, only variable displacement motor 1 is active. Initially, motor 1 is at an angle of 25°. In this range, the variable displacement pump takes control. At speeds higher than 23 km/h, motor 1 moves towards a smaller angle.
Variable displacement motor bearing flushing
The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors. The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors. The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.
6.2-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot oil is pumped out.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement motors
6.2.1
Variable adjustment motor Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement motor 1 Drive shaft 2 Housing 3 Discharge valve
4 Control unit 5 Regulating unit 6 Proportional valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement motor is flange-mounted on the transfer gear. The inclined axial tapered piston rotary group and the variable displacement are all integrated in the variable displacement motor.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-3 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Drive shaft Snap ring Shaft seal ring U-connection Motor housing Piston Cylinder Control lens Q min adjusting screw Bolt connection Pressure spring Pressure relief valve Discharge valve
6.2-4 o f 8
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Orifice Valve piston Socket-head screw Servo piston seal Servo piston Threaded pin Control pin Regulating spring 1 Connecting plate Spring cup Spring cup Regulating spring 2 Control bushing
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Control piston Proportional magnet Regulation adjusting screw Installation pin O-ring Q max adjusting screw Adjusting washer Pressure spring Centre pin Drive shaft bearing Check valve Valve insert
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
Components of the variable displacement motor
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Variable displacement motors
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-5 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motors
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement motor 1 2 3 4 5 6
Variable adjustment motor Check valves Proportional valve Control piston Servo piston Discharge valve
7 8 9 10 11 M1
Orifice Pressure relief valve Bearing lubrication oil Return oil from discharge valve Housing scavenging connection Servo pressure test connection
The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure. The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The torque at the drive shaft depends on the swivel angle and on the operating pressure in the closed circuit. The speed of the drive shaft depends on the pump flow and on the swivel angle of the variable displacement motor. – As the swivel angle decreases, the speed increases and the potential torque is reduced. – As the swivel angle increases, the torque increases and the potential speed is reduced.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
The regulation and control unit installed in the connecting housing adjusts the swivel angle of the motor. The main electronics (master) control the position of the motor.
6.2-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics Variable displacement motors
Electro-proportional control (EP) Depending on the energisation of the proportional magnet 7, the variable displacement motor is moved to the required angle. When the proportional magnet not energized, the motor is held at the 0° angle by the high pressure acting on the small servo piston face 2. When the proportional magnet is energised, above a certain current the control piston 6 is pushed up against the regulating springs 5 and 4. Highpressure oil flows via the control piston 6 to the large piston face 1 and the variable displacement motor moves out to a wider angle. During regulation, the control piston 3 is pushed down, increasing the tension in the regulating spring 4. This stops the regulation process if the current at the proportional magnet is not further increased. If the current is increased, the force of the two regulating springs is overcome and the motor continues moving to a wider angle. The maximum pivot angle is reached at a current of around 600 mA. The force of the proportional magnet is go great that it overcomes the spring force even at a wide pivot angle. The adjusting screw 8 is used for adjusting the regulating springs 5 (basic setting). Adjust the regulating springs 5 so that the motor is moved to a 25° angle at 600 mA on the proportional magnet. The main electronics (master) control the speed with which the variable displacement motor is moved. This means no swivel restrictors are required.
Cooling by the discharge valve The discharge valve is used in the closed circuit to avoid excessive heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil. When the machine is at rest, the pressure is the same on both faces of the valve piston 4. The two return springs 5 push the valve piston 4 to the centre position. No oil is discharged in this position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the machine moves, the pressure in the duct 6 or 7 increases and moves the valve piston 4 towards one of the return springs 5. The low pressure side is opened and a defined quantity of oil flows via the orifice 1 and the pressure relief valve 2 to the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-7 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motors
6.2.2
Motor scavenging pump Design
Scavenging pump arrangement 1 Motor scavenging pump
2 Brake system gear pump 3 Cooling system gear pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.
1 2 3 4
Flight O-ring Flange Seals
5 6 7 8
Bearing bushings Gears Housing Housing cover
Function description Scavenging from the variable displacement motor housing The pump actively draws up hot oil from the housing of the variable displacement motors and pumps it through the oil cooler to the hydraulic tank.
6.2-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
Motor scavenging pump components
7 Working hydraulics 7.0 Chapter contents 7
Working hydraulics.............................................................. 7.0-1 7.0.1
Working hydraulics - L550, L556..........................................7.0-1
7.0.2
Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580................................7.0-7
7.1
Working hydraulics pump ...............................................................7.1-1
7.2
Control block ...................................................................................7.2-1
7.3
Pilot control unit ..............................................................................7.3-1 7.3.1
Pilot control unit ....................................................................7.3-5
7.3.2
Pilot control solenoid valve ...................................................7.3-9
7.3.3
Pilot control hydro accumulator ..........................................7.3-10
7.3.4
Float position pressure switch ............................................7.3-11
7.4
Ride control.....................................................................................7.4-1 7.4.1
Ride control – L550, L556 ....................................................7.4-1
7.4.2
Ride control – L566, L576, L580 ..........................................7.4-7
7.4.3
Stabilisation module ...........................................................7.4-13
7.4.4
Hydro accumulator unit.......................................................7.4-15
7.4.5
Ride control pressure switch ..............................................7.4-17
7.5
Lift and tilt cylinders ........................................................................7.5-1 7.5.1
Lift cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-1
7.5.2
Tilt cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-3
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.6
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank .................................................................................7.6-1 7.6.1
Filter unit...............................................................................7.6-3
7.6.2
Bleeder filter .........................................................................7.6-8
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics 7.0.1 Valid for:
Working hydraulics - L550, L556 L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics 1 2 3 4
Lift cylinder Tilt cylinder Pilot control unit Hydraulic tank
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
5 Working hydraulics pump 6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump 7 Pilot control solenoid valve
8 9 10 11 12
Pilot control hydro accumulator Compact brake valve Hydro accumulator unit Stabilisation module Control block
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-1 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics
7.0-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31
Hydraulic tank Bleeder filter Return strainer Bypass valve Return suction filter Pre-tension valve Replenishing valve with strainer Travel pump return line Fan motor leak oil Compact brake pump leak oil Return line from oil cooler Shut-off valve Emergency steering pump intake port Replenishing pump Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Steering pump intake port Working hydraulics pump Axial piston pump Return cylinder Restrictor Servo cylinder Power regulator Restrictor Flow controller Steering pump return line Pilot control unit Tilt-out valve
Working hydraulics
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Bucket return-to-dig solenoid Tilt-in valve Lifting valve Lift kick-out solenoid Lowering valve Float position solenoid Float position pressure switch, 26 bar Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar Stabilisation module Ride control spool valve Restrictor check valve Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve Control block assembly Pre-tension valve Primary pressure relief valve LS pressure cut-off Flow control valve Tilt cylinder pressure balance Tilt cylinder spool valve Lift cylinder pressure balance Lift cylinder spool valve Load valve
60 Lifting pressure relief valve 61 Restrictor check valve 62 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 63 Check valve 64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve 65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve 66 Orifice ∅ 1 mm 67 Lift cylinder 68 Tilt cylinder 69 Oil from compact brake valve (housing preheating) 70 Cut-in block 71 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 72 Pilot control solenoid valve 73 Check valve 74 Pilot control hydro accumulator Test connections: P Working hydraulics pump high pressure M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure LS LS signal pressure MX Ride control accumulator pressure
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions: – Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders – Ride control – Float position – Automatic bucket return-to-dig function – Lift kick-out The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction filter 5 back to the hydraulic tank 1. The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to the consumer units independently of load. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-3 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation. See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
Working hydraulics pump The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics currently need. The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the variable displacement pump is never exceeded. See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt cylinder 4. The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump. The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control. See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2. The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2. See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.
7.0-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pilot control unit
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety. The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3 and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-5 o f 1 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics 7.0.2 Valid for:
Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580 L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics 1 2 3 4
Lift cylinder Tilt cylinder Pilot control unit Hydraulic tank
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Working hydraulics pump 6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump 7 Pilot control solenoid valve
8 9 10 11 12
Pilot control hydro accumulator Compact brake valve Hydro accumulator unit Stabilisation module Control block
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-7 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics PowerPoint
Service Manual Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics
7.0-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31
Hydraulic tank Bleeder filter Return strainer Bypass valve Return suction filter Pre-tension valve Replenishing valve with strainer Travel pump return line Fan motor leak oil Compact brake pump leak oil Return line from oil cooler Shut-off valve Emergency steering pump intake port Replenishing pump Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Steering pump intake port Working hydraulics pump Axial piston pump Return cylinder Restrictor Servo cylinder Power regulator Restrictor Flow controller Steering pump return line Pilot control unit Tilt-out valve
Working hydraulics 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Bucket return-to-dig solenoid Tilt-in valve Lifting valve Lift kick-out solenoid Lowering valve Float position solenoid Float position pressure switch, 26 bar Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar Stabilisation module Ride control spool valve Restrictor check valve Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve Control block assembly Pre-tension valve Primary pressure relief valve LS pressure cut-off Flow control valve Tilt cylinder pressure balance Tilt cylinder spool valve Lift cylinder pressure balance Lift cylinder spool valve Load valve
60 Lifting pressure relief valve 61 Restrictor check valve 62 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 63 Check valve 64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve 65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve 66 Orifice ∅ 1 mm 67 Lift cylinder 68 Tilt cylinder 69 Oil from compact brake valve (housing preheating) 70 Cut-in block 71 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 72 Pilot control solenoid valve 73 Check valve 74 Pilot control hydro accumulator Test connections: P Working hydraulics pump high pressure M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure LS LS signal pressure MX Ride control accumulator pressure
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions: – Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders – Ride control – Float position – Automatic bucket return-to-dig function – Lift kick-out The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction filter 5 back to the hydraulic tank 1. The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to the consumer units independently of load. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-9 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation. See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
Working hydraulics pump The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics currently need. The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the variable displacement pump is never exceeded. See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt cylinder 4. The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump. The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control. See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2. The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2. See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.
7.0-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pilot control unit
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety. The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3 and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-11 o f 1 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.1 Working hydraulics pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics pump 1 Drive shaft 2 Pump housing 3 Connection housing
4 Power regulator 5 Flow controller
The working hydraulics pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is driven by the diesel engine via this unit. The working hydraulics pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The rotary group cylinder contains seven pistons in a circular arrangement which can move back and forward.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Two power regulator and a flow controller are attached to the pump housing.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-1 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Drive shaft Shaft seal ring Snap ring Cover Pump housing Swash plate Glide shoe Piston Adjusting pin Q min adjusting screw Pressure spring O-ring Valve housing
7.1-2 o f 8
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Control lever Restrictor Piston with roller Control bushing Sleeve Servo piston Cylindrical roller bearing Control plate Restrictor Connection housing Pressure spring Return piston Return pin
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
O-ring Cylinder Q max adjusting screw Bushing Return plate Disc springs Return ball Swash plate bearing Guide pin Snap ring Cylindrical roller bearing
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Components of the working hydraulics pump
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Components of the regulator unit Valve piston Plug Valve insert Adjusting screw Counter nut Spring cup O-ring Regulating springs Spring cup
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
LS connection Valve piston Regulator housing Adjusting screw Counter nut Spring cup Regulating spring Spring cup Control lever
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Pin Valve piston Spring cup Pressure spring Spring cup O-ring Brace Valve insert
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-3 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics pump 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rotary group Return cylinder Restrictor Servo cylinder Restrictor Power regulator Flow controller
8 9 10 11 M1 LS P
Connection to hydraulic tank Oil to control valve block LS signal from control valve block Intake connection Servo pressure test connection LS signal pressure Working hydraulics pump high pressure
The working hydraulics pump operates in an open circuit. It draws up oil directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow of the of the working hydraulics pump is determined by the angle and speed of the pump. The governors fitted to the working hydraulics pump determine the angle of the pump and therefore the pump flow.
Pump control
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The swash plate 1 of the working hydraulics pump is moved out by the control piston 2. The operating pressure constantly acts in the piston chamber 3. This causes the pump to swivel out.
Working hydraulics pump with control unit
7.1-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
The swash plate is returned to its initial position by the return piston 5. Pressure oil is pumped into the piston chamber 4. The return piston is controlled by the governors fitted on the working hydraulics pump. The working hydraulics pump flow is controlled by the following governors: – Flow controller – Power regulator The operating state of the working hydraulics system governs which governor is currently activated. If the working hydraulics demand only a small amount of oil or none at all, the flow regulator restricts the working hydraulics pump to the required amount. If the set power limit is reached at a certain flow and increasing pressure, the flow regulator reduces the working hydraulics pump flow.
Flow regulation The load sensing system ensures that the working hydraulics pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics currently need.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the working hydraulics are not in use, the oil flow is blocked by the spool valves in the control block and the working hydraulics pump is reduced to minimum flow (leak flow). Connection 2 is depressurised. The high pressure pushes the piston 3 against the pressure springs 1 which determine the standby pressure in the system. The control piston 3 opens the high pressure duct 4 to the duct 5 and the return cylinder reduces the pump to leak flow.
Flow controller when the working hydraulics do not need oil 1 Pressure springs 2 LS connection X 3 Control piston
4 High pressure duct 5 Duct to return cylinder 6 Flow controller
If the working hydraulics need oil, the pressure at the connection 2 increases. The pressure and force of the springs 1 move the control piston 3 against the high pressure. The duct 5 opens to the tank connection 7. The open duct relieves the return cylinder and the pump delivers the required oil quantity.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-5 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
Flow controller when the working hydraulics need oil 1 2 3 4
Pressure springs LS connection X Control piston High pressure duct
5 Duct to return cylinder 6 Flow controller 7 To the pump housing
Pump pressure limitation The maximum operating pressure in the system is limited by the LS pressure cut-off valve 1 in the control block. The LS pressure, which affects the flow regulator 2, is set to a particular value.
LS pressure cut-off in the control block
The power regulator controls the displacement of the working hydraulics pump according to the operating pressure, so that a specific drive power is never exceeded. The power regulator works on the principle of hyperbolic control. It regulates the pump exactly along the preset power curve 1 (flow x high pressure).
7.1-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pump output regulation
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Pump output diagram The operating pressure acts via the ring face 8 of piston on the control lever 11. This produces a variable levering force depending on the position of the control cylinder (flow) and acts on the externally adjustable spring 6. If the force on the lever 11 generated by the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the valve piston 5 is moved. Pressure oil flows through the duct 3 to the return cylinder and the working hydraulics pump displacement is reduced.
Power regulator in the control phase LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Power regulator Pressure spring Duct to return cylinder High pressure duct Valve piston Regulating spring
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
7 8 9 10 11
Tank connection Piston ring face Servo piston Piston with roller Control lever
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-7 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics pump
7.1-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.2 Control block Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the control block 1 2 3 4 5 6
Closing element Lifting pressure relief valve Tilt-in pressure relief valve Pressure balances Main block housing Primary pressure relief valve
7 8 9 10
Tilt-out pressure relief valve Tilt cylinder spool valve Lift cylinder spool valve Float position / ride control solenoid valve 11 LS pressure cut-off
The control block is mounted in the front section. It consists of the main block housing 5 and the closing element 1. Additional segments for a 3rd and 4th control circuit can be installed if needed between the main block housing and the closing element.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The control block contains all the pressure cut-off valves and the valves for the float position and ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-1 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
Components of the control block Main block housing Pre-tension valve Primary pressure relief valve Tilt-out replenishing valve Lowering replenishing valve
6 7 8 9 10
Closing plate Lift cylinder spool valve Counter nut Cap nut Spool valve stroke adjusting screw
11 12 13 14
Cover Pressure spring Spring cup Tilt cylinder spool valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5
Components of the control block
7.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Cross section A-A of control block with spool valves for lift cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Cross section B-B of control block with spool valves for tilt cylinder 1 2 3 4 5
Main block housing Pressure spring Cover Restrictor check valve Spool valve stroke adjusting screw 6 Cap nut
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
7 Counter nut 8 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 9 Control piston 10 Valve insert 11 Main piston 12 Pressure balance
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
13 14 15 16 17 18
Lifting pressure relief valve Spring cup Lift cylinder spool valve Tilt-out pressure relief valve Tilt-in pressure relief valve Tilt cylinder spool valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-3 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the control valve block Primary pressure relief valve LS pressure cut-off Flow control valve Tilt cylinder load valve Tilt cylinder pressure balance Tilt cylinder spool valve Restrictor check valve Lift cylinder load valve Lift cylinder pressure balance Lift cylinder spool valve Lifting pressure relief valve Float position / ride control solenoid valve 13 Replenishing valve
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Tilt-in pressure relief valve Tilt-out pressure relief valve Pre-tension valve Orifice ∅ 1.0 mm Lift cylinder connection Housing preheating connection Tank connection from stabilization module Hydraulic tank connection LS connection Working hydraulics pump connection Tilt cylinder connection
The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 10 and the tilt cylinder 6. The spool valves are supplied with oil by the pilot control unit. The restrictor check valves 7 in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the individual functions. The LS control and the pressure balances 5 and 9 divide the oil among the individual consumer units. The float position or ride control function is activated by the solenoid valve 12. Secondary pressure relief valves for each function protect the working attachment, cylinders, hose lines and the control block from overload. At the same time, the secondary pressure relief valves act as replenishing valves. The LS pressure cut-off 2 protects the working hydraulics pump from excess pressure.
7.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Working hydraulics in active state The spool valves in the control block are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit.
Control block in active state When the tilt-in function is actuated, oil flows from the pilot control unit to the connection a1. This pushes the spool valve 2 to the left. The spool valve 2 opens the pump duct P to the pressure balance 3 via the control notches 1. If the pump pressure exceeds the pressure at the tilt cylinder, the pressure balance in the load valve opens and oil flows through the connection A1 to the tilt cylinder. The oil returning from the tilt cylinder flows through the connection B1 and the spool valve to the tank channel T.
Working hydraulics in float position
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
In the float position, the working attachment lies on the ground under its own weight. The lift arms can move up and down freely to compensate for uneven ground.
Control block in float position L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-5 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
At the maximum deflection of the LH control lever for lowering the lift arms, there is maximum control pressure at the connection b2. This pushes the spool valve 1 all the way to the right against the regulating spring 3 and the limit screw 2. When the spool valve 1 is in this position, the base end B2 of the lift cylinder is connected to the tank channel T.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position solenoid valve 4 is also energised. The rod ends of the lift cylinder A2 is also connected to the tank duct T. The lift arms can now move up and down freely.
7.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.3 Pilot control unit Design
Main components of the pilot control unit 3 Pilot control unit 4 Variable displacement pump with replenishing pump 5 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
6 7 8 9
Pilot control solenoid valve Solenoid valve block Pilot control hydro accumulator Control block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 Float position pressure switch, 26 bar 2 Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-1 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit 1 2 3 4
Hydraulic tank Replenishing pump Solenoid valve block Overspeed protection solenoid valve 5 Pilot control solenoid valve 6 Check valve 7 Pilot control hydro accumulator
8 Float position pressure switch, 26 bar 9 Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar 10 Pilot control unit 11 Tilt-in valve 12 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid 13 Tilt-out valve
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Lifting valve Lift kick-out solenoid Lowering valve Float position solenoid Control block assembly Lift cylinder spool valve Tilt cylinder spool valve Restrictor valve
The pilot control solenoid valve 5 is installed for the safety of the machine. The working hydraulics lockout button must be activated to prevent accidental movements of the working attachment during maintenance, road travel and when the driver leaves the machine. The operation of the working hydraulics is disabled. The pilot control hydro accumulator 7 with check valve 6 on the solenoid valve block 3 allows the lift arms to be lowered or the bucket to be tilted out, even when the engine is not running. The bucket return-to-dig, lift kick-out and float position functions are controlled via retaining solenoids in the pilot control unit and proximity switches.
7.3-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool valves are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 10. The required control oil is taken from the replenishing pump 2 of the travel hydraulics. The replenishing pressure relief valve limits the pilot control pressure to the specified level.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Pilot control unit The pilot control unit controls the spool valves in the control block. The control pressure increases smoothly according to the deflection of the lever. The pilot control unit contains retaining solenoids for the bucket return-to-dig, lift kick-out and float position functions. These solenoids hold the control lever in the maximum position until the solenoid current is switched off. See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.
Variable displacement pump with replenishing pump The replenishing pump 1 is part of the variable displacement pump 2 of the travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump delivers oil for the following components and functions: – Travel hydraulics control circuit – Replenishing oil in the closed circuit – Pilot control of the working hydraulics – Overspeed protection (rear axle braking function) The maximum pressure of the replenishing pump is limited by the replenishing pressure relief valve. The design and functions are described in the sections on the travel hydraulics and the variable displacement pump.
Solenoid valve block The solenoid valve block 4 contains the pilot control solenoid valve 2 and the pilot control hydro accumulator 1. When the machine is started or when the starter switch is in position 1, the pilot control solenoid valve is activated automatically. Control oil flows to the pilot control unit and the working hydraulics can be operated. The hydro accumulator 1 and check valve (starter switch in position 1) allow the lift arms to be lowered and the working attachment to be tilted out, even when the engine is not running. The working hydraulics lockout button deactivates the pilot control solenoid valve. The P connection in the pilot control unit is relieved towards the hydraulic tank and the working hydraulics cannot be used. See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit solenoid valve.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Control block The control block contains the spool valves for the tilt cylinder 1 and the lift cylinder 2. The spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders are supplied with oil by the pilot control unit. The restrictors in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the individual functions. The float position/ride control solenoid valve relieves the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated. See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-3 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics pump
7.3-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.3.1
Pilot control unit Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the pilot control device 1 Housing 2 Control valve 3 Electromagnetic locking
4 Control plate 5 Control lever
The pilot control device is fitted in the operating panel to the right of the driver's seat.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
An additional pilot control unit for special functions (3rd control circuit) can be fitted on the side of the existing pilot control unit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-5 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
7.3-6 o f 1 2
Pressure spring Spring sleeve O-ring Brass bushing Sealing ring O-ring Plastic bushing O-ring Tappet guide Retaining ring Electromagnet with sockets Threaded rod with universal joint Ring Tappet with universal joint Disc Lock nut Connector piece Counter nut Control lever Control plate
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Shim Adjusting bushing Nut Counter nut Adjusting screw Snap ring Tappet Guide bushing Tappet Retaining plates Spring cup Return spring Regulating spring Regulating piston Plug Bore hole Housing Connection 2 Connection 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Components of the pilot control device
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit 1 2 3 4
Lowering valve Lifting valve Tilt-out valve Tilt-in valve
5 Float position solenoid 6 Lift kick-out solenoid 7 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
The pilot control device activates the pistons in the control block hydraulically. It works on the basis of directly controlled pressure relief valves. When the control lever is moved, it supplies oil to the appropriate connection. The pressure regulation of the valves in the pilot control device depends on: – The position of the control lever – The properties of the individual regulating springs The retaining solenoids allow each function to be electromagnetically locked. Its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Idle state
In the idle state, the control lever is held in the zero position by the return spring 2. The connection 6 is connected via the hole 5 to the tank connection T.
Control valve in idle state / Control valve in active state Regulating phase
When the control lever is moved, the tappet 7 pushes against the return spring 8 and the regulating spring 9. The regulating spring 9 pushes down the regulating piston 10 and closes the connection of the port 12 and the tank connection T. At the same time, the connection 12 is connected via the hole 11 to the connection P. The control phase begins as soon as the force of the regulating spring 9 and the force of the hydraulic pressure at the connection 12 are equal. The regulating piston 10 is in equilibrium. The interaction of the regulating piston 10 and the regulating spring 9 means that the pressure at the connection 12 is proportional to the stroke of the
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-7 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
tappet 7 and therefore to the position of the control lever. The pressure regulation which is proportional to the position of the control lever allows the spool valves in the control block to be moved proportionally to the pressure.
Electromagnetic locking The following functions have electromagnetic locking: – Lift kick-out – Bucket return-to-dig – Float position The pressure spring 1 is attached under the tappet 3 and the spring sleeve 2. Just before the end of the stroke of the tappet and the control lever, the operator must apply additional force to tension the pressure spring 1. This shows the operator that the control lever is at its end position / maximum deflection. At the end position (maximum deflection) of the control lever, the ring 5 comes into contact with the anchor magnet 4. When the solenoid is activated, its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Unlocking takes place automatically by switching off the solenoid current using the proximity switch or by pulling back the control lever.
7.3-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.3.2
Pilot control solenoid valve Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Solenoid valves in the cut-in block 1 Pilot control hydro accumulator 2 Pilot control solenoid valve
3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The cut-in block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Function description Basic function The cut-in block includes the following components in a single housing: – Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics) – Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
Pilot control solenoid valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the engine is running or when the starter switch is in position 1, the pilot control solenoid valve 5 is activated automatically. Control oil flows to the pilot control unit 1 and the working hydraulics can be operated.
Hydraulic plan of the solenoid valve block 1 2 3 4
Pilot control unit Pilot control hydro accumulator Solenoid valve block assembly Check valve
5 Pilot control solenoid valve 6 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 7 Replenishing pump
The on-road travel button deactivates the pilot control solenoid valve 5. The P connection in the pilot control unit 1 is relieved towards the hydraulic tank and the working hydraulics cannot be used. The pilot control hydro accumulator 3 with check valve 4 allows the working hydraulics to be used even when the engine is not running (starter switch in position 1). The lift arms can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-9 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
7.3.3
Pilot control hydro accumulator (ID 7622 448)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug 2 Membrane
3 Closing head 4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2, which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Function description Basic function
It has the following applications: – To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride control system or steering attenuation. – As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the brake system.
Storing pressure for the pilot control The hydro accumulator 1 allows the working hydraulics to be used even when the engine is not running (starter switch in position 1). The lift arms can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
7.3-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and supply it when needed.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Working hydraulics pump
7.3.4
Float position pressure switch (ID 6905 869)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The float position pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in the control line for lowering the lift arms.
Function description Basic function The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as “normally open”.
Activating the float position function LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position pressure switch activates the float position function.
Layout of pressure switches and solenoid valve 1 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 2 Float position pressure switch
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Ride control pressure switch 4 Float position retaining solenoid
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-11 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Working hydraulics pump
When the float position pressure switch 2 reaches a set pilot control pressure, its electrical contact closes. If the float position/ride control button is switched on, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control valve block) and the float position retaining solenoid 4 (in the pilot control unit) are activated. When float position retaining solenoid 4 is activated, its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control valve block) relieves the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The working attachment lies on the ground under its own weight.
7.3-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
7.4 Ride control 7.4.1 Valid for:
Ride control – L550, L556 L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Design
Main components of the ride control system 1 Lift cylinder 2 Control block
3 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
4 Stabilisation module 5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2 are installed in the front section.
Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety. The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-1 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system Stabilisation module Ride control spool valve Restrictor check valve Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve Pilot control unit
14 Lowering valve 15 Lifting valve 16 Float position pressure switch, 26 bar 17 Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar 18 Lift cylinder
19 Control block assembly 20 Lift cylinder spool valve 21 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 22 Lifting pressure relief valve 23 Replenishing valve 24 Tilt cylinder spool valve
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders. The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This allows the lift arms to move up freely.
7.4-2 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
Stabilisation module The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload. If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control. The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high. This protects the hydro accumulator from overload. See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.
Hydro accumulator unit The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload. If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators. See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 2 and the tilt cylinder 1. The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the stabilisation module. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated. See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
Ride control pressure switch The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride control can be activated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-3 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Ride control deactivated When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position. Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load pressure of the working attachment. If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position. The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated 4 5 6 7
Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve
8 Lift cylinder 9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 Stabilisation module 2 Ride control spool valve 3 Restrictor check valve
7.4-4 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
Ride control activated Ride control can only be activated when: – The ride control button is activated – The travel speed is above 9.1 km/h (adjustable) – The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right, fully opening the connection to the hydro accumulators. The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank. If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated 1 Stabilisation module 2 Ride control spool valve 3 Restrictor check valve
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
4 5 6 7
Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve
8 Lift cylinder 9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-5 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-6 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
7.4.2 Valid for:
Ride control – L566, L576, L580 L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Design
Main components of the ride control system 1 Lift cylinder 2 Control block
3 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
4 Stabilisation module 5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2 are installed in the front section.
Function description Basic function LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety. The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-7 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system Stabilisation module Ride control spool valve Restrictor check valve Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve Pilot control unit
9 Lowering valve 10 Lifting valve 11 Float position pressure switch, 26 bar 12 Ride control pressure switch, 10 bar 13 Lift cylinder
20 Control block assembly 21 Lift cylinder spool valve 22 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 23 Lifting pressure relief valve 24 Replenishing valve 25 Tilt cylinder spool valve
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders. The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This allows the lift arms to move up freely.
7.4-8 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
Stabilisation module The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload. If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control. The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high. This protects the hydro accumulator from overload. See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.
Hydro accumulator unit The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload. If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators. See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 2 and the tilt cylinder 1. The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the stabilisation module. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated. See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
Ride control pressure switch The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride control can be activated.
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-9 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Ride control deactivated When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position. Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load pressure of the working attachment. If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position. The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated 4 5 6 7
Ride control solenoid valve Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve
8 Lift cylinder 9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 Stabilisation module 2 Ride control spool valve 3 Restrictor check valve
7.4-10 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
Ride control activated Ride control can only be activated when: – The ride control button is activated – At a travel speed above 9.1 km/h (adjustable) – The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised. The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right, fully opening the connection to the hydro accumulators. The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank. If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated 1 2 3 4
Stabilisation module Ride control spool valve Restrictor check valve Ride control solenoid valve
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 6 7 8
Safety valve Hydro accumulator unit Check valve Lift cylinder
9 Float position / ride control solenoid valve 10 Lift cylinder spool valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-11 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-12 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
7.4.3
Stabilisation module Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the stabilisation module 1 2 3 4
Housing Safety valve Ride control piston Lift cylinder connection
5 Hydro accumulator connection 6 Tank connection 7 Ride control solenoid valve
The stabilisation module is mounted under the steering cylinder in the front section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
It consists of the housing 1, which contains the safety valve 2 and the ride control piston 3. The ride control solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-13 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Components of the stabilisation module 1 2 3 4 5
Plug Socket-head screw Spacer bushing Spring cup Regulating spring
6 7 8 9
Regulating spring Ride control spool valve Regulating piston Ride control solenoid valve
10 11 12 13
Outer restrictor screw Restrictor check valve Inner restrictor screw Housing
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from excessive pressure peaks.
Hydraulic diagram of the stabilisation module
7.4-14 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
7.4.4
Hydro accumulator unit Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator unit 1 Housing 2 Stabilisation module connection
3 Hydro accumulator
The hydro accumulator unit is mounted in the front section. The hydro accumulators are mounted on the housing. The housing is connected to the stabilisation module.
L550, L556 L566, L576, L580 Hydro accumulator unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Function description Function The hydro accumulator unit is connected via the stabilisation module to the base end of the lift cylinders. If the maximum pressure is reached, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. This protects the hydro accumulator from overload. The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-15 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug 2 Nitrogen filling 3 Oil filling
4 Membrane 5 Closing head 6 Accumulator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The hydro accumulators have a small amount of oil in them to protect the membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such as when driving over rough ground, the oil prevents the membrane from hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
7.4-16 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Ride control
7.4.5
Ride control pressure switch (ID 6905 893)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The ride control pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in the control line for lowering the lift arms.
Function description Basic function The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as "normally closed".
Deactivating the ride control function The ride control pressure switch prevents ride control from being activated at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the contact in the ride control pressure switch is closed. This means that ride control can be activated. When the float position or lift arm lowering function is activated, the pressure on the ride control pressure switch increases and the electrical contact in the switch opens. This prevents ride control from being activated at the same time.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-17 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-18 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Lift and tilt cylinders
7.5 Lift and tilt cylinders 7.5.1
Lift cylinder Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the lift cylinder 1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 2 Piston rod bearing 3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod 5 Piston 6 Base-end cylinder bearing
7 Hex screw
The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3. The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 is forked. The base-end cylinder bearing 6 is a lug with a bearing bushing. The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3. The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
Function description Extension and retraction The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end. The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating pressure and the active surfaces. When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring face is active. This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting. The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when retracting than extending.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.5-1 o f 4
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Lift and tilt cylinders
Piston rod guide The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston rod bearing.
Sealing The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the piston rod.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the pressure chambers inside and out.
7.5-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Lift and tilt cylinders
7.5.2
Tilt cylinder Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the tilt cylinder 1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 2 Piston rod bearing 3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod 5 Piston 6 Base-end cylinder bearing
7 Hex screw
The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3. The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 6 form a lug with a bearing bushing. The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3. The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.5-3 o f 4
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Lift and tilt cylinders
Function description Extension and retraction The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end. The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating pressure and the active surfaces. When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring face is active. This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting. The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when retracting than extending.
Piston rod guide The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston rod bearing.
Sealing The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the piston rod.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the pressure chambers inside and out.
7.5-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Hydraulic tank
7.6 Hydraulic tank Design
Main components of the hydraulic tank 1 Shut-off valve 2 Working hydraulics pump intake port 3 Emergency steering pump intake port 4 Steering pump intake port 5 Suction line from replenishing pump
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Steel container Gear pump intake connection Oil level sight glass Return and suction filter Return strainer Bleeder filter Fixing panels for air filter and exhaust system
The hydraulic tank is fitted on the rear section. The fittings for fastening the exhaust and air filter are on the steel part of the hydraulic tank.
Function description Basic function LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The hydraulic tank contains the oil required by the hydraulic system. It supplies oil to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics, brake system and steering system. When the machine moves, a plate inside the hydraulic tank calms the hydraulic oil. This moderating plate divides the hydraulic tank into a return chamber and an intake chamber.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-1 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
Filter unit The filter unit consists of the following components: 1 Return suction filter 2 Return strainer 3 Bleeder filter 4 Suction line from replenishing pump The return suction filter 1 filters the oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics. The oil flows from the inside outwards through the filter. At the same time the filter acts as a suction filter for the replenishing pump of the hydrostatic travel drive. The replenishing pump draws up the filtered oil via the connection 4. To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must be exchanged with the atmosphere outside. The bleeder filter 2 provides the connection to the outside. To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through a fine filter. A valve with a spring provides a slight pressure inside the hydraulic tank. The return strainer 3 filters some of the oil returning from the entire hydraulic system. The filtered oil then flows back to the hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the filter unit and bleeder filter.
7.6-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Hydraulic tank
7.6.1
Filter unit Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components and connections of the filter unit 13 Return and suction filter 14 Integrated bypass valve 15 Bleeder filter
16 Return strainer 17 Filter housing 18 Suction line from replenishing pump
The filter unit is contained in the hydraulic tank. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The steel vessel is sealed with an O-ring.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-3 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
Components of the filter unit Filter housing Return suction filter cover Return strainer cover Duct to bypass valve Bleeder filter
6 7 8 9 10
Bypass valve Pre-tension valve Suction line from replenishing pump Replenishing strainer Return strainer
11 12 13 14 15
Return pipe Replenishing valve Filter element Magnetic rod Filter casing LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5
7.6-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Hydraulic tank
Function description Basic function The return suction filter 1 acts as a return filter for oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics, and as a suction filter for the replenishing pump of the hydrostatic travel drive. Some of oil flowing back from the various consumer units is pumped through the return suction filter 3 back to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 2 prevents inadmissible pressure changes inside the hydraulic tank. This means air can be exchanged with the atmosphere outside. Connections on the filter unit: Compact brake pump leak oil Fan motor leak oil Suction line from replenishing pump Working hydraulics pump leak oil Solenoid valve block return line Working hydraulics pump leak oil Return line from control block Return line from oil cooler
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Basic function of the filter unit 1 Control block oil cooler connection 2 Magnetic rod 3 Return and suction filter L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 Replenishing strainer 7 Pre-tension valve 8 Return strainer
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-5 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
4 Lower chamber 5 Suction line from replenishing pump
9 Return pipe
The oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics is pumped through the connection 1 to the return suction filter 3. The oil flows from the inside outwards through the return suction filter 3 and is cleaned. The magnetic rod 2 attracts larger metal particles from the oil flowing past. This also increases the lifetime of the filter. The outside of the filter is connected to intake connection 5 of the replenishing pump. More oil flows from the working and travel hydraulics to the return and suction filter than is drawn up by the replenishing pump. The excess oil flows through the pre-tension valve 7 to the hydraulic tank.
Oil supply to the replenishing pump The returning oil flows from the inside outwards through the return suction filter 1. The replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics draws up some of the oil from the lower chamber 2 via the intake connection 4. The pre-tension valve 3 preloads the intake connection 4 of the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The excess oil flows through the pretension valve 3 to the hydraulic tank.
Replenishing pump oil supply 1 Return and suction filter 2 Lower chamber 3 Pre-tension valve
Replenishing function 4 Suction line from replenishing pump 5 Replenishing strainer 6 Replenishing valve
If there is insufficient oil to supply the replenishing pump, it can draw up oil from the hydraulic tank. Oil flows through the replenishing strainer 5 and the replenishing valve 6 to the intake connection 4 of the replenishing pump. There may be too little oil in the filter element, for instance after it is changed.
7.6-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The pressure of the intake connection 4 allows the replenishing to draw up oil more easily for cold starts. This increases the pressure in the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Hydraulic tank
Bypass valve for pressure relief The bypass valve 4 prevents excess pressure in the return system. Excess pressure can arise if the filter element 1 is dirty or if the oil is not sufficiently viscous. If a certain pressure is reached, the bypass valve 4 opens. The oil then flows through the duct 3, the bypass valve 4 and the return strainer 5 to the hydraulic tank.
Return suction filter with bypass valve and return strainer 1 Return and suction filter 2 Connections to the filter unit: 3 Duct to bypass valve
4 Bypass valve 5 Return strainer
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The return strainer 5 catches dirt particles. This prevents soiling of the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-7 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
7.6.2
Bleeder filter Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the bleeder filter 1 2 3 4 5
Filter housing Inlet valve Pressure spring Outlet valve Pressure spring
6 7 8 9
O-ring Fine filter O-ring Inner housing
The bleeder filter consists of an oil-resistant, corrosion-proof plastic housing in which a filter element folded in a star shape is inserted. The bleeder filter contains an inlet and outlet valve.
Function description Function
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through the fine filter. The spring-loaded outlet valve 2 and inlet valve 3 reduce the exchange of air. This minimises the oil contamination and increases the service life of the fine filter element.
7.6-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics Hydraulic tank
Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by increased oil temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders retracting. At a certain excess pressure, the outlet valve 2 opens. This allows air to escape through the fine filter 1 and the opening 3.
Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by decreasing oil temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders extending.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
At a certain low pressure, the inlet valve 4 opens. This allows air to flow in through the opening 3 and the fine filter 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-9 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic tank
7.6-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 Steering System 8.0 Chapter contents 8
Steering System.................................................................. 8.0-1 8.0
Steering system ..............................................................................8.0-1
8.1
Steering pump ................................................................................8.1-1
8.2
Servostat.........................................................................................8.2-1
8.3
Steering cylinder .............................................................................8.3-1 8.3.1
8.4
Steering damper hydro accumulator ....................................8.3-3 Emergency steering........................................................................8.4-1 Emergency steering pump ...................................................8.4-5
8.4.2
Emergency steering pressure switch ...................................8.4-7
8.4.3
Emergency steering check pressure switch .........................8.4-8
8.4.4
Valve block ...........................................................................8.4-9
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
8.4.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Steering System
8.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
8.0 Steering system
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Design
Main components of the steering system 1 2 3 4
Servostat Oil cooler Collector pipe Hydraulic tank
5 6 7 8
Variable displacement pump Valve block Emergency steering pump Left steering cylinder
9 Steering damper hydro accumulator 10 Right steering cylinder
The machine has articulated steering. Two steering cylinders move the front section and the rear section to each other using the articulated joint.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-1 o f 4
Steering System PowerPoint
Service Manual Function description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the steering system
8.0-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Steering System
Hydraulic tank Bleeder filter Return strainer Bypass valve Return suction filter Pre-tension valve Replenishing valve with strainer Travel pump return line Fan motor leak oil Compact brake pump leak oil Solenoid valve block leak oil Return line from oil cooler Shut-off valve Working hydraulics pump intake port 15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 16 Right steering cylinder 17 Right steering damper hydro accumulator
18 Left steering cylinder 19 Left steering damper hydro accumulator 20 Variable displacement pump 21 Axial piston pump 22 Servo cylinder 23 Return cylinder 24 Restrictor 25 Restrictor 26 Pressure cut-off 27 Flow controller 28 Working hydraulics pump return line 30 Servostat 31 Left replenishing valve 32 Left pressure relief valve 33 Right replenishing valve 34 Right pressure relief valve 35 Metering pump
36 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52
Valve slider Valve block Check valve Check valve Variable displacement pump pressure switch B3 Emergency steering pump pressure switch B3a Emergency steering pump Electric motor Gear pump Pressure relief valve Oil cooler Collector pipe Bypass valve
Test connections: P High pressure / steering pump M High pressure / steering pump or emergency steering pump
The steering system operates in an open circuit. The variable displacement pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it through the valve block 40 to the servostat 30. The servostat supplies oil to the two steering cylinders when the steering wheel is moved. The load sensing system ensures that the pump 20 only pumps as much oil as is actually required. The emergency steering system allows steering movement if the variable displacement pump fails. The emergency steering pump 45 delivers oil via the valve block 40 to the servostat 30. The hydro accumulators 17 and 18 on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front and rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the steering system. The variable displacement pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. The returning oil from the servostat is pumped back through the oil cooler and the connection 3 via the return suction filter 4 to the hydraulic tank. Leak oil from the variable displacement pump is directed through the connection 2 via the return strainer 5 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 6 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
Variable displacement pump The pump draws up oil directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the valve block to the servostat. The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump only provides as much oil as the steering system currently needs. The pressure cut-off valve 2 limits the maximum pressure of the pump. See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-3 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual Valve block The valve block directs the oil from the variable displacement pump or the emergency steering pump to the servostat. The emergency steering pressure switch 1 monitors the pressure of the variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the emergency steering pressure switch 1 is too low, the emergency steering pump is automatically activated. This can happen if the diesel engine shuts down or if the variable displacement pump fails. The check valves 2 and 3 prevent the oil from flowing back to the pumps. See the detailed description in the section on the valve block.
Servostat The servostat is connected to the steering column. The steering wheel actuates the metering pump and valve slider in the servostat, causing the steering system to move. If the steering wheel is moved quickly, the flow booster system pumps some of the oil via the spool directly to the steering cylinders. This facilitates fast steering on rough terrain. When the steering wheel is moved slowly, the flow booster is not activated. All the oil is pumped through the spool and the metering pump to the steering cylinders. This facilitates sensitive steering on roads. Two pressure relief valves protect the steering cylinder and servostat from excessive pressure peaks. See the detailed description in the section on the servostat.
Steering cylinder The steering cylinders are connected to the front and rear sections. The servostat supplies oil to the steering cylinders during steering. The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front and rear sections from bumping other at full articulation. See the detailed description in the section on the steering cylinder.
The emergency steering function allows the steering system to be operated if the engine or the variable displacement pump fails. The emergency steering pump is activated by the main electronics (master). See the detailed description in the section on emergency steering.
Emergency steering pump The gear pump 4 of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric motor 2. The electric motor is switched on when necessary via the relay 1. In emergency steering mode the emergency steering pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the valve block to the servostat. The pressure relief valve 3 protects the pump from excess pressure. See the detailed description in the section on the emergency steering pump.
8.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Emergency steering function
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
8.1 Steering pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering pump 1 Drive shaft 2 Pump housing 3 Flow controller
4 Pressure cut-off 5 Connection housing
The steering pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The steering pump is flange-mounted to the working hydraulics pump and is driven by the diesel engine via this unit.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The pressure and flow controller attached to pump housing affect the control unit of the pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-1 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump Drive shaft Snap ring Shaft seal ring Pump housing Bearing casing Swash plate Return plate Piston
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Cylinder Control plate O-ring P connection Valve housing Shim Tapered roller bearing Shim
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Intake connection Snap ring Support ring Pressure spring Support ring Glide shoe Return ball Tapered roller bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump Ball journal Glide shoe Servo piston Regulating spring Piston guide
6 7 8 9 10
Test connection P Plug Pressure cut-off Flow controller LS connection
11 12 13 14
Guide piston Return cylinder Glide shoe Ball journal
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-3 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump 1 2 3 4 5 6
Rotary group Servo cylinder Return cylinder Restrictor Restrictor Pressure cut-off
7 8 9 10 11 12
Flow controller High pressure test connection Oil to servostat LS signal from servostat Return line to hydraulic tank Intake connection
The steering pump operates in an open circuit. During operation, the pump delivers oil from the hydraulic tank through the valve block to the steering. The displacement of the steering pump is proportional to the input speed and the variable cylinder volume. The pressure cut-off valve 6 and flow controller 7 attached to pump housing affect the control unit of the pump. The pump control unit pivots the swash plate out of the zero position. When the swash plate pivots out, the piston stroke in the rotary group 1 increases and the pump starts delivering oil.
Control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The control unit continuously regulates the steering pump flow. The angle of the swash plate 3 is changed from 0° towards 15° and vice versa.
Control unit with return cylinder and actuating cylinder
8.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
The system pressure constantly acts on the actuating cylinder 1. The actuating cylinder 1 pushes the swash plate 3 towards a wider angle and pump delivers oil. The return cylinder 2 moves the swash plate 3 against the actuating cylinder 1 to a smaller angle. The effective piston face of the return cylinder 2 is larger than that of the actuating cylinder 1. The oil pressure acting on the return cylinder 2 is controlled by the flow controller or pressure cut-off valve. In the pump control range, the oil pressure on the return cylinder is just enough to keep the forces of the actuating and return cylinders in equilibrium. This means the pump can maintain a specific pivot angle and pump a corresponding amount of oil.
Flow controller (load sensing) The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump only provides as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the steering system currently needs. If the steering system needs oil, the load pressure at the connection 4 increases. The pressure and the force of the springs 5 push the piston 2 against the pump pressure. The duct A opens to the tank connection T. The open duct A relieves the return cylinder 3 and the pump delivers the required quantity of oil.
Flow controller during steering (pump delivers oil) Flow controller Valve piston Plug Connection X Pressure springs
6 7 T A P
Adjusting screw Pressure cut-off Pump housing return line To the return cylinder High pressure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-5 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
If the steering wheel is not moved, the load pressure at the connection 4 decreases. The pump pressure moves the piston 2 against the springs 5. The piston 2 opens the pump pressure duct P to the duct A and the return cylinder regulates the pump to the minimum flow.
Flow controller with no steering movement (pump does not deliver oil)
Pressure cut-off When the maximum operating pressure in the system has been reached, the pump moves back to the smallest angle and only delivers leak oil. The maximum operating pressure remains constant. When the pump reaches its maximum operating pressure, the piston 3 in the pressure cut-off valve 1 moves against the spring 4. This opens the duct A and pressure oil flows to the return cylinder.
Pressure cut-off valve at maximum system pressure 1 2 3 4
8.1-6 o f 6
Pressure cut-off Effective face Valve piston Pressure spring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5 P A T
Adjusting screw High pressure To the return cylinder Pump housing return line
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The return cylinder moves the swash plate and regulates the pump to the smallest angle.
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
8.2 Servostat Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the servostat 1 Left pressure relief valve 2 Inner rotary slide valve with teeth
3 Right pressure relief valve 4 Housing with spool valve 5 Metering pump
The servostat is fastened on rubber fittings at the front under the cab. The rubber fittings prevent noise from the hydraulics from being transferred to the steel cab frame.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The steering column meshes with the teeth of the internal rotary slider 2. The internal rotary slider in the servostat is actuated by the steering wheel and the steering column.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-1 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Servostat
Components of the servostat Closing plate Metering pump Internal gear O-ring Intermediate flange Outer valve sleeve
7 8 9 10 11 12
Internal rotary slider Flight Actuator journal Housing Needle bearing Guide ring
13 14 15 16 17
Shaft seal ring Right pressure relief valve Leaf springs Left pressure relief valve Replenishing valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6
8.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the servostat 1 2 3 4 5 6
Left replenishing valve Left pressure relief valve Right replenishing valve Right pressure relief valve Metering pump Valve slider
7 8 9 10 11
Return line to hydraulic tank Steering cylinder connection Steering cylinder connection Oil from valve block Load sensing signal
When it is actuated, the servostat directs oil from the variable displacement pump to the steering cylinders. The oil supply to the steering cylinders is precisely metered according to the speed of the steering wheel. When the steering wheel is turned, the position of the internal rotary slider is turned in relation to the outer valve sleeve. This opens the valve, allowing a certain amount of oil to flow through the metering pump to the steering cylinder.
Flow booster
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The flow booster allows the small servostat to supply oil from two cylinders. A specific portion of the flow is directed through the metering pump, and another portion is pumped through the spool directly to the cylinders.
Diagram of flow booster 1 Boost ratio 2 Turns of steering wheel
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Oil via the metering pump 4 Oil via the spool
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-3 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Servostat
If the steering wheel is moved slowly, the entire flow is directed through the metering pump 3. The oil flowing to the steering system depends on the size of the metering pump. This allows very sensitive steering for travelling on roads. At faster steering speeds of more than 10 turns of the steering wheel per minute, additional holes in the spool open. Some of the oil flows through the metering pump 3, and more oil flows the spool 4 directly to the cylinders. The volumetric flow ration is 1:1.6. This allows very fast steering for rough terrain.
Flow regulation (load sensing) Load sensing ensures that the variable displacement pump only supplies the amount of oil currently needed by the steering system. The servostat reports the required amount of oil via the LS connection to the variable displacement pump. Steering system in inactive state
When the steering is not actuated, the duct P on the variable displacement pump 3 is blocked. The LS connection for controlling the pump is relieved via the spool to the tank connection T. The LS depressurised connection adjusts the variable displacement pump minimum flow.
Steering system in active state
When the steering is actuated, the spool 2 is moved. The connection P is connected to the connection LS and to the steering cylinder. The increase pressure at the LS connection causes the flow controller 4 to regulate the variable displacement pump 3 to the required oil quantity.
Pressure cut-off The pressure relief valves prevent excessive pressure peaks in the steering system. Pressure peaks can be caused by sudden loads while driving. Depending on the direction of the load, either the pressure relief valve 1 on the left steering cylinder or the pressure relief valve 2 for the right cylinder opens.
8.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement pump 3 is adjusted until there is a specific pressure difference between the connection P and the connection LS.
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
When the set pressure is reached, the valve cone 6 opens against the pressure spring 4. Oil flows from the consumer unit 7 to the tank connection 5. The opening pressure of the pressure relief valve can be set using the adjusting screw 3.
Replenishing function The servostat has two replenishing valves: one for steering to the left and one for steering to the right.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The replenishing valves prevent vacuums from forming in the steering cylinder under certain operating conditions. Oil flows through the check valve 2 from the tank duct 1 to the steering cylinder (duct 3). The pin 4 prevents the check valve 2 from moving too far from the valve insert.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-5 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Servostat
8.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System Steering cylinder
8.3 Steering cylinder Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering cylinder 1 Rod-end cylinder bearing 2 Piston rod bearing 3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod 5 Piston 6 Damper bushing
7 Base-end cylinder bearing
The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3. The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 7 form a lug with a swivel bearing. The piston rod bearing 2 is screwed into the cylinder tube 3. The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings.
Function description LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Extension and retraction The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end. The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating pressure and the active surfaces. When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring face is active. This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting. The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when retracting than extending.
Piston rod guide The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston rod bearing. L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.3-1 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering cylinder
Sealing The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the piston rod. The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the pressure chambers inside and out.
Stroke end shock absorber
Stroke end shock absorber 1 Piston rod 2 Piston
3 Damper bushing 4 Damper notch
The piston rod is slowed down before it is fully retracted. Just before the piston 2 hits the cylinder base, it enters the damper bushing 3 in the cylinder base.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The oil can only flow through the damper notch 4. This decreases the flow diameter for the displaced oil and the speed of the piston is reduced.
8.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System Steering cylinder
8.3.1
Steering damper hydro accumulator Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug for test and filling valve 2 Membrane
3 Closing head 4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2, which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Function description Basic function The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and supply it when needed.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
It has the following applications: – To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride control system or steering attenuation. – As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the brake system.
Steering damper The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements when changing direction quickly. Also, the damping effect absorbs external influences on the machine, for example if the working attachment is driven against an obstacle.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.3-3 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering cylinder
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug for test and filling valve 2 Nitrogen filling 3 Oil filling
4 Membrane 5 Closing head 6 Accumulator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The hydro accumulator has a small amount of oil in it to protect the membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such as when driving on rough terrain or suddenly moving the steering wheel, the oil prevents the membrane from hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
8.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System Emergency steering
8.4 Emergency steering Design
Main components of the emergency steering 1 Emergency steering button 2 Emergency steering check symbol field 3 Emergency steering symbol field 4 Main electronics (master) 5 Input module 1 6 Emergency steering pressure switch B3
7 Valve block 8 Emergency steering check pressure switch B3a 9 Emergency steering pump 10 Emergency steering pump relay 11 Output module 2
The emergency steering pump 9, the emergency steering pump relay 10 and the emergency steering check pressure switch 8 are mounted on the right of the rear section. The valve block 7 and the emergency steering pressure switch 6 are mounted on the left of the rear section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) 4 are located in the cab behind the driver's seat. The input module 1 and the output module 2 are fitted in the right cab access.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-1 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Function description Basic function
Functional diagram of the emergency steering 1 Emergency steering button 2 Emergency steering check symbol field 3 Emergency steering symbol field 4 Main electronics (master) 5 Input module 1 6 Emergency steering pressure switch B3
7 Valve block 8 Emergency steering check pressure switch B3a 9 Emergency steering pump 10 Emergency steering pump relay 11 Output module 2
The emergency steering system allows continued steering if the variable displacement pump or the diesel engine fails. The emergency steering pump 9 delivers oil via the valve block 7 to the servostat.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump is regulated by the main electronics (master) 4. The emergency steering check pressure switch 8, and the emergency steering pressure switch 5 provide the main electronics with the necessary signals. The emergency steering button 1 is for restarting the emergency steering pump.
8.4-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System Emergency steering
Pressure switch test When you switch on the ignition, the pressure switches are tested. The pressure switch is powered (24 V) via the fuse F11. When the system is OK, no signal is returned to the input module 1. This tells the main electronics (master) 2 that the pressure switch is working properly. The symbol fields 3 and 4 do not light up. If the pressure switch is defective or if there is moisture in the plug or cable, a positive signal is sent to the input module 1. If the emergency steering pressure switch 5 is defective, the emergency steering symbol field 4 lights up. If the emergency steering pressure check switch 6 is defective, the emergency steering check symbol field 3 lights up.
Function diagram of the emergency steering when the pressure switch is defective (ignition on, engine off, both pressure switches closed in the depressurised state) 1 Input module 1 2 Main electronics (master) 3 Emergency steering check symbol field 4 Emergency steering symbol field
5 Emergency steering pressure switch 6 Emergency steering check pressure switch 7 Emergency steering pump
Emergency steering check Every time the machine is started up the system performs a brief safety test. This safety test is not performed until the engine is running. This is to prevent the high current consumption of the emergency steering pump from impairing the starting procedure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
During the safety test, the emergency steering pump is activated. The pump runs for 2 to 3 seconds. A pressure of 16 bar must be reached within this time. The contact on the emergency steering check pressure switch 6 closes. During the safety test, the emergency steering check symbol field 3 lights up. The emergency steering system is then operational and the emergency steering check symbol field goes out. If the pressure at the emergency steering check pressure switch 6 does not reach 16 bar, the check symbol field stays lit until the ignition is switched off. The safety test is interrupted after 3 seconds. The emergency steering field check symbol field indicates to the driver that the emergency steering system is defective.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-3 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Activated emergency steering system
Functional diagram of the emergency steering 1 Input module 1 2 Output module 2 3 Emergency steering check pressure switch 4 Emergency steering pressure switch 5 Electric motor
6 7 8 9 10
Valve block Oil from the steering pump To servostat Emergency steering button Main electronics (master)
If the diesel engine or the steering pump 7 fails, the emergency steering function is started automatically. If the pressure drops, the emergency steering pressure switch 4 sends a signal via the input module 1 to the main electronics (master) 10. The main electronics give the start command to the output module 2 and the emergency steering pump starts pumping oil. At the same time the emergency steering symbol field lights up, accompanied by an audible signal. The emergency steering function is provided for 40 seconds. The electric motor 5 of the emergency steering pump is automatically switched off.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump can only started manually using the emergency steering button 9. This function is only available for 10 seconds if the ignition is on.
8.4-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System Emergency steering
8.4.1
Emergency steering pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the emergency steering pump 1 Relay 2 Electric motor
3 Pressure relief valve 4 Gear pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.
Components of the emergency steering pump 1 2 3 4
Relay Electric motor Connector piece Sealing ring
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
5 6 7 8
Flange Seals Bushing Gears
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
9 Housing 10 Valve housing 11 Pressure relief valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-5 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Function description Basic function The gear pump of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric motor. The electric motor is switched on and off via a relay. The gear pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank as needed. The oil is pumped via the valve block to the servostat. A pressure relief valve protects the pump from excess pressure.
Gear pump with pressure relief valve The gear pump 1 of the emergency steering pump is protected by a pressure relief valve. By restricting the maximum pressure, this also prevents the electric motor from consuming too much current. The system pressure pushes the valve piston 2 against the spring 3. If the maximum pressure is reached, the valve piston 2 opens. This allows hydraulic oil to flow out to the intake side of the gear pump. The maximum pressure is determined by the pressure spring 3 and the adjusting disc 4.
Emergency steering pump relay
Emergency steering pump with electric diagram 1 Relay 2 Positive current supply 3 Relay activation
8.4-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 Output module 2 5 Electric motor 6 Main earth connection
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The electric motor 5 of the emergency steering pump is switched on and off via the relay 1. The relay 1 is activated by the main electronics (master) and the output module 2. The relay is designed to switch large currents.
Service Manual
Steering System Emergency steering
8.4.2
Emergency steering pressure switch ID 1029 4440
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The emergency steering pressure switch 1 is mounted on the valve block 2.
Function description Basic function LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as “normally open”.
Activating the emergency steering function The emergency steering pressure switch monitors the steering system pressure. If the diesel engine or the steering fails, the pressure at the emergency steering pressure switch drops. If the pressure drops, the switch contact opens. This interrupts the positive signal to the input module 1 and the emergency steering system is activated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-7 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
8.4.3
Emergency steering check pressure switch ID 1029 4440
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The emergency steering pressure switch 2 is mounted on the emergency steering pump 1.
Function description
Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as “normally open”.
Activating the emergency steering function The job of the emergency steering check pressure switch is to test the emergency steering system. When the diesel engine is started, the emergency steering pump begins to pump oil. If the pressure rises to the set level, the switch contact closes. A positive signal to the input module 1 is activated and the emergency steering check is successfully completed.
8.4-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Service Manual
Steering System Emergency steering
8.4.4
Valve block Design
Components and connections on the valve block 1 Oil from the emergency steering pump 2 Oil from the variable displacement pump 3 Emergency steering pressure switch 4 Variable displacement pump check valve
5 6 7 8
To servostat Housing Steering test connection Emergency steering pump check valve
The valve block is fitted on left of the rear section.
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The valve block connects the oil from the variable displacement pump or the emergency steering pump to the servostat.
Hydraulic plan of the valve block 1 Oil from the variable displacement pump 2 Emergency steering pressure switch 3 Oil from the emergency steering pump 4 Emergency steering pump check valve
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5 Variable displacement pump check valve 6 To servostat 7 Steering pressure test connection
8.4-9 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
The emergency steering pressure switch 2 monitors the pressure of the variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the switch 2 is too low, the emergency steering pump is automatically activated. This can happen if the diesel engine fails or if the variable displacement pump pressure drops. The check valves 4 and 5 prevent oil from flowing back to the pump. Valve block during normal steering function
Valve block during normal steering function When the steering is activated, the variable displacement pump delivers oil to the connection 2 and via the check valve 4 to the servostat. The check valve 8 prevents oil from flowing back to the emergency steering pump.
Valve block during emergency steering function The emergency steering pump delivers oil to the connection 1 and via the check valve 8 to the servostat. The check valve 4 prevents oil from flowing back to the variable displacement pump.
8.4-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Valve block during emergency steering function
9 Brake system 9.0 Chapter contents 9
Brake system ...................................................................... 9.0-1 9.0.1 9.1
Brake system........................................................................9.0-1 Service brake ..................................................................................9.1-1
9.1.1
Brake system gear pump......................................................9.1-1
9.1.2
Compact brake valve............................................................9.1-3
9.1.3
Service brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.1-7
9.1.4
Brake light pressure switch ..................................................9.1-9
9.1.5
Accumulator charge pressure switch .................................9.1-10
9.2
Parking brake..................................................................................9.2-1 9.2.1
Disc brake.............................................................................9.2-2
9.2.2
Parking brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.2-4
9.3
Overspeed protection .....................................................................9.3-1 Overspeed protection solenoid valve ...................................9.3-3
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
9.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Brake system
9.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system 9.0.1
Brake system Design
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the brake system 1 Compact brake valve 2 Front axle service brake hydro accumulator 3 Rear axle service brake hydro accumulator 4 Parking brake hydro accumulator 5 Brake system gear pump 6 Hydraulic tank
7 Rear axle 8 Pilot control solenoid valve 9 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 10 Pilot control hydro accumulator 11 Oil from the replenishing pump 12 Transmission with parking brake
13 Front axle Test connections: M3 Accumulator charge pressure M4 Front axle brake pressure M5 Rear axle brake pressure M6 Parking brake pressure
The gear pump 5 is flange-mounted on the engine. Together with the compact brake valve 1, its job is to charge the hydro accumulators of the brake system. The hydro accumulators for the service brake are fitted outside on the cab floor. The hydro accumulator for the parking brake mounted directly on the compact brake valve. The service brake is a wet disc brake mounted in the wheel hubs of both axles. The parking brake is a disc brake attached to the transmission 12.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-1 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
PowerPoint
Function description Basic function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Hydraulic tank Return strainer Brake system gear pump Replenishing pump Solenoid valve block Overspeed protection solenoid valve Pilot control solenoid valve Check valve Pilot control hydro accumulator Compact brake valve assembly Accumulator charge valve Pressure balance pilot valve
9.0-2 o f 6
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Check valve Inverted shuttle valve Check valve Parking brake solenoid valve Inching angle sensor Pressure control piston for st 1 circuit Pressure control piston for 2nd circuit Accumulator charge pressure switch Front axle disc brakes Front axle hydro accumulator Parking brake hydro accumulator
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
24 25 26 27 28 29
Transfer gear Parking brake Brake light pressure switch Rear axle disc brakes Rear axle hydro accumulator Control valve block (housing spreheating)
Test connections: M3 Accumulator charge pressure M4 Front axle brake pressure M5 Rear axle brake pressure M6 Parking brake pressure
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the brake system
Service Manual
Brake system The service brake is a hydraulic 2-circuit brake system. It acts on the wet discs in the front and rear axles. The brake system gear pump 3 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the compact brake valve 10. The accumulator charge valve 11 in the compact brake valve fills the hydro accumulators to a specified oil pressure. When the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed (up to 2/3 of the way down), only the hydraulic inching function is activated via the inching angle sensor 17. When the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed (in the last third), oil flows from the hydro accumulators 22 and 28 via the pressure control pistons 18 and 19 to the brake pistons in the front and rear axles. This activates the wet disc brakes. At the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows into the hydraulic tank. The parking brake 25 is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. When the parking brake solenoid valve 16 is energised, oil flows from the parking brake hydro accumulator 23 to the parking brake and opens the callipers.
Hydraulic tank The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the brake system. The gear pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the return strainer 3 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation. See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
Brake system gear pump The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the connection 4 to the compact brake valve. The cooling system gear pump 3 and the brake system gear pump 2 have a shared intake port. See the detailed description in the section on the brake system gear pump.
Compact brake valve with hydro accumulator LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The compact brake valve performs the following tasks: – Charging the hydro accumulator – Inching function when the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed – Braking function when the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed – Activating the parking brake via the parking brake solenoid valve
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-3 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
The accumulator charge valve fills the hydro accumulators 2, 3 and 4 to a specified oil pressure. The accumulator charge pressure switch 5 monitors the pressure in the hydro accumulators. When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, oil flows from the service brake hydro accumulators 3 and 4 to the wet disk brake. The contact on the brake light pressure switch 6 closes and the brake lights light up. See the detailed description in the section on the compact brake valve.
Service brake The service brake is a wet disc brake 1 mounted in the front and rear axles. The oil pressure pushes the brake discs together. The number of brake discs and the brake pressure determine the braking force.
L550, L556, L566, L576 1 Brake piston 2 Brake discs
9.0-4 o f 6
Brake discs in the axle
3 Wheel hub (Multitrac axle)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 4 Differential (Hercules axle)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description of the wet disc brake in the section on the axles.
Service Manual
Brake system Parking brake The parking brake is attached to the output shaft of the transmission 4 and thus acts on all four wheels.
The parking brake is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. When you start the engine and press the parking brake button, the solenoid valve 2 in the compact brake valve 1 is activated. Oil flows from the hydro accumulator 3 to the parking brake 5, where it acts on the brake cylinder and opens the callipers. When you press the parking brake button again or turn off the engine, the force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating the required braking torque on the brake disc. When the parking brake is closed, the LED in the parking brake button and the parking brake symbol field in the display light up. See the detailed description in the section on the parking brake.
Overspeed protection The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When a set limit speed is exceeded, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is activated. Oil flows from the replenishing pump 2 to the rear axle disc brake 5, causing the machine to slow down. See the detailed description in the section on overspeed protection.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-5 o f 6
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Brake system
9.0-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system Service brake
9.1 Service brake 9.1.1
Brake system gear pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Scavenging pump arrangement 1 Motor scavenging pump
2 Brake system gear pump 3 Cooling system gear pump
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The gear pumps are fitted on the accessory drive of the engine and is driven by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.
Brake system gear pump components 1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Driver O-ring Flange Seals Bearing bushings
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 7 8 9
Gears Housing Housing cover Shaft seal ring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-1 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
Function description Basic function The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing. One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the other driven by the gear teeth. The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Oil supply for the brake system
The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 4 via the internal intake duct of the cooling system gear pump 3. The oil is pumped via the discharge port to the compact brake valve 1.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
The brake system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure relief valve in the compact brake valve.
9.1-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system Service brake
9.1.2
Compact brake valve Technical data See section 2.1
Design This compact brake valve is attached to the cab floor. It is activated using the inch/brake pedal.
Main components of the compact brake valve Actuation pedal Inching angle sensor R1 Brake pressure adjusting screw Brake light pressure switch Compact brake valve housing
6 Accumulator charge valve 7 Parking brake solenoid valve 8 Accumulator charge pressure switch 9 Base plate
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-3 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Cross section of the compact brake valve 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pedal idle position adjusting screw Base plate Parking brake check valve Pressure balance check valve Accumulator pressure test piston Valve insert Compact brake valve housing Pilot valve actuating piston Pressure relief valve
9.1-4 o f 1 0
10 Opening/closing pressure adjusting screw 11 Inverted shuttle valve 12 Return spring for 2nd brake circuit 13 Pressure control piston for 2nd brake circuit 14 Return spring for 1st brake circuit 15 Pressure control piston for 1st brake circuit 16 Spring cup
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17 Pressure control spring 18 Brake pressure adjusting screw 19 Seal rings 20 Pressure control springs 21 Spring sleeve 22 Actuating piston 23 Actuation pedal
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
Service brake
Service Manual
Brake system Service brake
Function description Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the compact brake valve 1 Parking brake solenoid valve 2 Inching angle sensor 3 Pressure control piston for 1st circuit 4 Pressure control piston for 2nd circuit 5 Inverted shuttle valve 6 Check valve 7 Pressure balance pilot valve 8 Check valve
9 10 11 12
Accumulator charge valve Flow control nozzle Gear pump P connection To the control valve block (housing preheating) 13 Accumulator charge pressure switch 14 Front axle hydro accumulator 15 Parking brake hydro accumulator
16 Parking brake connection 17 Front axle connection 18 To the overspeed protection solenoid valve 19 Brake light pressure switch 20 Rear axle hydro accumulator 21 Hydraulic tank connections M3 Accumulator charge pressure test connection
The compact brake valve is supplied with oil by a gear pump. The integrated accumulator charge valve 9 and the pilot valve 7 fill the hydro accumulator with pressure oil. If the accumulator charge cut-off pressure is reached, the accumulator charge valve 9 switches the pump flow to circulate to the connection N. LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
If braking causes the accumulator pressure to fall to the accumulator charge cutin pressure, the accumulator charge valve 9 switches to accumulator charging. The brake circuits of the front and rear axles are separated by the inverted shuttle valve 5. The parking brake solenoid valve 1 provides pressure oil to the disc brake.
Service brake When the pedal is depressed in the first two thirds of its range, the hydraulic inching function is activated. This function is triggered by the angle sensor on the compact brake valve. If the pedal is depressed further, the pressure control pistons of the 2nd circuit control the pressure in the brake pistons in proportion to the pedal force. At the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows back to the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-5 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
If one brake circuit fails, the second remains operational due to the mechanical contact between the two pressure control pistons in the compact brake valve. The actuation force remains the same.
Parking brake When you press the parking brake button, the parking brake solenoid valve 1 is opened. The accumulator pressure acts on the cylinders of the disc brake and opens the brake.
Inching angle sensor The angle sensor attached to the compact brake valve consists of two redundant sensors. The angle sensor 1 sends an electrical signal to input module 1 and the angle sensor 2 sends a signal to the input module 2.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve (travel hydraulics pump) is reduced. The variable displacement pump reduces its flow. This hydrostatically brakes the machine.
9.1-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system Service brake
9.1.3
Service brake hydro accumulator Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug 2 Membrane
3 Closing head 4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2, which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Function description Basic function The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and supply it when needed.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
It has the following applications: – To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride control system or steering attenuation. – To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the brake system.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-7 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
Storing pressure for the service brake
Hydro accumulator arrangement 1 2 3 4
Compact brake valve Parking brake hydro accumulator Front axle hydro accumulator Rear axle hydro accumulator
5 Accumulator charge pressure switch 6 Brake light pressure switch
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
The service brake hydro accumulators allow the brake to be applied a certain number of times if the service brake pump fails. Oil flows from the hydro accumulators through the compact brake valve 1 to the disc brake.
9.1-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system Service brake
9.1.4
Brake light pressure switch Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The brake light pressure switch 1 is mounted on the compact brake valve 3.
Function description Basic function Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as “normally open”.
Brake light switching function The job of the brake light pressure switch is to switch on the brake lights.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the pressure on the parking brake pressure switch rises. When a set level is reached, the contact closes and the brake lights are switched on.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-9 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
9.1.5
Accumulator charge pressure switch Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch 1 Connection contact 2 Adjusting screw 3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact 5 Membrane 6 Housing
The accumulator charge pressure switch 2 is mounted on the compact brake valve 3.
Function description Basic function The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off. The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted. This type of membrane pressure switch is known as “normally closed”.
Accumulator charge pressure monitoring function The job of the accumulator charge pressure switch is to monitor the accumulator charge pressure.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
If the pressure in one of the brake accumulators falls below the level set for the pressure switch, the contact closes and the accumulator charge pressure symbol field lights up. In addition, an audible signal sounds.
9.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
9.2 Parking brake Function description Basic function of the parking brake
Components of the parking brake 1 Compact brake valve 2 Parking brake solenoid valve 3 Parking brake hydro accumulator
4 Transfer gear 5 Disc brake
The parking brake is a spring accumulator brake. The parking brake is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. The parking brake is supplied with oil by the compact brake valve 1. The accumulator charge valve of the compact brake valve 1 fills the parking brake hydro accumulator 3 to a specified oil pressure. The parking brake hydro accumulator 3 provides oil pressure via the solenoid valve 2 to open the parking brake. The solenoid valve 2 is actuated using the parking brake button. When the parking brake is opened, oil flows from the hydro accumulator 3 via the solenoid valve 2 to the disc brake 5.
Function of the parking brake switch The parking brake can only be released when the engine is running. When you start the engine and press the parking brake button 2, the parking brake solenoid valve is activated. The brake pressure then acts via the open parking brake solenoid valve on the brake cylinder, and opens the parking brake against the force of the brake callipers. The parking brake symbol field 3 on the display goes out.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When you press the parking brake button 2 again or turn off the engine, the force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating the required braking torque on the brake disc. The parking brake symbol field 3 and the LED 1 in the parking brake button light up.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-1 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
Parking brake
9.2.1
Disc brake Technical data See section 2.1
Disc brake components 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Counter nut Plug Adjusting screw Anti-twist locking pin Brake callipers Dust seal Pressure pin
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Brake disc Guide pin Lock nut Counter nut Brake pad Adjusting screw Piston seal
15 16 17 18 19 20
Brake piston Cup springs Housing Brake oil connection Rubber centring element Bleeder screw
The parking brake is a spring-loaded sliding saddle brake which acts on the brake disc 8 attached outside on the output shaft of the transmission.
9.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Design
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
Function description Basic function of the disc brake
Disc brake in open position The two identical brake pads 5 and the brake calliper 1 slide freely on the guide pins 4, which are fastened in the transmission housing. When the brake is applied, it clamps the brake pads 5, creating a braking torque on the brake disk 3. The clamping force is generated by the cup springs 9. The piston 8 is pushed together with the pressure pin 2 and the front brake pad 5 towards the brake disc 3. When the front brake pad 5 comes into contact with the brake disc 3, the reactive force pushes the brake callipers 1 along the guide pin 4 until the rear brake pad 5 is also pressed against the brake disc 3. The parking brake is released by tensioning the entire cup spring set 9. Oil in the pressure chamber 7 pushes the piston 8 all the way back against the force of the cup springs 9.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Rubber fittings on the guide pin 4 push the entire brake calliper to the right until the adjusting screw 6 touches the transmission housing. This moves the rear brake pad 5 away from the brake disc 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-3 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
Parking brake
9.2.2
Parking brake hydro accumulator Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator 1 Plug 2 Membrane
3 Closing head 4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2, which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Function description Basic function
It has the following applications: – To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride control system or steering attenuation. – To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the brake system.
9.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and supply it when needed.
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
Storing pressure for the parking brake
Components of the parking brake 1 Compact brake valve 2 Parking brake hydro accumulator
3 Transmission with disc brake
The parking brake is closed by spring force and opened by the brake oil from the hydro accumulator 2.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the parking brake button is pressed, brake oil flows from the hydro accumulator and releases the parking brake. The parking brake can only be safely released when the parking brake symbol field is not lit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-5 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Parking brake
9.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system Overspeed protection
9.3 Overspeed protection Design
Main components of the overspeed protection 1 Compact brake valve 2 Oil from the replenishing pump 3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block 5 Rear axle
The solenoid valve block 4 is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Function description
Hydraulic diagram of the overspeed protection system 1 Compact brake valve 2 Pressure control piston for 2nd circuit 3 Brake light pressure switch
4 Replenishing pump 5 Solenoid valve block 6 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
7 Rear axle disc brake Test connection: M5 Rear axle brake pressure
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill. When the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit speed, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 6 is activated. Oil flows from the replenishing pump 4 to the rear axle disc brake 7, causing the machine to slow down.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.3-1 o f 4
Brake system
Service Manual
Overspeed protection
Overspeed service code If the engine or the variable displacement motors overspeed, the machine reacts as follows: – The overspeed protection solenoid valve is energised – A service code appears in the display: E 5030 Overspeed on one of the variable displacement motors E 5032 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 1 E 5031 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 2 E 600B Overspeed on diesel engine – The warning buzzer sounds for one second. – Additionally, after 3 seconds of overspeed protection being active, the service code E 5029 appears.
The brake is activated according to the intensity of overspeed. The following situations may occur: Situation A: In the event of serious overspeed, for example on a steep slope, the brake activated constantly for more than 3 seconds. The service code E 5029 appears with a short warning tone. Situation B: Once the limit speed is exceeded, the machine is automatically braked until the speed falls back below the threshold. After a short time, the limit speed is exceeded again and the brake is activated again. If the brake is activated for longer than 3 seconds, the service code E 5029 appears with a short warning tone. This also happens if the brake intervention is briefly interrupted. Situation C: The machine is briefly braked. The speed then returns to the normal range.
The service code E 5029 only appears during reckless driving, for example at full speed down steep slopes. If the service code E 5029 is found several times in the memory, it may affect the warranty on the machine, especially if any damage was caused by overspeed. The service codes are stored in the main electronics A15.
9.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Caution: Brake interventions with the service code E 5029 do not occur during normal operation. This service code is only generated when the machine is not operated properly.
Service Manual
Brake system Overspeed protection
9.3.1
Overspeed protection solenoid valve Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the solenoid valve block 1 Pilot control hydro accumulator 2 Pilot control solenoid valve
3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve 4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The solenoid valve block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Function description Basic function The solenoid valve block includes the following components in a single housing: – Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics) – Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Compact brake valve 2 Oil from the replenishing pump 3 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block 5 Rear axle disc brake
During normal operation, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is not energised. Oil can flow freely from the compact brake valve 1 through the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 to the rear axle disc brake 5. If the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit speed, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is energised. Oil flows from the connection 2 (from the replenishing pump) to the rear axle disc brake 5, causing the machine to slow down.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.3-3 o f 4
Brake system
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Overspeed protection
9.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
10 Electrical system
10.0
Chapter contents 10
Electrical system ............................................................... 10.0-1 10.0.1 10.1
Electrical system with circuit diagrams...............................10.0-3 Electrical components...................................................................10.1-1
10.1.1
Electrical components in the cab........................................10.1-1
10.1.2
Fuse and relay board A4 ....................................................10.1-2
10.1.3
Main electronics (master) A15............................................10.1-6
10.1.4
Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c) ..................................10.1-10
10.1.5
Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)................................10.1-15
10.1.6
Electrical components in the rear section.........................10.1-20
10.2
Battery installation ........................................................................10.2-1 Batteries .............................................................................10.2-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
10.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-1 o f 1
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Electrical system
10.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system 10.0.1
Electrical system with circuit diagrams Design The operating voltage of the machine is 24 volts. The batteries (2 x 12 V) are connected in series. The two batteries are installed in the right ballast weight.
Components of the electrical system
The table below lists all the components of the electrical system. The entry in the step column helps you locate the component in the circuit diagrams.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Abbreviations: - WH = Wiring harness - LFD = Liebherr ride control - SV = Solenoid valve - PSV = Proportional solenoid valve - LED = Light-emitting diode - SH = Service hours - * Options
Machine view 1, left
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-3 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Machine view 2, right
Machine view 3, above
10.0-4 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system Function description Circuit diagrams The circuit diagrams are on pages 1 to 75. The following list contains the pages and their main functions. Overview of pages for the electrical system: 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW L550 - L580 2 3 The circuit diagrams of the electrical system show the function sequences for the entire machine, including optional equipment. All components and connections are marked and shown with the appropriate switching code so that they are clearly identifiable. The keys also list the designations of the components. The circuit diagrams are divided into pages. The pages are also divided into individual sections. Click the links in the online documentation to skip to the relevant information.
Component designation “-”
The designations of the components and connectors are always shown with -XX..: - -XX… = Component designation, e.g. -P1 = Mechanical service hours indicator (optional)
Location code “+”
Location codes are shown with +XX. The location codes show where the components are fitted on the machine.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The following location codes are shown: - +B Ballast weight, general - +B1 Left ballast weight - +B2 Rear ballast weight - +F Travel drive, general - +F1 Front axle - +F2 Rear axle - +F3 Transmission - +H Rear section - +H1 Rear section hatch - +H2 Rear section below cab, right - +H3 Rear section below cab, left - +H4 Right rear section - +H5 Left rear section - +K Cab, general - +K1 Cab front instruments - +K2 Cab rear wall - +K3 Cab roof - +K4 Cab instruments in side cover, rear right - +K5 Cab instruments in side cover, rear left - +K6 Cab floor - +M Engine - +V Front section
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-5 o f 3
Electrical system
Service Manual +V1 +V2 +V3
Front section Lift arm Tilt cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
-
10.0-6 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAN BUS 3
A
A
HEAT/AIR CON CONTROL CC01
91/92 MOTOR CONTROL LHECU
106 B
PROJ: 8920980_003
DISPLAY UNIT
SENSORS (SWITCH, SENSOR)
CAN BUS 1
45
MACHINE
INPUTMODULE 1
CAN BUS 2 C
4x CAN
1x LAN
CAN BUS 3
ACTUATORS (MAGNETICS, SOLENOID VALVES)
CAN BUS 4 4XRS232
OPTIONS (e.g. WEIGHING EQUIPMENT CENTRAL GREASING, etc.)
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
112
2xCFCard
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
D
B
97
93
CAN CAN AIR CONDITIONING KEYPAD MAIN KEYPAD
22 OUTPUTMODULE 1 Ethernet / RS232 / CAN D
ELECTRIC LOAD (LIGHTING, WINDSCREEN WIPER, REAR REAR WINDOW HEATER
46 INPUTMODULE 2
21
E
OUTPUTMODULE 2
ELECTRIC KEYPAD FUSE AND RELAY BOARD
SENSORS
MACHINE
ACTUATORS
F
F Ersteller
0
Datum
SPL
Ausgabe
Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
OVERVIEW DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ELECTRONICS GG6 TIER3 WHEEL LOADER
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
1 114
2
1
3
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHEET
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
A
61
STARTER
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHEET
TRAVEL DIRECTIONS ; HYDRAULIC PUMP ; BUZZER ; PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP
54
FUNCTION WORKING BASKET
59
DISPLAY UNIT CAN BUS 3
35
FUNCTION D+ PROFILE LIGHT ; PARKING LIGHT
20
DISPLAY UNIT CAN BUS 3
36
FOOT FLAP VMC3 MIDDLE FLAP VMC4
66
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR REAR
31
FAN MOTOR AND SENSOR ICE UP PROTECTION
64
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR CABIN
32
JOYSTICK STEERING
72
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT CABIN XENON WORKING PROJECTOR
30
JOYSTICK STEERING
74
5
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ; AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; SUN SENSOR
62
BMKINDEX
6
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ; AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; SUN SENSOR
63
BMKINDEX
7
HEAD FLAP VMC5 TEMPERATURE SENSOR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING
67
BMKINDEX
8
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; ACTIVE ; OSCILLATING
107
BMKINDEX
9
CHARGE AIR COOLER ; OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
106
BMKINDEX
10
COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION
BMKINDEX
11
KEY ; HANDOUT CONTAINING TYPE ; COUNTING NUMBER ; SYSTEM AND PLACE
BMKINDEX
12
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH ; STOP LIGHT ; LOW BEAM ; HIGH BEAM
25
BMKINDEX
13
LHCONTROL LEVER SWITCH COMFORT CONTROL ; 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
51
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
7
BMKINDEX
14
GENERATOR
BMKINDEX
15
VENTILATOR CONDENSER INTEGRATED
68
BMKINDEX
16
VENTILATOR CONDENSER RETROFIT KIT
69
BMKINDEX
17
MOTOR CONTROL ; AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
47
BMKINDEX
18
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP ; LFD ; AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION ; RIDE CONTROL
23
BRAKE ACCUMULATOR
21
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP ; LFD ; AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION ; RIDE CONTROL
24
BRAKE ACCUMULATOR
22
OUTPUT MODULE 2; BACKUP ALARM AND CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
45
CAN BUS 1
37
OUTPUT MODULE 2; BACKUP ALARM AND CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
46
CAN BUS 2
38
PARKING BRAKE ; SPEED SENSOR CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
78
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG MOTOR CONTROL AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
70
PHASE SENSOR
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
105
6
BMKINDEX
DIESEL PREHEATING COLD WEATHER KIT 40°
82
REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR GROENEVELD
ANGLE SENSOR INCH/GAS PEDAL
52
REAR AREA MONITORING VIA MONITOR AND CAMERA
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
C
5
F
WARNING BEACON ; MIRROR AND REAR WINDOW HEATER
33
INJECTION PUMP CYLINDER 13
109
FLOAT POSITION ; BUCKET RETURNTODIG LIFT KICKOUT
56
INJECTION PUMP CYLINDER 46
110
WINDSCREEN WASHER FRONT AND REAR ; HOOTER
28
79
WINDSCREEN WASHER FRONT AND REAR ; HOOTER
29
101
STAND BY AM 4 CYLINDER ENGINE
111
EP 3. AND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
60
STAND BY AM 6 CYLINDER ENGINE
102
TRAVEL RANGES ; SWIVEL ANGLE HYDRO MOTORS OVERSPEED PROTECTION
53
TANK PIPE SENSOR ; TRANSMISSION / HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE ; VENTILATOR ; COOLING WATER LEVEL
Datum
1
76
108
Ausgabe Änderung
75
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
D
108
55
Datum
C
105
BACKUP ALARM ; GEROTOR STEERING ; DIESEL PREHEATING
Ersteller
Zustand
4
108
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM DIESEL ENGINE 4 AND 6 CYLINDER
B
26
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1
ELECTRONIC IMMOBILISER
A
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
21
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
2 114
E
F
2
1
3
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHEET
E
WATER VALVE VMC1 RECIRCULATED AIR FLAP VMC2
GENERAL OUTLAY ELECTRIC KEYPAD
94
KEY OF SYMBOLS DIN EN613461; DIN EN613462 ; DIN EN60617
GENERAL OUTLAY MAIN KEYPAD
95
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM LIEBHERR
77
GENERAL OUTLAY HEAT / AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
96
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ; ELECTRICAL SOCKET 12V ; RADIO ; LOUDSPEAKER
34
GENERAL OUTLAY HEAT / AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SYSTEM SIDE
97
INGITION LOCK ; BATTERIES ; GENERATOR ; MAIN FUSES
19
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 1
86
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 1;2 QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
58
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 2
87
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 1;2;3 AND 4 QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
57
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 3
88
AUXILIARY HEATER DBW 2010
80
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 4
89
AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90
81
GENERAL OUTLAY AIR CONDITIONING KEYPAD FLAP CONTROL
99
PROJ: 8920980_003
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL 4 CYLINDER
113
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL 6 CYLINDER
104
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL ENGINE SIDE
93
GENERAL OUTLAY OPTION KEYPAD
98
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 1
90 91
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 3
92
83
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
84
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 1 AND 2
41
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 3; JOYSTICK STEERING
71
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 3; JOYSTICK STEERING
73
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 4; EP 3. AND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
50
SUPPLY MASTER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTIC PLUG
40
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 1
42
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 1 AND 2
43
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 2
44
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 3
48
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 3; AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUTDOWN
49
SUPPLY KEYPADS
39
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
27
GENERAL OUTLAY SENSORS
103
GENERAL OUTLAY SENSORS
112
GENERAL OUTLAY PROTECTIVE FOIL
100
OVERVIEW DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ELECTRONICS GG6 TIER3 WHEEL LOADER
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
SHEET
85
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
Zustand
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL OUTLAY MASTER
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 2
F
8
WATER DETECTOR
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
7
22
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
6
TANK PIPE SENSOR ; TRANSMISSION / HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE ; VENTILATOR ; COOLING WATER LEVEL
A
B
5
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
106
1
B
D
E
F Ident.Nr.
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
ZeichNr.
4
114
C
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
A
65
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
3 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
TYPE / COUNTING NUMBER, SYSTEM, LOCATION CODE
A
A
TYPE / COUNTING NUMBER CIRCUITS TWISTED
M1 STARTER MOTOR ; OPERATING SUPPLY CODE
E
52 52
=B BALLAST =F TRAVEL DRIVE =H HIND CARRIAGE =K CABIN =M ENGINE =V FRONT SECTION
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
B
= SYSTEM
=K +K6 X1.S1
=K SYSTEM (CABIN) +K6 LOCATION CODE (CAB FLOOR) X1.S PLUG NAME AND PIN CONTACT
X1.B1
X1.B PLUG NAME AND SOCKET CONTACT
+K6 =K
52 PIN AM PLUG
C
CABLE GREEN OPTION
/7.E4
+LOCATION CODE
CROSS REFERENCE UP SHEET 7;E4
OPEN LINE END
+B BALLAST +B1 BALLAST LEFT +B2 BALLAST RIGHT
LETZTE MODIFICATION
+K CABIN +K1 CABIN FITTINGS +K2 CABIN REAR PANEL +K2.RH CABIN REAR PANEL RELAY RACK +K3 CAB ROOF +K4 CABIN FITTINGS SIDE COVER RIGHT REAR +K5 CABIN FITTINGS SIDE COVER LEFT REAR +K6 CAB FLOOR
+F TRAVEL DRIVE +F1 FRONT AXLE +F2 REAR AXLE +F3 TRANSMISSION
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
+H HIND CARRIAGE +H1 HIND CARRIAGE REAR HATCH +H2 HIND CARRIAGE UNTER CABIN RIGHT +H3 HIND CARRIAGE UNTER CABIN LEFT +H4 HIND CARRIAGE RIGHT +H5 HIND CARRIAGE LEFT
D
+M ENGINE
E
+V FRONT SECTION +V1 FRONT SECTION +V2 LIFT ARM +V3 TILT CYLINDER
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
KEY ; HANDOUT CONTAINING TYPE ; COUNTING NUMBER ; SYSTEM AND PLACE
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
4 114
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
A3
RADIO
/34.D7
=K
A3.X1
PLUG RADIO
/34.D7
A3.X2
PLUG RADIO
A4.46.4 *
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
A13.X2
PLUG DISPLAY UNIT LCD
/35.A3
=K
+K1
=K
+K3
A13a.X
DISPLAY UNIT
/35.D3
=K
+K1
/34.D7
=K
+K3
A15
MAIN ELECTRONICS MASTER
/85.B1
=K
+K2
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/30.D5
=K
+K2
A15.CAN.X
PLUG MASTER 8 POLIG
/35.B7
=K
+K2
A4.46.8 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/30.D8
=K
+K2
A15.COM4.X
PLUG MASTERR SUB D
/40.B6
=K
+K2
A4.Kl.15.a *
Kl.15 INPUT MODULE 4
/50.A1
=K
+K2
A15.X
PLUG MASTER 6 POLIG
/40.E1
=K
+K2
A4.X40
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/40.A4
=K
+K2
A16a
INPUTMODULE 1
/86.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X40.3a *
CONNECTION RELAY BOARD
/47.A4
=K
+K2
A16a.X1
PLUG INPUT MODULE 1
/51.C1
=H
+H3
A4.X41
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.E2
=K
+K2
A16a.X1.44 *
CAN CONNECTION. INPUT MODULE 1
/37.E6
=H
+H3
A4.X42
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/40.C4
=K
+K2
A16b
INPUT MODULE 2
/87.B1
=K
+K2
A4.X43
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/43.B2
=K
+K2
A16b.X1
PLUG INPUT MODULE 2
/27.A8
=K
+K2
A4.X44
PLUGRELAY BOARD
/25.D3
=K
+K2
A16b.X1.10a *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL 3. + 4.CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.D8
=K
+K2
A4.X44a:4 *
CONNECTION RELAY BOARD
/79.F8
=K
+K2
A16b.X1.9a *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL; 3. + 4.CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.D7
=K
+K2
A4.X45
PLUGRELAY BOARD
/35.E2
=K
+K2
A16b.X2.9+10b *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL; 3. + 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.D7
=K
+K2
A4.X46
PLUGRELAY BOARD
/30.D4
=K
+K2
A16c
INPUTMODULE 3
/88.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X47
PLUGRELAY BOARD
/33.B7
=K
+K2
A16c.X1
PLUG INPUTMODULE 3
/71.E1
=H
+H3
A4.X48
PLUGRELAY BOARD
/49.C8
=K
+K
A16d
INPUTMODULE 4
/89.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X48. *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/69.B7
=K
+K2
A16d.X1
PLUG INPUT MODULE 4
/60.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X49
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/25.B7
=K
+K2
A17.aX1a *
PLUG CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.B2
=H
+H3
A4.X50
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/27.B5
=K
+K2
A17.X2 *
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.D8
=H
+H
A4.X50.12a *
CONNECTION RELAY BOARD
/33.B3
=K
+K2
A17a
OUTPUT MODULE 1
/90.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X51
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/20.B4
=K
+K2
A17a.X1
PLUG OUTPUT MODULE 1
/42.E7
=H
+H3
A4.X52
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.C3
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.43.57 *
PLUG CANCONNECTION INPUT MODULE 1
/37.B6
=H
+H3
A4.X53
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/20.D3
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.48a *
OPTION BUCKET RETURNTODIG ÜBER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
/56.E6
=H
+H3
A4.X55
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/19.C8
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.6a *
OPTION BUCKET RETURNTODIG ÜBER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
/56.B6
=H
+H3
A4.X56
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/19.B2
=K
+K2
A17b
OUTPUT MODULE 2
/91.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X56a *
CONNECTION RELAY BOARD
/69.B2
=K
+K2
A17b..X1.43.57 *
PLUG CAN CONNECTION OUTPUT MODULE 2
/38.C1
=K
+K
A4.X56a:4 *
CONNECTION RELAY BOARD
/79.B4
=K
+K2
A17b.X1
PLUG OUTPUTMODULE 2
/43.C1
=H
+H3
A4.X57
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/19.B3
=K
+K2
A17b.X1.44 *
CAN CONNECTION OUTPUT MODULE 2
/38.F1
=K
+K
A4.X58
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/27.B8
=K
+K2
A17b.X1.58 *
CAN CONNECTION OUTPUT MODULE 2
/38.F2
=K
+K
A9 *
IMMOBILISER
/79.D4
=K
+K2
A17b.X143a *
CAN CONNECTION OUTPUT MODULE 2
/38.D7
=H
+H3
A9.X *
PLUG IMMOBILISER
/79.D4
=K
+K2
A17c
OUTPUT MODULE 3
/92.B1
=H
+H3
A11
MAIN KEYPAD
/95.C3
=K
+K4
A17c.X1
PLUG OUTPUT MODULE 3
/48.E2
=H
+H3
A11.X1
PLUG MAIN KEYPAD
/35.B4
=K
+K4
A18
ELECTRIC KEYPAD
/94.B2
=K
+K4
A13
DISPLAY UNIT LCD
/35.B1
=K
+K1
A18.X1
PLUG ELECTRIC KEYPAD
/27.A2
=K
+K4
A13.X1
PLUG DISPLAY UNIT LCD
/35.B1
=K
+K1
A18.X1.1a *
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUTDOWN
/49.D6
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
5 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
A18.X1.1b *
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUTDOWN
/49.D6
=K
A18.X2
PLUGELECTRIES KEY BOARD
/25.C2
A19
OPTION KEYPAD
A19.X1
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
B10
HOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
=K
+K4
B10.X1
PLUG HOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
/98.B3
=K
+K4
B10.X2
PLUG HOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
PLUG OPTION KEYPAD
/35.E7
=K
+K4
B10a *
PLUG HOOTER OPTION
/28.C2
=H
+H
A19.X2
PLUG CAN BUS 3
/35.F7
=K
+K4
B10a.X2 *
PLUG HOOTER OPTION
/28.C1
=H
+H
A21
AIR CON ELECTRONICS CC01 29 POLIG
/96.A2
=K
+K4
B11l
LOUDSPEAKER LEFT
/34.E7
=K
+K3
A21.X1
PLUG AIR CON ELECTRONICS CC01
/62.B3
=K
+K4
B11l.X1
PLUG LOUDSPEAKER LEFT
/34.E7
=K
+K3
A21.XB
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONICS
/70.E6
=K
+K4
B11l.X2
PLUG LOUDSPEAKER LEFT
/34.F7
=K
+K3
A21a
AIR CON ELECTRONICS CC01 42 POLIG
/97.B1
=K
+K4
B11r
LOUDSPEAKER RIGHT
/34.E8
=K
+K3
A21a.X2
PLUG AIR CON ELECTRONICS CC01
/64.B1
=K
+K4
B11r.X1
PLUG LOUDSPEAKER RIGHT
/34.E8
=K
+K3
A22
KEYPAD HEAT/ AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/99.B2
=K
+K4
B11r.X2
PLUG LOUDSPEAKER RIGHT
/34.F8
=K
+K3
A22.X1
PLUG KEY BOARD HEAT/ AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/39.E6
=K
+K4
B12
PRESSURE SWITCH BRAKE LIGHT
/25.E1
=H
+H3
A204
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.C5
=K
+K4
B12.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/25.E1
=H
+H3
A204.X *
PLUG CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.C4
=K
+K4
B13
COOLING WATER LEVEL
/21.C4
=H
+H
A205 *
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.D3
=H
+H3
B13.X
PLUG COOLING WATER LEVEL
/21.C4
=H
+H
A205.X *
PLUG CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.D3
=H
+H3
B14
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE
/21.C5
=F
+F3
A700C.6
MOTOR CONTROL ENGINE SIDE 6 CYLINDER
/104.A1
=M
+M
B14.X
PLUG TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE
/21.C5
=F
+F3
A700C.6.X1
PLUG ENGINE SIDE
/105.E2
=M
+M
B15
INDUCTIVE SWITCH BUCKET RETURNTODIG
/56.C2
=V
+V3
A700C4
MOTOR CONTROL ENGINE SIDE 4 CYLINDER
/113.A1
=M
+M
B15.X
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/56.C2
=V
+V3
A700D
MOTOR CONTROL VEHICLE SIDE
/93.B1
=M
+M
B16
BACKUP ALARM
/45.C5
=H
+H5
A700D.X2
PLUG VEHICLE SIDE
/47.E1
=M
+M
B16.X
PLUG BACKUP ALARM
/45.D5
=H
+H5
A.X1 *
PLUG CIRCULATING PUMP DBW2010
/80.E6
=B
+B2
B16a.X1 *
PLUG REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
/45.D5
=H
+H5
B1
SPEED SENSOR TRANSMISSION
/78.C6
=F
+F3
B16b.X *
PLUG REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
/45.C7
=H
+H5
B1.X
PLUG SPEED SENSOR
/78.C6
=F
+F3
B16c.X1 *
PLUG OPTIONBACKUP ALARM
/45.C5
=H
+H1
B2
SPEED SENSOR CONTROL MOTOR 1
/78.C7
=F
+F3
B17
INDUCTIVE SWITCH LIFT KICKOUT
/56.C4
=V
+V
B2.X
PLUG SPEED SENSOR CONTROL MOTOR 1
/78.C7
=F
+F3
B17.B
PLUG LIFT KICKOUT
/56.B4
=V
+V
B2a
SPEED SENSOR CONTROL MOTOR 2
/78.C8
=F
+F3
B17.X
PLUG LIFT KICKOUT
/56.B4
=V
+V
B2a.X
PLUG SPEED SENSOR CONTROL MOTOR 2
/78.C8
=F
+F3
B17.X_1
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/56.C4
=V
+V
B3
PRESSURE SWITCH EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP
/23.C5
=H
+H5
B19
PRESSURE SWITCH BRAKE ACCUMULATOR
/21.C3
=K
+K6
B3.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/23.C5
=H
+H5
B19.X
PLUGPRESSURE SWITCH
/21.C3
=K
+K6
B3a
PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP
/23.C4
=H
+H4
B25
TANK PIPE SENSOR
/21.C1
=H
+H2
B3a.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/23.C4
=H
+H4
B25.X
PLUG TANK PIPE SENSOR
/21.C1
=H
+H2
B4
AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION
/23.C6
=H
+H
B26
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ICE UP PROTECTION
/64.D5
=K
+K4
B4.X_1
PLUGPRESSURE SWITCH
/23.C6
=H
+H
B26a
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ICE UP PROTECTION
/64.D7
=K
+K4
B8
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/21.C6
=H
+H1
B27
PRESSURE SWITCH AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/62.C4
=H
+H
B8.X
PLUG HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/21.C6
=H
+H1
B27.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/62.C4
=H
+H
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
A
C
Ort
8
Blatt von
D
E
F
Anlage
003
B
6 114
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
B27.X.2 *
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/69.D8
=H
B28
PRESSURE SWITCHRIDE CONTROL
/23.C6
B28.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
B32
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+H
B711
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1
/108.B2
=M
+M
=K
+K
B711.X
PLUG ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1
/108.B2
=M
+M
/23.C6
=K
+K
B712
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2
/108.B4
=M
+M
PRESSURE SWITCH FLOAT POSITION
/56.C1
=K
+K4
B712.X
PLUG ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2
/108.B5
=M
+M
B32.X
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/56.C1
=K
+K4
B713
PHASE SENSOR
/108.B7
=M
+M
B39
AIR CON AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/62.D5
=K
+K6
B713.X
PLUG PHASE SENSOR
/108.B7
=M
+M
B39.X
PLUG AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/62.D6
=K
+K6
B.X6 *
PLUG AUXILIARY HEATER DBW2010
/80.D5
=B
+B2
B40
INTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/67.E6
=K
+K4
C.X1 *
PLUG CIRCULATING PUMP DBW2010
/80.E6
=B
+B2
B42
SUN SENSOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/62.D7
=K
+K1
E1
REAR LAMP LEFT
/25.E2
=B
+B1
B42.X
PLUG SUN SENSOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/62.D7
=K
+K1
E2
INDOOR LIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B43
INDUCTIVE SWITCH DISTRIBUTOR LH
/77.C7
=H
+H5
E2.X1
PLUG INDOOR LIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B44
INDUCTIVE SWITCH LEVEL LH
/77.C4
=H
+H5
E2.X2
PLUGINDOOR LIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B45
PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C7
=H
+H4
E2.X3
PLUG INDOOR LIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B45.X
PLUG PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C7
=H
+H4
E3
DRIVING HEADLIGHT LEFT
/25.E4
=V
+V1
B200 *
INDUCTIVE SWITCH JOYSTICK STEERING
/72.C4
=K
+K4
E3.X
PLUG DRIVING HEADLIGHT LEFT
/25.E4
=V
+V1
B200.X *
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/72.C4
=K
+K4
E3.Xa *
PLUG COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION LEFT
/26.E3
=V
+V
B201 *
PRESSURE SWITCH JOYSTICK STEERING
/72.C2
=H
+H3
E3.Xb *
PLUG COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION LEFT
/26.F3
=V
+V
B201.X *
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/72.C2
=H
+H3
E4
DRIVING HEADLIGHT RIGHT
/25.E5
=V
+V1
B202 *
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER JOYSTICK STEERING
/71.C6
=K
+K4
E4.X
PLUG DRIVING HEADLIGHT RIGHT
/25.E5
=V
+V1
B202.X *
PLUG SIGNAL TRANSMITTER JOYSTICK STEERING
/71.C6
=K
+K4
E4.Xa *
PLUG COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION RIGHT
/26.E6
=V
+V
B203 *
PRESSURE SWITCH CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
/78.D5
=V
+V1
E4.Xb *
PLUG COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION RIGHT
/26.F6
=V
+V
B203.X *
PLUG PRESSURE SWITCH
/78.E5
=V
+V1
E5
REAR LIGHT RIGHT
/25.E7
=B
+B2
B213 *
INDUCTIVE SWITCH CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C7
=V
+V2
E6
REAR LIGHTLEFT 24V 5W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
B213.X *
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/61.C7
=V
+V2
E7
REAR LIGHT RIGHT 24V 5W
/25.E6
=B
+B2
B701
OIL PRESSURE
/106.B5
=M
+M
E8
CONTEUR LIGHTLEFT 24V 4W
/25.E3
=K
+K3
B701.X
PLUG OIL PRESSURE
/106.B5
=M
+M
E9
CONTEUR LIGHT RIGHT 24V 4W
/25.E6
=K
+K3
B703
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
/106.B2
=M
+M
E10
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT 24V 70W
/30.E4
=K
+K3
B703.X
PLUG CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
/106.B2
=M
+M
E10.X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT
/30.E4
=K
+K3
B707
PLUG CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
/107.C7
=M
+M
E10a
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT 24V 70W
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B707.X
PLUG CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
/107.C7
=M
+M
E10a..X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B708
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
/107.C5
=M
+M
E10b *
XENON WORKING PROJECTOR
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B708.X
PLUG COOLANT TEMPERATURE
/107.C5
=M
+M
E10b.X *
PLUG XENON
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B709
FUEL TEMPERATURE
/107.C3
=M
+M
E11
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B709.X
PLUG FUEL TEMPERATURE
/107.C3
=M
+M
E11.X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B710
WATER DETECTOR
/106.C7
=M
+M
E11a
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B710.X
PLUG WATER DETECTOR
/106.C7
=M
+M
E11a.X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
7 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
E11b *
XENON WORKING PROJECTOR
/30.E8
=K
E11b.X *
PLUG XENON
/30.E8
E12 *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR LEFT
E12.b *
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
F02*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.C7
=H
+H
=K
+K3
F03
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP
/19.D4
=H
+H5
/32.E3
=K
+K3
F03* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.C6
=H
+H5.
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR LEFT
/32.E4
=K
+K3
F03*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.C6
=H
+H5
E12.b.X *
PLUG E12b
/32.D4
=K
+K3
F07
Kl.30 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
/19.D5
=H
+H5
E12.X *
PLUG E12
/32.E3
=K
+K3
F07*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.D7
=H
+H5
E12a *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR LEFT
/32.E4
=K
+K3
F07* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.D7
=H
+H5.
E12a.X *
PLUG E12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
F07*.X1 *
OPTION BATTERY KS 40°
/83.D7
=H
+H5.
E13 *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR RIGHT
/32.E6
=K
+K3
F07*.X1
VERSION BATTERY KS L586
/84.D7
=H
+H5
E13.b *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR RIGHT
/32.E7
=K
+K3
F07.X1
PLUG Kl.30 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
/19.D5
=H
+H5
E13.b.X *
PLUG E13b
/32.D7
=K
+K3
F07.X2
PLUG Kl.30 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
/19.E5
=H
+H5
E13.X *
PLUG E13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
F07B
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS Kl.15
/27.C1
=K
+K2
E13a *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR RIGHT
/32.E7
=K
+K3
F10
DISPLAY UNIT
/35.D2
=K
+K2
E13a.X *
PLUG E13a
/32.D7
=K
+K3
F11
PRESSURE SWITCH B28; B32
/56.E1
=K
+K2
E14l
LICENCE PLATE LIGHT LEFT 24V 10W
/25.D8
=H
+H1
F12 *
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.B3
=K
+K2
E14r
LICENCE PLATE LIGHT RIGHT 24V 10W
/25.D8
=H
+H1
F13
CONDENSER FAN
/68.B2
=K
+K2
E16
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR LEFT
/31.E4
=H
+H1
F14 *
DIESEL PREHEATING
/55.A8
=K
+K2
E16.X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR REAR LEFT
/31.E4
=H
+H1
F15
LH CONTROL LEVER
/51.A5
=K
+K2
E17
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR RIGHT
/31.E7
=H
+H1
F18
WINDSCREEN WIPER REAR
/28.C8
=K
+K2
E17.X
PLUG WORKING PROJECTOR REAR RIGHT
/31.E7
=H
+H1
F19
Kl.15 AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONICS
/62.B2
=K
+K2
E200
RESERVE LIGHTING
/45.D8
=K
+K4
F19A
Kl.30 AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONICS
/62.B1
=K
+K2
E200.X
PLUG RESERVE LIGHTING
/45.D8
=K
+K4
F20
WINDSCREEN WASHER, HOOTER
/28.C3
=K
+K2
F2
HIGH BEAM LEFT
/25.B5
=K
+K2
F21
LOW BEAM/DRIVING LIGHT
/25.B3
=K
+K2
F3
HIGH BEAMHIGH BEAM
/25.B6
=K
+K2
F22
STOP LIGHT; LIGHTING
/45.A8
=K
+K2
F4
DRIVING LIGHTLEFT
/25.B3
=K
+K2
F23 *
REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR ; PARTICLE FILTER
/75.A3
=K
+K2
F5
DRIVING LIGHT RIGHT
/25.B4
=K
+K2
F24
IGNITION ON MOTOR CONTROL
/47.B4
=K
+K2
F6
PROFILE LIGHT /PARKING LIGHT LEFT
/20.C6
=K
+K2
F25
WARNING BEACON
/33.C2
=K
+K2
F7
PROFILE LIGHT/ PARKING LIGHT RIGHT
/20.C6
=K
+K2
F26
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG; IMMOBILISER
/40.C6
=K
+K2
F8
DRIVER'S SEAT; RADIO Kl.58
/19.B8
=K
+K2
F27
PROFILE LIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEUR LIGHT
/20.C8
=K
+K2
F8A
INDOOR LIGHTING;AUXILIARY HEATER
/19.B7
=K
+K2
F29
IGNITION STARTER SWITCH BYPASS
/19.B3
=K
+K2
F9
LH CONTROL LEVER OPTIONS
/51.A6
=K
+K2
F30
VOLTAGE CONVERTER (RADIO)
/34.B2
=K
+K2
F01
MAIN FUSES
/19.D2
=H
+H5
F31A
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT
/30.B3
=K
+K2
F01* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.C3
=H
+H5.
F31B
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.B5
=K
+K2
F01*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.C3
=H
+H5
F32A
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR LEFT
/31.B2
=K
+K2
F02
HEATING FLANGE
/19.D4
=H
+H
F32B
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR RIGHT
/31.B5
=K
+K2
F02* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.C7
=H
+H.
F33A
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR LEFT
/32.B2
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
8 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
F33B
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR RIGHT
/32.B4
=K
F34 *
REFUELLING PUMP
/55.A6
F35
MASTER
F36
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
F010.X1
PLUG ACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATING FLANGE
/19.C5
=H
+H5
=K
+K2
F010.X2
PLUG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT HEATER FLANGE
/19.D5
=H
+H5
/40.B4
=K
+K2
F208 *
DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/82.C4
=K
+K2
MOTOR CONTROL
/47.B3
=K
+K2
F209 *
INPUT MODULE 4 LOGIC
/50.B1
=K
+K2
F38
MOTOR CONTROL LOGIC
/47.B5
=K
+K2
F210 *
Kl:15 INPUT MODULE 4
/50.B3
=K
+K2
F39 *
PRESELECTION DIAL AUXILIARY HEATER
/81.A5
=K
+K2
F213 *
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C2
=K
+K2
F40 *
AUXILIARY HEATER
/81.A8
=K
+K2
F216 *
AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
/47.B8
=K
+K2
F42 *
AUXILIARY HEATER NOZZLE STICK PREHEATER
/80.D2
=K
+K2
G1
BATTERY
/19.E2
=B
+B
F43
MODULES LOGIC
/41.B2
=K
+K2
G1*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.D3
=B
+B1
F44
INPUT MODULE 1
/41.B7
=K
+K2
G1* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.D3
=B
+B1.
F45
INPUT MODULE 2
/41.B3
=K
+K2
G2
BATTERY
/19.E3
=B
+B1
F46 *
INPUT MODULE 3
/71.A3
=K
+K2
G2*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.D4
=B
+B1
F47
OUTPUT MODULE 1 BK1
/42.B4
=K
+K2
G2* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.D4
=B
+B1.
F48
OUTPUT MODULE 1 BK1
/42.B7
=K
+K2
G3
ALTERNATOR
/19.E4
=M
+M
F49 *
OUTPUT MODULE 1
/55.E2
=K
+K2
G3*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.E6
=M
+M
F50 *
WORKING BASKET
/59.B1
=K
+K2
G3* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.E6
=M
+M.
F51
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BK 4
/43.A6
=K
+K2
G700 *
GENERATOR OPTION
/105.B4
=M
+M
F52
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BK3
/43.A7
=K
+K2
G700
GENERATOR
/105.B3
=M
+M
F53
OUTPUT MODULE 1 DO3
/77.B2
=K
+K2
H15
BLINKER LEFT 24V 21W ORANGE
/25.E4
=V
+V1
F54
MASTER LOGIC
/40.B5
=K
+K2
H16
BLINKER RIGHT 24V 21W
/25.E5
=V
+V1
F55
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BK 1
/44.A4
=K
+K2
H17
BLINKER BACK LEFT 24V 21W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
F56
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BK2
/44.A7
=K
+K2
H18
BLINKER RIGHT REAR 24V 21W
/25.E7
=B
+B2
F59
OUTPUT MODULE 1 BK4
/43.A2
=K
+K2
H20
BRAKE LIGHT LEFT 24V 21W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
F60
OUTPUT MODULE 1 BK 3
/43.A3
=K
+K2
H21
STOP LIGHT RIGHT 24V 21W
/25.E7
=B
+B2
F61
OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO3
/45.A1
=K
+K2
H22
WARNING BEACON
/33.E3
=K
+K3
F62
OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO4
/45.A2
=K
+K2
H22.X
PLUG WARNING BEACON
/33.E3
=K
+K3
F63 *
OUTPUT MODULE 3 BK1
/48.A4
=K
+K2
H22a
OPTION BACKUP ALARM
/45.C3
=H
+H1
F64 *
OUTPUT MODULE 3 BK2
/48.A6
=K
+K2
H22a.X1 *
PLUG OPTION BACKUP ALARM
/45.C3
=H
+H1
F65 *
OUTPUT MODULE 3 BK3
/49.A1
=K
+K2
H22a.X2 *
PLUG OPTION BACKUP ALARM
/45.D3
=H
+H1
F66 *
OUTPUT MODULE 3 BK4
/49.A3
=K
+K2
H40
BUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F71
KEYPADS
/39.B2
=K
+K2
H40.X1
PLUG BUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F73 *
REAR AREA MONITORING
/76.A5
=K
+K2
H40.X2
PLUG BUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F74
MIRROR/REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.B6
=K
+K2
H50
PROFILE LIGHT/PARKING LIGHT LEFT FRONT 24V 4W
/25.E4
=V
+V1
F75
RADIO Kl.58; ELECTRICAL SOCKET 12V
/34.B5
=K
+K2
H51
PROFILE LIGHT/PARKING LIGHT 24V 4W
/25.E5
=V
+V1
F76
RADIO
/34.B5
=K
+K2
H52
REVERSING LAMP LEFT
/25.E3
=B
+B1
F010
FEEDBACK HEATING FLANGE
/19.C5
=H
+H5
H53
REVERSING LAMP RIGHT 24V 21W
/25.E6
=B
+B2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
B
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
A
9 114
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
H54
LOW BEAM 24V 70W H7
/25.E4
=V
H55
LOW BEAM 24V 70W H7
/25.E5
H56
HIGH BEAM 24V 70W H3
H57
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+V1
K33B
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR RIGHT
/32.B6
=K
+K2
=V
+V1
K208 *
WORKING BASKET
/59.B6
=K
+K2.
/25.E4
=V
+V1
K213 *
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C6
=K
+K2
HIGH BEAM 24V 70W H3
/25.E5
=V
+V1
K216 *
AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
/47.D8
=K
+K2
H58 *
REVERSE WARNING LIGHT RED FLASHING
/55.C3
=B
+B1
K227 *
DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/82.C5
=K
+K2
H59 *
REVERSE WARNING LIGHT RED FLASHING
/55.C4
=B
+B1
K228 *
DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/82.C6
=K
+K2
K1
FLASHER UNIT
/27.C8
=K
+K2
K240
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
/27.A4
=K
+K2
K2
PROFILE LIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEUR LIGHT
/20.C7
=K
+K2
K243 *
AUXILIARY HEATER NOZZLE STICK PREHEATER
/80.D3
=K
+K2
K3
LOW BEAM
/25.B5
=K
+K2
K244
CONDENSER FAN
/68.B4
=K
+K2
K3A
HIGH BEAM
/25.B7
=K
+K2
K245
CONDENSER FAN
/69.B7
=K
+K
K5
SIMULATION D+
/20.C4
=K
+K2
K245
CONDENSER FAN
/68.B7
=K
+K2
K5a
INTERVAL WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT
/28.B4
=K
+K1
K246 *
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUTDOWN
/49.D7
=K
+K2
K5a.X
PLUG INTERVAL WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT
/28.C5
=K
+K1
K248 *
CONDENSER FAN
/69.B4
=K
+K2.
K8
WINDSCREEN WIPER REAR
/28.C7
=K
+K2
Kl.15 *
Kl.15 CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.B2
=K
+K2
K9
WARNING BEACON
/33.C3
=K
+K2
Kl.15.X
CONNECTION Kl.15 A4
/19.B2
=K
+K2
K01
IGNITION STARTER SWITCH BYPASS
/19.C2
=K
+K2
Kl.30.X
CONNECTION Kl.30 A4
/19.D2
=K
+K2
K04
HEATING FLANGE
/19.D6
=H
+H5
Kl.30.Xa *
Kl.30 DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/82.B3
=K
+K2
K04* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.B7
=H
+H5.
Kl.30a *
Kl.30 AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
/47.A8
=K
+K2
K04*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.B7
=H
+H5
L2
LED F2
/25.C6
=K
+K2
K10
MIRROR/REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.B7
=K
+K2
L3
LED F3
/25.C6
=K
+K2
K11
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP
/23.C2
=H
+H4
L4
LED F4
/25.C4
=K
+K2
K11*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.B6
=H
+H4
L5
LED F5
/25.C4
=K
+K2
K11* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L6
LED F6
/20.C6
=K
+K2
K11*.X3 *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L7
LED F7
/20.C7
=K
+K2
K11*.X4 *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L8
LED F8
/19.B8
=K
+K2
K12
RADIO; ELECTRICAL SOCKET 12V
/34.B4
=K
+K2
L8A
LED F8A
/19.B7
=K
+K2
K22
HAZARD WARNING LIGHT Kl.15
/27.C2
=K
+K2
L9
LED F9
/51.B6
=K
+K2
K22a
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS MG
/27.C3
=K
+K2
L07B
LED F07B
/27.D1
=K
+K2
K22b
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS MG
/27.C4
=K
+K2
L10
LED F10
/35.E2
=K
+K2
K25 *
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS USA
/27.C5
=K
+K2
L11
LED F11
/56.E1
=K
+K2
K26 *
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS USA
/27.C7
=K
+K2
L12 *
LED F12
/78.B3
=K
+K2
K31A
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT
/30.B4
=K
+K2
L13
LED F13
/68.B3
=K
+K2
K31B
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
/30.B7
=K
+K2
L14 *
LED F14
/55.B8
=K
+K2
K32A
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR LEFT
/31.B4
=K
+K2
L15
LED F15
/51.B5
=K
+K2
K32B
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR RIGHT
/31.B7
=K
+K2
L18
LED F18
/28.C8
=K
+K2
K33A
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOF REAR LEFT
/32.B3
=K
+K2
L19
LED F19
/62.B2
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
10 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
L19A
LED F19A
/62.B1
=K
L20
LED F20
/28.C3
L21
LED F21
L22
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
L55
LED F55
/44.B5
=K
+K2
=K
+K2
L56
LED F56
/44.B7
=K
+K2
/25.C3
=K
+K2
L59
LED F59
/43.B2
=K
+K2
LED F22
/45.B8
=K
+K2
L60
LED F60
/43.B3
=K
+K2
L23 *
LED F23
/75.B3
=K
+K2
L61
LED F61
/45.B2
=K
+K2
L24
LED F24
/47.B4
=K
+K2
L62
LED F62
/45.B3
=K
+K2
L25
LED F25
/33.C2
=K
+K2
L63 *
LED F63
/48.B4
=K
+K2
L26
LED F26
/40.D6
=K
+K2
L64 *
LED F64
/48.B6
=K
+K2
L27
LED F27
/20.C8
=K
+K2
L65 *
LED F65
/49.B2
=K
+K2
L29
LED F29
/19.C3
=K
+K2
L66 *
LED F66
/49.B3
=K
+K2
L30
LED F30
/34.B2
=K
+K2
L71
LED F71
/39.B2
=K
+K2
L31A
LED F31A
/30.C3
=K
+K2
L73 *
LED F73
/76.B5
=K
+K2
L31B
LED F31B
/30.C6
=K
+K2
L74
LED F74
/33.C6
=K
+K2
L32A
LED F32A
/31.B3
=K
+K2
L75
LED F75
/34.B5
=K
+K2
L32B
LED F32B
/31.B6
=K
+K2
L76
LED F76
/34.B6
=K
+K2
L33A
LED F33A
/32.B2
=K
+K2
L77
LED D+
/20.C4
=K
+K2
L33B
LED F33B
/32.B5
=K
+K2
M1
STARTER MOTOR
/19.E3
=M
+M
L34 *
LED F34
/55.B6
=K
+K2
M1*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.E5
=M
+M
L35
LED F35
/40.C4
=K
+K2
M1* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.E5
=M
+M.
L36
LED F36
/47.B3
=K
+K2
M2
WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT
/28.D4
=K
+K1
L38
LED F38
/47.B5
=K
+K2
M2.X1
PLUG WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT
/28.D4
=K
+K1
L39 *
LED F39
/81.B5
=K
+K2
M2.X2 *
PLUG WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT RESERVE
/28.D5
=K
+K1
L40 *
LED F40
/81.B8
=K
+K2
M3
WINDSCREEN WIPER REAR
/28.D7
=K
+K2
L42 *
LED F42
/80.D2
=K
+K2
M3.X
PLUG WINDSCREEN WIPER REAR
/28.D7
=K
+K2
L43
LED F43
/41.B2
=K
+K2
M4
WASHING PUMP FRONT
/28.D6
=K
+K1
L44
LED F44
/41.B7
=K
+K2
M4.X
PLUG WASHING PUMP FRONT
/28.E6
=K
+K1
L45
LED F45
/41.B4
=K
+K2
M5
FAN MOTOR
/64.E3
=K
+K4
L46 *
LED F46
/71.B3
=K
+K2
M5.X
PLUG FAN MOTOR
/64.D2
=K
+K4
L47
LED F47
/42.B4
=K
+K2
M6
LIEBHERR CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
/77.C3
=H
+H5
L48
LED F48
/42.B7
=K
+K2
M6.X
PLUG LIEBHERR CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
/77.D3
=H
+H5
L49 *
LED F49
/55.E2
=K
+K2
M7
COMPRESSOR SEAT
/19.E8
=K
+K2
L50 *
LED F50
/59.B2
=K
+K2
M7.X
PLUG COMPRESSOR SEAT
/19.E8
=K
+K2
L51
LED F51
/43.B6
=K
+K2
M8
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP
/23.D2
=H
+H4
L52
LED F52
/43.B7
=K
+K2
M8*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.B5
=H
+H4
L53
LED F53
/77.B2
=K
+K2
M8* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.B5
=H
+H4.
L54
LED F54
/40.C5
=K
+K2
M9
WASHING PUMP REAR
/28.D8
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
11 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
M9.X
PLUG WASHING PUMP REAR
/28.D8
=K
M10 *
REFUELLING PUMP
/55.E6
M11
WATER VALVE
M11.X
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
OLE17 *
CONNECTION AUXILIARY HEATER
/80.D8
=K
+K2
=H
+H1
OLE18 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.E2
=K
+K2
/65.E3
=K
+K4
OLE19 *
LIGHTING S210
/59.E3
=K
+K2
PLUG WATER VALVE
/65.E2
=K
+K4
OLE20 *
LIGHTING S210
/59.E4
=K
+K2
M13 *
CONDENSER FAN
/69.D6
=H
+H3a
OLE21 *
CONNECTION AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90
/81.D3
=B
+B2
M13
CONDENSER FAN
/68.D7
=H
+H3
OLE22 *
CONNECTION AUXILIARY HEATER
/80.E7
=B
+B2
M13.X
PLUG CONDENSER FAN
/68.D7
=H
+H3
OLE23 *
REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR
/75.C1
=H
+H3
M13.X *
PLUG CONDENSER FAN
/69.D6
=H
+H3a
OLE23 *
QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.E7
=K
+K4
M14
RECIRCULATED AIR FLAP
/65.E7
=K
+K4
P1
WORKING HOUR METER
/20.A3
=K
+K4
M14.X
PLUG RECIRCULATED AIR FLAP
/65.E6
=K
+K4
P1.X1
PLUG WORKING HOUR METER
/20.A3
=K
+K4
M15 *
CIRCULATING PUMP DWB2010
/80.D7
=H
+H1
P1.X2
PLUG WORKING HOUR METER
/20.B3
=K
+K4
M15
FOOT FLAP
/66.E3
=K
+K4
R1
ANGLE SENSOR INCH PEDAL
/52.C3
=K
+K6
M15.X *
PLUG CIRCULATING PUMP DWB2010
/80.D7
=H
+H1
R1.X
PLUG ANGLE SENSOR
/52.C3
=K
+K6
M15.X
PLUG FOOT FLAP
/66.E2
=K
+K4
R2
DROP RESISTOR L2
/25.C6
=K
+K2
M16
MIDDLE FLAP
/66.E7
=K
+K4
R3
DROP RESISTOR L3
/25.C6
=K
+K2
M16.X
PLUG MIDDLE FLAP
/66.E6
=K
+K4
R4
DROP RESISTOR L4
/25.C4
=K
+K2
M17
HEAD FLAP
/67.E3
=K
+K4
R5
ANGLE SENSOR GAS PEDAL
/52.C7
=K
+K6
M17.X
PLUG HEAD FLAP
/67.E3
=K
+K4
R5
DROP RESISTOR L5
/25.C4
=K
+K2
M700
STARTER MOTOR
/105.B6
=M
+M
R5.X
PLUG ANGLE SENSOR
/52.C6
=K
+K6
MO1
MV MODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
R6
DROP RESISTOR L6
/20.C6
=K
+K2
OLE1
SPARE LINE Kl.W
/19.C4
=K
+K2
R6a *
MIRROR HEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE2 *
CONNECTION AUXILIARY HEATER
/19.D7
=K
+K2
R6a.X *
PLUG MIRROR HEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE3 *
WORKING PROJECTOR CAB ROOFREAR
/31.A8
=K
+K2
R6b *
MIRROR HEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE4 *
LIGHTING RFWEOA OPTIONAL
/33.E5
=K
+K2
R6b.X *
PLUG MIRROR HEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE5 *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL; 3. + 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.F8
=K
+K2
R7
DROP RESISTOR L7
/20.C7
=K
+K2
OLE6 *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL; 3. + 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.F8
=K
+K2
R8
DROP RESISTOR L8
/19.B8
=K
+K2
OLE7 *
LOGIC OUTPUT MODULE 3
/41.D1
=K
+K2
R8A
DROP RESISTOR L8A
/19.B7
=K
+K2
OLE8 *
LOGIC INPUT MODULE 3
/42.D1
=K
+K2
R9
DROP RESISTOR L9
/51.B6
=K
+K2
OLE9 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/45.C8
=K
+K2
R9A *
EXCITATIONRESERVE
/20.C2
=K
+K2
OLE10 *
AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
/47.B7
=K
+K2
R9B
EXCITATION GG6
/20.C2
=K
+K2
OLE11 *
CONNECTION IMMOBILISER
/79.A4
=K
+K2
R07B
DROP RESISTOR L07B
/27.D1
=K
+K2
OLE12 *
CONNECTION IMMOBILISER
/79.A8
=K
+K2
R10
DROP RESISTOR L10
/35.E2
=K
+K2
OLE13 *
CONNECTION IMMOBILISER
/79.F7
=K
+K2
R10 *
DIESEL PREHEATING
/82.E5
=M
+M
OLE14 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.B3
=K
+K2
R10.X *
PLUG DIESEL PREHEATING
/82.E5
=M
+M
OLE15 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.B6
=K
+K2
R11
DROP RESISTOR L11
/56.E1
=K
+K2
OLE16 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD
/80.C7
=K
+K2
R12
REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.E7
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
12 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
R12.X1
PLUG REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.E7
=K
R12.X2
PLUG REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.E7
R12: *
DROP RESISTOR L12
R13
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
R45
DROP RESISTOR L45
/41.B4
=K
+K2
=K
+K2
R46 *
DROP RESISTOR L46
/71.B3
=K
+K2
/78.B3
=K
+K2
R47
DROP RESISTOR L47
/42.B4
=K
+K2
DROP RESISTOR L13
/68.B3
=K
+K2
R48
DROP RESISTOR L48
/42.B7
=K
+K2
R13 *
DIESEL PREHEATING
/55.E8
=M
+M
R49 *
DROP RESISTOR L49
/55.E2
=K
+K2
R13.X *
PLUG DIESEL PREHEATING
/55.E8
=M
+M
R50 *
DROP RESISTOR L50
/59.B2
=K
+K2
R14 *
DROP RESISTOR L14
/55.B8
=K
+K2
R51
DROP RESISTOR L51
/43.B6
=K
+K2
R15
DROP RESISTOR L15
/51.B5
=K
+K2
R52
DROP RESISTOR L52
/43.B7
=K
+K2
R18
DROP RESISTOR L18
/28.C8
=K
+K2
R53
DROP RESISTOR F53
/77.B2
=K
+K2
R19
DROP RESISTOR L19
/62.B2
=K
+K2
R54
DROP RESISTOR L54
/40.C5
=K
+K2
R19A
DROP RESISTOR L19A
/62.B1
=K
+K2
R55
DROP RESISTOR L55
/44.B5
=K
+K2
R20
DROP RESISTOR L20
/28.C3
=K
+K2
R56
DROP RESISTOR L56
/44.B7
=K
+K2
R21
DROP RESISTOR L21
/25.C3
=K
+K2
R59
DROP RESISTOR L59
/43.B2
=K
+K2
R22
DROP RESISTOR L22
/45.B8
=K
+K2
R60
DROP RESISTOR L60
/43.B3
=K
+K2
R23 *
DROP RESISTOR L23
/75.B3
=K
+K2
R61
DROP RESISTOR L61
/45.B2
=K
+K2
R24
DROP RESISTOR L24
/47.B4
=K
+K2
R62
DROP RESISTOR L62
/45.B3
=K
+K2
R25
DROP RESISTOR L25
/33.C2
=K
+K2
R63 *
DROP RESISTOR L63
/48.B4
=K
+K2
R26
DROP RESISTOR L26
/40.D6
=K
+K2
R64 *
DROP RESISTOR L64
/48.B6
=K
+K2
R27
DROP RESISTOR L27
/20.C8
=K
+K2
R65 *
DROP RESISTOR L65
/49.B2
=K
+K2
R29
DROP RESISTOR L29
/19.C3
=K
+K2
R66 *
DROP RESISTOR L66
/49.B3
=K
+K2
R30
DROP RESISTOR L30
/34.B2
=K
+K2
R71
DROP RESISTOR L71
/39.B2
=K
+K2
R31A
DROP RESISTOR L31A
/30.C3
=K
+K2
R73 *
DROP RESISTOR L73
/76.B5
=K
+K2
R31B
DROP RESISTOR L31B
/30.C6
=K
+K2
R74
DROP RESISTOR L74
/33.C6
=K
+K2
R32A
DROP RESISTOR L32A
/31.B3
=K
+K2
R75
DROP RESISTOR L75
/34.B5
=K
+K2
R32B
DROP RESISTOR L32B
/31.B6
=K
+K2
R76
DROP RESISTOR L75
/34.B6
=K
+K2
R33A
DROP RESISTOR L33A
/32.B2
=K
+K2
R77
DROP RESISTOR L77
/20.C4
=K
+K2
R33B
DROP RESISTOR L33B
/32.B5
=K
+K2
R701
HEATER FLANGE
/19.F6
=M
+M
R34 *
DROP RESISTOR L34
/55.B6
=K
+K2
S1
IGNITION SWITCH
/19.A3
=K
+K4
R35
DROP RESISTOR L35
/40.C4
=K
+K2
S1.X1
PLUG IGNITION SWITCH
/19.A3
=K
+K4
R36
DROP RESISTOR L36
/47.B3
=K
+K2
S1.X1.8a *
CONNECTION IMMOBILISER
/79.A6
=K
+K4
R38
DROP RESISTOR L38
/47.B5
=K
+K2
S1.X2
PLUG IGNITION SWITCH
/19.B4
=K
+K4
R39 *
DROP RESISTOR L39
/81.B5
=K
+K2
S1.X3
PLUG IGNITION SWITCH
/19.B4
=K
+K4
R40 *
DROP RESISTOR L40
/81.B8
=K
+K2
S2
LH CONTROL LEVER VNR AND OPTIONS
/51.E4
=K
+K4
R42 *
DROP RESISTOR L42
/80.D2
=K
+K2
S2.1
FORWARD ; NEUTRAL ; BACKWARDS
/51.F4
=K
+K4
R43
DROP RESISTOR L43
/41.B2
=K
+K2
S2.2
KICK DOWN
/51.F5
=K
+K4
R44
DROP RESISTOR L44
/41.B7
=K
+K2
S2.3
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH OPTION 1
/51.F5
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
13 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
S2.4
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH OPTION 2
/51.F6
=K
S2.X
PLUG LH CONTROL LEVER VNR AND OPTIONS
/51.E5
S2a *
LH CONTROL LEVER WITH ANALOGUE SENSOR + GRIP SENSOR
S2a.X2 *
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
SPLICE.X7
REVERSING LAMP
/25.D7
=H
+H4
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X8
BRAKE LIGHT
/25.F1
=H
+H4
/60.D4
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X10 *
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.B2
=H
+H3
PLUG LH CONTROL LEVER
/60.D5
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X30 *
WORKING BASKET
/59.D4
=K
+K6
S3
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH
/25.B1
=K
+K1
SPLICE.X70 *
LH CONTROL LEVER WITH ANALOGUE SENSOR GRIP SENSOR
/60.C5
=K
+K
S3.X1
PLUGSTEERING COLUMN SWITCH
/28.E2
=K
+K1
Splice;.X1
LOGIC MODULES
/41.D2
=K
+K
S3.X2
PLUGSTEERING COLUMN SWITCH
/25.A2
=K
+K1
Splice;.X3
OPTIONS LH CONTROL LEVER
/51.D5
=K
+K
S15
BATTERY MAIN SWITCH
/19.E1
=H
+H5
Splice;.X4 *
CONDENSER FAN
/69.D4
=K
+K
S15*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.E2
=H
+H5
Splice;.X9
WINDSCREEN WIPER FRONT
/28.A5
=K
+K
S15* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.E2
=H
+H5.
Splice;.X11 *
MIRROR/REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.D6
=K
+K3
S23 *
QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.C7
=K
+K4
Splice;.X12 *
MIRROR/REAR WINDOW HEATER
/33.F6
=K
+K3
S23.X1 *
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.C7
=K
+K4
T1
VOLTAGE CONVERTER
/34.B7
=K
+K2
S23.X2 *
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.D7
=K
+K4
T1.X
PLUG VOLTAGE CONVERTER
/34.A7
=K
+K2
S23a *
QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.C6
=K
+K4
V1
FREEWHEELING DIODE K01
/19.C2
=K
+K2
S43 *
BACKUP ALARM CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2 *
BLOCKING DIODE
/28.C1
=H
+H
S43.X1 *
PLUG BACKUP ALARM
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2
FREEWHEELING DIODE k01.30
/19.C3
=K
+K2
S43.X2 *
PLUG BACKUP ALARM
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2.X1 *
PLUG BLOCKING DIODE
/28.B1
=H
+H
S202 *
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH JOYSTICK STEERING
/72.C3
=K
+K4
V2.X2 *
PLUG BLOCKING DIODE
/28.C1
=H
+H
S204 *
REFUELLING PUMP
/55.C6
=H
+H2
V3
FREEWHEELING DIODE K12
/34.B4
=K
+K2
S210 *
WORKING BASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V8
FREEWHEELING DIODE K5
/20.C3
=K
+K2
S210.X1 *
PLUG WORKING BASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V9
FREEWHEELING DIODE K3
/25.C5
=K
+K2
S210.X2 *
PLUG WORKING BASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V10
FREEWHEELING DIODE K2
/20.C7
=K
+K2
S212 *
RFWEOA OPTIONAL
/33.C4
=K
+K4
V11
FREEWHEELING DIODE K22
/27.C3
=K
+K2
S212.X1 *
PLUG RFWEOA OPTIONAL
/33.B4
=K
+K4
V12
FREEWHEELING DIODE K22a
/27.C4
=K
+K2
S212.X2 *
PLUG RFWEOA OPTIONAL
/33.C5
=K
+K4
V13
FREEWHEELING DIODE K22b
/27.C4
=K
+K2
S212a *
SYMBOL RFWEOA OPTIONAL
/33.B4
=K
+K4
V14 *
FREEWHEELING DIODE K25
/27.C6
=K
+K2
S213 *
EMERGENCY OFF 1 WORKING BASKET
/59.D7
=K
+K4
V15 *
FREEWHEELING DIODE K26
/27.C7
=K
+K2
S213 *
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V16
FREEWHEELING DIODE K31A
/30.B5
=K
+K2
S213.X1 *
PLUG CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V17
FREEWHEELING DIODE K31B
/30.B7
=K
+K2
S213.X2 *
PLUG CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V18
FREEWHEELING DIODE K32A
/31.B4
=K
+K2
S214 *
EMERGENCY OFF 2 WORKING BASKET
/59.D8
=K
+K4
V19
FREEWHEELING DIODE K32B
/31.B7
=K
+K2
S216 *
EMERGENCY OFF AUTOMATIC RUNOUT
/47.C8
=K
+K3
V20
FREEWHEELING DIODE K33A
/32.B4
=K
+K2
S222
COMFORT CONTROL; 3. + 4.COMFORT CONTROL
/51.E7
=K
+K4
V21
FREEWHEELING DIODE K33B
/32.B6
=K
+K2
S222.X1 *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL 3. + 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.E7
=K
+K4
V32
FREEWHEELING DIODE K244
/68.B4
=K
+K2
S222.X2 *
PLUG COMFORT CONTROL 3. + 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
/51.E8
=K
+K4
V32C
BLOCKING DIODE
/31.B7
=K
+K2
SPLICE.X2
SPLICE LOGIC MODULES
/42.C2
=K
+K2
V33
FREEWHEELING DIODE K244
/68.B4
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
14 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
V33C
BLOCKING DIODE
/32.B6
=K
V34
FREEWHEELING DIODE K245
/68.B7
V35
FREEWHEELING DIODE K245
V36
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
X2.B.50 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.50
/69.D6
=K
+K6
=K
+K2
X2.B.51 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.51
/69.D7
=K
+K6
/68.B7
=K
+K2
X2.B.52 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.52
/69.E7
=K
+K6
FREEWHEELING DIODE K246
/49.D7
=K
+K
X2.J
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS EU
/27.C6
=K
+K2
V37
FREEWHEELING DIODE K246
/49.D7
=K
+K
X2.S
PLUG CAB FLOOR
/62.C5
=K
+K6
V46 *
FREEWHEELING DIODE K243
/80.D2
=K
+K2
X2.S* *
PLUG CAB FLOOR OPTION
/69.E8
=K
+K6
V48 *
FREEWHEELING DIODE K246
/49.D8
=K
+K2
X2.S.50 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.50
/69.D6
=K
+K6
V49
FREEWHEELING DIODE K245
/68.B7
=K
+K2
X2.S.51 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.51
/69.D7
=K
+K6
V50
FREEWHEELING DIODE K244
/68.B5
=K
+K2
X2.S.52 *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X2.S.52
/69.E7
=K
+K6
V53
FREEWHEELING DIODE K240
/27.A3
=K
+K2
X3 *
PLUG PRESELECTION DIAL THERMO 90
/81.B1
=K
+K4
V57
FREEWHEELING DIODE K10
/33.C8
=K
+K2
X3.J
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS USA
/27.C8
=K
+K2
V58
FREEWHEELING DIODE K9
/33.C3
=K
+K2
X4 *
PLUG PRESELECTION DIAL DBW2010
/80.B1
=K
+K4
V59
FREEWHEELING DIODE K8
/28.C6
=K
+K2
X4.J *
JUMPER RESERVE
/20.C1
=K
+K2
V60
FREEWHEELING DIODE K3A
/25.C7
=K
+K2
X5 *
PLUG NOZZLE STICK PREHEATER DBW2010
/80.E3
=B
+B2
V80
BLOCKING DIODE
/20.B2
=K
+K2
X5.J *
JUMPER RESERVE
/20.C2
=K
+K2
V81
BLOCKING DIODE
/20.C3
=K
+K2
X6.J
JUMPER GG6
/20.C2
=K
+K2
V82
BLOCKING DIODE
/20.D3
=K
+K2
X11.ST1 *
PLUG AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90
/81.D5
=B
+B2
V83 *
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D2
=K
+K2
X12.ST2 *
PLUG AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90
/81.C6
=B
+B2
V84 *
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D2
=K
+K2
X13.ST3 *
PLUG AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90
/81.D7
=B
+B2
V85
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D3
=K
+K2
X16.B
PLUG LIGHTING REAR HATCH
/31.D4
=H
+H
V86
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D4
=K
+K2
X16.S
PLUG LIGHTING REAR HATCH
/31.D4
=H
+H
V87
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D8
=K
+K2
X22a.B
PLUG CABIN
/30.D4
=K
+K4
V88 *
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.D8
=K
+K2
X22a.S
PLUG CABIN
/30.D4
=K
+K4
V89
BLOCKING DIODE
/27.C8
=K
+K2
X22b.B
PLUG WIRING HARNESS CABIN
/19.D7
=K
+K4
V100 *
BLOCKING DIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X22b.S
PLUG WIRING HARNESS CAB
/19.D7
=K
+K4
V100.X1 *
PLUG BLOCKING DIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X26.B
PLUG E12
/32.D3
=K
+K3
V100.X2 *
PLUG BLOCKING DIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X26.S *
PLUG E12
/32.E3
=K
+K3
W1
ANTENNA
/34.D8
=K
+K3
X26a.S *
PLUG E12b
/32.E4
=K
+K3
X1.B
PLUG CAB FLOOR
/20.E3
=K
+K6
X27.B
PLUG E12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
X1.B.64 *
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.B8
=H
+H
X27.S *
PLUG E12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
X1.B.65 *
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.E8
=H
+H
X28.B
PLUGFAN MOTOR
/21.B7
=H
+H
X1.J
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS EU
/27.C5
=K
+K2
X28.B
PLUG E13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
X1.S
PLUG CAB FLOOR
/20.D3
=K
+K6
X28.S
PLUG FAN MOTOR
/21.B7
=H
+H
X1.S.61a *
PLUG CAB FLOOR X1.S.61
/69.C8
=K
+K
X28.S *
PLUG E13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
X2.B
PLUG CAB FLOOR
/62.C5
=K
+K6
X28a.S *
PLUG E13b
/32.E7
=K
+K3
X2.B* *
PLUG CAB FLOOR OPTION
/69.E8
=K
+K6
X29.B
PLUG E13a
/32.D7
=K
+K3
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
15 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
X29.S *
PLUG E13a
/32.D7
=K
X31
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/77.C5
X33
PLUG MAGNETICS PILOT CONTROL UNIT
X33.X
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
X.RS232.B
PLUG DIAGNOSTIC LEAD AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONICS
/70.B7
=K
+K
=H
+H5
XA16a.X1.58 *
CAN CONNECTION. INPUT MODULE 1
/37.E7
=H
+H3
/56.C7
=K
+K4
XB39
PLUG AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/62.D6
=K
+K6
PLUG MAGNETICS PILOT CONTROL UNIT
/56.C7
=K
+K4
XE14l.a *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.D7
=H
+H1
X37a *
PLUG RFWEOOPTIONAL
/25.C8
=H
+H3
XE14l.a. *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.E7
=H
+H1
X37b *
PLUG RFWEO OPTIONAL
/25.C8
=H
+H3
XE14l.b *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.D7
=H
+H1
X43
PLUG INDUCTIVE SWITCH
/77.C7
=V
+V1
XE14r.a *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.D8
=H
+H1
X44 *
PLUG RELAY BOARD DIESEL PREHEATING
/82.B5
=K
+K2
XE14r.a. *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.E8
=H
+H1
X45.B *
PLUG CONNECTOR LINT FILTER
/69.B5
=K
+K2
XE14r.b *
PLUG LICENCE PLATE LIGHT ITALIAN VERSION
/25.E8
=H
+H1
X45.S *
PLUG CONNECTOR LINT FILTER
/69.B5
=K
+K2
XMSP1
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGEFRONT LEFT
/19.D3
=H
+H2
X48.B *
PLUG EMERGENCY OFF 2 WORKING BASKET
/59.C8
=H
+H
XMSP1.e *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONT LEFT
/59.F4
=H
+H2
X48.S *
PLUG EMERGENCY OFF 2 WORKING BASKET
/59.C8
=H
+H
XMSP1a
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONT LEFT
/31.F4
=K
+H2
X50.B *
PLUG CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.C2
=H
+H3
XMSP1b
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONTLEFT
/43.D2
=H
+H2
X50.S *
PLUG CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
/78.C2
=H
+H3
XMSP1c
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONT LEFT
/25.F6
=H
+H2
X51.B *
PLUG EMERGENCY OFF;
/59.A7
=K
+K
XMSP1d *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONT LEFT
/48.D3
=H
+H2
X51.S *
PLUG EMERGENCY OFF;
/59.A7
=K
+K
XMSP4.1
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGEREAR LEFT
/19.E1
=H
+H
X52.B *
PLUG REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR
/75.D4
=K
+K2
XMSP4.1*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.D2
=H
+H
X60
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG
/40.F6
=K
+K2
XMSP4.1* *
OPTION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
/83.D2
=H
+H.
X60a
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
/70.E2
=M
+M
XMSP4.2
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE BACKLEFT
/19.D3
=H
+H5
X70
12V ELECTRICAL SOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP4.3
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGEBACK LEFT
/19.F3
=H
+H5
X70.X1
PLUG 12V ELECTRICAL SOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP6.1
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/19.D2
=K
+K2
X70.X2
PLUG 12V ELECTRICAL SOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP6.10 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/71.C2
=K
+K2
X71
ELECTRICAL SOCKET CIGARETTE LIGHTER
/34.E3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.11 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/71.C4
=K
+K2
X71.X
PLUG CIGARETTE LIGHTER
/34.E3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.12 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/57.E8
=K
+K2
X73
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
/34.F3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.13 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/33.F7
=K
+K2
X75.B *
PLUG INTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/67.C6
=K
+K4
XMSP6.14 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/55.C8
=K
+K2
X75.S
PLUG INTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
/67.C6
=K
+K4
XMSP6.15 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/81.C6
=K
+K2
X223.B *
PLUG DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/80.F3
=K
+K2
XMSP6.16 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/80.F1
=K
+K2
X223.S *
PLUG DIESEL PREHEATING 40°
/82.B6
=K
+K2
XMSP6.18 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/30.F5
=K
+K2
X321a *
COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION LEFT
/26.E2
=V
+V
XMSP6.19 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/82.F6
=K
+K6
X321b *
COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION RIGHT
/26.E8
=V
+V
XMSP6.2
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/19.D2
=K
+K2
X700.B
PLUG MOTOR CONTROL
/105.D7
=M
+M
XMSP6.20 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/82.F6
=K
+K6
X700.S
PLUG MOTOR CONTROL
/105.D7
=M
+M
XMSP6.21 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/76.C5
=K
+K2
X701.B
PLUG MOTOR CONTROL
/105.D8
=M
+M
XMSP6.22 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/75.D4
=K
+K2
X701.S
PLUG MOTOR CONTROL
/105.D8
=M
+M
XMSP6a
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/28.F8
=K
+K2
X.M7a.S
PLUG DIAGNOSTIC LEAD AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRONICS
/70.B6
=K
+K2
XMSP6b
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/39.B4
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
16 114
A
B
C
D
E
F
2
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
XMSP6c
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/33.F7
=K
XMSP6d *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/45.B7
XMSP6e *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
XMSP7a
8
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
Y11a.JPT *
PLUG OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 3
/57.C3
=V
+V
=K
+K2
Y11b *
EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C7
=V
+V1
/33.B5
=K
+K2
Y11b.JPT *
PLUG EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C7
=V
+V1
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB ROOF
/32.F6
=K
+K3
Y12
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 2
/57.C2
=V
+V
XMSP7b
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB ROOF
/25.F6
=K
+K3
Y12.JPT
PLUG OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 2
/57.C2
=V
+V
XMSP10*
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
/84.F4
=M
+M
Y12a *
EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C6
=V
+V1
XMSP12
MASS GROUPING BLOCK A4
/19.D2
=K
+K2
Y12a *
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4
/57.C4
=V
+V
XMSP12.1 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK A4
/47.E8
=K
+K2
Y12a.JPT *
PLUG EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C6
=V
+V1
XMSP12.2 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK A4
/79.C6
=K
+K2
Y12a.JPT *
PLUG OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4
/57.C4
=V
+V
XMSP63 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/78.D4
=K
+K2
Y12b *
EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C8
=V
+V1
XMSP200 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/50.C2
=K
+K2
Y12b.JPT *
PLUG EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C8
=V
+V1
XMSP201 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK HIND CARRIAGE FRONT LEFT
/61.D4
=K
+K2
Y13
FAN MOTORINTERCOOLER
/21.C7
=H
+H
XMSP.20 *
MASS GROUPING BLOCK CAB REAR WALL
/69.F7
=K
+K2
Y13.X
PLUG FAN MOTOR
/21.C7
=H
+H
Y2
TRAVELLING DIRECTION FORWARD
/54.C1
=H
+H
Y14
WORKING HYDRAULICS LOCKOUT
/57.C5
=H
+H
Y2.DT
PLUG TRAVELLING DIRECTION FORWARD
/54.C1
=H
+H
Y14.JPT
PLUG WORKING HYDRAULICS LOCKOUT
/57.C5
=H
+H
Y2a
TRAVELLING DIRECTION FORWARD
/54.C3
=H
+H
Y15
PWM SWIVEL ANGLE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C5
=H
+H
Y2a.DT
PLUG TRAVELLING DIRECTION FORWARD
/54.C3
=H
+H
Y15.JPT
PLUG PWM SWIVEL ANGLE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C5
=H
+H
Y3
TRAVELLING DIRECTION BACKWARDS
/54.C2
=H
+H
Y15a
PWM SWIVEL ANGLE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C6
=H
+H
Y3.DT
PLUG TRAVELLING DIRECTION BACKWARDS
/54.C2
=H
+H
Y15a.JPT
PLUG PWM SWIVEL ANGLE TRAVEL PUMP
/54.C6
=H
+H
Y3a
TRAVELLING DIRECTION BACKWARDS
/54.C4
=H
+H
Y16
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
/53.C5
=H
+H
Y3a.DT
PLUG TRAVELLING DIRECTION BACKWARDS
/54.C4
=H
+H
Y16.JPT
PLUG OVERSPEED PROTECTION
/53.C5
=H
+H
Y6
TRAVEL RANGES, MODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y17
LIFT KICKOUT
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y6.1
TRAVEL RANGE 1
/53.C4
=F
+F3
Y18
FLOAT POSITION
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y6.2
TRAVEL RANGE 2
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y20
RIDE CONTROL
/23.C7
=V
+V1
Y6.3
TRAVEL RANGE 3
/53.C3
=F
+F3
Y20.JPT
PLUG RIDE CONTROL
/23.C7
=V
+V1
Y6.X
PLUG TRAVEL RANGES, MODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y21
RIDE CONTROL
/23.C8
=V
+V1
Y9
BUCKET RETURNTODIG
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y21.JPT
PLUG RIDE CONTROL
/23.C8
=V
+V1
Y9a
BUCKET RETURNTODIG ÜBER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
/56.C6
=V
+V1
Y22
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
/62.E5
=M
+M
Y9a.JPT *
PLUG BUCKET RETURNTODIG ÜBER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
/56.C6
=V
+V1
Y22.X
PLUG AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
/62.E5
=M
+M
Y10
PARKING BRAKE
/78.C1
=H
+K6
Y50
FAN REVERSAL
/21.C8
=H
+H3
Y10.JPT
PLUG PARKING BRAKE
/78.C1
=H
+K6
Y50.AF2
PLUG FAN REVERSAL
/21.C8
=H
+H3
Y11
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1
/57.C1
=V
+V
Y51 *
JOYSTICK STEERING LEFT
/72.C6
=H
+H3
Y11.JPT
PLUG OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1
/57.C1
=V
+V
Y51.AF2 *
PLUG JOYSTICK STEERING LEFT
/72.C6
=H
+H3
Y11a *
EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C5
=V
+V1
Y52 *
JOYSTICK STEERING RIGHT
/72.C7
=H
+H3
Y11a *
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 3
/57.C3
=V
+V
Y52.AF2 *
PLUG JOYSTICK STEERING RIGHT
/72.C7
=H
+H3
Y11a.JPT *
PLUG EP 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
/50.C5
=V
+V1
Y53
QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.C8
=V
+V1
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
7
SHEET
F
BMK
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
5
FUNCTION
B
D
4
BMK
A
C
3
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Ort
8
Blatt von
B
C
Anlage
003
A
17 114
D
E
F
2
1
A
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
4
5
BMK
FUNCTION
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
Y53.JPT
PLUG QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
/57.D8
=V
+V1
Y57
HYDRO MOTOR SWIVEL ANGLE 1
/53.C8
=F
+F3
Y57.DT
PLUG HYDRO MOTOR SWIVEL ANGLE 1
/53.C8
=F
+F3
Y63 *
GEROTOR STEERING
/55.C4
=H
+H3
Y63.JPT *
PLUG GEROTOR STEERING
/55.C4
=H
+H3
Y64 *
SAFETY JOYSTICK STEERING
/72.C8
=H
+H3
Y64.JPT *
PLUG SAFETY JOYSTICK STEERING
/72.C8
=H
+H3
Y65 *
WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER LOCKOUT
/59.E4
=V
+V1
Y65.JPT *
PLUG WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER LOCKOUT
/59.E4
=V
+V1
Y66 *
WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER LOCKOUT
/59.E5
=V
+V1
Y66.JPT *
PLUG WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER LOCKOUT
/59.E5
=V
+V1
Y67 *
WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER FINE CONTROL
/59.E6
=V
+V1
Y67.JPT *
PLUG WORKING BASKET TILT CYLINDER FINE CONTROL
/59.E6
=V
+V1
Y68 *
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.E6
=V
+V1
Y68.JPT *
PLUG CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
/61.E6
=V
+V1
Y711
INJECTION PUMP 1
/109.B3
=M
+M
Y712
INJECTION PUMP 2
/109.B4
=M
+M
Y713
INJECTION PUMP 3
/109.B6
=M
+M
Y714
INJECTION PUMP 4
/110.B3
=M
+M
Y715
INJECTION PUMP 5
/110.B4
=M
+M
Y716
INJECTION PUMP 6
/110.B6
=M
+M
YEP1
HYDRAULIC MOTOR 1
/53.C6
=F
+F3
YEP1.DT
PLUGHYDRAULIC MOTOR 1
/53.C6
=F
+F3
YEP2
HYDRO MOTORS 2
/53.C7
=F
+F3
YEP2.DT
PLUG HYDRAULIC MOTOR 2
/53.C7
=F
+F3
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
3
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
18 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
WH 2.5Q
58
15
15
50a
50a
P 0 12
A16a.X1
OLE1 Verb. 1
4
1
1
+H5 F07 10A RD
2
BK 70Q
31
RD 70Q
+H5 XMSP4.3
BK 70Q
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
+H2 XMSP1c
1
E2.X1
*
B 6
BK 2.5Q
RD 25Q
WH 2Q
+K2 M7 2
28
5
1
E2.X2
M
E
3
E2.X3
2
=K
+H2 XMSP1b
+M R701 0
M7.X
+K3 XMSP7a
BK 2Q
1
BK 2Q =K
BK 2Q
3
9
+K2 XMSP6b
7
F
IGNITION LOCK ; BATTERIES ; GENERATOR ; MAIN FUSES 4
1
+K3 E2 0
X
3
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
D+
M7.X
1
RD 1.5Q
+M G3
1
WH 2Q
31
/81.B6
50
2
Datum
D
1
M
B+
Kl.30.F07 RD 1.5Q
+M M1
W
/D+
* 30
1
WH 1Q
X
+B1 G2
X1.B X1.S
z
+
R.5
=K
/27.A5
*
+
Ersteller
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
28
RD 25Q
/20.E3
BK 70Q
RD 25Q
+B G1 +H5 S15
30.1
RD 25Q
RD 70Q
A4.X55
1
RD 25Q
XMSP4.1 +H
A4.X57
1
30.2 50 +H5 K04
2 1
GND
OLE2
=H
*
ELECTRICAL SOCKET RADIO F8 /34.B3
1
1
L8
C
*
1
100A F02 +H
1
+H5 F01 100A
2
1
* 1
L8A
1
65
+H5 XMSP4.2
BK 25Q
+H2 XMSP1
2
200A F03 +H5 WH 1.5Q
1 1
+K2 XMSP6.1
BK,BK 25Q,25Q
BK 25Q
+K2 XMSP6.2
RD 25Q
2
BK 25Q
RD 25Q
MP
R8
WH 2Q
+H5 F010 5A HBR
+K6 X1.S X1.B +K6
65
V2
GND
=K
F
Zustand
1
RD 6Q
XMSP12
RD 25Q
1
R8A
T.4
GND
Kl.30.X 1
A
Verb.
L29
85
15A BU
GND
1
87
Kl. 30.F08
R29
A700D.DO2 X2 39
A700D.X2
F8
B
=K+K4X3:1
A
10A RD A
WH 2Q
K01
A700D.X2
/93.E2
A700D +M
WH 6Q
V1
A700D.DI2 X2 64
F8A
E
ENGINEECU SELECTION HEATER FLANGE
1
86
25A WH
WH 1.5Q =K+K6X1.S:65
F29
/23.B2
30
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
/93.E2
A700D +M
E Kl. 15
ENGINEECU ACKNOWLEDGEMENT HEATER FLANGE
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15.X 1
E
T.1
39
1
T.3
64
A4 =K +K2
A4.X57
S.4
3
A4.X56
4
RD 2.5Q
Kl. 30
D
2
S1.X3
A4 =K +K2
BK 1.5Q
A9 IMMOBILISER Kl. 15
1
S1.X2
A4.X57
X1 24 A16a.UI15 A +H3 Kl 50a A16a /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input15 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
30
ENGINE SIDE/105.B6
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
30
1
0
A
1
9
2
8
1
6
5
8
5
WH 2.5Q
6
10
24
5
WH 2.5Q
+K4 S1
10
A9 Kl.15
S1.X1
/79.C6
A
1
+K6 X1.S X1.B
WH 2.5Q
1
WH 2.5Q
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
19 114
3
4
A
A18.X2
B
A4.X49 A4 =K +K2
LED GREEN L77
10
OLD M.4 M.9
K.10
PROFILE LIGHT / PARKING LIGHT
R77
E
E
E 86
R9B
V81
220Ω
F6 86
A
F27
10A RD
C
87
A
87a
R27
GND
L27
T.7
T.8
A4.X57
A4.X57
WH 1.5Q 19 WH 1.5Q Kl.58aR
E
/25.C8
Kl.58aL /25.D2
6
19
WH 1.5Q 6
WH 1.5Q 5 WH 1.5Q
5
WH 1.5Q 4 WH 1.5Q
4
WH 1.5Q Kl.58aL /25.D3
WH 1.5Q Kl.58aL
D
*
WH 1.5Q
3
WH 1.5Q
*
/25.E4
3
8
T.6
A4.X57
3
2 2 /19.F5
D+
GND
T.5
*
+K6 X1.S X1.B
GND
A4.X57
6
5
1
A4.X53
/D+ WH 1Q
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+K6 X1.S X1.B
L7
GND
WH 1Q
O.1
L6
85
87a
WH 1.5Q
87
Kl.58aR
85
/25.D6
E
WH 1.5Q
E
V82
E
R7
WH 1.5Q
X6.J 10A
R6
Kl.58aR
X5.J 10A
K2
A
V8
/25.D6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
K5 X4.J 10A
3A VT
A
7
A
30
V10
Kl.58aR
A
F7
3A VT
30
/25.E5
R9A
Kl.30
/51.A4
9
=K +K2 A4.X51
5
F15.2 Kl.15
V80
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K2 XMSP6b
/51.A4
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
JUMPER X6 220Ohm/5Watt L550 L586
B
E
1
P1.X2
Kl.15 F15.1
A
2
JUMPER X5 RESERVE
A4 =K +K2
8
ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: /94.D3 OUTLET A6 A18 PARKING LIGHT +K4 A =K A18.PWM6 X2 3
WH 1Q
h
INFO JUMPER X4 RESERVE 0 OHM EXCITATION
D
7
1
+K4 P1
C
6
1
P1.X1
5
3
2
1
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
FUNCTION D+ PROFILE LIGHT; PARKING LIGHT 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
20 114
A A16a.UI4 X1 7
A16a.X1
/93.D2
A700D +M
A700D.AI11.1 X2 63
A700D.X2
/86.C5 A16a /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input13 A16a transmisson overtemperature+H3 +H3 A16a.UI13 X1 22
A16a.X1
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: resistor input 1 hydraulics oil temperature D A16a.RI1 X1 46
A16a.X1
8
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput 6 (Bank2) A17a VENTILATOR +H3 A A17a.PWM6 X1 19
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput6 (Bank A17b FAN REVERSAL +H3 A A17b.PWM6 X1 19
A17b.X1
A
+H X28.B X28.S
+K6 B19 0
Q
0 sw
ge
UP
+ B
1
+H B13 0
A
+H1 B8 0
T
2
B19.X
4
1
1
+F3 B14 0
B13.X
1 1
+H Y13 0
°C
B8.X
Y13.X
1
+H3 Y50 0
2
2
C
1
2
Y50.AF2
2
BK 1.5Q
D
2
+H X28.S X28.B
BU 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1.5Q
2
2 B25.X
s
Y13.X
2
C
B8.X
2
+H2 B25
B14.X
1
vi
B13.X
2
gn
Y50.AF2 B19.X
1
3 1
1
2
3
B25.X
1
WH 1.5Q
1
B
WH 1.5Q
1
RD 1Q
WH 1Q
BU 1Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
2
2
BK 1.5Q
1
+H3 A16a /86.E5
+H3 A16a
EARTH TANK SENSOR EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
/86.D5
GND PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE
EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
X1 32 A16a.24V
+H3 A16a
Vcc PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE /86.E2 SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
+M A700D
+H3 A16a
COOLANT LEVEL SIGNAL ENGINEECU
/93.D2
/86.C5
X1 47 A16a.RI1 D hydraulics oil temperature resistor input 2 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 61 A17a.GND_PWM6
+H3 A17a
EARTH VENTILATOR /90.D5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
61
A16a.X1
X2 62 A700D.AI11.2
61
A700D.X2
47
A16a.X1
X1 61 A16a.GND
62
A16a.X1
X1 65 A16a.GND
61
A16a.X1
32
E 65
E
1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
RD 1Q
B
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
19
PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN:
7
19
A16a.X1
37
A16a.X1
A16a +H3
ENGINEECU VCC coolant level signal
6
46
A16a.24V X1 37
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input 4
5
22
A
4
7
A16a +H3
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input 14 A16a TANK SENSOR +H3 A A16a.UI14 X1 23 23
/86.F2
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V TANK SENSOR
3
63
2
1
X1 61 A17b.GND_PWM6
+H3 A17b /91.D5
EARTH FAN REVERSAL EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
TANK PIPE SENSOR ; TRANSMISSION / HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE ; Werk Bischofshofen GmbH VENTILATOR ; COOLING WATER LEVEL , BRAKE ACCUMULATOR 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
21 114
WH 1Q
A16a.RI1 X1 46
A16a.X1 +H3
A17a.X1 +H3
A17b.PWM6 X1 19
A17b.X1 +H3
B
X28.B X28.S
+H3 A16a
/35.D5
X1 32 A16a.24V
=M +M +H3 A700D D pressure accumulator brake A16a =M+M/34.D2
Masse Tankgeber Masse CAN: INPUT MODUL 1
/35.E2
Supply 24V CAN: INPUT MODUL 1
X2 62 A700D.AI11.2 KÜHLWASSERSTANDS. SIGNAL MOTORECU
B13a..X2
1
BK 1.5Q
2
D
BK 1.5Q
+H3 A17a.X1
X1 47 A16a.RI1
+H3 A16a Hydrauliköltempertur
/35.B5 Widerstandseingang2 CAN: INPUT MODUL 1
+H3 A17b.X1
X1 61 A17a.GND_PWM6
+H3 A17a
/37.D5
Masse Lüfter Masse CAN: OUTPUT MODUL 1
61
+H3 A16a.X1 WH 1Q
X1 65 A16a.GND
A700D.X2
62
+H3 A16a.X1
65
+H3 A16a.X1
32
B13a.X
2
2
W160 +WL017 BU
B13a
47
1
X28.S X28.B
B13 Steckverbindung Superseal L544 L554
1
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
W160 +WL016 BK
B13a.X
2
Y50.AF2 +H3
BK 1.5Q
B13a..X2
WH 1Q
1
B8.X
2 Y13.X
C
2
2
1
+H3 Y50 2
1 °C
B8
Y13 0
1
1
T
2
B13.X
Y13.X 1
1
2
2
4
B8.X
1
61
+F3 B14
2
B19.X +K6
+H3 Y50.AF2
2
ge
2 B25.X
B13
P
2
sw
B14.X
1
2
+K6 B19
Q
B13.X 1
1
B19.X
vi
X1 61 A17b.GND_PWM6
E
+H3 A17b Masse Lüfterumkehr
/38.D5
Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
A17a.PWM6 X1 19
19
A16a.X1
A
+H3
1
3
W160 +WL016 BU 1
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16a.UI13 X1 22
2
E
3
B25
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
1 gn
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
W160 +WL016 RD
B
B25.X
A700D.X2
+H3
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: /38.D2 PWMAusgang6 (Bank2) A17b Lüfterumkehr
19
A16a.X1
=M
+H3
1
A16a.UI4 X1 7
+H3
8
OUTPUT MODUL 1 CAN: /37.D2 PWMAusgang6 (Bank2) A17a Lüfter
1
A16a.X1 +H3
37
A16a.X1 +H3
A16a.UI14 X1 23 23
A16a.24V X1 37
A700D.AI11.1 X2 63
INPUT MODUL 1 INPUT MODUL 1 CAN: CAN: /35.D2 analoger Universaleingang13 /35.B5 Widerstandseingang1 A16a Getriebeübertemperatur A16a Hydrauliköltempertur
46
+H3
7
W160 +WL017 RD
+H3
MOTORECU VCC KÜHLWASSERSTANDS.
22
INPUT MODUL 1 INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: CAN: =M+M/34.D2 /35.D2 analoger Universaleingang14 /35.B2 analogue all-purpose input4 A16a A16a pressure accumulator brakeA700D Tankgeber +M
6
WH 1Q
A16a +H3
5
WH 1Q
/35.E2 A
4
7
INPUT MODUL 1 CAN: Versorgung 24V 24V Tankgeber
3
63
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
TANK PIPE SENSOR ; TRANSMISSION / HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE ; Werk Bischofshofen GmbH VENTILATOR ; COOLING WATER LEVEL , BRAKE ACCUMULATOR 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
22 114
WH 1Q
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
WH 1.5Q
30 30
WH 1Q 1 X1 60 A17b.GND_PWM5
+H3 A17b
EARTH emergency steering /91.D5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
+H3 A16a /86.D5
GND NLP Check EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
+H3 A16a /86.E2
/86.D5
1
1 2
2
1
Vcc NLP SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
A700D.X2
X1 60 A16a.GND
+H3 A16a
BK 1.5Q
X1 34 A16a.24V
A16a.X1
X1 59 A16a.GND
D
+M A700D
GND NLP EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
/93.E2
X2 46 A700D.TI1.GND
A17b.X1
AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM ENGINEECU
A17b.X1
X1 62 A17b.GND_PWM7
+H3 A17b
EARTH LFD /91.D5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
E
63
A16a.X1
Y21.JPT
62
A17b.X1
Y20.JPT
2
BK 1.5Q
A16a.X1
Vcc NLP Check SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
59
2
60
M
B28.X
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
B4.X_1
2
60
/86.E2
2
A
33
WH 1Q
A16a
P
2
B3.X
BK 1Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
B
P
1
+V1 Y21 0
2
A
+
WH 1Q
B
Y21.JPT
1
+V1 Y20 0
Kl. 15
+
Y20.JPT 1
/56.E2
UP
+K B28
2
+H5 B3 0
UP
+H B4 0
s
B28.X
1
WH 1Q
+H4 B3a 0
B4.X_1
C
46
s
1
Ausgabe
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
85
B3.X
C
X1 33 A16a.24V
Datum
A17b.X1
A
B
34
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
B3a.X
+H3 A16a.X1
Ersteller
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMAusgang8 (bank A17b LFD/FLOAT POSITION +H3 A A17b.PWM8 X1 21
C
B3a.X
F
Zustand
+K6 X1.B X1.S
86
88a
+H4 M8 0
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput7 (bank A17b LFD +H3 A A17b.PWM7 X1 20
21
A16a.X1
8
20
A16a.X1
ENGINEECU INPUT MODULE 1 VACUUM CAN: /93.E2 A700D AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input6 A16a LFD +M +H3 A700D.TI1 A X2 60 A16a.UI6 X1 19 A700D.X2 19
18
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input3 A16a PRESSURE NLP +H3 A A16a.UI3 X1 6
7
RD 25Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
88
GND VIA EARTH STRIP
E
A16a.X1
+H4 K11
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Kl. 30.F08
B
C
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input1 A16a PRESSURE NLP Check +H3 A A16a.UI1 X1 4
6
/19.C4
A17b.X1
5
60
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput5 (bank A17b emergency steering A A17b.PWM5 X1 18
4
4
A
3
6
2
1
X1 63 A17b.GND_PWM8
+H3 A17b /91.D5
EARTH LFD EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
F Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP ; LFD ; AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION ; RIDE CONTROL
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
23 114
+H3
MOTORECU UNTERDRUCK LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.
A700D.X2 +M =M
7
A16a.UI6 X1 19
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
=H +H3 A17b.X1
=H+H/38.D5
X1 60 A17b.GND_PWM5 Masse Notlenkung Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
=H +H3 A17b.X1
1
1
X1 62 A17b.GND_PWM7
X1 63 A17b.GND_PWM8
=H =H +H3 +H3 Masse LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung Masse LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung A17b A17b
F11 10A/RD =K+K/15.E2
=H +H3 A17b
60
2
Kl. 15.6
WH 1Q
63
M =H +H3 A17b.X1
D
UNTERDRUCK MOTORECU
62
=M+M/34.E2
2
2 29
=M A700D.TI1.GND +M A700D LUFTFILTERVERSCHM. GND
BK 1.5Q
=K +K6 X1.S
C
29
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
B28.X
2
P
46
WH 1Q
4
WH 1.5Q
30
WH 1Q
1
1
+K B28
BK 1.5Q
B4.X_1 +H
=M +M A700D.X2
4
+V1 Y21.JPT 1 +V1 Y21 0 2 Y21.JPT +V1
B28.X
2
1
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
+V1 Y20.JPT 1 +V1 Y20 0 2 Y20.JPT +V1
P
2
1
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
WH 1.5Q
30 WH 1Q
1
+H Splice.X6
=K +K6 X2.B X2.S +K6 =K
A17b.PWM8 X1 21
WH 1Q
+H B4
2
B3.X +H5
+H3 =H
1
B3a.X +H4
1
+H B4.X_1
P
2
P
X1.S +K6 =K
=H+H/38.D5
Masse =H+H/38.D5 CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
E
Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
A17b.PWM7 X1 20
B
X2 46
=H +H4 M8
+H3 =H
A
WH 1Q
A16a.X1 +H3 =H
1
+H5 B3
2
1
WH 1Q
1
1 1
+H5 B3.X
8
INPUT MODUL 1 OUTPUTMODUL 2 OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: CAN: CAN: =H+H/35.D2analogue all-purpose =H+H/38.D2 input6 PWMAusgang7 (Bank2)=H+H/38.D2 PWMAusgang8 (Bank2) A16a A17b A17b LFD LFD LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
+H3 =H
A700D.TI1 X2 60
=M
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16a.X1 +H3
2
30.1 31 K11.X3 K11.X1 +H4 +H4 =H =H
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
A16a.UI3 X1 6
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
=H =H +H4 +H4 K11.X4 K11.X2 30.2 50 =H +H4 K11
GND über Masseband
E
+H4 B3a.X +H4 B3a
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Kl. 30.F08
B
4
18
A16a.X1 +H3
=K+K/4.C4
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
A16a.UI1 X1 4
6
+H3
A17b.PWM5 X1 18
2
+H3 =H
6
21
OUTPUTMODUL 2 INPUT MODUL 1 INPUT MODUL 1 CAN: CAN: CAN: =M+M/34.E2 =H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang5 (Bank2) =H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input1 =H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input3 A700D A17b A16a pressure NLP Check A16a Notlenkung Druck NLP +M
A
C
5
20
4
19
3
60
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
EMERGENCY STEERING PUMP ; LFD ; AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION ; RIDE CONTROL
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
24 114
HIGH BEAM
E
30
86
E
E
30
F4
A17b.X1
F5
7,5A BN
7,5A BN
V9
R5
L21
L4
L5
7,5A BN
V60
0
85
87a A
GND
87
R2
R3
L2
L3
GND
10
1
XMSP1c
1
E4.X
XMSP1c
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q 1 1
2
XE14l.a.
H53
2
E7
7
H21
4
H18
+B2 E5 0
XE14l.b
+K3 XMSP7b
1
+H2 XMSP1c
XE14r.b
5
X16.B X16.S
2
EXTENSION OF THE LICENCE-PLATE LIGHTING FOR THE ITALIAN VERSION
1
+H2 XMSP1c
+H4 Splice.X8 Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH ; STOP LIGHT ; LOW BEAM ; HIGH BEAM
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
*
2
XE14r.a.
*
5
D
1
+H1 E14r BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
/27.E7 Kl.49
/20.E6 Kl.58aR
WH 1.5Q 1 1
6
SW 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
3
+K3 E9
H51 H16
BK 1.5Q 4
WH 1.5Q 3
/20.E6
H55
6
5
4
WH 1.5Q 3
WH 1.5Q
1
H57
XE14r.a 1
+H1 E14l
BK 1.5Q 2 2
0
XE14r.b
XE14l.b
BK 1.5Q
0
5
BK 1.5Q
+V1 E4
4
+H X16.S X16.B
XE14l.a
BK 1.5Q
+V1 E3
3
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
SW 1.5Q
H56
2
F.6
1
H54
1
H50
2
WH 1.5Q 2
+H4 Splice.X7
A4.X45
3
/27.E5
18 18 /20.E6
17 17
16 2
WH 1.5Q 3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q 4
3
E3.X
+K3 XMSP7a
16
19 19
/20.E5
/27.E6 WH 1.5Q 5
4
2
10
1
5
3
H15
7
X1.S X1.B
2
5 1
H52
A4.X45
* E
BK 1.5QEXTEN 6
9
2
6
*
X1.S X1.B +K6
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
4
A4.X45 F.5
C
GND
F.1
Kl.58aL
E6
GND
BK 1.5Q
H20
A4.X45
WH 1.5Q 3
BK 1.5Q
H17
XMSP1b
Änderung
+H3 X37a
85
A
GND
F.3
SW 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2
5
WH 1.5Q
/20.E5
3 /20.E6 WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL
Kl.49
B12.1 WH 1.5Q
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
+K3 E8
2
B12.X
GND
A4.X44
1
+B1 E1 0
2
87
A
R4
E.3
/27.E5
/45.E8
A
R21
GND
1
P
F3
7,5A BN
X37b +H3
4
X2 4 A18.PWM7 A low beam /94.E3 OUTLET A7 CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
1
+H3 B12 0
F2
K3A
1
10A RD
K3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
F21
=K +K4 A18
/33.E4
A17b.DO3 X1 37
86
5
E
5
E
A
B12.X
X1.37
+H3
87a
A18.X2
B
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.F2 digital output 3 A17b REVERSING LIGHT
6
hb/lbF/A LH 0
/33.E4
K.8
L
F
Zustand
LOW BEAM / DRIVING LIGHT
A4.X49
K.6
Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
R
WH 1.5Q
E
+K1 S3
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
A4 =K +K2
A4.X49
K.4
/20.E7
B
A4.X49
K.2
WH 1.5Q
A4.X49
X1.37
56
Kl.58aR
30
1
56a
BK 1.5Q 2 2
56b
37
49a
=K
WH 1.5Q
R
=K
BK 1.5Q
L
=K 2
=K
WH 1.5Q
3
A
WH 1.5Q
3/7 S3.X2
A16b.X1
WH 1.5Q
2
WH 1.5Q
2/7
5
/87.C2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
5/7
4
A16b.X1
8
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE universal HIGH BEAM A A16b.UI2 X1 5
A16b +K2
6
/87.C2
4/7
7
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE universal DRIVING LIGHT A A16b.UI1 X1 4
A16b +K2
A
6
5
5
8
4
4
3
4
2
1
3
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
25 114
F
2
3
6
/7.E7 Kl.49a.2
R
8
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN:
/36.B2ANALOGUE Universaleingang1 DRIVING LIGHT
/36.B2ANALOGUE Universaleingang2 HIGH BEAM
A16b +K2
49a
56b
56a
15
A4.X49
A4.X49
K.4
A4.X49
K.6
K.8 B
A4 =K +K2
56
A4.X49
K.2
5
3
A16b.X1
8
2
A16b.UI2 X1 5
6
5
4
4
A16b.X1
4
3/7
S3.X2 5/7 +K1 S3.X2 2/7 +K1 S3.X2
5
A16b +K2
A16b.UI1 X1 4
2
2 2
7
LOW BEAM / DRIVING LIGHT
HIGH BEAM
Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
5
A
+K1
+K1 S3 0
E
30
E
F21 10A RD
a bc
L OR
ab
E F4 7,5A BN
F5 7,5A BN
E
A
A
87
30
E
F2 7,5A BN 87a
A
86
K3
F3 7,5A BN
85
87a
A
GND
86
K3a
87
85
A
GND C
GND
GND
H50 H54
H56
=V +V1 E3
=V 2 +V1 E4
3
4
H57
H55
H51
5
4 WH 1.5Q
5
D 31
intstall 3pin socket!
58
+V X321b 0
E
31
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q 1
XMSP1c
54
54
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
1
E4.X
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
5
4
1
BK 1.5Q
1
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
4
3 WH 1.5Q
H16
E4.Xa
XMSP1c
3
2
5
E3.Xa
E3.X
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
2
58
1
3
+V X321b
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/7.E5
/5.E6 4
WH 1.5Q
6
18 3 Kl.58aR.1 4 Kl.49.3 5
2
2
+V E4.Xa
1 1
18
17 17
16
19 19 3
+V E3.Xa
H15
1.5Q,1.5Q BK,BK
8JB 001 9333001 LBH ID 6200003
F.6
E4.Xb +V
/5.E5
/7.E6
Kl.49.2 5 Kl.58aL.1 4 2
+K6 +K6 X1.SX1.S
16
+K6 +K6 X1.SX1.S
E3.Xb +V
A4.X45
2
F.1
WH 1.5Q
F.3
5
54
A4.X45
1
A4.X45F.5
5
A4.X45
WH 1.5Q
2
3
3 3
4 WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+V X321a 0 31
GND
BK 1.5Q
58
3
install 3-pin socket!
5
31
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
54
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
58
WH 1.5Q
+V X321a
Abblentlicht OUTLET A7 CAN: ELECTRIESKEY BOARD
4
/39.E4
5
+K4 A18
A4.X44 E.3
WH 1.5Q
8JB 001 9333001 LBH ID 6200003
GND
HELLAint
X2 4 A18.PWM7
WH 1.5Q
A18.X2
GND
4
HELLA
1
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
3
L
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
3
+K1 +K1 +K1 S3.X1S3.X1S3.X1 B
4
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN:
5 S3.X2 4/7 +K1
Kl.49aR.2
Kl.49aL.2
/7.B5
A
/7.B5
1
E3.Xb
E4.Xb
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
COUNTRYSPECIFIC TYPE/EXECUTION 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
26 114
A18.X1
5
A4.X50
4
RD,RD 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4.X50
L.4
A4 =K +K2
RD 1.5Q RD 1.5Q
Kl.30.F07 Kl.30
6
7 ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: /94.C3 FLASHING SPEED INPUT A18 HAZARD WARNING LIGHT +K4 A =K A18.Flasher X1 6
/19.F5 /39.B3
*
L.3
86
8
30
A18.X1
10
A
RD 1.5Q
3
ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: /94.D3 OUTLET A1 A18 HAZARD WARNING LIGHT +K4 A =K A18.PWM1 X1 10
4
K240
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE universal INDICATOR SIGNAL A A16b.UI3 6 X1
A16b.X1 +K2
/87.C2
A16b +K2 A
6
3
6
2
1
V53
85
87
87a
GND WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
L.1
A4.X50 RD 1.5Q WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q U.3
U.4
A4.X58
4
A4.X58
8
7
11
A4.X50
L.11
V89
M.7
C E
30
86
30
K22
F07B
86
30
K22a
10A RD 87a
87
85
86
A
K22b
V11
V12
87a
87
V13
85
87a
87
X1.J 10A RD
30
86
A
K25 V14
E
85
87a
87
X2.J 10A RD
30
86
49
K26
GND
87a
87
85
GND
49a
9
6
A4.X58 U.6
E1 / H18 RIGHT REAR
WH 1.5Q
E
/25.D7
Kl.49
10
X1.S X1.B
WH 1.5Q
9
M.10 OLD M.3
D
V88
10
L.6
Kl.49
E5 / H17 LEFT REAR
A4.X51
WH 1.5Q 10
WH 1.5Q 6
A4.X50
/25.E4
8 8
7
+K6 X1.S X1.B E3 / H15 LEFT FRONT
56
Kl.49
hb/lbF/A LH 0
30
X1.S X1.B
/25.D2
R
=K +K1 S3 0
56a
L.5
WH 1.5Q
56b
WH 1.5Q 5
WH 1.5Q 12
49a
7
+K6 X1.S X1.B
A4.X50
M.12 OLD M.1
WH 1.5Q
R
A4.X51
Kl.49
5
E
GND
V87
/25.E5
2
31 GND
V86
E4 / H16 RIGHT FRONT
5
3
X3.J 10A RD
E
85
GND
WH 1.5Q 2
WH 1.5Q 3
WH 1.5Q L
0
GND
V85
GND
+K1 S3.X1
0
A
K1
V84 V83
F07bKL. 15
R07B L07B
C
V15
A
WH 1.5Q
E
A4.X51 OLD M.6
A4 =K +K2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
L.8
A4.X50
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
B
3
B
L
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
27 114
2
1
3
4
5
OPTION HORN OPERATION VIA PUSHBUTTON SWITCH ON LH CONTROL LEVER
WH 1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
12
4
B
A4.X49
A4 =K +K2
31
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
1
+K2 XMSP6a
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
6
Kl.15
3 2
=K
S
BK 1.5Q
15A BU
A18.X2
86
30
E
K8
F18
V59
10
85
87
10A RD
87a
2
R20 L20
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
1
B10.X2 +H
R18
GND
L18
GND
GND
A4.X44
4
4
1
1
3
1
53
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
31b
M3.X
*
M9.X
1
1
+K2 M3
M4.X
53a
M
+K4 M9 0
M
E
2
0
2
M9.X
31
2
sw
sw
31
swbl
wsbl
+K1 M4 0
bl
+
M
2
M3.X
2
53
3
D
2
7/7
6
6
4
2
6/7
7 1 7
7
53a
2
WH 1.5Q
1
swbl
wsbl
53c
M
WH 1.5Q 0 J 1
1
53
+K1 M2 0
wash 53b
31b
bl
1
1
M3.X
1 +
WH 1.5Q 6
3
* M4.X
1/7
H
4
horn
0 1
M2.X2
4
M2.X1
3
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
S3.X2
5
1
=K +H2 XMSP1a
*
E.7 WH 1.5Q
K.1
1
A4.X49
E.9
7
A4.X44
1
9
47
*
X1 47 A17b.GND_PWM2 D +H3 EARTH OPTIONS A17b /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
A
1
A
B10a.X2 +H
A
K.12
4
WH 1.5Q
+H B10
15
WH 1.5Q 6
1.5Q 1.5Q 1.5Q 1.5Q 1.5Q 1.5Q
1
F20
1
WH WH WH WH WH WH
WH 1.5Q
1
B10.X1
5
31b
0 K5a.X
6905155
31b Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K2 XMSP6a
S3.X1 Ersteller
BK 1.5Q
15
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
J
WH 1.5Q
F
Zustand
+K1 K5a E
V2 B10a 1 +H +H V2.X2 1/1
2
A18.X1
G
Kl.15
1 1
A4 =K +K2
*
86
I
0
0 1
E
3
WH 1.5Q
25
+K6 X1.S X1.B
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
SW 1.5Q 5
25
K5a.X
5
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
OPT3 sw5
S3 +K1
D
V2.X1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
ELECTRIC KEYPAD ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: CAN: /94.D3 OUTLET A3 /94.D3 OUTLET A4 A18 WINDSCREEN WIPER A18 WASHING PUMP REAR +K4 +K4 A A =K =K A18.PWM3 A18.PWM4 X1 12 X2 1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput2 (Array A17b OPTIONS +H3 A A17b.PWM2 X1 5
B
8
+K Splice;.X9
OPT1 sw4 OPT2 sw3
7
12
A
6
8
+K2 XMSP6a
+K2 XMSP6a
5
+K2 XMSP6a
7
1
F
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
WINDSCREEN WASHER FRONT AND REAR ; HOOTER 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
28 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Splice.X9
A18 +K4
+K6 X1.S
+K4
S
31b
BK 1.5Q
6
12
86
30
K8 V44
10
87a
A
87
85
F18 10A RD
85
GND
87
A
87a
GND
C
GND
*
A4.X49
A4.X44
1
A4.X55 +K2
A4.X44
11
9
GND
K.1
E.9
7
BK 1.5Q
86
K271
*
E.7
6
M
M4 0
53
+K2 M3
sw
M4.X
6
6
4
4
sw
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
15 31b
S3.X1
+K2 XMSP6a
8
1
M9.X
31
BK 1.5Q
7
7
M3.X +K2
2
1
1
+K4 M9 0
2
2
J
53
0 J 1
M
2
7
31
53a
2
53b
S3.X2
1
M
2 7/7
1
3
31b
M9.X
1
+K2 XMSP6a
+K2 XMSP6a
5
E
WH 1.5Q
+K1 M2
6/7
M
53a
3
+ wsbl
swbl
bl
wsbl
1 53c
53
4
D
+K2 * M3.X
2
1 +
31b
4
1
+K2 M3.X
swbl
1
1
1
1
3
+K2 M3.X
2
4
* M4.X
bl
1/7
H
M2.X2
4
M2.X1
3
S3 +K1
WH 1.5Q
+K2 XMSP6a
7
1
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
12
E 30
+K2 XMSP6a
+H2 XMSP1a
B
A4 =K +K2
1
F20 15A BU
5
A4.X49
V59
0
E
A18.X2
K.12
31
6
A18.PWM4 X2 1
1
1
+K1 K5 Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4 =K +K2
A
Kl.15
15
4
9
+K2 +K2 A4.X55 A4.X55
4 5
10
2
I 86
B10.X2 +H =H
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
*
5
3
G
0
D
1
2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
3 2
B
1
A18.X1 =H +H B10.X1 =H +H B10
ELEKTRICKEYPAD CAN: Output A4 windscreen washer rear
A18.PWM3 X1 12
25
25
/39.D4
ELEKTRICKEYPAD CAN: /39.D4 Output A3 SWindscreen wiper A18
1
A
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
WINDSCREEN WASHER FRONT AND REAR ; HOOTER 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
29 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
WH 1.5Q
A
A
A4.X58 A4 =K +K2
E1
PROJ: 8920980_003
F31A
Kl. 30
E1 30
KL. 15
E2
B
oder Kl. 30
F31B
30
KL. 15
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
10A RD
85
86
K31B
V16
10A RD
E1 A E2
A
V17
E1 A E2
87a
A
R31A
87
85
R31B GND
L31A
GND
L31B
C
XMSP7a
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
+K2 XMSP6.18
6
4
7
Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
3
4
5
WH 2Q 2
1
XMSP7a
E
2
E11b.X
+K2 XMSP6.18
8
2
OPTION XENON WORKING PROJECTOR Ident.Nr.
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT CABIN XENON WORKING PROJECTOR
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
+K3 E11b 0
BK 2Q
E11a.X
1
2
2
OPTION XENON WORKING PROJECTOR Ersteller
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
D
1
SW 1.5Q
+K3 E11a
SW 1.5Q
2
+K3 XMSP7a
1
E11b.X
1
2
E11.X
A4.46.8 +K2
4
3 1
1
+K3 E11
E11a.X
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q 5
1
2
E10b.X
2
E10a..X
SW 1.5Q
WH 2Q
2 SW 1.5Q 1
1 2
2
E11.X
1
+K3 E10b 0
8
2
2
1
+K3 E10a
SW 1.5Q
+K3 XMSP7a
E10b.X
1
2
E10.X
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
A4.46.4 +K2
BK 2Q
+K3 E10
E10a..X
G.8
3
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
A4.X46
G.7
4
SW 1.5Q
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
A4.X46
G.4
8
A4.X46
G.3
7
A4.X46
4
3
X2 5 A18.PWM8 =K A +K4 WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT A18 /94.E3 OUTLET A8 CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
1
A18.X2
GND
5
GND
F
Zustand
86
K31A
E10.X
E
Kl. 15
Kl. 30
E2 oder
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Kl. 15
Kl. 30
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT
B
C
5
U.5
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
30 114
F
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A4.X58
Verb.
1
=K+K2A4.X58:7
8
OLE3 U.8
A4 =K +K2
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR AM REAR
A
E2
E1 30
oder
F32A
Kl. 30
Kl. 15
WH 1.5Q E1
Kl. 30
Kl. 15
Kl. 30
A
KL. 15
86
V32C
E2 oder
K32A
Kl. 30
F32B
KL. 15
V18
10A RD
B
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
85
10A RD
E1 A E2
A
R32A L32A
87
85
X58
GND
/32.A7
GND
Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
10
9
WH 2Q 14
WH 2Q WH 2Q 4
BK 2Q
+H2 XMSP1a
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
F
3
Ident.Nr.
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR REAR 3
2
+H X16.B X16.S
E
BK 2Q
E17.X
BK 2Q Ersteller
3 2
2
2
+H2 XMSP1a
3
WH 2Q 1
+H1 E17
E16
+H X16.B X16.S
D
1
E17.X
1
E16.X
X1.S
4
E16.X
13
6
11 11 1
1
+H X16.S X16.B
1
X2 6 A18.PWM9 =K A +K4 A18 WORKING PROJECTOR REAR /94.E3 OUTLET A9 CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
G.10
13
+K6 X1.S X1.B
X1.S
2
A18.X2
A4.X46
G.9
WH 2Q
+H X16.S X16.B
A4.X46
G.6
WH 2Q
+K6 X1.S X1.B
A4.X46
12
G.5
WH 2Q
A4.X46
WH 2Q
5
C
6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
87a
L32B
GND
F
Zustand
B V19
R32B
GND
BK 2Q
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
86
K32B
2
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
30
E1 A E2
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
31 114
4
5
6
7
7
3
+K2 A4.X58 U7
A4 =K +K2
E2 oder
F33A
Kl. 30
KL. 15
V33C
E2
86
X58
0
Kl. 15
E1 30
A
/31.C8
E1
Kl. 30
Kl. 15
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR AM CAB ROOF
Kl. 30
A
8
WH 1.5Q
2
1
oder
K33A
Kl. 30
F33B
KL. 15
V20
10A RD
B
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
10A RD
85
E1 A E2
R33A
87a
87
85
GND GND
GND
+K3 XMSP7a Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
10 10
1
1.5Q 1 2
+K3 X28a.S
E
1.5Q
2
E13.b.X
Ident.Nr.
6
F
2
ZeichNr.
5
2
BK 2Q
+K3 XMSP7a
1
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 4
1
+K3 E13.b
2
WH 2Q 12 WH 2Q
1 1 1
E13.b.X
1.5Q
X28a.S +K3
1.5Q 2
+K3 X29.S X29.B
WORKING PROJECTOR REAR CABIN 3
D
2
2
E13a.X
BK 2Q
+K3 XMSP7a
4
WORKING PROJECTOR DOUBLE
2
2
2
2
+K3 X28.S X28.B
G.12
1
+K3 E13a
SW 1.5Q
2
E13.X
A4.X46
2
11 WH 2Q
9 9
WH 2Q 1
E13a.X
2
1.5Q
+K3 X26a.S
+K3 X29.B X29.S
1
1 2
E12.b.X
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
1
+K3 E13
BK 2Q
+K3 XMSP7a
G.11
SW 1.5Q
1
1.5Q
E13.X
=K
3
A4.X46
1
8
+K3 E12.b
1.5Q
2
SW 1.5Q
=K
X27.S X27.B
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
+K3 X28.B X28.S
1
2
E12a.X
WORKING PROJECTOR SIMPLE
1
WH 2Q
+K3 E12a
2 2
+K3 X26.S X26.B
1 1
2
E12.X
E12.b.X
1.5Q
E12a.X
2
1
+K3 E12
X26a.S +K3
1
=K +K3 X27.B X27.S
WORKING PROJECTOR DOUBLE
2
1
E12.X
G.2
8
7 7 1
WH 2Q
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
SW 1.5Q
=K +K3 X26.B X26.S
A4.X46
WH 2Q
G.1
1
WORKING PROJECTOR SIMPLE
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
2
A4.X46
WH 2Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
C
F
Zustand
V21
L33B
BK 2Q
E
B
R33B
GND
L33A
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
86
K33B
A
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
C
30
E1 A E2
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
32 114
4
ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: /94.D3 OUTLET A2 A18 WARNING BEACON +K4 A =K A18.PWM2 X1 11
6
7
WH 1.5Q
8
ELECTRIC KEYPAD CAN: /94.D3 OUTLET A5 A18 REAR WINDOW HEATER +K4 A =K A18.PWM5 X2 2
Option BACKUP ALARM OPTICAL OPTIONAL REVERSINGACTIVE
RD 1Q
A18.X2 =K
BK 1.5Q H.4
A4.X47
Kl. 30
A4 =K +K2
1
=K +K2 K10
E
1
S212.X1
5
9
5
86
F74
S212.X2
30
V57
87a
10A RD 87a
87
R74
85
WH 1.5Q Masse
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
2
2
WH 2.5Q +K3
+K3
R6a
R6b
0
0 2
1 1
BK 2.5Q
=K BK 2.5Q
+K2 XMSP6.13
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
6
E
2
R12.X2
BK 2.5Q
2
R6b.X
Splice;.X12 +K3
5
1
0
2
WARNING BEACON ; MIRROR AND REAR WINDOW HEATER 4
6
1
1
R12.X1 +K2 R12
1
2
Verb.
OLE4
WH 2.5Q
OPTION MIRROR HEATING
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
R6b.X
1
R6a.X
D
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
=K+K4S212.X2:9 1
R6a.X
WH 1.5Q
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
=K
H.2
=K
6
WH 1.5Q
+K3 Splice;.X11
BK 2.5Q
M
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
36
WH 1.5Q REVERSING LIGHT
1
+K3 H22
X1.37
/25.A8
1
H22.X
/25.A8
X1.37
5
5
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S
WH 1.5Q
+K6
36
35
35
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
A4.X47
H.1
L.10
WH 1.5Q 15
WH 1.5Q
A4.X50
L.9
+K6 X1.S
WH 1.5Q
A4.X50
R.8
10
9
8
A4.X55
A4.X47
WH 2.5Q
1
GND
GND
Ausgabe
C
L74
L25
Datum
85 GND
GND
R25
Ersteller
87
A
V58
A
86
15A BU
K9
F25
F
Zustand
+K2 XMSP6e
B
Kl. 15
10 10
9
12
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
3
S212.X2
2 1 0
WH 1.5Q
E
0 S212 +K4
1 E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
S212a
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
A4 =K +K2
S212.X1
1
+K2 A4.X50.12a
L.12
3
B
A4.X50
A
4
A18.X1
11
A
5
2
3
WH 1.5Q
2
1
1
+K2 XMSP6c
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
1 Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
33 114
RD 2.5Q WH 1.5Q
8
RD 2.5Q WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
S.5
A4.X56
=K T1.X
5
S.9
A4.X56
9
O.5
A4.X53
5
C.7
A4.X42
7
A
7
=K 4
1
+
24V +K2
A4 =K +K2
T1
A4.X56 S.7
A4.X56
5 BK 1.5Q
6 WH 1.5Q
3 BK 1.5Q
S.3
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
RD 1.5Q
+K4 X22a.B X22a.S +K4
12
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
3
=K 7
A3.X1
=K
7
+K3 A3
1
X70.X2
E
1
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
1
+K3 B11l
+K3 B11r
2 B11l.X2
2
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ; ELECTRICAL SOCKET 12V ; RADIO ; LOUDSPEAKER
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
B11r.X1
1
B11l.X1
1
+
CIGARETTE LIGHTER 24V
Datum
RD BNRD BK BN
2
ELECTRICAL SOCKET 12V
Ersteller
+K3
=K RD 0.75Q
=K
W1
6 6
5
4
2
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
1
10165605
1
1
1
BK 0.75Q
=K
RD 0.75Q +
X70.X1 +K5 X70 10165605
1
2
1 2
D
LS li 5
4
3
LS re 3
=K
1
8
R A D I O
A3.X2
+K4 X71
4 +
BK 0.75Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
IGN
8
=K
4
XMSP6a +K2
F
Zustand
C
12
O.3
GND
BK 1.5Q
L76 RD 1.5Q
L75
11
R76
BK 1.5Q
7
3
6
A4.X53
=K
11
R75
GND
*
=K
A
85
GND
R.6
=K
4
5
B A
L30
A4.X55
6
RD 1.5Q
87
+
2
WH 1.5Q
87a
=K
10A RD
4
/19.B8 F8 Kl.58
F76
10A RD
3
PROJ: 8920980_003
R30
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
V3
0
A
D
F75
K12
B
C
86
T1.X
4
15A BU
WH 1.5Q
30
F30
E
3
WH 1.5Q
E
+
2
0
E
+K2 XMSP6a
12V
WH 1.5Q
A4 =K +K2
Kl. 30
A4 =K +K2
A
BK 2.5Q
6
BK 2.5Q
5
1
4
RD 2.5Q
3
4
2
1
B11r.X2
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
34 114
/99.C2
/99.C2
+K4 A22 /99.C2
/99.C2
A
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
2
A21.X1
RD 1Q
A19.X1
A19.X1
A19.X1
A19.X1
8
L10
X1 8 A19.CAN_Low A +K4 CAN_Low A19 /98.D4 CAN_Low CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
BK 1.5Q
WH 0.5Q
7
RD 1Q
A21.X1
=K
F.11
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: CAN: /96.C2 CAN1_Low OUT /96.C2 CAN1_High OUT CAN1_Low OUT CAN1_High OUT A A A21.CAN1 A21.CAN1 X1 16 X1 17
X1 7 A19.CAN_High A +K4 CAN_High A19 /98.D4 CAN_High CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
X1 4 A19.CAN_Low A +K4 CAN_Low A19 /98.C4 CAN_Low CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
C
D
X1 3 A19.CAN_High A +K4 CAN_High A19 /98.C4 CAN_High CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
E
+K4
+K4
+K4
+K4
RD 1Q BU 1Q
8
F Ident.Nr.
DISPLAY UNIT CAN BUS 3
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
3
8
A19.X2 7
11 Datum
HEAT/AIR CON CAN: CAN_High CAN_High A A22.CAN_High X1 3
=K
+K2 XMSP6c Ersteller
A21.X1
X1 13 X1 14 A21.CAN1 A21.CAN1 A A +K4 +K4 CAN1_Low INPUT CAN1_High INPUT A21 A21 /96.C2 CAN1_Low ᕮ; /96.C2 CAN1_High ᕮ; CAN: CAN: HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
=K
A4.X45
2
A21.X1
=K
WH,WH 0.5Q,0.5Q
+K2 XMSP6b
=K
R10
GND
*
=K
=K
BU 1Q
2
A13a.X +K1
1
5A LBN
A15.CAN.X
B
X1 7 A22.CAN_High A CAN_High CAN_High CAN: HEAT/AIR CON
A22.X1
=K F10
A15.CAN.X
CAN HIGH 3 A A15.CAN3H .CAN.X 7
14
A22.X1
A22.X1
E
7
8
A22.X1
HEAT/AIR CON CAN: CAN_Low CAN_Low A A22.CAN_Low X1 4
WIRING HARNESS PREPARATION COLOUR GRAPHIC DISPLAY
Kl. 15
WH 0.5Q
0.5Q BK
=K
X1 8 A22.CAN_Low A CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN: HEAT/AIR CON
+K4 A22
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
=K
A15 +K2 =K
17
RD 0.5Q BU 0.5Q
A4 =K +K2
A11.X1 +K4 =K
/85.C1 CAN LOW 3 A A15.CAN3L .CAN.X 2
RD 1Q
A11.X1 +K4 =K
=K
A15 +K2 =K
3
6
+K2 XMSP6a
/85.C1
2
9
A11 +K4 =K
MASTER MODULE CAN:
BU 1Q
8
/95.D4
MASTER MODULE CAN:
13
7
A11 +K4 =K
MAINKEY BOARD CAN: CAN_High CAN_High A A11.CAN_High X1 3
16
6
/95.D4
CAN BUS 3
4
=K
5
N
A
4
=K
4
3
2
3
rpm time hours
4
2
=K
PROJ: 8920980_003
STOP
MAINKEY BOARD CAN: CAN_Low CAN_Low A A11.CAN_Low X1 4
8
BU 1Q
T
/95.D4
7
X1 7 A11.CAN_High A CAN_High CAN_High CAN: MAINKEY BOARD
3
4
/95.E4
=K +K4 A11
RD 1Q
3/
F
Zustand
A13.X2 +K1 =K
A11.X1
7
4
1
A13.X1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
2
BK 1.5Q
1/2
1/
1/1
D
MP
1
1
B
check
A11.X1
7
0
mph km/h
50
120
+K1 A13
A 12
0
40
11
1
100
90
40
10
A 13
=K
BU 1Q
1
5
30
20
=K X1 8 A11.CAN_Low A CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN: MAINKEY BOARD
=K +K4 A11
A 23
6
3
4
2
5
8
3
A
C
4
4
3
4
2
1
4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
35 114
5
A11.CAN_Low X1 4
A11.CAN_High X1 3
+K4 A22.X1
W156 +WL006 BU
A11.X1
X1 8 A22.CAN_Low CAN_Low /43.C2 CAN_Low CAN: HEIZ/KLIMA TASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMA TASTATUR CAN: /43.C2 CAN_Low A22 CAN_Low
+K4 A19.X1
A
+K4 A19.X1
X1 8 A19.CAN_Low
+K4 A19
/42.C4 GND
/41.C4
/41.C4
A21 +K4
+K4 A19
/42.C4
A21.X1
A19.X1
A21.X1
+K4 A19
CAN_High CAN_High CAN: OPTIONS TASTATUR
/42.C4
B
X1 14 A21.CAN1
+K4 A21
/41.C4
/41.D4
A21 +K4
CAN1_High IN CAN1_High IN CAN: HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: CAN1_High OUT CAN1_High OUT
C
A21.CAN1 X1 17
A21.X1
A19.X1
X1 4 A19.CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN: OPTIONS TASTATUR
D
X1 3 A19.CAN_High
+K4 A19
/42.C4
CAN_High CAN_High CAN: OPTIONS TASTATUR E
A4.X45
+K2 XMSP6b
3
4
A19.X2
7
8
F.11
W156 +WL036 RD 2
W156 +WL036 BU
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
A15.CAN3H .CAN.X 7
A21.CAN1 X1 16
X1 7 A19.CAN_High
CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN: OPTIONS TASTATUR
CAN HIGH 3
A15..CAN.X
CAN1_Low IN CAN1_Low IN CAN: HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: CAN1_Low OUT CAN1_Low OUT
W156 +WL045 RD
4
W156 +WL045 BU
Kl. 15 F10 5A LBN
+K4 A21
A22.CAN_High X1 3
A22.X1 +K4
A15 +K2
X1 13 A21.CAN1
+K4 A22.X1 +K4
E
A21.X1
CAN_High /43.C2 CAN_High CAN: HEIZ/KLIMA TASTATUR HEIZ/KLIMA TASTATUR CAN: /43.C2 CAN_High A22 CAN_High
A22.CAN_Low X1 4
A4 =K +K2
A15..CAN.X
+K4 A22
8
WH 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
+K4
/33.C1 CAN LOW 3 A15.CAN3L .CAN.X 2
X1 7 A22.CAN_High
+K4 A22
11
E
+K4 A22.X1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
W156 +WL005 RD W156 +WL005 BU
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A11.X1
A15 +K2
7
6
/33.C1
W156 +WL010 RD
9
A11 +K4
14
8
/40.C4
17
7
A11 +K4
W156 +WL034 RD
6
/40.C4
+K2 XMSP6a
4
5
N
Master Modul CAN:
3
rpm time hours
4
3
3
2
1
2
STOP
Master Modul CAN:
2
T
W156 +WL010 BU
4
BK 1.5Q
4
1/1
B
A13.X2 +K1
/40.C4
13
0
40
1/
3/
/40.C4
MP
2 1
1/2
1
A13.X1
check
50
120
mph km/h
CAN CONNECTION 3 (C)
CAN_High CAN_High CAN: HAUPTTASTATUR HAUPTTASTATUR CAN: CAN_High CAN_High
16
A 12
0
A
W156 +WL034 BU
11
1
10
40
100 90
+K4 A11
CAN_Low CAN_Low CAN: HAUPTTASTATUR HAUPTTASTATUR CAN: CAN_Low CAN_Low
8
4
A 13
X1 7 A11.CAN_High
3
30
20
+K1 A13
+K4 A11
5
1
A 23
W156 +WL006 RD
4
3
3 2
A11.X1
X1 8 A11.CAN_Low
7
A11.X1
4
A
7
7
DISPLAY CAN
6
7
4
8
3
8
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
DISPLAY UNIT CAN BUS 3 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
36 114
3
4
5 MASTER MODULE CAN:
A15 +K2 =K
CAN HIGH 1 A A15.CAN1H .CAN.X 5
A15.CAN.X
A17a.X1.43.57 +H3
A16c.X1
B 2
1
A17a.X1.43.57 +H3
44
39
RD 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
38 38
X1.S X1.B
BU 1Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
CAN BUS 1
+H3 A16a /86.C5
X1 43 A16a.CAN_Low D CAN low (Res verb.) CAN low CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
X1 57 A16a.CAN_High
+H3 A16a /86.D5
CAN high (Res verb.) CAN high CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
/86.C5
A16a.X1
A16c.X1
+H3 A16a.X1.44
X1 58 A16a.CAN_High
+H3 A16a
58
58
44
A17a.CAN_High X1 57
A17a.X1
X1 44 A16a.CAN_Low D CAN low CAN low CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
+H3 A16a
/88.C5
A16c +H3
/88.D5
A16c +H3
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: CAN high CAN high
D
A16c.CAN_High X1 57
A16c.X1
57
A16a.X1
+H3
BU 1Q
A16a.X1
8
A16a.X1
A17a.X1
RD 1Q
A700D.X2
BU 1Q
A700D.X2
A700D.CAN1H.1 X2 8
9
A700D.CAN1L.2 X2 9
CAN1 HIGH
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: CAN low CAN low D A16c.CAN_Low X1 43
CAN high CAN high CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
RD 1Q
A700D +M
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D5 CAN high A17a CAN high
/88.D5
+H3 XA16a.X1.58
E 1
/93.C6 CAN1 LOW
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C5 CAN low A17a CAN low +H3 D A17a.CAN_Low X1 43
/88.C5
+H3 A16c
43
ENGINEECU CAN:
+H3 A16c
BU 1Q
ENGINEECU CAN:
CAN high /90.D5 CAN high CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
C
X1 58 A16c.CAN_High
1
CAN: ENGINEECU
+H3 A17a
X1 44 A16c.CAN_Low D CAN low CAN low CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
57
CAN: ENGINEECU
A16c.X1
X1 58 A17a.CAN_High
RD 1Q
/93.C6
/93.C6
A700D +M
CAN1 RES
A17a.X1
58
/93.C6
+M A700D
X1 44 A17a.CAN_Low D +H3 CAN low A17a /90.C5 CAN low CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
43
CAN1 LOW
A17a.X1
57
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+M A700D
X2 54 A700D.CAN1R
44
A700D.X2
X2 40 A700D.CAN1L.1
54
A700D.X2
40
BU 1Q
43
E
RD 1Q
=K
BU 1Q
=K
A
5
A15.CAN.X
+K6 X1.S X1.B
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
8
MASTER MODULE CAN:
4
CAN LOW 1 A A15.CAN1L .CAN.X 4
B
C
7
/85.C1
A15 +K2 =K
OUTPUT MODULE 3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
A
OUTPUT MODULE 2
/85.C1
6
39
2
1
CAN high CAN high CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
/86.D5
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
CAN BUS 1 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
37 114
2
+K A17b.X1.44
29
43
X1 29 A17c.CAN_Res
+H3 A17c
RESERVE /92.E2 CAN MATCHING RESISTOR CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
+H3 A17c.X1
58
A17c.CAN_High X1 58
59
C
59
58
X1.S X1.B
B
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.D5 CAN high A17c CAN high
44
A17c.X1 58
A17c.X1
57
CAN low CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C5 CAN low A17c CAN low +H3 D A17c X1 44
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
43
58
A16b.CAN_High X1 57
A16b.X1
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
A17b.X1
X1 58 A17b.CAN_High
+H3 A17b.X143a
A17b.X1
X1 57 A17b.CAN_High
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.E2 CAN MATCHING RESISTOR A17b CAN END
+H3 A17b
+H3
/91.D5 A17b.CAN_Res X1 29
A17b.X1
57
CAN high CAN high CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
/91.D5
1
+H3 A17b
D
CAN high (CANE m. CAN high CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
E
29
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C5 CAN low A17b CAN low (CANE m. +H3 D A17b.CAN_Low X1 43
58
44
A17b.X1
X1 44 A17b D +H3 CAN low A17b /91.C5 CAN low CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A16d.CAN_High X1 57
+K A17b.X1.58
/92.C5
CAN low (CANE m. CAN_Res verb.)
6
58
A17b.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: CAN high CAN high (Res verb.)
A16d.X1
+H3 A17c
X1 43 A17c.CAN_Low D
CAN BUS 2
CAN high CAN high CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
BU 1Q
A16d.X1
/89.D5
A16d +H3
CAN: MASTER MODULE
RD 1Q
/89.C5
A16d +H3
/87.D5
A16b +K2
43
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: CAN low CAN low (Res verb.) D A16d.CAN_Low X1 43
/89.D5
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: CAN high CAN high (CANE m
/85.C1
57
/89.C5
+K6 X1.S X1.B
.CAN.X 6 A15.CAN2H A CAN HIGH 2
=K +K2 A15
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: CAN low CAN low (CANE m. D A16b.CAN_Low X1 43
A16b.X1
RD 1Q
44
BU 1Q
A15.CAN.X
.CAN.X 3 A15.CAN2L A CAN LOW 2
X1 58 A16d.CAN_High
+H3 A16d
8
WH 1.5Q
1
+H3 A16d
/87.C5
A16b +K2
A16b.CAN_High X1 58
3
2
A15.CAN.X =K +K2 A15
RD 1Q
1 BU 1Q
44
A16d.X1
43
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
A17b..X1.43.57 +K
CAN: MASTER MODULE
1
E
/87.D5
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: CAN high CAN high
A16b.X1
/85.C1
X1 44 A16d.CAN_Low D CAN low CAN low CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
7
A17c.X1 INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: CAN low CAN low D A16b.CAN_Low X1 44
A16b.X1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
A16d.X1
6
WH 1.5Q
A16b +K2
A17b..X1.43.57 +K
5
A
/87.C5
C
4
OUTPUT MODULE 3
OUTPUT MODULE 2
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
A
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
1
ERECTION OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN END (JUMPER) REMOVE!
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
CAN BUS 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
38 114
2
1
3
4
5
SUPPLY ELECTRIC KEYPAD
6
7
8
SUPPLY MAINKEY BOARD
A
A
/27.A5 F07 Kl.30
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
E
F71
10A RD
B
R71
B
XMSP6b +K2
6
4
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
C.6
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
3
A4.X42
C.4
X1 5 A18.Kl30 =K A +K4 SUPPLY A18 /94.C3 SUPPLY CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
A18.X1
2
5
1
X1 1 A18.Kl15 =K A +K4 INFORMATION INPUT A18 /94.C3 INFORMATION INPUT CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
A18.X1
X1 2 A18.GND =K A +K4 SUPPLY EARTH A18 /94.C3 SUPPLY EARTH CAN: ELECTRIC KEYPAD
=K +K4 A11 /95.D4
1
A11.X1
X1 1 A11.Kl15 A +24V SUPPLY CAN: MAINKEY BOARD
=K +K4 A11 /95.D4
2
C
A11.X1 A18.X1
X1 2 A11.GND A SUPPLY EARTH SUPPLY EARTH CAN: MAINKEY BOARD
D
XMSP6c +K2
XMSP6c +K2
7
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
X1 5 A19.Kl15 A +K4 SUPPLY Kl. 15 A19 /98.D4 SUPPLY CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
+K4 A22 /99.C2
BK 1.5Q
A22.X1
X1 1 A22.Kl15 A INFORMATION INPUT INFORMATION INPUT CAN: HEAT/AIR CON
/99.C2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY KEYPADS Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
+K4 A22
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
A22.X1
X1 2 A22.GND A SUPPLY EARTH SUPPLY EARTH CAN: HEAT/AIR CON
+K4 A22 /99.C2
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
5
WH 1.5Q
A22.X1
X1 2 A19.GND A +K4 SUPPLY EARTH A19 /98.C4 SUPPLY EARTH CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
E
2
A19.X1
1
A19.X1
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X1 1 A19.Kl15 A +K4 INFORMATION INPUT A19 /98.C4 INFORMATION INPUT CAN: OPTIONS KEY BOARD
2
A19.X1
5
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
6
/51.B6
SUPPLY HEAT/AIR CON KEY BOARD
Kl.15
/51.B6
SUPPLY OPTION KEYPAD
F
Zustand
*
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
* A4.X42
1
E
GND
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
1
L71
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
XMSP6b +K2
Kl.30
A
X1 5 A22.Kl15 A SUPPLY Kl. 15 SUPPLY CAN: HEAT/AIR CON
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
39 114
4
5
6
7
SUPPLY MASTER MODULE
SUPPLY DIAGNOSTIC PLUG MASTER MODULE CAN:
A /85.C5
A15.COM4.X
5
A15 +K2 =K
Receive (RXD) A A15.RXD .COM4.X 2
Transmit (TXD) A A15.TXD .COM4.X 3
A15.COM4.X
=K
=K
B
A
5A HBR A
R35
R54
L35
L54
GND
A4 =K +K2
Kl. 30
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
/85.B5
A15 +K2 =K
=K
F54
10A RD
GND
E
XMSP6b +K2
C 10A RD
A4.X42
RD 0.5Q
F26
BU 0.5Q
10 BK 0.5Q
9
8
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
XMSP6b +K2
A
C.8
R26 L26 GND
A4.X40
10
9
RD 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
D
A.9
A4.X40 A.10
A9 Kl.30
RD 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
XMSP6b +K2
4
E
CAN: MASTER MODULE
CAN: MASTER MODULE
/85.C1 CAN: MASTER MODULE
CAN: MASTER MODULE
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
+K2 X60
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY MASTER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTIC PLUG
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
*9
4
I
.PWR.X 6 A15.VBat A Kl. 30
H
/85.B1
=K +K2 A15
G
2
.PWR.X 2 A15.DIGIN0 A Kl. 15
B
/85.C1
=K +K2 A15
A
/85.B1
.PWR.X 5 A15.Shield A HOUSING MASTER
/79.C6
=K +K2 A15
A15.X
IMMOBILISER Kl.30
.PWR.X 1 A15.GND A EARTH
=K +K2 A15
A15.X
5
A15.X
6
BK 1.5Q
A15.X
F
Zustand
MASTER MODULE CAN:
E
F35
1
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
SIGNAL Ground (S A A15.GND .COM4.X 5
A15.COM4.X
Kl. 15 E
B
C
4
Kl. 30
A4 =K +K2
MASTER MODULE CAN: /85.B5
A15 +K2 =K
A.4
A4.X40
8
3
3
2
2
1
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
40 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 2
8
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 1
A
A
E
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
Kl. 15
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
E
F43
E
F45
5A VI
F44
10A RD
10A RD
B
B
R45
R44
L43
L45
L44
X
R43
GND
/42.C2
GND
5
A4.X44
XMSP6b +K2
XMSP1a +H2
6
6
+K6 X1.S X1.B
A16a.X1
XMSP1a +H2
7
D
WH 1.5Q
+K2 A16b
X1 2 A16b.24V_logic A VBatt 24V Log SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
40 40
+K2 A16b /87.D2
+K2 A16b /87.E2
VBatt 24V SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
+K2 A16b /87.E2
X1 2 A16a.24V_logic A +H3 VBatt 24V Log A16a /86.C2 SUPPLY 24V LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
+H3 A16a /86.D2
X1 16 A16a.GND_logic A SUPPLY GND LOGIK EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
A16a.X1
X1 30 A16a.24V
+H3 A16a
VBatt 24V SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
/86.E2
31
A16a.X1
30
A16a.X1
X1 31 A16b.GND
2
A16b.X1
X1 30 A16b.24V
31
30
16
A16b.X1
X1 16 A16b.GND_logic A EARTH LOGIK EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
X1 31 A16a.GND
+H3 A16a /86.E2
E
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
X
/87.C2
A16b.X1
2
A16b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=H+H3A17c.X1:2, =K+K6X2.S:33
+K6 X1.S X1.B
BK 1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q
XMSP6b +K2
8
16
+K Splice;.X1
41
WH 1.5Q
A.5
OLE7 Verb.
A4.X40
E.11
WH 1.5Q
S.12
41
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
11
A4.X56
/48.C2
E
A
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A
GND
12
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 1 AND 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
41 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUPPLY Outputmodule 1 A
Kl. 15
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
Kl. 15
A
E
E
E
F47
F43 B
B
/41.B1
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
R47
R48
L47
L48 GND
X
GND
C
A4.X44
+H3 A17a /90.D1
EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
44
WH 1.5Q
D BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
X1 3 A17a.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17a /90.C1 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
10
A17a.X1
X1 15 A17a.24V_B2 A +H3 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 A17a /90.D1 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
17
A17a.X1
XMSP1a +H2
15
BK 1.5Q
X1 1 A17a.24V_B1 A +H3 VBatt 24V Bank1 A17a /90.B1 SUPPLY 24V BANK 1 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
SUPPLY EARTH LOGICAL PART
+K6 X1.S X1.B
9
3
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
X1 16 A17a.GND_logic A
1
BK 1.5Q 2
A17a.X1
X1 2 A17a.24V_logic A +H3 VBatt 24V Log A17a /90.C1 SUPPLY 24V LOGICAL PART CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
XMSP1a +H2
44
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X1.S X1.B
8
43
/44.C2
43
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K+K6X2.S:64 WH 1.5Q
Splice.X2.F43 KL. 15
42
XMSP1a +H2
42
OLE8 Verb. 1
WH 1.5Q
E.10
X1 17 A17a.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17a /90.D1 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
E
/71.C1
Kl.15
A17a.X1
A4.X44
E.8
16
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+K6 X1.S X1.B
10
8
11
A4.X56 +K2 Splice.X2
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
A
R43 L43
S.11
D
10A RD
A
A
C
F48
10A RD
5A VI
SUPPLY LOGIC
SUPPLY BANK 1
SUPPLY BANK 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 1 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
42 114
3
4
5
6
E
F59
F60
10A RD
R52
L59
L60
L51
L52
GND
5
A4.X43
4
GND
A4.X43 D.5
A4.X42
A4.X42 WH 1.5Q
+K6 X1.S X1.B
50
+K6 X1.S X1.B
46
45
+K6 X1.S X1.B
45
C.11
WH 1.5Q
50
WH 1.5Q
B
GND
C.3
46
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
R51
WH 1.5Q
X1 28 A17a.24V_B4
X1 26 A17a.GND
+H3 +H3 A17aVBatt 24V Bk 4 zu M 2/33 (2. AST) A17a /90.E1
SUPPLY 24V Bank4 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
SUPPLY EARTH /90.E1 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
SUPPLY BANK 4
A17a.X1
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 14 A17a.24V_B3 A +H3 A17aVBatt 24V Bk 3 zu M 2/35 (2. AST) /90.D1 SUPPLY 24V Bank3 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
VBatt 24V Bk 4 /91.E2 SUPPLY 24V Bank4 CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
SUPPLY BANK 3
+H3 A17a.DO2 X1 35
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 28 A17b.24V_B4
+H3 A17b
34
32
A17a.DO1 X1 33
8
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.E1 digital output2 A17a 2.AST pump2 zu M 2/14
X1 26 A17b.GND
+H3 A17b /91.E2
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17b.X1
X1 12 A17b.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17b /91.C2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
SUPPLY BANK 4
35
A17b.X1
XMSP1b +H2
7
D
E
14
A17b.DO2 X1 35
X1 12 A17a.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17a /90.C1 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
XMSP1b +H2
+H3
33
A17a.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.E1 digital output1 A17a 2. AST Joystick zu M 2/28
12
+H3
SUPPLY SUPPLY DO2 /90.E1 SUPPLY for DIGTAL OUTPUT 2 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
BK 1.5Q
2
+H3 A17a
SUPPLY SUPPLY DO1 /90.E1 SUPPLY for digital output1 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
28
BK 1.5Q
A17a.X1
26
33
A17b.DO1 X1 33
XMSP1b +H2 BK 1.5Q
+H3
1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.E2 digital output2 A17b 2. AST TRANSMISSION
+H3 A17a
35
XMSP1b +H2
12
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.E2 digital output 1 A17b 2. AST pump1
X1 34 A17a.V_DO2
BK 1.5Q
SUPPLY SUPPLY DO /91.E2 SUPPLY CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17a.X1
X1 32 A17a.V_DO1
26
+H3 A17b
VBatt SUPPLY DO1 /91.E2 SUPPLY CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17a.X1
A17a.X1
X1 34 A17b.V_DO2
+H3 A17b
A17b.X1
34
A17b.X1
X1 32 A17b.V_DO1
14
A17b.X1
32
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
28
E
A
R60
D.4
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
10A RD
R59
GND
+K6 X1.S X1.B
A E
F52
10A RD
A
B
C
F51
10A RD
A
E
51
E
A4 =K +K2
51
Kl. 15
11
A
Kl. 15
SUPPLY Outputmodule 2
3
A4 =K +K2
8
Kl. 15
SUPPLY Outputmodule 1
7
Kl. 15
2
1
A17b.X1
X1 14 A17b.24V_B3 A +H3 VBatt 24V BK 3 A17b /91.D2 SUPPLY 24V Bank3 CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
SUPPLY BANK 3
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 1 AND 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
43 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUPPLY Outputmodule 2 A4 =K +K2
Kl. 15
A Kl. 15
A
E
F55
E
F56
10A RD
10A RD
A
A
E
R56
L55
L56
B
GND
A4.X43
WH 1.5Q 49
A17b.X1
X1 3 A17b.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17b /91.C2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
BK 1.5Q
X1 15 A17b.24V_B2 A +H3 VBatt 24V Bank2 A17b /91.D2 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
SUPPLY BANK 1
A17b.X1
D
17
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17b.X1
6
49
48 48
X1 1 A17b.24V_B1 A +H3 VBatt 24V Bank1 A17b /91.B2 SUPPLY 24V CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
SUPPLY LOGIC
+K6 X1.S X1.B
15
A17b.X1
X1 16 A17b.GND_logic A +H3 VBatt EARTH A17b /91.D2 EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
XMSP1b +H2
5
3
16
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X1.S X1.B
A17b.X1
X1 2 A17b.24V_logic A +H3 VBatt 24V LOGICAL PART A17b /91.C2 SUPPLY 24V CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
XMSP1b +H2
4
1
Splice.X2.F43 KL. 15 WH 1.5Q
XMSP1b +H2
C
D.6
WH 1.5Q
A.12
2
A17b.X1
A4.X40
6
/42.C3
12
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
R55
GND
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
X1 17 A17b.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17b /91.D2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
E
SUPPLY BANK 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
44 114
2
3
4
5
6
WH 1.5Q 9
C.5
5 1 =K+K4S43.X2:9
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
E200.X
D
*
1 WH 1.5Q
+K4 E200
2
+H3 A17b
VBatt DO3 /91.F2 SUPPLY CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
B12.1
BK 1.5Q
/25.D1
54 X1 A17b.GND_DO4
X1 38 A17b
+H3
+H3 A17b
EARTH Backup A17b EARTH /91.D5 CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
VBatt D04 /91.F2 SUPPLY CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
+K2 XMSP6a
2
3
Ident.Nr.
OUTPUT MODULE 2; BACKUP ALARM AND CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 4
5
E
9
STOP LIGHT
X1 36 A17b.V_DO3
A17b.X1
54
A17b.X1
38
A17b.X1
10
E200.X
F
Zustand
20
+K6 X1.S X1.B
20
2
B16b.X
2
1
B16.X
+H5 2 B16a.X1
C WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
OLE9 Verb.
WH 1.5Q 1
1 1
B16b.X
+H5
A4.X44
22
22
21
X2.S X2.B +K6
WH 1.5Q
21 52 52
1
+K6 X1.S X1.B BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X2.S X2.B +K6
+H5 B16
2
+H1 B16c.X1
B
+K2 XMSP6d
BK 1.5Q
53 53
+H5 B16 0
M 2
H22a.X2
B16.X
2
+H1 H22a 0
B16a.X1 1
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
S43.X2
WH 1.5Q
1
B16c.X1 +H1
L22 GND
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X1.S X1.B
10
R22
WH 1.5Q
5
A4.X42
H22a.X1
10A RD A
9
5
10
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X43
R
1
F22
S43.X2
1 0
S43.X1
OPTION ᕪ; Rear side/ERECTION UP bonnet
GND
36
E
L62
D.10
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
L61 GND
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
R62
=K +K4 S43 0
WH 1.5Q
B
A
R61
WH 1.5Q
A
S43.X1
A17b.X1
9
10A RD
A E
10
F62
10A RD
39
F61
+H3 A17b.DO4 39 X1
Kl. 15
BK 1.5Q
E
A4 =K +K2 WH 1.5Q
E
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: Digitalausgang4 /91.F2 A17b Backup ALARM
1
Kl. 15
WH 1.5Q
A
Kl. 15
8
OPTION Back up ALARM CAN BE SWITCHED OFF
SUPPLY Outputmodule 2 A4 =K +K2
7
5
1
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
45 114
2
3
4
5
6
=K +K4 S43 0
1
1
B
GND
=K +K2 XMSP6d
22
WH 1.5Q 22
A4.X44
C
1
1
20
+K6 X1.S X1.B
2
BK 1.5Q D
X1 36 A17b.V_DO3
=H +H3 A17b
54
38
=H +H3 A17b.X1
54 X1 A17b.GND_DO4
X1 38 A17b
Reserve Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
VBatt DO3 Reserve =H+H/51.F2 Versorgung für Digitalausgang3 =H+H/51.F2 Versorgung für Digitalausgang4 CAN: CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2 OUTPUTMODUL 2
=H +H3 A17b
=K+K/7.D1
=H +H3 A17b
+H3 A17b.X1
36
+H3 A17b.X1
B12.1.2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
2
20
B16.X +H5
B16b.X +H5 =H
2
=H 2 +H5 B16a.X1 2
1
+H1 B16c.X1
+H5 B16 0
BK 1.5Q
52 52
53 53
H22a.X2
=H +H5 B16b.X
B16a.X1 +H5 =H
1
21
21
+K6 X2.S X2.B
X2.S X2.B +K6
1
+H5 B16 0
M 2
=K +K6 X1.S X1.B +K6 =K
1
2
+H1 H22a 0
1
B16c.X1 +H1
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
H22a.X1
1
=K +K6 X1.S X1.B +K6 =K
10
S43.X2
R
C.5
+H5 B16.X
A
Verb. A4.X44:5
5
10
PROJ: 8920980_003
5
S43.X1
A4.X42
=H+H/51.D5
E
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
9
1 0
Bremslicht
E
A4.X43
S43.X2
1
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
GND
D.10
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
GND
F22 10A RD
=K+K4S43.X2:9
B
=K +K4 S43a S2 6905201 6002120 0
Rückfahrwarneinrichtung optisch Heckseitig/Montage auf Motorhaube
E
5
A
S43.X1 WH 1.5Q
A
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
A
WH 1.5Q
A17b.DO4 39 X1
F62 10A RD
39
F61 10A RD
A17b +H3 =H
WH 1.5Q
E
=H+H/51.F2
Kl. 15
WH 1.5Q
E
A4 =K +K2
9
Kl. 15
10
Kl. 15
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: Digitalausgang4 Reserve
1
A4 =K +K2
8
Option Back up Alarm which can be switched off
Supply Outputmodule 2 A
7
5
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
OUTPUT MODULE 2; BACKUP ALARM AND CAN BE SWITCHED OFF 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
46 114
2
1
3
4
5
1
+K2 A4.X40.3a
6
7
8
+K2 Kl.30a 1
WH 1.5Q
SUPPLY LHECUUP/CR
B
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
A
R24
R38
L36
L24
L38
GND
GND
A4.X40
A.1
2
2
1
A
R36
GND
A.2
XMSP6c +K2
XMSP6c
2
RD 6Q
Verb.
37 37
1 5A LBN
A4.X41 +K2 B.2
A700D.X2
1
+K2 F216 5A LBN
X2 68 A700D.15
+M A700D
IGNITION ON ENGINEECU
/93.B2
3
=K +K2.RH
B
2 100 mm
RD 1.5Q
F38
10A RD
=K+K2K216:87
F24
40A OG
E
WH 1.5Q
F36
E
68
E
+K6 X1.S X1.B
Kl. 30
Kl. 15
Kl. 30
A4 =K +K2
A4.X40
A
OLE10
A4.X40
3
A.3
A
+K3 S216
C
21
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+M A700D /93.B2
SUPPLY 30b PERFORMANCE PART ENGINEECU
+M A700D /93.C2
X2 15 A700D.31.2 EARTH PERFORMANCE PART ENGINEECU
+M A700D /93.C2
X2 2 A700D.30.2 SUPPLY 30b PERFORMANCE PART ENGINEECU
+M A700D
EARTH PERFORMANCE PART ENGINEECU
/93.C2
X2 4 A700D.30.3
+M A700D
SUPPLY 30b ELECTRONICS ENGINEECU
/93.C2
A700D.X2
0
87 10022680
10022680
87a
E 1
3
A700D.X2
X2 16 A700D.31.3
4
A700D.X2
16
A700D.X2
2
15
A700D.X2
X2 1 A700D.30.1
31
BK 1.5Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
15
+K2 XMSP12.1 +M A700D.X2
D
+K2 K216 0
RD 2.5Q
30
57
X1.S X1.B
57
56
=K +K2.RH
56
X1.S X1.B
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 2.5Q 24
+K6 X1.S X1.B
24
55
RD 2.5Q 21
54
X1.S X1.B
55
+K6 X1.S X1.B
21
54
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+K6 X1.S X1.B
1
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
4
WH 1.5Q
22
XMSP6c
X2 3 A700D.31.1
+M A700D
EARTH ELECTRONICS ENGINEECU
/93.C2
OPTION LAGGING AUTOMATICS
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
MOTOR CONTROL ; AUTOMATIC RUNOUT Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
47 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
CONNECT WITH A4.X56.12 F43
A
F64
10A RD
10A RD
A
A
R63
R64
L63
L64
B
/41.F1
GND
A4.X41 +K2
10
8
X
A4.X41 +K2
WH 1.5Q
D
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
3
29
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
XMSP1d +H2
29
2
28
33
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
XMSP1d +H2
28
1
33
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP1d +H2
A17c.X1
X1 3 A17c.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17c /92.C2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
A17c.X1
X1 15 A17c.24V_B2 A +H3 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 A17c /92.D2 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
17
A17c.X1
X1 1 A17c.24V_B1 A +H3 VBatt 24V Bank1 A17c /92.B2 SUPPLY 24V BANK 1 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
15
A17c.X1
X1 16 A17c.GND_logic A +H3 VBatt EARTH LOGICAL PART A17c /92.D2 EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
3
A17c.X1
X1 2 A17c.24V_logic A +H3 VBatt 24V LOGICAL PART A17c /92.C2 SUPPLY 24V LOGICAL PART CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
1
A17c.X1
16
E 2
E
F63
E
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
E
A
GND
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
Kl. 15
SUPPLY Outputmodul 3
X1 17 A17c.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17c /92.D2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 3 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
48 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUPPLY Outputmodule 3
E
E
F66
L65
L66
GND
A4 =K +K2
B
GND
E F71 10A RD
WH 1.5Q
11
6
A4.X40
A4.X40
C
1 1
8
30
86
+K2 K246
D V48
0
+K4 A18.X1.1a
87a
87
85
1
V36
V37
WH 1.5Q
GND MP
A4.X48
I.11
I.10
MP
10
BK 1.5Q
A18.X1.1b +K4
A4.X48 I.8
A4 =K +K2
X1 1 A18.Kl15 A +K4 A18 INFORMATION INPUT /52.C3 INFORMATION INPUT CAN: ELECTRIESKEY BOARD
WH 1.5Q
A4.X48
12
C.6
A18.X1 WH 1.5Q
A4.X42
I.12
*
C.4
WH 1.5Q
4
* A4.X42
SUPPLY OPTIONS/KLIMATASTATUR
31
WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
5
31
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
30
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
XMSP1d +H2
4
30
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
XMSP1d +H2
6
GND
X1 12 A17c.GND A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A17c /92.C2 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
A17c.X1
A17c.X1
X1 28 A17c.24V_B4
+H3 A17c
SUPPLY 24V Bank4 /92.E2 SUPPLY 24V Bank4 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
26
A17c.X1
X1 14 A17c.24V_B3 A +H3 SUPPLY 24V Bank3 A17c /92.D2 SUPPLY 24V Bank3 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
28
A17c.X1
12
E 14
E
+K6 X2.B X2.S
A
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
WH 1.5Q
R66
32
PROJ: 8920980_003
SUPPLY ELECTRIC KEYPAD
A
R65
32
A
B
A
10A RD
SUPPLY MAIN KEYPAD
10A RD
Kl. 15
F65
C
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput1 (Bank1) A17c Vcc CUTOFF LIGHTING +H3 A A17c.PWM1 X1 4
Kl. 15
A
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
X1 26 A17c.GND
+H3 A17c /92.E2
OPTION AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CUTOFF (ABA)
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLY OUTPUT MODULE 3; AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SHUTDOWN 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
49 114
A17c.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput4 (Bank1) A17c 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 +H3 A A17c.PWM4 X1 7
A17c.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.D2 PWMOutput5 (Bank2) A17c 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 +H3 A A17c.PWM5 X1 18
A17c.X1
F209 5A LBN
F210 10A RD
2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
18
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput3 (Bank1) A17c 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 +H3 A A17c.PWM3 X1 6
8
7
WH 6Q
A17c.X1
1
2
/89.D2
+H3 A16d /89.E2
1
1
Y12b.JPT
2
1
Y11b.JPT
2
SUPPLY 24V SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
+H3 A16d
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17c.X1
50
49
A17c.X1
E
X1 47 X1 48 X1 49 X1 50 A17c.GND_PWM2 A17c.GND_PWM3 A17c.GND_PWM4 A17c.GND_PWM9 D D D D +H3 +H3 +H3 +H3 RESERVE A17cGND 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 A17cGND 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 A17cGND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 A17c /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH /92.C5 EARTH CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3 OUTPUT MODULE 3 OUTPUT MODULE 3 OUTPUT MODULE 3
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
/89.E2
A17c.X1
48
A17c.X1
X1 31 A16d.GND
47
BK 1.5Q
A16d.X1
X1 30 A16d.24V
31
WH 1.5Q
A16d.X1
2
D BK 1.5Q
+H3 A16d
X1 16 A16d.GND_logic A EARTH LOGICAL PART EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
30
BK 1.5Q
A16d.X1
X1 2 A16d.24V_logic A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A16d /89.C2 SUPPLY 24V LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUTMODUL 4
16
WH 1.5Q
A16d.X1
Y12b.JPT 1 +V1 Y12b 0
2
Y12a.JPT
2
Y11a.JPT
2 2
BK 1.5Q
2
Y11b.JPT 1 +V1 Y11b 0
57
56
Y12a.JPT 1 +V1 Y12a 0
57
WH 1.5Q
Y11a.JPT 1 +V1 Y11a 0
2
+K6 X2.S X2.B
56
BK 1.5Q
+K6 X2.S X2.B
55
54
+K6 X2.S X2.B
54
+K6 X2.S X2.B
XMSP200 +K2
1
55
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
XMSP200 +K2
1
C
2
E
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput2 (Bank1) A17c 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 +H3 A A17c.PWM2 X1 5
7
B
1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
6
=K +K2.RH
B
C
5
*
WH 6Q
A
4
6
+K2 A4.Kl.15.a 1
3
5
2
1
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 4; EP 3. AND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
50 114
3
4
5
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
6
E
F9
10A RD
A
A4.X45
WH 1Q 5
B
A4.X45 F.10
F.9
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal CONTROL LEVEROption1 A A16b.UI9 X1 8
/87.C2
A16b +K2
WH 1Q
A16b.X1
18
A16b.X1
*
10
9
4
A4.X44
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal CONTROL LEVER BACKWARD2 A A16b.UI6 X1 19 19
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal /87.D2 CONTROL LEVER FORWARD2 A16b +K2 A A16b.UI5 X1 18
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
9
A16a.X1
8
A16a.X1
XMSP6c +K2
A16b.X1
/87.C2
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal CONTROL LEVER Option2 A A16b.UI10 X1 9
A16b.X1
/87.C2
A16b +K2
A16b.X1
WH 1Q
7
9
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
OPT2 sw3
10
WH 1Q
2
1 0
E 1
OPT3 sw5
S222.X1
7
2
8
9
S222.X2
9
8
1
10
S222.X2
2
6
3
12
1
5
11
3
2
10
5
4
6
COMFORT CONTROL VIA 1 5 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT VIA 1 5 AND 6 2 INFO ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS!
0 S2.1
S2.2
S2.3
S2.4
BK 1.5Q
V N R
WH 1.5Q
+K4 S2
2
S2.X
4
OPT1 sw4
5
1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
0 S222 +K4
6
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16b.X1.10a +K2
5
WH 1Q
A16b.X2.9+10b +K2 WH 1Q
A16b.X2.9+10b +K2
1
A16b.X1.9a +K2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
1
D 1
WH 1Q
23
+K6 X1.B X1.S +K6
23
+K6 X1.B X1.S +K6
LH CONTROL LEVER VNR AND OPTIONS OLE5 OLE6
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
C
+K Splice;.X3
S222.X1
E
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal CONTROL LEVER; Option3 A A16b.UI11 X1 10
WH 1Q
22
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
E.4
22
D
L9
GND
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
L15
10
B
R9
9
F15.3
R15
/39.E8
A
Kl.15
F15.2
10A RD
/39.E3
F15
E
Kl.15
F15.1
/20.C3
INPUT MODULE 1 INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: CAN: /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input9 /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input10 /87.D2 A16a CONTROL LEVER FORWARD1 A16a CONTROL LEVER BACKWARD1 A16b +H3 +H3 +K2 A A A16a.UI9 A16a.UI10 X1 8 X1 9
8
A
/20.B2
8
A
7
Kl. 15
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
LHCONTROL LEVER SWITCH COMFORT CONTROL ; 3 AND 4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
Verb. Verb.
1 1
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
=K+K4S222.X2:9 =K+K4S222.X2:10
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
51 114
A16b.X1
35
A16b.24V X1 35
RD 0.5Q
21
A
B
15 15
14 14 BU 0.5Q
12
2
/87.E2
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V throttle transmitter2
3
+K6 X2.B X2.S
12
11 11
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q 1
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
A16b.X1
BU 0.5Q
A16a.X1
25
A16a.X1
/87.D2
A16a.UI16 X1 25
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
A16b.X1
A16a.24V X1 39
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal throttle transmitter2 A A16b.UI8 X1 21
A16b +K2
+H3
5
+K6 R5 R5.X
6
4
3
+
2
5
BK 0.5Q
D
EARTH InchPot.1 EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
16
A16b.X1
X1 67 A16a.GND
EARTH InchPot.2 EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
+H3 A16a /86.E5
EARTH throttle transmitter1 EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
63
67
A16a.X1
X1 62 A16b.GND
/87.D5
E
3
62
1
A16b.X1 +K2 A16b
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
63
3
X1 63 A16a.GND
16
13 BK 0.5Q
13
X2.S X2.B +K6
1
/86.D5
signal
2
X2.S X2.B +K6
+H3 A16a
6
3 signal
5
2
2
4
+
2
A16a.X1
1
6
3
1
+
BK 0.5Q
R1.X
signal
R5.X
6
3 signal
2
+
+K6 R1
4
1 4
5
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
A16b.24V X1 34
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.E2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input16 A16a throttle transmitter1
8
C
R1.X
D
/86.F2
A16a +H3
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V throttle transmitter1
7
3
+K6 X2.B X2.S
2
/87.E2
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V InchPotentiometer2
6
39
A16b.X1
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
/87.D2
A16b +K2
5
RD 0.5Q
B
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal InchPotentiometer2 A A16b.UI7 X1 20
21
A16a.X1
RD 0.5Q
A16a.X1
4
20
INPUT MODULE 1 INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: CAN: SUPPLY 24V /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input8 24V InchPotentiometer1A16a InchPotentiometer1 +H3 A A16a.24V A16a.UI8 X1 35 X1 21 35
/86.E2
A16a +H3
A
3
34
2
1
X1 63 A16b.GND
+K2 A16b /87.D5
EARTH throttler transmitter EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
ANGLE SENSOR INCH/GAS PEDAL Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
52 114
A17b.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput13 (Bank4) A17a oil engine1 +H3 A A17a.PWM13 X1 22
A17a.X1
8
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput14 (Bank4) A17a oil engine2 +H3 A A17a.PWM14 X1 23
A17a.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: A /90.D1 PWMOutput8 (Bank2) A17a Swivel angle limitation. oil engine 1 +H3 A A17a.PWM8 X1 21
A17a.X1
21
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput1 (Bank A17b OVERSPEED PROTECTION +H3 A A17b.PWM1 X1 4
7
23
A17a.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput9 (Bank3) A17a cruising range1 +H3 A A17a.PWM9 X1 8
6
22
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput11 (Bank3) A17a cruising range3 +H3 A A17a.PWM11 X1 10
5
4
A17a.X1
4
10
A17a.X1
11
A
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput10 (Bank3) A17a cruising range2 +H3 A A17a.PWM10 X1 9 9
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput12 (Bank3) A17a Modulation +H3 A A17a.PWM12 X1 11
3
8
2
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Y6.3
Y16.JPT
YEP2.DT
1
1
2
Y57.DT
H G
E
YEP1.DT
2
H
G F
F
1
+F3 Y57
Y6.1
0 E Y6.X
1
1
2
Y57.DT
2
Y6.2
2
+H Y16
D
YEP2.DT 1 +F3 YEP2
2
MO1
YEP1.DT 1 +F3 YEP1
2
+F3 Y6
C
1
2
B
D
B
A
C
Y16.JPT Y6.X A
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
D
+H3 A17a
+H3 A17a
EARTH Modulation /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 2 /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
X1 52 A17a.GND_PWM11
+H3 A17a
EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 3 /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
X1 46 A17b.GND_PWM1 D +H3 EARTH overspeed A17b /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17a.X1
X1 64 A17a.GND_PWM13
+H3 A17a
A17a.X1
X1 65 A17a.GND_PWM14
EARTH oil engine1 /90.D5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
+H3 A17a
EARTH oil engine2 /90.E5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
63
A17a.X1
65
A17b.X1
X1 50 A17a.GND_PWM9 D +H3 EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 1 A17a /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
64
A17a.X1
46
A17a.X1
X1 51 A17a.GND_PWM10
50
A17a.X1
X1 53 A17a.GND_PWM12
51
A17a.X1
52
E 53
E
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
X1 63 A17a.GND_PWM8
+H3 A17a /90.D5
Swivel angle limitation. oil engine 1 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
TRAVEL RANGES ; SWIVEL ANGLE HYDRO MOTORS OVERSPEED PROTECTION
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
53 114
A A17b.PWM9 X1 8
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump2 BACKWARD
A A17b.PWM10 X1 9
A17b.X1
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput4 (Bank A17b SWIVEL ANGLE travel pump2 +H3 A A17b.PWM4 X1 7
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.C2 ANALOGUE Output2
A16a +H3
HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP
A A16a.UI2 X1 5
A16a.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput7 (Bank2) A17a BUZZER +H3 A A17a.PWM7 X1 20
A17a.X1
26 26
WH 1Q
BU 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X1.B X1.S
B
1
C
Y15.JPT
B
2
Y15a.JPT
+
H40.X2
IP
1
+H4 B45 0
s
+K2 H40 0
+ C
A
BK 1Q
2
3
B45.X
1
Y15a.JPT 1 +H Y15a 0
2
1
1
2
Y3a.DT
1 1
+H Y15 0
2
2
1
+H Y3a 0
2
Y2a.DT
Y15.JPT
2
2
Y3.DT
1
+H Y2a 0 2
2
Y2.DT
1
+H Y3 0
Y3a.DT
2
1
+H Y2 0
Y2a.DT
1
Y3.DT
1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
Y2.DT
1
H40.X1
B45.X
D
BK 1Q
20
20
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
RD 1Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
1
+H3 A17a EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 FORWARD
+H3 A17a EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 BACKWARD
+H3 A17b
/90.E5
/90.E5
/91.C5
EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump
EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
+H3 A17b /91.C5
EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump
EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
X1 48 A17b.GND_PWM3 D +H3 EARTH travel pump A17b /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17b.X1
X1 49 A17b.GND_PWM4 D +H3 EARTH SWIVEL ANGLE A17b /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A16a.X1
41
A17b.X1
X1 51 A17b.GND_PWM10
49
A17b.X1
X1 41 A16a.24V D +H3 HIGH PRESSURE travel pump A16a /86.B5 SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
A17a.X1
62
X1 50 A17b.GND_PWM9 D
48
A17b.X1
X1 67 A17a.GNDPWM16
51
A17a.X1
X1 66 A17a.GND_PWM15
50
A17a.X1
67
E 66
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
C
A
WH 1Q
A17b.X1
8
20
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump2
A17a.PWM16 X1 25
24
A17a.X1
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 BACKWARD
A17b +H3
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput3 (Bank A17b SWIVEL ANGLE travel pump1 +H3 A A17b.PWM3 X1 6
7
5
A A17a.PWM15 X1 24
A17b +H3
6
7
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 FORWARD
A17a +H3
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput10 (Ban
9
A17a +H3
5
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput9 (Bank
25
A
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.E1 PWMOutput16 (Bank4)
4
8
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput15 (Bank4)
3
6
2
1
X1 62 A17a.GND_PWM7
+H3 A17a /90.D5
EARTH BUZZER EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
TRAVEL DIRECTIONS ; HYDRAULIC PUMP ; BUZZER ; PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
54 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
OPTION GEROTOR STEERING
+H3
+H3
A17a.V_DO4 X1 38
A17a.DO4 X1 39
A17a.X1
38
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput15 (Ban A17b Vcc MVGEROTOR STEERING +H3 A A17b.PWM15 X1 24
A17b.X1
39
A
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.F1 digital output4 A17a back up alarm . OPTICAL
OPTION FUEL PREHEATING Kl.30
A4 =K +K2 F34
Kl.15
A4 =K +K2
E
24
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.F1 SUPPLY for digital output4 A17a supply for digital output 4 via. A4
8
A E
F14
20A YE
15A BU
F
L34
L14 GND
A4.X42
A4.X44
1
9
GND
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
1
1 1
0
2
2
Y63.JPT
1
+H2 S204
BK 2.5Q
+H3 Y63
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2
1
XMSP6.14 +K2 C
WH 2.5Q
=B +B1 H59
1
Y63.JPT
2
10 10
=B +B1 H58
2
BK 1.5Q
D
A4 =K +K2 F49
1
E
2
WH 2.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A4.X43
8
BK 1.5Q
10A RD
+M
A17b.X1
X1 54 A17a.GND_DO4
A
R49 L49
+H3 A17b
/90.D5
/91.E5
EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
E
T
X1 66 A17b.GND_PWM15
+H3 A17a EARTH back up alarm. OPTICAL
GND
R13
66
A17a.X1
0
M
M10 0
EARTH GEROTOR STEERING EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
Kl.15
OPTION BACKUP ALARM VISUAL REDFLASHING Ersteller Datum Ausgabe
Zustand
R14 B
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K6 X2.B X2.S
54
E
A
R34
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
WH 1.5Q
B
WH 1.5Q
A
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
OPTION REFUELLING PUMP
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
BACKUP ALARM; GEROTOR STEERING ; DIESEL PREHEATING 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
F
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
55 114
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput3 (Bank1) A17a BUCKET RETURNTODIG +H3 A A17a.PWM3 X1 6
A16a.X1
2
X33.X 2
36 WH 1Q
4
6
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
32
33 33
3
32
3
+K6 X1.S X1.B
31
D BK 1.5Q
WH 1Q 2 2
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+V B17.B B17.X
Y18
4
3
Y17
2
2
Y9
6
+K4 X33 0
1
+V1 Y9a 0
BK 1Q
A
BK 1Q
+H3 A17a.X1.48a
BK 1Q
/23.E6
10A RD
1
F11
BK 1Q
E
WH 1Q
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
*
C
5
1 OPT2 sw3
OPT3 sw5
31
3
2
3
OPT1 sw4
2
2
1
3
3
1
1
5
3
1 1
X33.X
2
1
B17.X_1 + +V B17 0 Ö B17.X_1
F.7
A4.X45
36
35 35 WH 1Q
WH 1Q
34
WH 1.5Q
1
WH 1Q
OPTION BUCKET RETURNTODIG VIA PUSHBUTTON SWITCH AM LH CONTROL LEVER
34
+K6 X1.B X1.S
WH 1Q
B32.X
A
B
1
WH 1Q
27 27
B17.X B17.B +V
WH 1Q
P
E
R11
X1 11 A16a.UI12 A +H3 A16a BUCKET RETURNTODIG /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input12 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
GND
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
X1 66 A16a.GND
+H3 A16a /86.E5
BUCKET RETURNTODIG EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
+H3 A16a /86.D5
LIFT KICKOUT EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
+H3 A17a /90.C5
4
5
6
EARTH BUCKET RETURNTODIG
EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1 Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
X1 49 A17a.GND_PWM4 D +H3 A17a EARTH LIFT KICKOUT /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
A17a.X1
60
A17a.X1
X1 48 A17a.GND_PWM3 D
49
48
A17a.X1
X1 64 A16a.GND
FLOAT POSITION ; BUCKET RETURNTODIG LIFT KICKOUT
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
A16a.X1
X1 10 A16a.UI11 A +H3 LIFT KICKOUT A16a /86.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input11 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
64
A16a.X1
10
A16a.X1
11
A16a.X1
66
L11
F
Zustand
A17a.X1.6a +H3
A17a.X1
WH 1Q
36
18
A16a.24V X1 38
A17a.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.D1 PWMOutput5 (Bank2) A17a FLOAT POSITION +H3 A A17a.PWM5 X1 18
1
B15.X + +V3 B15 0 Ö B15.X
2
+K4 B32 0
7
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
B32.X
A17a.X1
38
A16a.24V X1 36
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V LIFT KICKOUT
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput4 (Bank1) A17a LIFT KICKOUT +H3 A A17a.PWM4 X1 7
WH 1Q
A16a +H3
+H3 A16a.X1
Kl. 15
E
+K6 X1.B X1.S
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
C
/86.F2
WH 1Q
A16a.X1
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.F2 SUPPLY 24V A16a 24V BUCKET RETURNTODIG
8
6
A INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /86.D2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input5 A16a FLOAT POSITION +H3 A A16a.UI5 X1 18
7
18
6
WH 1Q
5
7
4
WH 1Q
3
1
2
1
X1 60 A17a.GND_PWM5
+H3 A17a /90.D5
EARTH FLOAT POSITION EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
56 114
F
/87.C2
A16b.X1
A
5
9
5
9
1
10
2 BK 1.5Q
1
=K+K4S23.X2:9
+K2 XMSP6.12
EARTH Additional equipment /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
+H3 A17c
RESERVE /92.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
+H3 A17c /92.C5
RESERVE EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 3
Verb.
47
1
+H3 A17b
A17a.X1
X1 47 A17a.GND_PWM2 D +H3 EARTH AHS A17a /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
3
Ident.Nr.
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 1;2;3 AND 4 QUICKCHANGE DEVICE
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 4
5
+H X1.B.65
E 1
OLE23
EARTH Additional equipment /91.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
X1 51 A17c.GND_PWM10
D
+H +K6 X1.B X1.S
F22 10A X44/5
+H3 A17b
A17c.X1
X1 52 A17c.GND_PWM11
51
A17c.X1
X1 53 A17b.GND_PWM12
52
A17b.X1
X1 52 A17b.GND_PWM11
53
A17b.X1
63 1
A17.X2 70 mm
+K2 XMSP6.12
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
S23.X2
BK 1.5Q 2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
S23.X1
10
2
BK 1.5Q
Y14.JPT
0 1
1
+V1 Y53 0
2
S23a 0
2
+H A17.X2
BK 1.5Q
Y12a.JPT
1
1
2
+K4 S23 0
* S23.X2 WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
Y11a.JPT
S23.X1
B
C
*
1
2
2
Y14.JPT +H Y14 0
2
Y12.JPT
2
Y11.JPT
2
Y12a.JPT 1 +V Y12a 0
2
2
1
1
+V Y12 0
Y11a.JPT 1 +V Y11a 0
2
+V Y11 0
1
1
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q
1
1
63
0
+K6 X1.S X1.B +K6
X1.B.64 +H
WH 1.5Q
1
1
64
5
+K2 V100
F
Zustand
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal alarm buzzer A A16b.UI12 X1 11
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
Y12.JPT
1
52
E
Y11.JPT
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
B
A16b +K2
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput2 (Bank1) A17a AHS +H3 A A17a.PWM2 X1 5
8
64
A17c.X1
7
WH 1.5Q
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput10 (Bank3) A17c RESERVE +H3 A A17c.PWM10 X1 9
6
11
A17c.X1
5
WH 1.5Q
A17b.X1
10
A17b.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /92.C2 PWMOutput9 (Bank3) A17c RESERVE +H3 A A17c.PWM9 X1 8
11
A
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput12 (Bank A17b Additional equipment2 +H3 A A17b.PWM12 X1 11
4
8
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.C2 PWMOutput11 (Bank A17b Additional equipment1 +H3 A A17b.PWM11 X1 10
3
9
2
1
ZeichNr.
6
SEE ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS!
F
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
57 114
A17a.PWM2 X1 5
A4 =K +K2
E
=H +H3 A17bMasse Zusatzausrüstung1 Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
X1 53 A17b.GND_PWM12
=H +H3 A17bMasse Zusatzausrüstung2
=H+H/38.C5
Masse CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
X1 47 A17b.GND_PWM2
=H +H3 A17b GND Quick change device
=H+H/38.B5
MGND CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
=H +H3 A17a
=H+H/37.B5
5
A4.X45
*
XMSP6a +K2
F.12
2
X1 47 A17a.GND_PWM2 Masse AHS Masse CAN: OUTPUT MODUL 1
+K4 A21
/41.B4
BK 1.5Q
D
+K4 A21.X1
X1 3 A21.Kl15
Klemme 30 Versorgung CAN: HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
+K4 A21
/41.B4
2
RD 2.5Q
2
+K4 A21.X1
X1 2 A21.GND
+K4 A21
Klemme 15 Klemme 15 CAN: HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
/41.B4
Anspeisung Masse Anspeisung Masse CAN: HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
E
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
C
1
A4.X41
X1 1 A21.Kl30 47
=H +H3 A17a.X1
47
=H +H3 A17b.X1
53
52
X1 52 A17b.GND_PWM11
=H+H/38.C5
=H +H3 A17b.X1
GND
B.5
+K4 A21.X1 =H +H3 A17b.X1
B
F19 10A rt
GND
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q 1
+H Y14.JPT 1 +H Y14 0 2 Y14.JPT +H
BK 1.5Q
2
BK 1.5Q
2
F19a 20A ge
2
WH 1.5Q
+V1 Y53.JPT 1 +V1 Y53 0 2 Y53.JPT +V1
1
WH 1.5Q
+V Y12.JPT 1 +V Y12 0 2 Y12.JPT +V
1
=V +V Y11.JPT 1 +V Y11 0 2 Y11.JPT +V =V
BK 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
F19 Kl. 15.Kl. 15
A17a.X1 +H3 =H
Speisung Klimaanlage
/25.F1
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
+H3 =H
Kl. 15
A17b.PWM2 X1 5
12
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
+H3 =H
8
A
WH 1Q
A17b.PWM12 X1 11
OUTPUT MODUL 1 CAN: =H+H/37.B2 PWMAusgang2 (Bank1) A17a AHS
7
3
A17b.X1 +H3 =H
+H3 =H
6
1
A17b.PWM11 X1 10
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: =H+H/38.B2 PWMOutput2 (Bank1) A17b Squick change device
5
5
+H3 =H
10
A
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: =H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang12 (Bank3) A17b Zusatzausrüstung2
11
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: =H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang11 (Bank3) A17b Zusatzausrüstung1
4
Kl. 30
3
5
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT 1;2 QUICKCHANGE DEVICE 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
58 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION WORKING BASKET WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
1
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
8
87a
B
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X2.S X2.B
9 9
S210.X2
BK 1.5Q
5 5
WH 1.5Q
1 1
+H2 XMSP1.e
2 1 0
+K4 S213
4
22
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
2
Y67.JPT BK 1.5Q
+H2 XMSP1.e
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 5
6
WH 1.5Q 2 2 WH 1.5Q
+H X48.S X48.B
25
A16c.X1
E
X1 25 A16c.UI16
+H3 A16c
basket function Not OFF 2 /88.E1 ANALOGUE all-purpose input16 CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
F
3
ZeichNr.
4
6
X1 6 A16c.UI3 A +H3 basket function Not OFF 1 A16c /88.C1 ANALOGUE all-purpose input3 CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
Ident.Nr.
FUNCTION WORKING BASKET 3
A16c.X1 2
BK 1.5Q
+H2 XMSP1.e
1
1
1
Y66.JPT
BK 1.5Q
Verb.
OLE20
+H2 XMSP1.e
1
+V1 Y67 0
2 2
Y65.JPT
1
Verb.
1
2
WH 1.5Q
+V1 Y66 0
2
+V1 Y65 0
Y67.JPT
1
2
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q =K+K4S210.X2:9
Y66.JPT
1
BK 1.5Q =K+K4S210.X2:10
Y65.JPT
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
6
10
S210.X2
WH 1.5Q
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
22
WH 1.5Q
+K6 Splice.X30
10
3
S210.X1
Datum
21
D 3
Ersteller
+K4 S214
21
6
+K4 S210 0
*
1
WH 1.5Q
3
X2.S X2.B
WH 1.5Q
S210.X1
C
1
WH 1.5Q
+H X48.B X48.S 3
BK 1.5Q 5 5
WH 1.5Q
+K6 X2.S X2.B
2
+K6 X2.S X2.B
2
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4.X43
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q WH 1.5Q
*
30
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
85
7
8
K208
7
WH 1.5Q
F
Zustand
87
L50
OLE19
E
9
A
+K6 X2.B X2.S
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
K208 * =K +K2.RH
86
+K6 X2.B X2.S
R50
C
7
WH 1.5Q
10A RD
B
A16c.X1
9
F50
A16c.X1
+K X51.S 1/1 X51.B WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
E
A
WH 1.5Q
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /88.C1 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input9 A16c basket function Mode 2 +H3 A A16c.UI9 X1 8 8
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /88.C1 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input4 A16c basket function Mode 1 +H3 A A16c.UI4 X1 7
A
WH 1.5Q
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
59 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION PROPORTIONAL CONTROL 3. AND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: CAN: /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input2 /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input9 A16d 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT Aktiv A16d OPTION +H3 +H3 A A A16d.UI2 A16d.UI9 X1 5 X1 8
BK 1Q
8
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
GND
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
2
5
3
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
+K4 S2a 0
cap. sensor feed 24V
S2.X1
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
2
GND
GND
Out
Vcc 5V
Out
GND
Ident.Nr.
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
ZeichNr.
4
E
F
EP 3. AND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT 3
CAPACITIVE
Hall sensors + SW1 feed 5V U low (V) U mid (V) U high (V) Sensor 1 0,505 2,52 4,54 Sensor 2 0,556 2,521 4,539
state off 1,4....1,6mA not active state on 2,9....3,6mA active Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
FNR
JOYSTICK SENSOR Vcc 5V
WH 1Q
Datum
NO
SW1
C
WH 1Q
Ersteller
NC
COM
WH 1Q
+K6 X1.B X1.S +K6
WH 1Q
+K6 X1.B X1.S +K6
HALL SENSOR 1. and 2.
V N R
Vcc 24V
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
7
S2a.X2
INPUT MODUL 2
/50.D2 ANALOGUE Universal A16b JOYSTICK REVERSE2 +K2 A16b.UI6 X1 19 A16b.X1 +K2
S 0 20mA
CAN:
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
7 INPUT MODUL 2
/50.D2 ANALOGUE Universal A16b JOYSTICK FORWARD2 +K2 A16b.UI5 X1 18 A16b.X1 +K2
WH 1Q
INPUT MODUL 1
CAN:
INPUT MODUL 1
=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUE Universale=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUE Universal A16a JOYSTICK FORWARD1 A16a JOYSTICK REVERSE1 +H3 +H3 A16a.UI9 A16a.UI10 X1 8 X1 9 A16a.X1 A16a.X1 +H3 +H3
D
SW1
A4.X44 E.4
F
Zustand
BU 1Q
RD 1Q A F15.3
C
2
1
BK 1Q
FUNKTION FNR
F15.2
E F15 10A RD
BU 1Q
/6.C3
F15.1
RD 1Q
/6.B2
2
WH 1Q
Kl. 15
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
A4 =K +K2
CAN:
E
A16d.X1
B
+K Splice.X70
CAN:
D
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.X1
C
A
54
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: EARTH GND Rocker Roller Cap A16d.GND X1 54
5
WH 1Q
B
A16d.X1
/89.D5
A16d +H3
10
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input11 A16d OUTPUT Hallsensor 2 +H3 A A16d.UI11 X1 10
6
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input3 A16d OUTPUT Hall sensor 1 +H3 A A16d.UI3 X1 6
7
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input4 A16d CONTROL 5V +H3 A A16d.UI4 X1 7
WH 1Q
A16d.X1
36
A16d.X1
A16d.GND X1 59
/89.C5
A16d +H3
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: SUPPLY 5V Roller Rocker Cap D A16d.5V X1 50 50
A16d.24V V X1 36
/89.D5
A16d +H3
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: EARTH capacitive Joystick sensor
59
/89.F2
A16d +H3
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: /89.C2 ANALOGUE all-purpose input1 A16d capacitive Joystick sensor +H3 A A16d.UI1 X1 4 4
A
INPUTMODUL 4 CAN: SUPPLY 24V capacitive Joystick sensor
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
60 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
A
+K2 Kl.15 1
BK 1Q
=K +K2.RH
+K2 XMSP201
+V1 S213 0
2
9
1
B213.X =V + +V2 B213 0 S B213.X
* 30
85
+K2 K213
1 0
0 10
*
87a
87
86
BK
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
C
BU
2
3 B213.X
S213.X2
BK 1Q
S213.X1
10
5
5
1 BN
BK 1Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+K2 F213 7,5A HBR
1
S213.X2
3
1
9
S213.X1
1
2
2
=K +K2.RH
XMSP201 +K2
4
D
WH 1Q
1
=K XMSP201
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
WH 1Q
1
Y68.JPT
E
1
+V1 Y68 0
BK 1Q
Y68.JPT
2
2
=K +K2 XMSP201
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
B
WH 6Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
E
WH 1Q
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
WH 1Q
D
8
OPTION CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER
A
C
7
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
3
F Ident.Nr.
CUTOFF TILT CYLINDER Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
61 114
/96.B2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/96.B2
X1 2 A21.GND A SUPPLY EARTH SUPPLY EARTH CAN:
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
28
A21.X1
29
26
27
10
A21 +K4
/68.E8
RD 0.5Q 6 6
5 5 1
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
C
BU 0.75Q
RD 0.75Q
WH 2.5Q
1
1 °C
2
XB39 B39.X Y22.X
B42.X +K1 B42
1
0 2
B42.X
2
WH 2.5Q
53
+K6 B39 0
1
B39.X XB39
2
4
62
+K4 X22b.S X22b.B
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.75Q
RD 0.75Q
WH 1.5Q
B
D
1
62 WH 1.5Q
+K4 A21
2
3
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
+K6 X2.B X2.S
F19 Kl. 15.Kl. 15
/96.B2
+K4 A21
X1 3 A21.Kl15 A CLAMP 15 CLAMP 15 CAN:
A21.X1
/96.D2
2
E
1
/62.D2
+K4 A21
61 18bar
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q /62.E4
X1 1 A21.Kl30 A CLAMP 30 SUPPLY CAN:
A21.X1
+K6 X2.S X2.B
H
4
F19 Kl. 15.Kl. 15
WH 1Q
RD 2.5Q
A21.X1
1
N
B27.X
A21.X1
3 P
+K6 X1.B X1.S
A21 +K4
2
F.12
2
A21.X1
/96.D2
A
CAN: SUN SENSOR SUN SENSOR A A21.PME X1 28
1
XMSP6a +K2
A21 +K4
WH 0.75Q
B.5
A4.X45
L
/96.D2
CAN: SUN SENSOR+ SUN SENSOR+ A A21.PME X1 29
WH 1Q
12
*
+H B27
A21.X1
2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
5
B27.X
1
GND
A4.X41 +K2
X1.S X1.B
Kl.15
GND
A21 +K4
CAN: SENSOR_ambient temp. SENSOR_ambient temp. A A21.PME X1 27
CAN: SENSOR_ambient temp. SENSOR_ambient temp A A21.PME X1 26
1
L19
/96.D2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
WH 2.5Q
L19A
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
8
WH 2.5Q
5 WH 1Q
R19
1
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A
R19A
7
+M Y22 0
REMOVE WIRE JUMPER XB39 WHEN MOUNTING B39!
/68.E2
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
+K6 X1.S X1.B
60
B
10A RD
60
F19
20A GE
A21 +K4
6
CAN: compressor clutch compressor clutch A A21.PME X1 10
A21.X1
WH 1Q
F19A
A21.X1
E
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
/96.C2
3
E
C
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: /96.B2 SWITCH HIGH&# A21 SWITCH HIGH&# +K4 A A21.PME X1 5
Kl. 15
Kl. 30
A4 =K +K2
5
61
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A
4
Kl.15
3
53
2
1
OPTION AIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ; AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; SUN SENSOR
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
62 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
A21.X1
A21.PME X1 21
A21.X1
+K4
A21.PME X1 20
A21.X1
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: Sonnensensor Sonnensensor
A21.PME X1 29
A21.X1
A21.PME X1 28
A21.X1
28
A21.X1
A21.PME X1 26
A21 +K4
29
A21.X1 +K4
A21.PMES X1 27
+K4
/41.E4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: Sonnensensor+ /41.E4 A21 Sonnensensor+
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A21.PME X1 10
+K4
A21 +K4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: Fühler_Innenr.1 Fühler_Innenr.1
20
A21.X1 +K4
5
A21.X1 +K4
A21.PME X1 6 6
A21.PME X1 5
+K4
/41.D4
21
+K4
HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: CAN: CAN: /41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp.+ /41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp. /41.D4 Fühler_Innenr.1 + A21 Sensor_ambient temp.+ A21 Sensor_ambient temp. A21 Fühler_Innenr.1 +
26
+K4
10
+K4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: /41.C4 Kompressorkupplung A21 Kompressorkupplung
27
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: CAN: /41.B4Schalter HochNiederdruck /41.C4 Schalter Mitteldruck A21Schalter HochNiederdruck A21 Schalter Mitteldruck
W160 +WL040 BU
X1.S +K6
2
1 2
B42.X +K1
1
=M +M Y22
F19 Kl. 15.Kl. 15
2 B40.X
1
1
62
=M +M Y22.X
°C
D
2
B40
+K1 B42
2
WH 1Q
1
2 B39.X
+K1 B42.X
1
B40.X
1
B39.X 1 =H +K6 °C B39
62
W156 +WL037 BU
W156 +WL037 RD
W156 +WL038 BU
W156 +WL038 RD
3 3
2
W160 +WL040 RD
WH 1Q
=H +H Splice.X4
E
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
C
2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
4
2 B27.X +H
X2.S X2.B
/24.E7
E
4 B27.X +H
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
P
+K6 X2.S X2.B
2
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
1
1
+H B27
1
3
W156 +WL039 BU
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+H B27.X
1
WH 1Q 3
+H B27.X
61 61
60
+K6 X1.S
60
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
B
+K6 X1.S
W156 +WL039 RD
B
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ; AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; SUN SENSOR
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
63 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
A21a +K4
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A21a +K4
CAN: Sensor2 (icing) Sensor2 (icing) A A21a.38 X2 38
A21a.X2
38
CAN: Sensor2+ (icing) Sensor2+ (icing) A A21a.37 X2 37
B
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
37
A21a +K4
CAN: Sensor1 (icing) Sensor1 (icing) A A21a.36 X2 36
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
36
A21a +K4
CAN: Sensor1+ (icing) Sensor1+ (icing) A A21a.35 X2 35
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
35
42
A21a.X2
A21a +K4
CAN: diagnostics FAN diagnostics FAN A A21a.16 X2 16
WH 1.5Q
A21a +K4
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
16
CAN: Logic output(010V) Logic output(010V) A A21a.2 X2 2
WH 1Q
BK 2.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
1
+K4 M5
3
1
2
3
1 +K4 B26a
°C
°C
6
2
M5.X
+K4 B26 1
D
A21a.X2
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
A21a +K4
28
A21a.X2
B
CAN: GND FAN GND FAN A A21a.42 X2 42
RD 2.5Q
A21a +K4
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
WH 1Q
CAN: 24V FAN 24V FAN A A21a.28 X2 28
2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
4
2
6
5
2
M
E
FAN MOTOR
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
MOTOR AND SENSOR ICE UP PROTECTION
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
64 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
9
CAN: VMC2 clockwise rotation VMC2 clockwise rotation A A21a.8 X2 8
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
12
A21a.X2
B
8
A21a +K4
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: VMC2 potentiometer tap VMC2 potentiometer tap A A21a.12 X2 12
A21a.X2
CAN: VMC2 counter clockwise rotation VMC2 counter clockwise rotation A A21a.9 X2 9
A21a +K4
10
11
A21a +K4
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a +K4
A21a.X2 HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: VMC1 clockwise rotation VMC1 clockwise rotation A A21a.3 X2 3
BK 0.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
A21a +K4
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
2
3
4
6
M14.X
6
4
5
3
4
6
3
2
2
1
1
4
M11.X
3
D
1
D
A21a.X2
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
A21a +K4
CAN: V ref VMC2 V ref VMC2 A A21a.10 X2 10
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: VMC1 potentiometer tap VMC1 potentiometer tap A A21a.7 X2 7 7
B
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: GND VMC2 GND VMC2 A A21a.11 X2 11
3
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A21a +K4
4
A21a.X2
CAN: VMC1 counter clockwise rotation VMC1 counter clockwise rotation A A21a.4 X2 4
A21a +K4
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: V ref VMC1 V ref VMC1 A A21a.5 X2 5
A21a +K4
6
A21a +K4
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
CAN: Masse VMC1 Masse VMC1 A A21a.6 X2 6
5
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
5
6
E
+K4 M11
+K4 M14
M
M
URECIRCULATED AIR FLAP VMC2
WATER VALVE VMC1
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
WATER VALVE VMC1 RECIRCULATED AIR FLAP VMC2 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
65 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
23
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC4 clockwise rotation A21a VMC4 clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.22 X2 22
B
BK 0.5Q
22
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
26
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC4 counter-clockwise rotation A21a VMC4 counter-clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.23 X2 23
24
25
18
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC4 potentiometer tap A21a VMC4 potentiometer tap +K4 A A21a.26 X2 26
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: V ref VMC4 A21a V ref VMC4 +K4 A A21a.24 X2 24
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC3 clockwise rotation A21a VMC3 clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.17 X2 17
21
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: GND VMC4 A21a GND VMC4 +K4 A A21a.25 X2 25
5
1
2
3
4
6
M16.X
6
4
4
3
3
2
4
2
1
3
1
6
2
M15.X
1
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC3 counter clockwise rotation A21a VMC3 counter clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.18 X2 18
17
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC3 potentiometer tap A21a VMC3 potentiometer tap +K4 A A21a.21 X2 21
B
C
A21a.X2
20
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: V ref VMC3 A21a V ref VMC3 +K4 A A21a.19 X2 19 19
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: GND VMC3 A21a GND VMC3 +K4 A A21a.20 X2 20
5
6
E
+K4 M15
+K4 M16
M
FOOT FLAP VMC3
M
MIDDLE FLAP VMC4
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
FOOT FLAP VMC3 MIDDLE FLAP VMC4 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
66 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
40
39
31
A21a.X2
WH 1Q WH 1Q
B
3
4
1
2
3
4
+K4 M17
6
2
M17.X
1
1 2
WH 1Q WH 1Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
1 2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: temp.sensor(air cond. aut.) A21a temp.sensor(air cond. aut.) +K4 A A21a.40 X2 40
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC5 clockwise rotation A21a VMC5 clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.30 X2 30
34
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.) A21a temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.) +K4 A A21a.39 X2 39
+K4 X75.S X75.B
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC5 counter clockwise rotation A21a VMC5 counter clockwise rotation +K4 A A21a.31 X2 31
30
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: VMC5 potentiometer tap A21a VMC5 potentiometer tap +K4 A A21a.34 X2 34
B
C
A21a.X2
33
A21a.X2
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: V ref VMC5 A21a V ref VMC5 +K4 A A21a.32 X2 32 32
HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAN: GND VMC5 A21a GND VMC5 +K4 A A21a.33 X2 33
5
D
1
6
+K4 B40 0
°C
E
2
M
HEAD FLAP VMC5
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
HEAD FLAP VMC5 TEMPERATURE SENSOR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
67 114
E
Zustand Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Änderung Datum
1 Name Datum
BK 2.5Q
2
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
3
MP
4
A4.X48 A4.X48
+K6 X2.S X2.B
1,5 Ohm 70 Watt
M13.X
+H3 M13 0 M13.X
+K6 X2.B X2.S
+K2 XMSP6c
VENTILATOR CONDENSER INTEGRATED
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
5 6
Kl.15
A4.X56
4
87a
MP
A B
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
6
9
6
30 86
K245 0 V49
87 85
V34
GND
8920980
460 9010 00 003 7
WH 2.5Q
86
I.6
A4 =K +K2 I.9
I.4
3
A4.X48
/62.A4
MP I.5
V33
5
V50
WH 2.5Q
V32
85
51
GND
87
51
0
WH 2.5Q
K244
B
L13
I.7
A4 =K +K2
7
R13 87a
A4.X48
C
WH 2.5Q
30
WH 2.5Q
Kl. 15 I.3
A4.X48
50
A
I.2
15A BU
5
50
* 2
F13
I.1
E
4
52
WH 2.5Q
2
3
A
WH,WH 2.5Q,2.5Q
2
52
WH 2.5Q
A4 =K +K2
BK 2.5Q
Kl.15
X1 8 A21.PME A +K4 FAN_interior. A21 /96.C2 FAN_interior.2 + CAN: HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM /62.E4
A21.X1 WH 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
8
D We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1 7 8
A A
A4.X48
B
V35
GND
MP
A4.X48 C
D
M
C
E
9
F F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
68 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
RETROFIT KIT CONDENSER FAN A
A4.X48.
=K +K2.RH
I.5
5
C
1
1
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q 1 WH 1.5Q
M13.X 1,5 Ohm 70 Watt
1
1
4
2 2
B
M
53a 53a
E
1
WH 1Q
D
B27.X.2 +H =H
+K6 X2.B* X2.S*
C
M13.X BK 1.5Q
ONLY USE WITH FLUFF FILTER OPERATION !
3 +H B27 P
A
=H +H3a M13 0
LOCATE SPLICE CLOSE TO X2.S:1!
X2.S.51 X2.B.51
WH 1.5Q
10
WH 1.5Q
+K2 XMSP.20
+K Splice;.X4 1
A4.X48.
2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
+K X1.S.61a X1.B
MP I.7
MP
X2.S.50 X2.B.50 +K6 2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q GND
10022680
0
V35
1
V34
61
87
WH 1.5Q
87a
WH 1.5Q
31
87a
A21.PME X1 10 A21.X1 +K4
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
X2.S.52 =M +M Y22.X
1
E
85
0
A4.X48.
+K6 X2.S X2.B +K6
87
B
B
15
X45.B
D
86
K245
X45.S
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE CAN: Kompressorkupplung Kompressorkupplung
30
C
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
10008761 0
/62.C2 A21 +K4
A4.X48.
V49
WH 1.5Q
=K +K2. K248
2
WH 1.5Q
2
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
A4.X56a
*
X45.S 30
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
*
1
B GND
*
A4 =K +K2
7
R13 L13
1
A
6
+K2 X45.B
I.6
15A BU
A
F13
9
E
I.9
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4 =K +K2
WH 1.5Q
Kl. 15
1
A
1
=M +M Y22
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
VENTILATOR CONDENSER RETROFIT KIT Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
69 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG DIESEL ENGINE A
A
A700D.RXD X2 37
A700D.GND X2 38
A700D.X2
38
A700D.X2
/93.D6
A700D +M
DIAGNOSTIC LEAD AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A700D.TXD X2 36
A700D.X2
X.M7a.S 1/2 2/2 +K2
5 3 2
/93.D6
A700D +M
ENGINEECU EMIT DIAGNOSIS
36
/93.D6
A700D +M
ENGINEECU RECEIVE DIAGNOSIS
37
ENGINEECU EARTH DIAGNOSIS
X.RS232.B +K
E
BK 0.5Q BU 0.5Q RD 0.5Q
WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
BK 1Q BU 1Q RD 1Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
*
* =K 11 12
*
22
+K4 A21.XB *29
+K4 A21.XB
1
+M X60a
3 2
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
D
A B C D E F G H I
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
E
10290843 0 *9
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG MOTOR CONTROL AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
70 114
A A16c.UI1 X1 4
A16b.UI16 X1 25
A16b.X1
A16c.X1
5
BK5 1Q
BK 1Q 2
OG
GY
WH
RD
C
5
4 signal
signal
D
BK 1Q
BK6 1Q
3
+H3 A16c /88.D1
X1 16 A16c.GND_logic A EARTH LOGICAL PART EARTH LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
+H3 A16c /88.E1
SUPPLY 24V SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
A16b.X1
X1 31 A16c.GND
+H3 A16c
+K2 A16b
SUPPLY EARTH EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
/88.E1
A16c.X1
X1 67 A16b.GND
/87.E5
E 67
A16c.X1
X1 30 A16c.24V
67
A16c.X1
31
A16c.X1
X1 2 A16c.24V_logic A +H3 SUPPLY EARTH A16c /88.C1 SUPPLY 24V LOGICAL PART CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
30
A16c.X1
16
BK 1.5Q
X2.S X2.B +K6
67
67
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1Q
61
X2.S X2.B +K6
6
B202.X
BK3 1Q
61
62
X2.S X2.B +K6
62
63
X2.S X2.B +K6
64
X2.S X2.B +K6
63
64
3
B202.X
+
BK
BN
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
B202.X
2
+K4 B202
B
BK4 1Q
BK 1Q BK2 1Q
BK 1Q BK1 1Q 1
12
/42.E1 Kl.15
1
+
2
E
XMSP6.11 +K2
1
1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A4.X44
B202.X
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
XMSP6.10 +K2
A16c.X1
66
+K6 X2.B X2.S
L46
JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2 re
66
R46
A
BK 1Q
A
/88.E1
A16c +H3
A16c.24V DO1 X1 33
WH 1.5Q
A16b.X1
JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: SUPPLY 24V
33
10A RD
X56/11 F34/5A
B
A16b.24V X1 36
A16c +H3
65
F46
JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 1
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /88.C1 ANALOGUE all-purpose input1
6
E
/87.E2
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: ANALOGUE Universal
8
4
/87.F2
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: SUPPLY 24V VCC JOYSTICK STEERING
7
65
A
Kl. 15
6
4
A4 =K +K2
5
WH 1.5Q
4
25
3
36
2
1
X1 67 A16c.GND
+H3 A16cJOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2 re
GND JOYSTICK STEERING EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
/88.E5
EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 3; JOYSTICK STEERING Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
71 114
A A16c.UI2 X1 5
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V Joystick ARMREST
A16c.24V V X1 36
A16c.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput13 (Bank A17b JOYSTICK STEERING LEFT +H3 A A17b.PWM13 X1 22
A16c.24V X1 37
A16c.X1
7
A17b.X1
8
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.D2 PWMOutput14 (Bank A17b JOYSTICK STEERING RIGHT +H3 A A17b.PWM14 X1 23
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE 2 CAN: /91.E2 PWMOutput16 (Bank A17b Savety MV Joy
A
+H3 A17b.PWM16 X1 25
A17b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
68 68
60
WH 1.5Q
B
+K6 X2.B X2.S
BK 1Q BK9 1Q
C
X1 38 A16c.24V
+H3 A16c
PRESSURE standard steering1 /88.D5 EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
+H3 A16c Vcc PRESSURE standard steering 1 /88.F1
SUPPLY 24V CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
1
1
Y64.JPT
2
1 2
Y52.AF2
2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
70
+K6
BK 1Q
X1 23 A16c.UI14 A +H3 Joystick ARMREST A16c /88.D1 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input14 CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
A16c.X1
A17b.X1
X1 65 A16c.GND
+H3 A16c /88.E5
EARTH Joystick armrest EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
A17b.X1
X1 64 A17b.GND_PWM13
+H3 A17b
EARTH JOYSTICK STEERING /91.D5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
A17b.X1
X1 65 A17b.GND_PWM14
+H3 A17b
EARTH JOYSTICK STEERING /91.E5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
67
E 65
A16c.X1
Y51.AF2
2
D
WH 1Q
X1 22 A16c.UI13 A +H3 Joystick activation A16c /88.D1 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input13 CAN: INPUT MODULE 3
0
2
2
0 3
1
+H3 Y64 0
BK 1.5Q
BK 1Q BK11 1Q
A16c.X1
22
A16c.X1
X1 64 A16c.GND
38
A16c.X1
+H3 Y52
70
BK 1Q 59
X2.S X2.B +K6
WH 1.5Q
X2.S X2.B +K6
69
59
BK10 1Q
2
8
8
BU
BK8 1Q
B202.X
WH 1Q
B201.X
BK 1Q
BK
Y64.JPT
1
+H3 Y51
65
0
A
Y52.AF2
1
3
S202
+
Y51.AF2
BN
69
+H3 P B201 U 0 B
+K4
B200.X 1 + +K4 B200 0 S 2 B200.X B200.X
BK 1Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
s
7
64
B202.X C
23
B201.X
7
1
BK 1Q BK7 1Q
60
WH 1Q
+K6 X2.B X2.S
64
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
C
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
A16c.X1
/88.F1
A16c +H3
6
25
Joystick PRESSURE standard steering 1
/88.F1
A16c +H3
5
23
A16c +H3
5
A
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: SUPPLY 24V 24V Joystick activation
36
INPUT MODULE 3 CAN: /88.C1 ANALOGUE all-purpose Input2
4
22
3
37
2
1
X1 67 A17b.GNDPWM16
+H3 A17b /91.E5
GND Savety MV Joy EARTH CAN: OUTPUTMODULE 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
JOYSTICK STEERING Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
72 114
A16b24V Joystick activation +K2 =K A16b.24V
E F46 10A RD
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: =K+K/49.E2
+K2 =K
X56/11 F3475A
A16b.X1 +K2 =K
E
BK 1Q 5 WH
C
BN
RD
WH
RD
6
BK 1Q BK6 1Q
6
3
3
BK 1Q
61
B
+
D
67
A16c.X1
+H3 A16c
X1 2 A16c.24V_logic A A Feed GND
=H+H3/58.C1 Supply 24V Logic part CAN: INPUT MODUL 3
Feed 24V Supply 24V CAN: INPUT MODUL 3
A16b.X1
X1 31 A16c.GND
+H3 A16c
=H+H3/58.E1
67
A16c.X1
X1 30 A16c.24V
31
A16c.X1
X1 16 A16c.GND_logic A +H3 +H3 Feed GND Logic part A16c A16c =H+H3/58.D1 GND Logic part =H+H3/58.E1 CAN: INPUT MODUL 3
30
A16c.X1
2
A16c.X1
16
BK 1.5Q
X2.S X2.B +K6
67
67
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X2.B X2.S +K6
5
4 signal
signal
BK3 1Q
61
62
X2.S X2.B
62
63
X2.S X2.B
63
64 64
X2.S X2.B
A
BK4 1Q
BK 1Q 4
2
BN
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
=K +K4 S202 B_JOYSTICK
BK5 1Q
BK2 1Q 1
2
1
XMSP6.11 +K2 =K
+
X2.S X2.B +K6
A16c.X1
66 65
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
1
BK1 1Q
12
=H+H/19.E1 Kl.15.2
PROJ: 8920980_003
XMSP6.10 +K2 =K
X1 67 A16b.GND
+K2 A16b GNDJoystick
Feed GND MGND CAN: INPUT MODUL 3
=K+K/49.E5
steering left
MGND CAN: INPUT MODUL 2
X1 67 A16c.GND
+H3 A16c GND Joystick
=H+H3/58.E5
E
steering Sensor 2 re
MGND CAN: INPUT MODUL 3
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
A16c.X1
A4.X44 +K2 =K
1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
GND
INPUT MODUL 3 CAN:
=H+H3/58.C1 analogue universal input1 A16c Joystick steering sensor 2re Vcc Joystick steering sensor 2 ree +H3 +H3 A A16c.24V DO1 A16c.UI1 X1 33 X1 4
66 65
A
B
C
A16b.UI16 X1 25
X1 36
A16b.X1 +K2
INPUT MODUL 3 CAN: Supply 24V
6 =H+H3/58.E1 A16b Joystick steering transmitter1 A16c analogue all-purpose Input16
8
4
=K+K/49.F2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: Supply 24V
7
33
Kl. 15
6
WH 1.5Q
A4 =K +K2
5
WH 1.5Q
A
4
25
3
36
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
SUPPLY INPUT MODULE 3; JOYSTICK STEERING Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
73 114
WH 1Q
25
A17b.X1
A
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
B
2
2
BK 1Q
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
3
1
+H3 Y64 YVENTIL_2 0
BK 1Q
A17b.X1
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17b.X1
X1 65 A17b.GND_PWM14
A17b.X1
X1 67 A17b.GNDPWM16
+H3 A17b
+H3 MasseGNDJoystick steering right A17b =H+H/51.E5
=H+H/51.E5
67
A16c.X1
X1 23 X1 22 X1 65 X1 64 A16c.UI14 A16c.UI13 A16c.GND A17b.GND_PWM13 A +H3 A +H3 +H3 +H3 Joystick Armrest A16c Joystick activation GND Joystick armrest GND Joystick steering left A16c A16c A17b aanalogue universal input14 =H+H3/58.E5 =H+H3/58.D1 1analogue all-purpose Input13=H+H3/58.D1 3 MGND =H+H/51.D5 MGND CAN: CAN: CAN: CAN: INPUT MODUL 3 INPUT MODUL 3 INPUT MODUL 3 OUTPUTMODUL 2
65
70 70
BK 1.5Q
69
D
BK 1Q
64
A16c.X1
23
22
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
59
59
X2.S X2.B +K6
69
8
BK 1Q
8
0
A16c.X1
BU
+H3 Y52 0
C
7
+K4 S202
X2.S X2.B +K6
1
+H3 Y51 0
65
7
2
BK
1
2
BN
1
1
60
1 =K + +K4 B200 0 S 2
BK 1Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
X2.B X2.S +K6
60
WH 1Q
+H3 Splice.X11
BK 1Q
2
68
X2.B X2.S +K6
E
Reserve MGND CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
MGND CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
INFORMATION FROM Ident.Nr. 8920980 Zeich.Nr. 460 9010 00 000 VALID TO SERIAL NUMBER : see attachment
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
A17b.X1
23
36
A17b.X1
8
OUTPUTMODUL 2 OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: CAN: PWMOutput16 (Bank4) =H+H/51.E2 =H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput14 (Bank4) Reserve A17b Joystick steering right A17b +H3 +H3 A A17b.PWM16 A17b.PWM14 X1 25 X1 23
22
A16c.24V X1 37
WH 1Q
24
+H3 A16c.X1
7
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: =H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput13 (Bank4) A17b Joystick steering left +H3 A A17b.PWM13 X1 22
68
PROJ: 8920980_003
6
1 Ö Servostat 26 bar
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
1 P
5
INPUT MODUL 3 CAN: =H+H3/58.F1 Supply 24V A16c 24V Joystick Armrest
Reserve
1
+H3 B201a 0
B
A16c.X1
WH 1Q
5
A16c.X1
WH 1Q
A16c.X1
D
4
INPUT MODUL 3 INPUT MODUL 3 INPUT MODUL 3 CAN: CAN: CAN: aanalogue universal-input155 =H+H3/58.F1 =H+H3/58.C1 analogue universal-input22 =H+H3/58.D1 Supply 24V A16c A16c JJoystick pressure standard steering 11 A16c 224V Joystick activation steering 22 +H3 JJoystick pressure standard +H3 +H3 A A A16c.UI2 A16c.UI15 A16c.24V V X1 24 X1 5 X1 36
A
C
3
37
2
1
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
JOYSTICK STEERING Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
74 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
OUTPUTMODUL 2 CAN: Digitaloutput4 Backup ALARM
/75.F2
A17b +H3
A17b.DO4 39 X1 39
Kl. 15
A4 =K +K2
E
F23
A17b.X1
10A RD A
R23
Verb.
WH 1.5Q
REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR GROENEVELD
A4.X41 +K2
NOT USED
=K+K2X52.B:2
1
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
C
WH 1.5Q
1
1
+K2 X52.B
B16.X
2
+H5 B16 0 2
1 2
WH 1.5Q
1
D
BK 1.5Q
+K2 XMSP6.22
RD BU YE
A17b.X1
E
54
E
B16.X
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
B
L23
Rückfahrs.
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
OLE23
B
54 X1 A17b.GND_DO4 MASSE Backup &# MASSE CAN: OUTPUTMODUL 2
+H3 A17b
/75.D5
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR GROENEVELD Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
75 114
D
E We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
Zustand Änderung
1 1
2
F Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum Name Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
3
OLE24 OLE25
3
Verb. Verb. 1 1
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
4 PK RT BN BK
OG WH
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1 4 5
A
A4 =K +K2 F73
B
1
MONITOR
5
6
REAR AREA MONITORING ÜBER MONITOR AND CAMERA
6
7
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980
460 9010 00 003 7
8
REAR AREA MONITORING VIA MONITOR AND CAMERA Kl. 15
A
E
3A VT
A
R73 L73 B
GND
A4.X41.6 +K2 XMSP6.21 +K2 C
ELECTRONICS REAR AREA MONITORING D
E
CAMERA F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
76 114
4
A
A17a.X1
R53
32
RD 0.5Q 1
+K6 X2.S X2.B
+K6 X2.S X2.B
B
4
RD 0.5Q A
RD 1Q
+V1 X43
C
BN
BN
WH 1.5Q
+H5 X31
1
X31
C
2
4
3
BU
2
BU
3
B
S
1
BK
B43
C
3
3
M6.X
2
2
+H5 M6 0
47
B44
M
X43
B
47
+
WH 1.5Q
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
2
A
9 WH 1.5Q
1
+K6 X1.S X1.B
2
BK
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X41 +K2 B.9
+H3 A17a /90.F1
GND central lubrication system MV PUMP EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
+K2 A16b /87.D2
Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
/87.D5
+K2 A16b /87.D5
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 5
Ident.Nr.
6
BK 0.5Q 42 42
BK 0.5Q X1 59 A16b.GND
+K2 A16b /87.D5
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
59
56
Sig. DISTRIBUTOR centr. frequency input2 CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
ZeichNr.
4
A16b.X1
X1 56 A16b.FI2
GND LEVEL centr EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
E
1
A16b.X1
X1 60 A16b.GND
+K2 A16b
41
BU 0.5Q
45 45
A16b.X1
X1 22 A16b.UI13 A Sig. LEVEL centr ANALOGUE Universale CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM LIEBHERR 3
+K6 X2.B X2.S
1 60
A16b.X1
+K6 X2.B X2.S
1 22
1
X1 40 A17a.GND_DO3
+K6 X2.B X2.S
2
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
44
+K6 X2.B X2.S
2
41
2
44
BK 1.5Q
2
A17a.X1
BU 0.5Q
BK 1Q
BU 1Q
D
F
Zustand
1
GND
40
E
A16b.X1
L53
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A
A16b.24V X1 32
40
A17a.DO3 X1 37
8
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: SUPPLY 24V VCC DISTRIBUTOR cen. l. s.
RD 0.5Q
+H3
37
B
A16b.X1
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.F1 digital output3 A17a VCC central lubrication unit. MV PUMP
10A RD
/87.E2
A16b +K2
33
Kl. 15
F53
7
A16b.24V X1 33
SUPPLY SUPPLY DO3 /90.F1 SUPPLY for digital output3 CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
E
C
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: SUPPLY 24V VCC LEVEL central l. s.
+H3 A17a
A4 =K +K2
6
40
/87.E2
A16b +K2
X1 36 A17a.V_DO3
A
5
43
A17a.X1
36
3
43
2
1
GND DISTRIBUTOR centr. EARTH CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
77 114
A16a.FI2 X1 56
A16a.FI1 X1 55
A16a.X1
A
A16b.FI1 X1 55
A16b.X1
AUTOMATIC GREASING SYSTEM
10A RD
1
L12 1
1
*1 2
1
WH 1.5Q
2
2
*2
2
3
3
3
4
A204.X * A4.X56 +K2
2
1
X50.S X50.B +H3
4 4
GND
1
RD 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
R12:
RD 1Q
A
17
+K6 X2.S X2.B
17
B GREASING MODE
WH 1.5Q
RD 1Q
F12
RD 1Q
1
A16a.X1
/87.D5
A16b +K2
INPUT MODULE 2 CAN: frequency input1 SPEED hydro motor
55
/86.D5
A16a +H3
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: frequency input1 SPEED hydro motor1
55
INPUT MODULE 1 CAN: frequency input2 drive rotation speed
8
1
+H3 Splice.X10
+H3 X50.S
7
E
WH 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
/86.D5
27
1
+F3 B2 0
2
+K2 XMSP63
B1.X
2
B2.X
B2a.X
1
BU 1Q
BK 1.5Q
5
8
+V1 B203 0
BU 1Q
18
7
1
1
1
18
4
P BU 1Q
2
B203.X
2
2
0
+K6 X2.B X2.S
1
Groeneveld Twin Pump A16a.X1
X1 70 A16a.GND_FI2
+H3 A16a /86.E5
EARTH output speed EARTH frequency input2 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
69
A16a.X1
X1 46 A17a.GND_PWM1 D +H3 EARTH PARKING BRAKE A17a /90.C5 EARTH CAN: OUTPUT MODULE 1
70
E
A16b.X1
X1 69 A16a.GND_FI1
+H3 A16a /86.E5
SPEED hydro motor1 EARTH frequency input1 CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
69
6
B203.X
2
1
2
1
8
6
3
7
1
BU 1Q
D
+H3 A205
A17a.X1
2
WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
3
BK 1.5Q
A205.X
1
+F3 B2a 0
2
+F3 B1 0
B2a.X
1
2
1
1
B2.X
1
B1.X
2
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
BK 1.5Q 27
WH 1.5Q 26 WH 1.5Q
25
WH 1.5Q
2
Y10.JPT
25
+K6 X2.S X2.B
2
26
WH 1.5Q
1
+K6 Y10 0
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Y10.JPT
WH 1.5Q
C
46
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
6
+K4 A204
Kl.15
A4 =K +K2
A17.aX1a +H3
B
5
A16a +H3
4
A17a.X1
4
OPTION GROENEVELD CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
OUTPUT MODULE 1 CAN: /90.C1 PWMOutput1 (Bank1) A17a PARKING BRAKE +H3 A A17a.PWM1 X1 4
A
C
3
56
2
1
X1 69 A16b.GND_FI1
+K2 A16b /87.E5
EARTH SPEED hydro m. EARTH frequency input CAN: INPUT MODULE 2
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
PARKING BRAKE ; SPEED SENSOR CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM GROENEVELD
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
78 114
5
6
INGITION LOCK WITH TRANSPONDER COIL
OLE12
S1.X1.8 PINNING OUT WITH OLE 12 CONNECT
+K4 S1.X1.8a
8
Verb.
1
=K+K2A9.X:2
WH 2.5Q
+K6 X1.S
A
30
2
S1.X3
K01
B
CAN: INPUT MODULE 1
WH 2.5Q WH 2.5Q
F29 25A WH
Kl 50a ANALOGUE universal-input15
GND MP6 CABIN
E
86
igniton lock S1.X1:6
T.3
F26 A4.X40:9
3
4
A4.X57
X1 24 A16a.UI15
=H +H3 A16a
=H+H/37.D2
24
WH 2.5Q
8
S1.X2
30
1
V1
(1) dashboard
A
(3) igniton switch
85
(5) key
Kl. 30
=K +K2 A9
Kl.30 Kl.15 GND
Operation-Key Relais 1
Relais 2
Relais 3
RD WH BK WH WH
11 14 13 1 3
C
BK 1.5Q
A9 Kl.15
XMSP12.2 +K2
1.5Q 2.5Q 1.5Q 2.5Q 2.5Q
D
WH 2.5Q WH 2.5Q
2 4
WH 1Q WH 1Q
8 10
A4 =K +K2 /5.B2
WH 1Q WH 1Q
Relais 4
11 14 13 1 3 5 2 4 6 8 10 12 7 9
A9.X
Master-Key
WH 2.5Q
XMSP12
A9 Kl.30
1
Kl.30.X 1
RD 1.5Q
1 GND
Kl. 15
87
(4) mother
/19.A1
/40.E5
(2) antenna
WH 2.5Q WH 2.5Q
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
+H3 A16a.X1
Kl.15.X 1
30
/5.C3
F15.1
E F15 10A RD
F15.2
E
A F15.3
10 pin PLUG NOT in use!
ELECTRONICS IMMOBILISER
+K4 S2
5
3
1
6
8
7
9
10
11
Datum Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
4
A4.X44a:4 +K2
V N R
OPTION Ersteller
12
1
=K+K2A9.X:8
Ident.Nr.
ELECTRONIC IMMOBILISER Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
Verb.
460 9010 00 003 7
E.4
A4.X44:4 PINNING OUT WITHOLE 13 CONNECT
OLE13
8920980
A4.X44
1
2
WH 1Q
1
GND
4
F
Zustand
50a
1
OLE11 E
9
50a
Kl. 15
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
8
15
+K2 A4.X56a:4
S.4
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
6
15
RD 2.5Q
A4.X56 A4 =K +K2
5
P 0 12
S1
A4.X56:4 PINNING OUT WITH OLE 11 CONNECT
B
10 58
1
Verb.
WH 2.5Q
1
5
1
A
7
1
4
=K+K2A9.X:1
3
1
2
1
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
79 114
F
2
4
PRESELECTOR CLOCK
A4 =K +K2
A
120 min
5
6
E
F39
5A BN A
E
20A YE A
R40 L40
OLE14
=K
WH 2Q WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
3
XMSP6.16 +K2
4
BK 2.5Q
Kl. 30
E
7
X2/1
M15.X
A4.X41 +K2
1
BK 1.5Q WH 1.5Q
OR
NOZZLE STICK PREHEATER
Verb.
1
+K2 XMSP6.16
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q 1 BK 1.5Q 2
1 Ersteller Datum Ausgabe
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
WH 1.5Q
OLE22
Verb.
E
=K+K2OLE17:1
1
=K +K4 A21.X1
WITH CABLE (OR )CONNECT!
+B2 X5
=B+B2X5:1 RD 1.5Q BK 1.5Q WH 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
+K2 X223.B
OLE18
2
M15.X
A4.X52 C.X1
9
12
2 1
1
DBW 2010 GND
A.X1 +B2
L42
Verb.
+H1 M15 0
OLE17
30
+
M
4
+B2 B.X6
D
=B+B2OLE22:1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
K243
V46
A 86
OLE16
87a WH 2.5Q
R42
Verb.
WH 2.5Q
10A RD
87
1
1
85
=K+K2A4.X52:7
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
A4.X52
RD 2.5Q
7
8
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
A4.X52
F42
=K
C
RD,RD 2.5Q,2.5Q
A4 =K +K2
A4.X41
2
+K2 XMSP6.16
2
Verb.
A4.X41
B
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
+K2 XMSP6.16
1
GND
=K+K4X4:1
4
RD 1Q =K+K4X4:11
F
Zustand
RD 1Q BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 1.5Q
GND
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
A
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
L39
B
D
A4 =K +K2
Verb.
R39
C
8
F40
P
X4 +K4
7 F8 10A Kl. 58 A4.X57/4
3
OLE15
1
X1 4 A21.PME A AUXILIARY HEATER /46.B2 AUXILIARY HEATER CAN: HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1 2 3 4
=K +K4 A21
PLUG CONNECTION FUEL PREHEATING
F Ident.Nr.
AUXILIARY HEATER DBW 2010 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
80 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
PRESELECTOR CLOCK Kl. 30
A
120 min
E
F39
P
Kl. 30
5A BN
11 12
8
20A YE A
R40
/19.F7
B
GND
A4.X41 +K2
7
4
PROJ: 8920980_003
X
GND
A4.X41 +K2
RD 1Q WH 2Q BK 1Q
RD 2.5Q
WH 1Q WH 1Q
XMSP6.15 +K2
1
11 12
9
+B2 X12.ST2
3 4
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
BK 2.5Q
C
THERMO 90
=K+K4A21.X1:4
+B2 X11.ST1
WH 1.5Q
X13.ST3
1
Verb.
OLE21
D
4
WITH CABLE (SW )CONNECT!
A21.X1
E 4
E
F40
L40
BK,BK 1Q,1Q
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
R39
A E
L39
B
C
4
1 2
A
X3 +K4
A4 =K +K2
F8 10A Kl. 58 A4.X57/4
A4 =K +K2
X1 4 A21.PME A +K4 AUXILIARY HEATER A21 /96.B2 AUXILIARY HEATER CAN: HEAT/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
AUXILIARY HEATER THERMO 90 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
81 114
2
1
3
4
5
A4 =K +K2
A
6
7
8
Kl.15
A
E
F14
PLUG CONNECTION AUXILIARY HEATER DBW 2010
15A BU A
R14 L14 GND
B
E
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 2.5Q
=K +K2.RH
1
F208 20A YE
2
87a
87
86
87a
0
0
K227 +K2
K228 +K2 30
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
87
86
C
85
30
RD 2.5Q
85
WH 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
D BK 2.5Q
3
4
R10.X
2
BK 2.5Q
1
D
B
X44 +K2
RD 6Q
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
=K +K2 Kl.30.Xa 1
2/2 BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X223.S 1/2 +K2
1
2
3
4
E
R10 +M T ON +5° 0°: OFF +10° +K6 XMSP6.19
1
1
+K6 XMSP6.20
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
DIESEL PREHEATING COLD WEATHER KIT 40° Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
82 114
E
Zustand
BK 95Q
Änderung
1 Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum Name Datum
2
XMSP4.1* +H.
+H5. S15* 2
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
3
1 RD 25Q
+B1. G1* +
4
1
30.1
2 K11*.X4
1
+H5. F01* 100A 2
RD 95Q
+B1. G2* +
30
+M. M1*
5
M 50
31
K11* +H4. 30.2 50 30.1
1
+H5. F03* 200A +H. F02* 100A
2
* 2
W
+M. G3*
F
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES 40°
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
6
B+
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
RD 6Q
M 1
WH 25Q
5 6
F07*.X1
+H5. F07* 10A RD
7
1
B
+H4. M8* 0 K11*.X3
1
1
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
4
RD,RD 25Q,6Q
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
3
RD,RD 95Q,25Q
BK 95Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
2
BK 95Q
D We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1 7 8
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES COLD WEATHER KIT 40°C
A A
+H5. K04* 30.2 50 B
31
1
C
1
2
D
* RD 25Q
E
* D+
3
31 B
F
8920980
460 9010 00 003
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
83 114
E
Zustand
BK 95Q
Änderung
1 Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum Name Datum
2
XMSP4.1* +H
+H5 S15* 2
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
3
1 RD 25Q
+H4 M8* 0
+
+B1 G1*
F
4
M
1 +
+M XMSP10*
+H4 K11* 88
88a
2
1 1
+H5 F01* 100A +H5 F03* 200A
RD 95Q
*
+B1 G2*
+M M1*
5
M 50
+H F02* 100A
2 2 2
W
+M G3*
1
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSES L586
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
6
B+
RD 6Q
B WH 25Q
5 6
30.1
F07*.X1
+H5 F07* 10A RD
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
7
1
1
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
4
RD,RD 6Q,25Q
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
3
RD,RD 25Q,95Q
BK 95Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
2
BK 95Q
D We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1 7 8
VERSION BATTERY WIRING HARNESSESL586
A A
86 +H5 K04* 30.2 50 B
85 31
1
C
*
1
2
D
RD 25Q
E
* 30 D+
3
BK 95Q
31 B
F
8920980
460 9010 00 003
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
84 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
PME MASTER GENERAL OUTLAY ON AND OUTLETS
=K +K2
A15
Module Nr.: Module name:
PME_MASTER
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
A15.GND A15.DIGIN0 A15.DIGIN1 A15.DIGIN2 A15.Shield A15.VBat A15.CAN4L A15.CAN3L A15.CAN2L A15.CAN1L A15.CAN1H A15.CAN2H A15.CAN3H A15.CAN4H A15.DCD A15.RXD A15.TXD A15.DTR A15.GND A15.n.c. A15.RTS A15.CTS A15.n.c. A15.DCD A15.RXD A15.TXD A15.DTR A15.GND A15.n.c. A15.RTS A15.CTS A15.n.c.
/40.E1 /40.E3
Description
EA
/40.E2 /40.E4 /35.B6 /38.C3 /37.A4 /37.A5 /38.C4 /35.B7
A15.DCD A15.RXD A15.TXD A15.DTR A15.GND A15.n.c. A15.RTS A15.CTS A15.n.c.
Plug
Pin
EARTH Kl. 15 DIGITAL 1 DIGITAL 2 HOUSING MASTER Kl. 30 CAN LOW 4 CAN LOW 3 CAN LOW 2 CAN LOW 1 CAN HIGH 1 CAN HIGH 2 CAN HIGH 3 CAN HIGH 4 Data Carrier Detec Receive (RXD) Transmit (TXD) Data Derminal Read SIGNAL Ground (S NOT USED Request to send (R Clear to send (CTS NOT USED Data Carrier Detec Receive (RXD) Transmit (TXD) Data Derminal Read SIGNAL Ground (S NOT USED Request to send (R Clear to send (CTS NOT USED
.PWR.X .PWR.X .PWR.X .PWR.X .PWR.X .PWR.X CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Data Carrier Detec Receive (RXD) Transmit (TXD) Data Derminal Read SIGNAL Ground (S NOT USED Request to send (R Clear to send (CTS NOT USED
COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3 COM3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Phys. Adr. A15.DCD A15.RXD A15.TXD A15.DTR A15.GND A15.n.c. A15.RTS A15.CTS A15.n.c. A15.TXD + A15.TXD A15.RXD + A15.n.c. A15.n.c. A15.RXD A15.n.c. A15.n.c. A15.TXD + A15.TXD A15.RXD + A15.n.c. A15.n.c. A15.RXD A15.n.c. A15.n.c.
Sheet
EA
/40.A7 /40.A8 /40.A6
Description Data Carrier Detec Receive (RXD) Transmit (TXD) Data Derminal Read SIGNAL Ground (S NOT USED Request to send (R Clear to send (CTS NOT USED Transmit Data + Transmit Data Receive Data + NOT USED NOT USED Receive Data NOT USED NOT USED Transmit Data + Transmit Data Receive Data + NOT USED NOT USED Receive Data NOT USED NOT USED Transmit Data + Transmit Data Receive Data + NOT USED NOT USED Receive Data NOT USED NOT USED
A15.TXD + A15.TXD A15.RXD + A15.n.c. A15.n.c. A15.RXD A15.n.c. A15.n.c.
Plug COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 COM4 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN1 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LAN3 LAN3 LAN3 LAN3 LAN3 LAN3 LAN3 LAN3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY MASTER Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
85 114
2
E
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16a.UI10 A16a.UI11 A16a.UI12 A16a.GND A16a A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.GND_logic
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A16a.24V A16a.24V_logic A16a.GND A16a.UI1 A16a.UI2 A16a.UI3 A16a.UI4 A16a.UI9
A16a.GND A16a.UI5 A16a.UI6 A16a.UI7 A16a.UI8 A16a.UI13 A16a.UI14 A16a.UI15
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Sheet
Module Nr.: Module name: EA
/41.E5 /23.A3 /54.A7 /23.A4 /21.A3 /51.C1 /51.C2 /56.F4 /56.F2
/41.E6 /56.A1 /23.A6 /52.A2 /21.A5 /21.A2 /19.B6
A16a.UI16 A16a.GND A16a A16a.24V A16a.CAN_Res A16a.24V A16a.GND A16a.24V
/52.A6
A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.24V A16a.GND
/23.E4 /23.E5 /52.A1 /56.A2 /21.A1 /56.A4 /52.A5
5
6
7
8
INPUT MODULE 1 ON AND OUTLETS
A16a
Phys. Adr.
4
A
+H3
B
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
/41.E7 /41.E8 /21.F3
B
PME1_INPUT MODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys. Adr. A16a.24V A16a A16a.CAN_Low A16a.CAN_Low A16a.GND A16a.RI1 A16a.RI1 A16a.RI2
Sheet
RESERVE VBatt 24V Log RESERVE PRESSURE NLP Check HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP PRESSURE NLP PRESSURE PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE CONTROL LEVER VOR1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTROL LEVER REVERSE1 LIFT KICKOUT BUCKET RETURNTODIG RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE SUPPLY GND LOGIK
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A16a.RI2 A16a.5V A16a.5V A16a.5V A16a.5V A16a.GND A16a.FI1 A16a.FI2
RESERVE FLOAT POSITION LFD QUICKCHANGE DEVICE InchPotentiometer1 Transmission overtemperature TANK SENSOR Kl 50a
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A16a.CAN_High A16a.CAN_High A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND
/37.E3 /37.E5 /23.E3 /23.E4 /21.F2
Throttle transmitter1 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE CANEND WITH PIN 43 verb. VBatt 24V SUPPLY EARTH Vcc PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND A16a.GND_FI1 A16a.GND_FI2
/21.F1 /56.F3 /52.F6
Vcc NLP Check Vcc NLP 24V InchPotentiometer1 24V BUCKET RETURNTODIG 24V TANK SENSOR 24V LIFT KICKOUT 24V Throttle transmitter1 RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
EA
/54.F7 /37.E2 /37.E4 /21.A6 /21.F6
/78.A7 /78.A6
/52.F2 /56.F5
/78.F7 /78.F6
Description
Plug
Pin
HIGH PRESSURE travel pump RESERVE CAN low (Res verb.) CAN low RESERVE Hydraulic oil temperature Hydraulic oil temperature RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE SPEED hydro motor1 Drive rotation speed
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CAN high (Res verb.) CAN high GND NLP Check GND NLP GND PRESSURE RESERVOIR BRAKE HIGH PRESSURE TRAVEL PUMP EARTH InchPotentiometer1 LIFT KICKOUT
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
EARTH TANK SENSOR BUCKET RETURNTODIG EARTH Throttle transmitter1 RESERVE SPEED hydro motor1 EARTH Output speed
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 1 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
86 114
2
E
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16b.UI10 A16b.UI11 A16b.UI12 A16b.GND A16b A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.GND_logic
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A16b.24V A16b.24V_logic A16b.GND A16b.UI1 A16b.UI2 A16b.UI3 A16b.UI4 A16b.UI9
A16b.GND A16b.UI5 A16b.UI6 A16b.UI7 A16b.UI8 A16b.UI13 A16b.UI14 A16b.UI15
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Sheet
Module Nr.: Module name: EA
/41.E1 /25.A5 /25.A7 /27.A8 /51.C6 /51.C6 /51.C8 /57.A6
/41.E2 /51.C3 /51.C4 /52.A3 /52.A7 /77.F4
A16b.UI16 A16b.GND A16b A16b.24V A16b.CAN_Res A16b.24V A16b.GND A16b.24V
/71.A6
A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.24V A16b.GND
/77.A4 /52.A4 /52.A8 /71.A5
5
6
7
8
INPUT MODULE 2 ; ON AND OUTLETS
A16b
Phys. Adr.
4
A
+K2
B
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
/41.E3 /41.E4 /77.A7
B
PME1_INPUTMODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys. Adr.
RESERVE VBatt 24V Log RESERVE DRIVING LIGHT HIGH BEAM INDICATOR SIGNAL RESERVE CONTROL LEVER Option1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A16b.24V A16b A16b.CAN_Low A16b.CAN_Low A16b.GND A16b.RI1 A16b.RI1 A16b.RI2
CONTROL LEVER Option2 CONTROL LEVER; Option3 Warning buzzer RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE EARTH LOGIK
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A16b.RI2 A16b.5V A16b.5V A16b.5V A16b.5V A16b.GND A16b.FI1 A16b.FI2
RESERVE CONTROL LEVER FORWARD2 CONTROL LEVER REVERSE2 InchPotentimeter2 Throttle transmitter2 Sig. LEVEL Zentr Diesel particulate filter Diesel particulate filter
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A16b.CAN_High A16b.CAN_High A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND
JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 1 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE CANEND VBatt 24V SUPPLY EARTH VCC DISTRIBUTOR Central lubrictaion system
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND A16b.GND_FI1 A16b.GND_FI2
VCC LEVEL Central lubrication system 24V InchPotentiometer2 24V Throttler transmitter2 VCC JOYSTICK STEERING RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Sheet
EA
/38.B5 /38.B3
/78.A8 /77.F7 /38.B6 /38.B4 /77.F8 /77.F5 /52.F3 /52.F7
/71.F6 /78.F8
Description
Plug
Pin
RESERVE RESERVE CAN low (CANE m. CAN low RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE SPEED hydro motor Sig. DISTRIBUTOR central lubrication system
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CAN high (CANE m CAN high GND DISTRIBUTOR central lubrication system GND LEVEL central lubrication system RESERVE EARTH InchPotentiometer2 EARTH Throttle transmitter RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
EARTH Joystick & RESERVE GND JOYSTICK STEERING RESERVE EARTH SPEED Hy RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
87 114
2
A16c
E
PROJ: 8920980_003
Sheet
6
B
Plug
Pin
Phys. Adr.
/71.A7 /72.A2 /59.F7 /59.A2 /59.A3
/71.F2
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! EARTH LOGICAL PART
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A16c.RI2 A16c.5V A16c.5V A16c.5V A16c.5V A16c.GND A16c.FI1 A16c.FI2
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! Joystick activation Joystick ARMREST RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A16c.CAN_High A16c.CAN_High A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND
/37.D7 /37.C7
A16c.UI16 /59.F8 A16c.GND A16c A16c.24V A16c.CAN_Res A16c.24V /71.F3 A16c.GND /71.F4 A16c.24V V_DO1
basket function Not OFF 2 SUPPLY EARTH NOT USED! NOT USED! CANEND WITH PIN 43 conn. SUPPLY 24V SUPPLY EARTH Vbatt SUPPLY DO1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND A16c.GND_FI1 A16c.GND_FI2
/72.F5
A16c.24V DO1 A16c.24V A16c.24V A16c.24V V A16c.24V A16c.24V A16c.24V A16c.GND
JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2 right NOT USED! NOT USED! 24V Joystick activation 24V Joystick ARMREST Vcc PRESSURE standard steering 1 NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
/72.F3 /72.F4
/71.A8 /72.A3 /72.A4 /72.F2
A16c.24V A16c A16c.CAN_Low A16c.CAN_Low A16c.GND A16c.RI1 A16c.RI1 A16c.RI2
Sheet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A16c.GND A16c.UI5 A16c.UI6 A16c.UI7 A16c.UI8 A16c.UI13 A16c.UI14 A16c.UI15
8
PME1_INPUTMODULE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
/71.F1
7
INPUT MODULE 3 ON / OUTLETS
Description
EA
5
NOT USED! SUPPLY EARTH NOT USED! JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2 right Joystick PRESSURE standard steering 1 Basket function Not OFF 1 Basket function Modus 1 Basket function Modus 2
A16c.UI10 A16c.UI11 A16c.UI12 A16c.GND A16c A16c.24V A16c.24V A16c.GND_logic
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A16c.24V A16c.24V_logic A16c.GND A16c.UI1 A16c.UI2 A16c.UI3 A16c.UI4 A16c.UI9
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Phys. Adr.
4
A
Module Nr.: Module name:
+H3
B
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
/37.D6 /37.C6
/72.F1
/71.F7
EA
Description
Plug
Pin
NOT USED! NOT USED! CAN low CAN low NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CAN high CAN high NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! PRESSURE standard steering 1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
EARTH Joystick armrest NOT USED! JOYSTICK STEERING SENSOR 2 re NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 3 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
88 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
INPUT MODULE 4 ON / OUTLETS A16d
E
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.24V A16d.24V_logic A16d.GND A16d.UI1 A16d.UI2 A16d.UI3 A16d.UI4 A16d.UI9
EA
B
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys. Adr.
NOT USED! SUPPLY EARTH NOT USED! capacitive Joystick sensor 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT Active OUTPUT Hall sensor 1 CONTROL 5V OPTION
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOT USED! OUTPUT Hall sensor 2 NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! EARTH LOGICAL PART
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A16d.RI2 A16d.5V A16d.5V A16d.5V A16d.5V A16d.GND A16d.FI1 A16d.FI2
A16d.GND A16d.UI5 A16d.UI6 A16d.UI7 A16d.UI8 A16d.UI13 A16d.UI14 A16d.UI15
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A16d.CAN_High A16d.CAN_High A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND
A16d.UI16 A16d.GND A16d A16d.24V A16d.CAN_Res A16d.24V /50.E3 A16d.GND /50.E4 A16d.24V V_DO1
NOT USED! SUPPLY EARTH NOT USED! NOT USED! WITH PIN 43 conn. SUPPLY 24V SUPPLY EARTH Vbatt DO1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND A16d.GND_FI1 A16d.GND_FI2
A16d.24V DO1 A16d.24V A16d.24V A16d.24V V A16d.24V A16d.24V A16d.24V A16d.GND
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! capacitive Joystick sensor NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A16d.UI10 A16d.UI11 A16d.UI12 A16d.GND A16d A16d.24V A16d.24V A16d.GND_logic
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Sheet
Phys. Adr.
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Module Nr.: Module name:
+H3
B
/50.E1 /60.A2 /60.B7 /60.A5 /60.A4 /60.B7 /60.A6
/50.E2
/60.A1
A16d.24V A16d A16d.CAN_Low A16d.CAN_Low A16d.GND A16d.RI1 A16d.RI1 A16d.RI2
Sheet
EA
/38.D1 /38.D1
/60.A3
/60.A8
/38.D2 /38.D2 /60.A3
Description
Plug
Pin
NOT USED! NOT USED! CAN low (Res conn.) CAN low NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
NOT USED! Roller Rocker Cap NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! GND Rocker Roller Cap NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CAN high (Res verb.) CAN high capacitive Joystick sensor NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED! NOT USED!
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY INPUT MODULE 4 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
89 114
2
A17a
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
4
5
8
B
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Sheet
Description
A17a.24V_B1 A17a.24V_logic A17a.GND A17a.PWM1 A17a.PWM2 A17a.PWM3 A17a.PWM4 A17a.PWM9
/42.E4 /42.E1 /42.E5 /78.A1 /57.A5 /56.A6 /56.A7 /53.A4
VBatt 24V Bank1 VBatt 24V Log SUPPLY EARTH PARKING BRAKE AHS BUCKET RETURNTODIG LIFT KICKOUT cruising range1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A17a.24V A17a.24V A17a.CAN_Low A17a.CAN_Low A17a.GND_DO2 A17a.GND_PWM1 A17a.GND_PWM2 A17a.GND_PWM3
A17a.PWM10 A17a.PWM11 A17a.PWM12 A17a.GND A17a.24V_logic A17a.24V_B3 A17a.24V_B2 A17a.GND_logic
/53.A2 /53.A3 /53.A1 /43.E3 /43.E4 /42.E7 /42.E2
cruising range2 cruising range3 Modulation SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE VBatt 24V Bk 3 zu M 2/35 (2. AST) SUPPLY 24V Bank2 SUPPLY EARTH LOGICAL PART
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A17a.GND_PWM4 A17a.GND_PWM9 A17a.GND_PWM10 A17a.GND_PWM11 A17a.GND_PWM12 A17a.GND_DO4 A17a.FI1 A17a.FI2
A17a.GND A17a.PWM5 A17a.PWM6 A17a.PWM7 A17a.PWM8 A17a.PWM13 A17a.PWM14 A17a.PWM15
/42.E7 /56.A8 /21.A7 /54.A8 /53.A8 /53.A6 /53.A7 /54.A1
SUPPLY EARTH FLOAT POSITION VENTILATOR BUZZER Swivel angle limitation. oil engine1 oil engine1 oil engine2 TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 FORWARD
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A17a.PWM16 A17a.GND A17a.GND_logic A17a.24V_B4 A17a.CAN_Res A17a.24V A17a.GND_DO1 A17a.V_DO1
/54.A2 /43.E2
/43.D5
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 BACKWARD SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE VBatt 24V Bk 4 zu M 2/33 (2. AST) CANEND WITH PIN 43 verb. RESERVE RESERVE SUPPLY SUPPLY DO1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A17a.DO1 A17a.V_DO2 A17a.DO2 A17a.V_DO3 A17a.DO3 A17a.V_DO4 A17a.DO4 A17a.GND_DO3
/43.D5 /43.D8 /43.D8 /77.A3 /77.B3 /55.A1 /55.A2 /77.F3
2. AST Joystick zu M 2/28 SUPPLY SUPPLY DO2 2.AST Pump2 zu M 2/14 SUPPLY SUPPLY DO3 VCC central lubrication system MV PUMP Supply digital output4 A4 Back alarm OPTICAL GND central lubrication system MV PUMP
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
/43.E1
7
OUTPUT MODULE 1 ON / OUTLETS
Phys. Adr.
EA
6
A
Module Nr.: Module name:
+H3
B
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
Plug
Pin
Plug
Pin
RESERVE RESERVE CAN low CAN low RESERVE EARTH PARKING BRAKE EARTH AHS EARTH BUCKET RETURNTODIG
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
/56.F7 /53.F4 /53.F2 /53.F3 /53.F1 /55.E2
EARTH LIFT KICKOUT EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 1 EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 2 EARTH TRAVEL RANGES 3 EARTH Modulation EARTH Back alarm OPTICAL RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
A17a.CAN_High A17a.CAN_High A17a.GND A17a.GND_PWM5 A17a.GND_PWM6 A17a.GND_PWM7 A17a.GND_PWM8 A17a.GND_PWM13
/37.D5 /37.C5
CAN high CAN high RESERVE EARTH FLOAT POSITION EARTH VENTILATOR EARTH BUZZER Swivel angle limitation, oil engine1 EARTH Oil engine1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
A17a.GND_PWM14 A17a.GND_PWM15 A17a.GNDPWM16 A17a.GND A17a.GND_FI1 A17a.GND_FI2
/53.F7 /54.F1 /54.F2
EARTH Oil engine2 EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 FORWARD EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump1 BACKWARD RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
/37.D4 /37.C4 /78.F1 /57.F5 /56.F6
/56.F8 /21.F7 /54.F8 /53.F8 /53.F6
EA
Description
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 1 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
90 114
2
A17b
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
A17b.24V_B1 A17b.24V_logic A17b.GND A17b.PWM1 A17b.PWM2 A17b.PWM3 A17b.PWM4 A17b.PWM9
4
5
B
/44.E4 /44.E1 /44.E5 /53.A5 /28.B1 /54.A5 /54.A6 /54.A3
VBatt 24V Bank1 VBatt 24V LOGICAL PART SUPPLY EARTH OVERSPEED PROTECTION OPTIONS SWIVEL ANGLE travel pump1 SWIVEL ANGLE travel pump2 TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump2
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A17b.24V A17b.24V A17b.CAN_Low A17b A17b.GND_DO2 A17b.GND_PWM1 A17b.GND_PWM2 A17b.GND_PWM3
A17b.PWM10 A17b.PWM11 A17b.PWM12 A17b.GND A17b.24V_logic A17b.24V_B3 A17b.24V_B2 A17b.GND_logic
/54.A4 /57.A1 /57.A2 /43.E7 /43.E8 /44.E7 /44.E2
TRAVELLING DIRECTION Pump2 BACKWARD Additional equipment1 Additional equipment2 SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE VBatt 24V BK 3 VBatt 24V Bank2 VBatt EARTH
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A17b.GND_PWM4 A17b.GND_PWM9 A17b.GND_PWM10 A17b.GND_PWM11 A17b.GND_PWM12 A17b.GND_DO4 A17b.FI1 A17b.FI2
A17b.GND A17b.PWM5 A17b.PWM6 A17b.PWM7 A17b.PWM8 A17b.PWM13 A17b.PWM14 A17b.PWM15
/44.E7 /23.A2 /21.A8 /23.A7 /23.A8 /72.A6 /72.A7 /55.A4
SUPPLY EARTH Emergency steering FAN REVERSAL LFD LFD/FLOAT POSITION JOYSTICK STEERING LEFT JOYSTICK STEERING RIGHT Vcc MVGEROTOR STEERING
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A17b.PWM16 A17b.GND A17b.GND_logic A17b.24V_B4 A17b.CAN_Res A17b.24V A17b.GND_DO1 A17b.V_DO1
/72.A8 /43.E6
Savety MV Joy SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE VBatt 24V Bk 4 CAN END RESERVE RESERVE VBatt SUPPLY DO1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A17b.DO1 A17b.V_DO2 A17b.DO2 A17b.V_DO3 A17b.DO3 A17b A17b.DO4 A17b.GND_DO3
/43.D1 /43.D4 /43.D4 /45.F1 /25.B8 /45.F2 /45.A5
2. AST Pump1 SUPPLY SUPPLY DO 2. AST TRANSMISSION VBatt DO3 REVERSING LIGHT VBatt D04 Backup ALARM RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
/43.D1
8
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Plug
/43.E5 /38.E6
7
OUTPUT MODULE 2 ON / OUTLETS
Description
EA
6
A
Module Nr.: Module name:
+H3
B
3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
Pin
Plug
Pin
RESERVE RESERVE CAN low (CANE m. CAN low RESERVE EARTH over rotation speed EARTH OPTIONS EARTH travel pump
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
/54.F6 /54.F3 /54.F4 /57.F1 /57.F2 /45.F5
EARTH SWIVEL ANGLE EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION EARTH TRAVELLING DIRECTION EARTH Additional equipment EARTH Additional equipment EARTH Backup RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
A17b.CAN_High A17b.CAN_High A17b.GND A17b.GND_PWM5 A17b.GND_PWM6 A17b.GND_PWM7 A17b.GND_PWM8 A17b.GND_PWM13
/38.E8 /38.D6
CAN high (CANE m. CAN high RESERVE EARTH emergency steering EARTH FAN REVERSAL EARTH LFD EARTH LFD EARTH JOYSTICK STEERING
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
A17b.GND_PWM14 A17b.GND_PWM15 A17b.GNDPWM16 A17b.GND A17b.GND_FI1 A17b.GND_FI2
/72.F7 /55.E4 /72.F8
EARTH JOYSTICK STEERING EARTH GEROTOR STEERING GND Savety MV Joy RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
/38.E5 /38.D5 /53.F5 /28.D1 /54.F5
/23.E2 /21.F8 /23.E7 /23.E8 /72.F6
Description
EA
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 2 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
91 114
2
3
OUTPUT MODULE 3
OUTPUT MODULE 1
OUTPUT MODULE 2
A
INPUT MODULE 1
INPUT MODULE 3
1
A17c
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
/48.F3 /48.F1 /48.F5 /49.A7 /50.A5 /50.A6 /50.A7 /57.A3
VBatt 24V Bank1 VBatt 24V LOGICAL PART SUPPLY EARTH Vcc CUTOFF LIGHTING 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A17c.24V A17c.24V A17c.CAN_Low A17c A17c.GND_DO2 A17c.GND_PWM1 A17c.GND_PWM2 A17c.GND_PWM3
A17c.PWM10 A17c.PWM11 A17c.PWM12 A17c.GND A17c.24V_logic A17c.24V_B3 A17c.24V_B2 A17c.GND_logic
/57.A4
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE SUPPLY 24V Bank3 SUPPLY 24V Bank2 VBatt EARTH LOGICAL PART
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A17c.GND_PWM4 A17c.GND_PWM9 A17c.GND_PWM10 A17c.GND_PWM11 A17c.GND_PWM12 A17c.GND_DO4 A17c.FI1 A17c.FI2
A17c.GND A17c.PWM5 A17c.PWM6 A17c.PWM7 A17c.PWM8 A17c.PWM13 A17c.PWM14 A17c.PWM15
/48.F7 /50.A8
SUPPLY EARTH 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A17c.CAN_High A17c.CAN_High A17c.GND A17c.GND_PWM5 A17c.GND_PWM6 A17c.GND_PWM7 A17c.GND_PWM8 A17c.GND_PWM13
RESERVE SUPPLY EARTH RESERVE SUPPLY 24V Bank4 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE VBatt SUPPLY DO1
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A17c.GND_PWM14 A17c.GND_PWM15 A17c.GNDPWM16 A17c.GND A17c.GND_FI1 A17c.GND_FI2
RESERVE VBatt SUPPLY DO2 RESERVE VBatt SUPPLY DO3 RESERVE VBatt SUPPLY D04 RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
/49.F1 /48.F6 /48.F2
/49.F4 /49.F3 /38.B8
A17c.DO1 A17c.V_DO2 A17c.DO2 A17c.V_DO3 A17c.DO3 A17c A17c.DO4 A17c.GND_DO3
8
B
A17c.24V_B1 A17c.24V_logic A17c.GND A17c.PWM1 A17c.PWM2 A17c.PWM3 A17c.PWM4 A17c.PWM9
/49.F2
7
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Sheet
EA
6
OUTPUT MODULE 3 ON / OUTLETS
Phys. Adr.
A17c.PWM16 A17c.GND A17c.GND_logic A17c.24V_B4 A17c.CAN_Res A17c.24V A17c.GND_DO1 A17c.V_DO1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
5
A
Module Nr.: Module name:
+H3
B
4
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
EA
/38.B7 /38.B7 /50.E5 /50.E6 /50.E7 /50.E8 /57.F4 /57.F3
/38.B8
Description
Plug
Pin
RESERVE RESERVE CAN low (CANE m. CAN_Res conn.) CAN low RESERVE GND CUTOFF LIGHTING GND 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 GND 3. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
GND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV1 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
CAN high (CANE m. CAN_Res conn.) CAN high RESERVE GND 4. CONTROL CIRCUIT EP MV2 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
65 66 67 68 69 70
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY OUTPUT MODULE 3 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
92 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
LH ECUUP/CR GENERAL OUTLAY ON AND OUTLETS +M A700D
LHECUUPCREXT
B
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
Phys. Addr. A700D.50 A700D.15 A700D.30.1 A700D.30.2 A700D.30.3 A700D.31.2 A700D.31.3 A700D.31.1
Sheet
Type
Description
PIN
Phys. Addr.
/47.C6
ENGINE IGNITION
STARTING ON
X2 X2
66 68
/47.F1 /47.F3 /47.F5 /47.F2 /47.F4 /47.F6
SUPPLY 30b SUPPLY 30b SUPPLY 30b EARTH EARTH EARTH
PERFORMANCE PART PERFORMANCE PART ELECTRONICS PERFORMANCE PART PERFORMANCE PART ELECTRONICS
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
1 2 4 15 16 3
X2 X2 X2
67 69 70
A700D.DI5 A700D.DI6 A700D.DI7
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
A700D.AI9.1 A700D.AI9.2 A700D.AI9.GND A700D.AI10.1 A700D.AI10.2 A700D.AI10.GND
GAS PEDAL CHANNEL 1 GAS PEDAL CHANNEL 1 GAS PEDAL CHANNEL 1 GAS PEDAL; CHANNEL 2 GAS PEDAL; CHANNEL 2 GAS PEDAL; CHANNEL 2
SUPPLY SIGNAL EARTH SUPPLY SIGNAL EARTH
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
35 34 33 49 48 47
COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR EARTH
VCC SIGNAL
X2 X2 X2
63 62 61
A700D.AL1.REF1 A700D.AI1.05V A700D.AI1.GND
WATER FUEL WATER FUEL WATER FUEL
FUEL FUEL FUEL
X2 X2 X2
7 6 5
A700D.AI2.REF1 A700D.AI2.05V A700D.AI2.GND
COOLING WATER COOLING WATER COOLING WATER
LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL
X2 X2 X2
21 20 19
X2 X2
60 46
A700D.AI11.1 A700D.AI11.2 A700D.AI11.GND
/21.A4 /21.F4
A700D.TI1 A700D.TI1.GND A700D.DO1 A700D.DI2 A700D.DO2 A700D.DI3 A700D.DO3 A700D.DO4 A700D.DO5
/23.A5 /23.F5
AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM
/19.B5
D+ HEATER FLANGE
GENERATOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
X2 X2
53 64
HEATER FLANGE FREE SOLENOID VALVE ENGINE BRAKE RESERVE
SELECTION
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
39 65 25 11 13
/19.B6
FUEL SELECTION
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Plug
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
3
Plug
A700D.DO5.GND A700D.DO6 A700D.DO6.GND
RESERVE FAN VALVE FAN VALVE
SELECTION EARTH
X2 X2 X2
12 27 26
A700D.DO10 A700D.DO11 A700D.DO12
FEHLERLAMPE CONTROL RESERVE
(LowSide) PREHEAT (LowSide)
X2 X2 X2
14 28 42
A700D.FO A700D.CAN1.H.2 A700D.CAN1R A700D.CAN1L.1 A700D.CAN1H.1 A700D.CAN1L.2
SIGNAL
/37.C3 /37.C2 /37.D3 /37.D2
SPEED CAN1 HIGH CAN1 RES CAN1 LOW CAN1 HIGH CAN1 LOW
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
56 40 9 8 54 10
EARTH
/70.A3 /70.A2
CAN1 GND CAN2 HIGH CAN2 LOW CAN2 RES CAN2 HIGH CAN2 LOW CAN2 GND DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSIS
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
45 41 23 22 55 24 59 36 37
DIAGNOSIS SUPPLY SIGNAL
EARTH
X2 X2 X2
38 50 51
A700D.GND A700D.LSB1 A700D.LSB2
/70.A1
4
EMIT RECEIVE
PIN
A700D.GND A700D.FREI1 A700D.FREI2 A700D.FREI3 A700D.FREI4
EARTH NC NC NC NC
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
52 17 18 29 30
A700D.FREI7
NC
X2
43
A700D.FREI11 A700D.FREI5 A700D.FREI6 A700D.FREI8
NC NC NC NC
X2 X2 X2 X2
44 31 57 58
A700D.FREI9
NC
X2
32
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL ENGINE SIDE
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
B
Description
A700D.CAN1.GND A700D.CAN2H.2 A700D.CAN2L.1 A700D.CAN2R A700D.CAN2H.1 A700D.CAN2L.2 A700D.CAN2.GND A700D.TXD A700D.RXD
Type Sheet
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
93 114
C
D
E
F
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
ELECTRIC KEYPAD B
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Phys. Addr.
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
=K +K4 A18
ELECTRIC KEYPAD 10278758
TYPE Sheet
Description
A18.Kl15 A18.GND A18.CAN_High A18.CAN_Low
A A A A
/39.D2 /39.D4
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
A18.Kl30 A18.Flasher
A A
/39.D3 /27.A7
A18.CAN_High A18.CAN_Low
A A
A18.CAN_RES. A18.PWM1 A18.PWM2 A18.PWM3
A A A A
A18.PWM4 A18.PWM5 A18.PWM6 A18.PWM7 A18.PWM8 A18.PWM9
PLUG PIN INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4
SUPPLY SUPPLY HAZARD WARNING LIGHT FLASHING SPEED INPUT
X1 X1
5 6
CAN_High CAN_Low
CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1
7 8
/27.A1 /33.A3 /28.A6
CAN_RES. HAZARD WARNING LIGHT WARNING BEACON WINDSCREEN WIPER
MATCHING RESISTOR OUTLET A1 OUTLET A2 OUTLET A3
X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12
A A
/28.A7 /33.A7
WASHING PUMP REAR REAR WINDOW HEATER
OUTLET A4 OUTLET A5
X2 X2
1 2
A A A A
/20.A7 /25.D1 /30.D1 /31.E1
PARKING LIGHT OUTLET A6 Abblentlicht OUTLET A7 WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT OUTLET A8 WORKING PROJECTOR REAR OUTLET A9
X2 X2 X2 X2
3 4 5 6
C
D
ELECTRIC KEYPAD E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY ELECTRIC KEYPAD Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
94 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
B
E
=K +K4 A11
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
C
Phys. Addr.
MAIN KEYPAD 10278781
TYPE Sheet
A11.Kl15 A11.GND A11.CAN_High A11.CAN_Low
A A A A
A11.Kl15 A11.GND
A A
A11.CAN_High A11.CAN_Low
A A
A11.CAN_RES. A11.Res. A11.Res. A11.Res.
A A A A
Description
/39.D5 /39.D7 /35.B5 /35.B4
PLUG
PIN
+24V SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
SUPPLY SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4
24V SUPPLY EARTH
SUPPLY SUPPLY EARTH
X1 X1
5 6
CAN_High CAN_Low
CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1
7 8
CAN_Abschlusswid. RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
MATCHING RESISTOR RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
/35.A5 /35.A4
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY MAIN KEYPAD Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
95 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
ELECTRIC KEYPAD B
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
ELECTRIC KEYPAD
=K +K4 A18
10278758
Phys. Addr.
TYPE
Sheet
Description
PLUG
A18.Kl15 A18.GND A18.CAN_High A18.CAN_Low
A A A A
/39.D2 /39.D4
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
A18.Kl30 A18.Flasher
A A
/39.D3 /27.A7
SUPPLY SUPPLY HAZARD WARNING LIGHT FLASHING SPEED INPUT
A18.CAN_High A18.CAN_Low
A A
CAN_High CAN_Low
A18.CAN_RES. A18.PWM1 A18.PWM2 A18.PWM3
A A A A
/27.A1 /33.A3 /28.A6
A18.PWM4 A18.PWM5
A A
A18.PWM6 A18.PWM7 A18.PWM8 A18.PWM9
A A A A
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
PIN
X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4
X1 X1
5 6
CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1
7 8
CAN_RES. HAZARD WARNING LIGHT WARNING BEACON WINDSCREEN WIPER
MATCHING RESISTOR OUTLET A1 OUTLET A2 OUTLET A3
X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12
/28.A7 /33.A7
WASHING PUMP REAR REAR WINDOW HEATER
OUTLET A4 OUTLET A5
X2 X2
1 2
/20.A7 /25.D1 /30.D1 /31.E1
PARKING LIGHT Low beam
OUTLET A6 OUTLET A7 WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT OUTLET A8 OUTLET A9 WORKING PROJECTOR REAR
X2 X2 X2 X2
3 4 5 6
C
D
ELECTRIC KEYPAD E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY ELECTRIC KEYPAD Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
94 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
HEAT / AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SYSTEM SIDE
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
A21a
Module Nr.: Module name:
+K4
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
Phys. Adr.
Sheet
A21a.1 A21a.2 A21a.3 A21a.4 A21a.5 A21a.6 A21a.7 A21a.8
/64.B3 /65.B3 /65.A3 /65.A2 /65.A1 /65.B2 /65.B7
EA
HEAT-/ AIR CONDITIONING (INSTALLATION)
PLUG
BDescription
Pin
Phys. Adr.
Sheet /66.A5 /66.B6
not used logic output(010V) VMC1 clockwise rotation VMC1 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC1 GND VMC1 VMC1 Potentiometer tap VMC2 clockwise rotation
not used logic output(010V) VMC1 clockwise rotation VMC1 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC1 GND VMC1 VMC1 Potentiometer tap VMC2 clockwise rotation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A21a.25 A21a.26 A21a.27 A21a.28 A21a.29 A21a.30 A21a.31 A21a.32
VMC2 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC2 Ground VMC2 VMC2 potentiometer tap not used not used not used diagnose fan
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
VMC3 clockwise rotation VMC3 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC3 Ground VMC3 VMC3 potentiometer tap VMC4 clockwise rotation VMC4 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A21a.9 A21a.10 A21a.11 A21a.12 A21a.13 A21a.14 A21a.15 A21a.16
/65.A7 /65.A6 /65.A5 /65.B6
/64.B4
VMC2 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC2 Ground VMC2 VMC2 potentiometer tap not used not used not used diagnose fan
A21a.17 A21a.18 A21a.19 A21a.20 A21a.21 A21a.22 A21a.23 A21a.24
/66.B3 /66.A3 /66.A2 /66.A1 /66.B2 /66.B7 /66.A7 /66.A6
VMC3 clockwise rotation VMC3 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC3 Ground VMC3 VMC3 potentiometer tap VMC4 clockwise rotation VMC4 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC4
EA
Description
Plug
Pin
/67.B3 /67.A4 /67.A3
Ground VMC4 VMC4 potentiometer tap not used 24V fan not used VMC5 clockwise rotation VMC5 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC5
Ground VMC4 VMC4 potentiometer tap not used 24V fan not used VMC5 clockwise rotation VMC5 counter clockwise rotation V ref VMC5
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A21a.33 A21a.34 A21a.35 A21a.36 A21a.37 A21a.38 A21a.39 A21a.40
/67.A2 /67.B2 /64.B5 /64.B6 /64.B7 /64.B8 /67.A6 /67.A7
Ground VMC5 VMC5 potentiometer tap Sensor1+ (icing) Sensor1 (icing) Sensor2+ (icing) Sensor2 (icing) Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.) Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.)
Ground VMC5 VMC5 potentiometer tap Sensor1+ (icing) Sensor1 (icing) Sensor2+ (icing) Sensor2 (icing) Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.) Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A21a.41 A21a.42
/64.B2
not used Ground FAN
not used Ground FAN
41 42
/64.B1
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
GENERAL OUTLAY HEAT / AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SYSTEM SIDE
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
97 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
B
E
Phys. Addr.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
OPTION KEYPAD
+K4 A19
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
10278759
TYPE SHEET
BDESCRIPTION
PLUG
PIN
A19.Kl15 A19.GND A19.CAN_High A19.CAN_Low
A A A A
/39.F2 /39.F4 /35.E7 /35.E6
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4
A19.Kl15 A19.c.
A A
/39.F3
SUPPLY Kl. 15 n.c
SUPPLY n.c
X1 X1
5 6
A19.CAN_High A19.CAN_Low
A A
/35.E5 /35.E4
CAN_High CAN_Low
CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1
7 8
A19.CAN_RES. A19.PWM1 A19.PWM2 A19.PWM3
A A A A
CAN_RES. n.c. n.c. n.c.
MATCHING RESISTOR n.c. n.c. n.c.
X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12
A19.PWM4 A19.PWM5
A A
n.c. n.c.
n.c. n.c.
X2 X2
1 2
A19.PWM6 A19.PWM7 A19.PWM8 A19.PWM9
A A A A
n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c.
n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c.
X2 X2 X2 X2
3 4 5 6
C
D
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY OPTION KEYPAD Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
98 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
B
E
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Phys. Addr.
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
B
+K4 A22
10278759
TYPE SHEET
PLUG PIN
BDESCRIPTION
A22.Kl15 A22.GND A22.CAN_High A22.CAN_Low
A A A A
/39.F5 /39.F7 /35.D5 /35.D4
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
INFORMATION INPUT SUPPLY EARTH CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1 X1 X1
1 2 3 4
A22.Kl15 A22.c.
A A
/39.F8
SUPPLY Kl. 15 n.c
SUPPLY n.c
X1 X1
5 6
A22.CAN_High A22.CAN_Low
A A
/35.C5 /35.C4
CAN_High CAN_Low
CAN_High CAN_Low
X1 X1
7 8
A22.CAN_RES. A22.PWM1 A22.PWM2 A22.PWM3
A A A A
CAN_RES. n.c. n.c. n.c.
MATCHING RESISTOR n.c. n.c. n.c.
X1 X1 X1 X1
9 10 11 12
A22.PWM4 A22.PWM5
A A
n.c. n.c.
n.c. n.c.
X2 X2
1 2
A22.PWM6 A22.PWM7 A22.PWM8 A22.PWM9
A A A A
n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c.
n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c.
X2 X2 X2 X2
3 4 5 6
C
D
CAN AIR COND. KEYPAD
E
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
GENERAL OUTLAY AIR CONDITIONING KEYPAD FLAP CONTROL
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
99 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
B
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
240.00
F1 10A
F31a 10A
...
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT LEFT
F2 7,5A
F31b 10A
HIGH BEAM LEFT
WORKING PROJECTOR FRONT RIGHT
F3 7,5A
F32a 10A
HIGH BEAM RIGHT
WORKING PROJECTOR LEFT REAR HATCH
F4 7,5A
F32b 10A
E
WORKING PROJECTOR RIGHT REAR HATCH
F5 7,5A
F33a 10A
130.00
LOW BEAM RIGHT
WORKING PROJECTOR LEFT* CAB ROOF
F6 3A
F33b 10A
BOUNDARY/PARKING LIGHT LEFT
F7 3A
WORKING PROJECTOR RIGHT* CAB ROOF
F29 25A
F9
10A
F45 10A
F56 10A
FUEL PREHEATING ..................................
INPUT MODULE 2 Vcc
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BANK 2 OUTPUT MODULE 3 K11/50, Y50, Y20, Y21 Vcc DO 1
F67 10A
F27 10A PROFILE LIGHT/ PARKING LIGHT
F15 10A
F46 10A
F57 10A
F68 10A
F28 10A
LH CONTROL LEVER VNR Erreg. G3, SIMULATION D+
INPUT MODULE 3 Vcc JOYSTICK STEERING
... ...
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc DO 2
WEIGHING DEVICE ...
F18 10A
F47 10A
F58 10A
F69 10A
F30 15A
Windscreen wiper motor OUTPUT MODULE 1 BANK 1 ... washing p. back;dust filter check Y10, Y14, Y9, Y17 ...
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc DO 3
Vcc VOLTAGE CONVERTER (RADIO, 12V plug.)
F19 10A
F70 10A
F34 20A
HEAT/AIR Cond. system. Kl.15 OUTPUT MODULE 1 BANK 2 OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO 1 Y18, Y13, H40, Y57* OPM1 YEP1,YEP2,Y2,Y3
F48 10A
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc DO 4
REFUELLING PUMP
F20 15A
F49 10A
F71
F35 10A
WIPER, WASHING PUMP front; HORN
Vcc DO4 OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO 2 RFWE OPTICAL red flashing li. OPM1 MO1, Y6.1.2.3
Vcc KEYPADS Kl.15
Vcc MASTER Kl.30
F21 10A
F50 10A
F61
F72
F38 5A
LOW BEAM HIGH BEAM
... ...
OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO 3 E1, E5 back off lights
... ...
LHECUUP/CR Vcc Controller
F22 7,5A
F51
F62 10A
F73
F39 5A
OUTPUT MODULE 1 DO 1 OUTPUT Modul2 Y51, Y52
OUTPUT MODULE 2 DO 4 B16 Backup ALARM
... ...
Uhr AUXILIARY HEATER
F52 10A
10A
F59 10A
F60 10A
10A
10A
BOUNDARY/PARKING LIGHT Ignition lock release RIGHT
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH LH CONTROL LEVERR
AIR CON/OPTION KEYPAD
Switch lighting STOP LIGHT
F07b 10A
F75 10A
F10 5A
F23 5A
F63 10A
F74 15A
F40 20A
Flashing function
RADIO Kl.58 12V ELECTRICAL SOCKET
DISPLAY UNIT ...
Puritec PARTICLE FILTER
OUTPUT MODULE 1 DO 2 REVERSING OBSTACLE DETECTOR OPM2 Y2a,Y3a,Y11,Y12
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc BANK 1
REAR WINDOW HEATER MIRROR HEATING*
VCC AUXILIARY HEATER Kl.30 ...
F8 15A
F76 10A
F11 10A
F24 10A
F53 10A
F64 10A
F19A 20A
F41
compressor seat*, (RADIO) CIGARETTE LIGHTER (X70)
RADIO Kl.30
PRESSURE SWITCH B32, B28, B3, B3a
IGNITION ON ENGINE ECU
OUTPUT MODULE 1 DO 3 Y62 central lubrication sys. LH
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc BANK 2
HEAT/AIR COND. SYS. Kl. 30 Dust particle filter . ...
F12 10A
F43 5A
F8A
10A
Interior lighting Clock AUXILIARY HEATER
F54 5A
F65 10A
F25
Groeneveld centr. lubr. system Logic INPUT 1+2 ... Logic OUTPUT 1 + 2
Kl. 15 MASTER ...
OUTPUT MODULE 3 Vcc BANK 3
WARNING BEACON
F13 15A
F55 10A
F66 10A
F26
F44 10A
M11 VENTILATOR CONDENSER INPUT MODULE 1 ... Vcc
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
LOW BEAM LEFT
F14 15A
OUTPUT MODULE 2 BANK 1 OUTPUT MODULE 3 Y16, Y53, Y15, Y15a Vcc BANK 4
D
20A
F42
10A
... ...
10A
KL. 30
DIAGNOSTIC PLUG IMMOBILISER KAT
S1
C
F36 40A F17
LED TEST
A14.B1 LHECUUP/CR A14.B2 LHECUUP/CR
F16 40A
40A
...
...
...
KL. 15
F37 ... ...
...
E
8922717_002
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY PROTECTIVE FOIL Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
100 114
D
E We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1
Zustand Änderung
1
2
Ersteller
Datum
Datum Name Datum
2
3
Ausgabe
27.03.2007 09:42
3
4
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
4
5
5
6
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM DIESEL ENGINE 4 AND 6 CYLINDER
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
6
7
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980
460 9010 00 003 7
8
A A
B B
ENGINE D936A6 AND D934A6 WITH ENGINE ECU C
D
E
F F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
101 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
ᑏ; COOLANT TEMPERATURE ENGINE ECU
A
A
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR +M B708
M710 Y22
VEHICLE SIDE
1
ENGINE SIDE
/107.C5 1
R710 R701
X1
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
D+ /105.B3
GENERATOR B
+M
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
+M Y711 +M
/109.B3 +M /109.B4 +M /109.B6 +M /110.B3 +M /110.B4 +M /110.B6 X1 Y712 X1 Y713 X1 Y714 X1 Y715 X1 Y716 X1
/105.B6 50
M700 M1
1 /107.C7
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
B707 +M
D
/108.B2 1
SPEED
1 /106.B2
+M B711
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
PHASE SENSOR
B710 +M
/108.B7 1
n1
3 /106.C7
3
E
SPEED
=M +M B712
/108.B4 1
WATER DETECTOR;
n
B709 +M TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUEL 1 /107.C3
B701 1 +M /106.B5 OIL PRESSURE 1
F
2
B703 +M
1
+M B713
E
STARTER
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
INJECTION PUMP
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
G700 G3
2
3
F
n2 Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
STAND BY AM 6 CYLINDER ENGINE 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
102 114
E
Zustand
+M B707
Änderung
1 Datum
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
Ersteller
Datum
Name Datum
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUEL
Ausgabe
27.03.2007 09:42
2
WL701
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE WH 1.94
/108.B7 1
Y715 /110.B3 +M X1
Y714 +M
ENGINE PLUG
R710
3
M710 Y22
M710
R710
ᑏ;
1
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
4 1
G700 G3
X1
M710 +M G700
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
WL700
GENERATOR
WH 1.94 2
5
2
1
GENERAL OUTLAY SENSORS
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
6
X701.B +M
n 3 /106.C7
+M B713
R710 R701
+M Y713
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
35 34 33 32 31 30 29
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
35 34 33 32 31 30 29
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
Y716 /110.B4 +M X1
X1
/109.B4
/110.B6
X1
X1
/109.B6
5
+M X701.S
OIL PRESSURE B710 +M
/106.B5 1
n2
4
X700.S +M
1
+M B701
PHASE SENSOR
3
+M X700.B
1
/107.C5 1
/106.B2 1
+M Y712 X1
/109.B3
+M Y711
2
X700.B +M
+M B708
2
/108.B4 1
SPEED
/107.C3 1
3 2
+M B703
3
/108.B2 1
SPEED
+M X700.S
+M B709
n1 +M B712
+M B711
PROJ: 8920980_003
A
/107.C7 1
D We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
1 6 7
G700
/105.B3 D+
+M M700
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980
460 9010 00 003 7
8
INJECTION PUMP; 16 ENGINE ECU A
VEHICLE PLUG
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
B B
M700 M1
M700
1
/105.B6 50
C
STARTER
WATER DETECTOR;
D
1
E
F F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
103 114
2
1
A
5
6
7
8
A
PIN
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SUPPLY (5V) OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SIGNAL (0,54,5V)
X1 X1
63 49
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE Air intake pressure transmitter Air intake pressure transmitter
GND NC NC NC SUPPLY (5V) SIGNAL (0,54,5V)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
35 62 48 34 61 47
Air intake pressure transmitter RESERVE RESERVE
GND NC NC
X1 X1 X1
33 60 46
A A A A A A
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
NC NC NC NC NC NC
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
32 59 45 31 58 44
A700C.AI8.GND A700C.TI2 A700C.TI2.GND
A A A
/107.E7 /107.E6
RESERVE Air intakte temp. transmitter Air intake temp. transmitter
NC SIGNAL GND
X1 X1 X1
30 50 36
A700C.TI3 A700C.TI3.GND A700C.TI4
A A A
/107.E5 /107.E4 /107.E3
Coolant temp. transmitter Coolant temp. transmitter Fuel temp. transmitter
SIGNAL GND SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1
51 37 52
A700C.TI4.GND A700C.POWER.PS1 A700C.TI5
A
/107.E2 /106.E7 /106.E7
Fuel temp. transmitter water detector water detector
GND SUPPLY (UBat) SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1
38 57 53
A700C.TI5.GND A700C.POWER.SPEED1
/106.E6 /108.E3
water detector Speed sensor 1
GND SUPPLY (12V)
X1 X1
A700C.SPEED1 A700C.SPEED1.GND
/108.E2 /108.E1
Speed sensor 1 Speed sensor1
SIGNAL GND
X1 X1
39 69 55
A700C.POWER.SPEED2 A700C.SPEED2 A700C.SPEED2.GND A700C.POWER.INDEX A700C.INDEX
/108.E5 /108.E4 /108.E4 /108.E7 /108.E7
Speed sensor 2 Speed sensor 2 Speed sensor 2 phase sensor phase sensor
SUPPLY(12V) SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
Sheet
A700C.AI3.REF2 A700C.AI3
A A
/106.E5 /106.E4
A700C.AI3.GND A700C.AI4.REF2 A700C.AI4 A700C.AI4.GND A700C.AI5.REF3 A700C.AI5
A A A A A A
/106.E4
A700C.AI5.GND A700C.AI6.REF3 A700C.AI6
A A A
/106.E1
A700C.AI6.GND A700C.AI7.REF4 A700C.AI7 A700C.AI7.GND A700C.AI8.REF4 A700C.AI8
Description
GND SUPPLY (12V) SIGNAL
56
Type
Sheet
Description
Plug
PIN 42 24
phase sensor RESERVE RESERVE
GND NC NC
X1 X1 X1
RESERVE RESERVE Dynamo D+
NC NC Ubat
X1 X1 X1
23 25 26 64
Starting motor. KL50 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
Activation(UBat) NC NC NC NC NC
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
29 66 67 43 65 14
/109.E2 /109.E3
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE EP CYLINDER 1 EP CYLINDER 1
NC NC NC NC NC NC NC PWM (+) PWM (GND)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
28 13 27 9 10 11 12 22 8
A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
/109.E4 /109.E4 /109.E5
EP CYLINDER 2 EP CYLINDER 2 EP CYLINDER 3
PWM (+) PWM (GND) PWM (+)
X1 X1 X1
21 7 20
A700C.A3.LOW.MV3 A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4 A700C.A4.LOW.MV4 A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5 A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
/109.E6
/110.E2 /110.E3
EP CYLINDER 3 RESERVE RESERVE EP ZYLINDER 4 EP ZYLINDER 4
PWM (GND) NC NC PWM (+) PWM (GND)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
6 19 5 18 4
A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
/110.E4
EP ZYLINDER 5
PWM (+)
X1
17
A700C.B2.LOW.MV6 A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7 A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8
/110.E4 /110.E5 /110.E6
EP ZYLINDER 5 EP ZYLINDER 6 EP ZYLINDER 6 RESERVE
PWM (GND) PWM (+) PWM (GND) NC
X1 X1 X1 X1
3 16 2 15
RESERVE
NC
X1
1
/108.E6
A700C.INDEX.GND A700C.FI1 A700C.FI1.GND A700C.FI2 A700C.FI2.GND A700C.DI1
41 68 54HS 40 70
D
/105.E2
A700C.DO9 A700C.DI9 A700C.DO13 A700C.POWER.PS1 A700C.DI8 A700C.DO8
D D D
/105.E7
A700C.DO8.GND A700C.DO7 A700C.DO7.GND A700C.CURR1.HIGH A700C.CURR1.LOW A700C.CURR2.HIGH A700C.CURR2.LOW A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
D D D
D D
A700C.B4.LOW.MV8
B
C
D
E
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
35 34 33 32 31 30 29
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
/106.E3 /106.E2
Phys. Addr.
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
Typ
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
*70/70
153
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
Plug
Phys. Addr.
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
4
+M A700C.6
B
C
3
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL 6 CYLINDER 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
104 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
/19.E4
VEHICLE SIDE
A
B
E
+M G700
D+
W
+M G700
G 3~ B+
B
D+
W
+M M700
G 3~ B+
10 80A
B
30
WH 1.94
50
M 31
6,6kW
15 100A
C
/104.B6
A700C.6.X1
X1 64 A700C.DI1 D DYNAMO ( Generator ) D+ Ubat MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.B6
2 1
+M X701.B X701.S +M
2
1
2 2
+M X701.B X701.S +M
WH 1.94
1
+M X700.B X700.S +M
D
29
WH 1.94
WH 0.96
A700C.6.X1
64
WH 0.96
+M A700C.6
64
A700C.6.X1
+M X700.B X700.S +M
WH AWG14
1
WL700
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
WL701
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
X
B
X1 29 A700C.DO9 D Starter. KL50 Activation (UBat) MOTORECU
E
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
STARTER, GENERATOR Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
105 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
OIL PRESSURE
p
+M B701
U
Q
p
E
3
BK
BK
3
2
1 2
B701.X
IN+
OUT
2
3
1 1
2
1
GND
3 3
PROJ: 8920980_003
IN+
OUT
2
B
12K
0,5 4,5V
B710.X
/104.B2
X1 33 A700C.AI5.GND A Charge air pressure sensor GND MOTORECU
X1 61 A700C.AI5.REF3 A Charge air pressure sensor SUPPLY (5V) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.B2
X1 49 A700C.AI3 A Oil pressure sensor SIGNAL (0,54,5V) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.D2
X1 39 A700C.TI5.GND
WH 0.96
X1 53 A700C.TI5
WATER DETECTOR GND MOTORECU
WATER DETECTOR SIGNAL MOTORECU
D
57
53
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 63 A700C.AI3.REF2 A Oil pressure sensor Supply (5V) MOTORECU
39
WH 0.96 63
WH 0.96
X1 35 A700C.AI3.GND A Oil pressure sensor GND MOTORECU
49
A700C.6.X1
35
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 47 A700C.AI5 A Charge air pressure sensor SIGNAL (0,54,5V) MOTORECU
61
47
WH 0.96
+M A700C.6
33
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
B703.X
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
GND
R
3
0,5 4,5V 1
+M B710
U
2
+M B703
B
0 10 bar / g
1
0,5 4,5 bar / a
WATER DETECTOR
X1 57 A700C.POWER.PS1
E
WATER DETECTOR SUPPLY (UBat) MOTORECU
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
CHARGE AIR COOLER ; OIL PRESSURE SWITCH, WATER DETECTOR
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
106 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
+M B708
+M B707
B708.X
B
R
2
B707.X
2
1 1
1
B709.X
30° 130°C
R
2 2
PROJ: 8920980_003
30° 130°C
R 1
1
2
+M A700C.6 /104.D2
+M A700C.6 /104.D2
X1 37 A700C.TI3.GND A COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR GND MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.D2
WH 0.96
D
50
WH 0.96
X1 51 A700C.TI3 A COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR SIGNAL MOTORECU
36
A700C.6.X1
51
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 52 A700C.TI4 A FUEL TEMP. SENSPR SIGNAL MOTORECU
37
WH 0.96
X1 38 A700C.TI4.GND A FUEL TEMP. SENSOR GND MOTORECU
52
A700C.6.X1
38
WH 0.96
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
+M B709
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
2
30° 130°C
B
C
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
1
FUEL TEMPERATURE
X1 36 A700C.TI2.GND A AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor GND MOTORECU
X1 50 A700C.TI2 A AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor SIGNAL MOTORECU
E
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ; AKTIVE ; OSCILLATING 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
107
Blatt von
114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
E
GND
SIGNAL
1
2
B713.X
B
U+
3 3
U+
3
2
2
X
1
SIGNAL
B712.X
3
2
GND
1
3
U+
3
2
2 1
PROJ: 8920980_003
SIGNAL
n
+M B713
X
/104.E2
X1 41 A700C.SPEED1.GND ENGINE SPEED Sensor1 GND MOTORECU
ENGINE SPEED Sensor 1 SIGNAL MOTORECU
ENGINE SPEED Sensor 1 SUPPLY (12V) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.E2
X1 40 A700C.SPEED2.GND ENGINE SPEED Sensor 2 GND MOTORECU
X1 54 A700C.SPEED2 ENGINE SPEED Sensor 2 SIGNAL MOTORECU
ENGINE SPEED Sensor 2 SUPPLY (12V) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6
WH 0.96
X1 42 A700C.INDEX.GND
X1 56 A700C.INDEX
PHASE SENSOR GND MOTORECU
PHASE SENSOR SIGNAL MOTORECU
/104.B6
D
70
56
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 68 A700C.POWER.SPEED2
42
WH 0.96 68
54
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
A700C.6.X1
X1 69 A700C.POWER.SPEED1
40
WH 0.96
X1 55 A700C.SPEED1
69
55
WH 0.96
+M A700C.6
41
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
GND
1
PHASE SENSOR
n
+M B712
X
B711.X
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
n
+M B711
B
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2
1
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1
X1 70 A700C.POWER.INDEX
E
PHASE SENSOR SUPPLY (12V) MOTORECU
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1, ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2, PHASE SENSOR
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
4
5
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
108 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
INJECTION PUMP 1
+M Y711
E
+M Y713
X2
X1
B
X2
X1
X2
IP CYLINDER 1 PWM (+) MOTORECU
IP CYLINDER 1 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.D6
X1 7 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2
IP CYLINDER 2 PWM (+) MOTORECU
IP CYLINDER 2 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.D6
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
X1 21 A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2
D
6
20
WH 1.23
A700C.6.X1
7
WH 1.23
X1 8 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
/104.D6
A700C.6.X1
8
X1 22 A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1
21
WH 1.23
+M A700C.6
22
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
X1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
+M Y712
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
INJECTION PUMP 3
INJECTION PUMP 2
X1 20 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
X1 6 A700C.A3.LOW.MV3
IP CYLINDER 3 PWM (+) MOTORECU
IP CYLINDER 3 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
E
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
INJECTION PUMP CYLINDER 13 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
109 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
A
INJECTION PUMP 5
INJECTION PUMP 4
+M Y714
E
+M Y716
X2
X1
B
X2
X1
X2
IP CYLINDER 4 PWM (+) MOTORECU
IP CYLINDER 4 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.E6
X1 3 A700C.B2.LOW.MV6
IP CYLINDER 5 PWM (+) MOTORECU
IP CYLINDER 5 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
+M A700C.6 /104.E6
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
X1 17 A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
D
2
16
WH 1.23
A700C.6.X1
3
WH 1.23
X1 4 A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
/104.D6
A700C.6.X1
4
X1 18 A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5
17
WH 1.23
+M A700C.6
18
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
C
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
X1
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
+M Y715
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
INJECTION PUMP 6
X1 16 A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7
X1 2 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7
EP ZYLINDER 6 PWM (+) MOTORECU
EP ZYLINDER 6 PWM (GND) MOTORECU
E
F
F Ersteller Datum
lbhhae0 Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
INJECTION PUMP CYLINDER 46 Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
ZeichNr.
4
5
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
110 114
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
ᑏ; COOLANT TEMPERATURE ENGINE ECU
A
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
A
B708 1
VEHICLE SIDE
M710 Y22 1
ENGINE SIDE
R710 R701
X1
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT GENERATOR
PROJ: 8920980_003
C
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
Y711
n1
Y713
X1
Y714
X1
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE 1 1
B707
D
B713
n CHARGE AIR PRESSURE 1
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
B712
3
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
2
1
B703
1
B701
3
n2
1
2
3
E
B710
WATER DETECTOR 1 B709
50
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUEL
F
STARTER Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
X1
Y712
PHASE SENSOR
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
E
X1
B711
1
D
B
INJECTION PUMP 14
1
C
G700 G3
D+
B
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Ident.Nr.
STAND BY AM 4 CYLINDER ENGINE
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
F
M700 M1
4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
111 114
E
Zustand
1
1
1 1
3
1
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
1
B
1
D We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
n1
3
3 2
2
Änderung Datum
1 Name
Y712
Y711
n2
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
B713
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
3
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R710 R701
ᑏ;
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Y713
R710 X1
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16
4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ENGINE SIDE
M710 Y22
M710
G700
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
5
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
4
35 34 33 32 31 30 29
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
3
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
35 34 33 32 31 30 29
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
Y714 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
2
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
X1
X1
A
X1
X1
1 5 6
GENERATOR
GENERAL OUTLAY SENSORS
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH
6
7
G700 G3 M700 M1
G700 M700
PHASE SENSOR
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980
460 9010 00 003 7
8
ENGINE ECU
INJECTION PUMP 14 A
VEHICLE SIDE
ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR B
B711
1
B712 D+
50
C
STARTER
n WATER DETECTOR
1
B701
D
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
1
B703
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
B708
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUEL E
B709
CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
B707
F F
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
112 114
2
1
A
5
6
7
8
A
PLUG
Description
Typ
A700C.AI3.REF2 A700C.AI3
A A
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
SUPPLY (5V) SIGNAL (0,54,5V)
X1 X1
63 49
A700C.AI3.GND A700C.AI4.REF2 A700C.AI4 A700C.AI4.GND A700C.AI5.REF3 A700C.AI5
A A A A A A
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE CHARGE AIR COOLER CHARGE AIR COOLER
GND NC NC NC SUPPLY (5V) SIGNAL (0,54,5V)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
35 62 48 34 61 47
A700C.AI5.GND A700C.AI6.REF3 A700C.AI6
A A A
CHARGE AIR COOLER RESERVE RESERVE
GND NC NC
X1 X1 X1
33 60 46
A700C.AI6.GND A700C.AI7.REF4 A700C.AI7 A700C.AI7.GND A700C.AI8.REF4 A700C.AI8
A A A A A A
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
NC NC NC NC NC NC
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
32 59 45 31 58 44
A700C.AI8.GND A700C.TI2 A700C.TI2.GND
A A A
RESERVE Charge air temperature sensor Charge air temperature sensor
NC SIGNAL GND
X1 X1 X1
30 50 36
A700C.TI3 A700C.TI3.GND A700C.TI4
A A A
Coolant temperature sensor Coolant temperature sensor Fuel temperature sensor
SIGNAL GND SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1
51 37 52
A700C.TI4.GND A700C.POWER.PS1 A700C.TI5
A
Fuel temperature sensor WATER SENSOR WATER SENSOR
GND SUPPLY (UBat) SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1
38 57 53
A700C.TI5.GND A700C.POWER.SPEED1
WATER SENSOR ENGINE SPEED SENSOR1
GND SUPPLY (12V)
X1 X1
A700C.SPEED1 A700C.SPEED1.GND
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 1 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR; 1
SIGNAL GND
X1 X1
39 69 55
A700C.POWER.SPEED2 A700C.SPEED2 A700C.SPEED2.GND A700C.POWER.INDEX A700C.INDEX
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 2 PHASE SENSOR PHASE SENSOR
SUPPLY (12V) SIGNAL
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
GND SUPPLY (12V) SIGNAL
PIN
Phys. Addr.
41 68 54 40 70 56
Type
Description
Sheet
Plug
PIN
A700C.INDEX.GND A700C.FI1 A700C.FI1.GND
PHASE SENSOR RESERVE RESERVE
GND NC NC
X1 X1 X1
A700C.FI2 A700C.FI2.GND A700C.DI1
RESERVE RESERVE GENERATOR D+
NC NC Ubat
X1 X1 X1
23 25 26 64
STARTER. KL50 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
SELECTION (UBat) NC NC NC NC NC
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
29 66 67 43 65 14
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE EP CYLINDER 1 EP CYLINDER 1
NC NC NC NC NC NC NC PWM (+) PWM (GND)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
28 13 27 9 10 11 12 22 8
A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2 A700C.A2.LOW.MV2 A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
EP CYLINDER 2 EP CYLINDER 2 RESERVE
PWM (+) PWM (GND) NC
X1 X1 X1
21 7 20
A700C.A3.LOW.MV3 A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4 A700C.A4.LOW.MV4 A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5 A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE EP CYLINDER 3 EP CYLINDER 3
NC NC NC PWM (+) PWM (GND)
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
6 19 5 18 4
A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
EP CYLINDER 4
PWM (+)
X1
17
A700C.B2.LOW.MV6 A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7 A700C.B3.LOW.MV7 A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8
EP CYLINDER 4 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
PWM (GND) NC NC NC
X1 X1 X1 X1
3 16 2 15
A700C.B4.LOW.MV8
RESERVE
NC
X1
1
D
A700C.DO9 A700C.DI9 A700C.DO13 A700C.POWER.PS1 A700C.DI8 A700C.DO8
D D D
A700C.DO8.GND A700C.DO7 A700C.DO7.GND A700C.CURR1.HIGH A700C.CURR1.LOW A700C.CURR2.HIGH A700C.CURR2.LOW A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1 A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
D D D
D D
42 24
B
C
D
E
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
42 41 40 39 38 37 36
49 48 47 46 45 44 43
56 55 54 53 52 51 50
70 69 68 67 66 65 64
63 62 61 60 59 58 57
153
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
*70/70
PROJ: 8920980_003 We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
Sheet
Phys. Addr.
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
E
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
4
+M A700C4
B
C
3
F
F Ersteller Datum Ausgabe Zustand
Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
Ident.Nr.
GENERAL OUTLAY MOTOR CONTROL 4 CYLINDER 4
5
ZeichNr.
6
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
113 114
2
1
CODE LETTER STABE
3
CODE LETTER S
= SYSTEM
4
5
KIND OF EQUIPMENT DIN EN613462
6
7
DENOTATION EXTRACTED OF DIN 72552
CLAMP SIGNAL
SIFUSES
A
U
UNDER CARRIAGE
D
REVOLVING STAGE
A
BOOM
F
CARRIAGE (CRAWLER CRANE)
M
MOTOR
E
We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
D
Für dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegen stand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfältigung, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhaltes sind ohne unsere ausdrückliche Zustimmung verboten. © LIEBHERR WERK EHINGEN
C
PROJ: 8920980_003
B
F
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION UNDER CARRIAGE H
CAB
F
VEHICLE
S
SWITCH CABINET
M
B
APPROXIMATION, SENSOR, SWITCH TACHO SENSOR, TEMPERATURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR,SWITCH, SENSOR
K D A
CARRIGE
S
SWITCH CABINET
M
MOTOR
+
=
U
+
H
Ausgabe Änderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
RETURN WIRE TO BATTERY,PLUS VIA SWITCH / RELAY (SWITCHED PLUS) RETURN WIRE FROM BATTERIE, MINUS / GROUND DIRECT
F
FUSES, FI, CIRCUIT BREAKER
31b
RETURN WIRE TO BATTERY, MINUS / GROUND VIA SWITCH / RELAY (SWITCHED MINUS)
G
DYNAMOS, GENERATORS, BATTERIES LAMPS , ANNOUNC.
SWITCHING RELAY, TIME RELAY, CONTACTOR RELAY I/OMODULE, UEAMODULE, ABVELECTRONICS, TRANSISTOR, ELECTRONIC VALVES INDUCTORS
GREY
GRAU
3
VT
VIOLET
VIOLETT
5
LB
LIGHT BROWN
BEIGE
7,5
BN
BROWN
BRAUN
10
RD
RED
ROT
15
BU
BLUE
BLAU
YE
YELLOW
GELB
50
STARTER, STARTER CONTROL UNIT; DIRECT
30
GN
GREEN
GRÜN
50e; 50f
START LOCK RELAY, INPUT;OUTPUT
52
TAG SIGNAL WIPER MOTOR
B
WIRE COLOURS DIN IEC 757
N
TRANSDUCER
54
STOPLIGHT
P
BUZZER, CLAMP, SPEAKERS, CLOCK, TACHOGRAPH, PRINTER, VOLTMETER, WATTMETER,
54g
TAG SIGNAL ( COMPRESSED AIR VALVE )
Q
POWER SWITCH RELAY ( FOR LOAD ) BREAKER, MOTOR STARTER, TYRISTOR
55
FOG LAMP
56,a,b,d
HEADLIGHT
57,a,L,R
PARKING LIGHT
58,b,c,d,L,R
LIMITATION,END,LICENSE PLATE AND DEVICE LIGHTS
61
C
RESISTORS, DIODES SWITCH, KEYPAD( WITHOUT DISPLAY ), MOUSE
T
LSBBUS SENSOR, ANTENNA, TELEPHONE SET POWER TRANSFORMER, RECTIFIER, RADIO
U
ISOLATOR
V
FILTER
W
COLLECTING ELECTRODE, CABLE, CABLE LOOP, INFORMATION BUS OPTICAL FIBER, DUCT ( RING WHEEL TRANSDUCER ) CONNECTOR ( ELECTRICAL ), PLUG, CLAMP, TERMINAL BLOCK, TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECTION TERMINAL STRIP ADD. PART
GY
20
MOTORS
Z
2
FLASHER UNIT
M
VALVES
A
FARBEN
49
53,a,b,c,e,i
Y
COLOURS
ALT
COLOURS
FARBEN
gr
GY
GREY
GRAU
vi
VT
VIOLET
VIOLETT
rs
PK
PINK
ROSA
br
BN
BROWN
BRAUN
rt
RD
RED
ROT
GENERATOR CONTROL
bl
BU
BLUE
BLAU
72
ALARM SWITCH,(ALL AROUND, INDICATOR LAMP)
ge
YE
YELLOW
GELB
75
RADIO, CIGARETTE LIGHTER
gn
GN
GREEN
GRÜN
76
SPEAKERS
sw
BK
BLACK
SCHWARZ
B+,B
BATTERY, PLUS,MINUS
or
OG
ORANGE
ORANGE
D+,D
DYNAMO, PLUS,MINUS
ws
WH
WHITE
WEISS
DF,DF1,DF2
DYNAMO, FIELD, FIELD1, FIELD2
D
E
BEXAMPLE FOR SIGNAL CROSS-REFERENCE
EINSTALLATION LOCATION
Datum
30b 31
EXAMPLE FOR EQUIPMENT LABELING SYSTEM
INPUT OF BATTERY PLUS, DIRECT
FLOURESCENT LAMP, LAMP, BULB, LIGHT FIXTURE HEADLIGHTS, RUNNING LIGHT, HEATING
X
=
30
E
S
CARRIAGE
SWITCHED PLUS BEHIND BATTERY (OUTPUT IGNITION[DRIVE]SWITCH)
CAPACITOR
R
CABIN
15
C
L
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION REVOLVING STAGE / CARRIAGE
Ersteller
Zustand
KEYPAD UNIT, BRACE UNIT, MONITOR, ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
K
MOTOR
A
A
H
8
AKIND OF EQUIPMENT
ZNUMBERING
K
53
:
ACONNECTION
:
30
Donninger J. 26.03.2007 16:16 lbhhae0 27.03.2007 09:42
2
SFUSE
or
30b.F390
4
5
FUSE
SIGNAL
+24V.L1
KEY OF SYMBOLS DIN EN613461; DIN EN613462 ; DIN EN60617
Werk Bischofshofen GmbH 3
SIGNAL
6
Ident.Nr. ZeichNr.
8920980 460 9010 00 003 7
F Anlage Ort
003 8
Blatt von
114 114
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
10.1 Electrical components 10.1.1
Electrical components in the cab The main electrical/electronic components are located on the cab rear wall
Design The following components are fitted on the cab rear wall: - Fuse and relay board - Voltage converter - Main electronics (master) - Input module - Warning buzzer - Diagnostic plug - Optional components
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The electrical and electronic components are mounted under the covering on the cab rear wall.
Components on the rear cab wall 1 Warning buzzer H40 (behind cover) 2 Diagnostic plug 3 Main electronics (master) A15
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
4 5 6 7
Voltage transformer T1 Rear wiper motor M3 Relay and fuse board A4 Relay base fixing (optional)
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 Input module 2 A16b 9 Connector X1 10 Connector X2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-1 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
10.1.2
Fuse and relay board A4 (ID no. 10290014)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Design
Fuse and relay board A4
10.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
F1 F2 F3
10 A terminal 15 reserve 7.5 A terminal 15 left high beam 7.5 A terminal 15 right high beam F4 7.5 A terminal 15 left low beam F5 7.5 A terminal 15 right low beam F6 3 A terminal 30 left profile light / parking light F7 3 A terminal 30 right profile light / parking light F07b 10 A terminal 15 hazard lights F8 15 A terminal 58 compressor seat, seat heater* F8a 10 A terminal 58 interior lighting, radio, cigarette lighter (X70) F9 10 A terminal 15 LH control lever button, air conditioning keypad, optional keypad F10 5 A terminal 15 display unit F11 10 A terminal 15 pressure switches B32, B28, B3, B3a F12 20 A terminal 15 reserve F13 20 A terminal 15 reserve F14 15 A terminal 15 fuel preheating F15 10 A terminal 15 S2 LH control lever; tank pipe sensor; terminal 15 master; engine stop relay; alternator excitation F16 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse) F17 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse) F18 10 A terminal 15 washer pump, rear wiper motor F19 10 A terminal 15 heater, B27 air conditioning F19A 20 A terminal 30 heater, air conditioning F20 15 A terminal 15 front wiper, washer pump, horn F21 10 A terminal 15 driving light, high beam F22 7.5 A terminal 15 brake lights, switch illumination F23 15 A terminal 15 reserve F24 10 A terminal 15 ignition ON, engine ECU F25 10 A terminal 30 flashing beacon F26 10 A terminal 30 diagnostic plug F27 10 A terminal 30 profile light / parking light F28 10 A terminal 30 reserve F29 25 A terminal 30 ignition starter switch relief F30 15 A terminal 30 voltage converter, radio, 12 V socket F31a 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight + double beam, front left F31b 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight + double beam, front right
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
F47 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 bank 1 - Y9, Y10, Y14, Y17 F48 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 bank 2 - H40, Y13, Y18, Y57 F49 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 bank 3 - YMo1, Y6.1, Y6.2, Y6.3 Y11, Y12 F50 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 bank 4 - Y2, Y3, YEP1, YEP2 F51 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 DO1 supply - OP M2 - Y51, Y52 F52 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 DO2 supply - OP M2 - Y2a, Y3a, Y11, Y12 F53 10 A terminal 15 output module 1 DO3 supply Y62 central lubrication system F54 5 A terminal 15 master control A15 supply F55 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 bank 1 - Y16, Y53, Y15 F56 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 bank 2 - K11/50, Y50, Y20, Y21 F57 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 bank 3 - Y11, Y12 F58 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 bank 4 - reserve F59 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 DO1 supply - OP M1 - YEP1, YEP2, Y2, Y3 F60 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 DO2 supply - OP M1 Y6.1.2.3 F61 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 DO3 supply - E1, E5 F62 10 A terminal 15 output module 2 DO4 supply - B16 F63 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 bank 1 - reserve F64 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 bank 2 - reserve F65 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 bank 3 - reserve F66 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 bank 4 - reserve F67 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 DO1 supply F68 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 DO2 supply F69 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 DO3 supply F70 10 A terminal 15 output module 3 DO4 supply F71 10 A terminal 15 keypad supply F72 30 A terminal 15 reserve F73 10 A terminal 15 reserve F74 15 A terminal 15 rear window heater, heated mirror* F75 10 A terminal 30 radio IGN,
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
K209 Dust filter excess pressure system relay K228 Visual back-up alarm relay K229 Visual back-up alarm relay K230 Automatic run-off relay K240 Power hazard light relay K241 Reserve K242 Reserve K243 Reserve K244 Reserve K245 Reserve K246 Reserve K270 Immobiliser relay K271 Return-to-dig relay M3 R9b Alternator exciter resistance 220 Ω S1 Safety test button V1 Extinguishing diode K01 V2 Extinguishing diode K01/87 V3 Extinguishing diode K12 V4 Extinguishing diode K02 V5 Extinguishing diode K03 V6 Extinguishing diode K02/87 V7 Extinguishing diode K03/87 V8 Extinguishing diode K5 V9 Extinguishing diode K3 V10 Extinguishing diode K2 V11 Extinguishing diode K22 V12 Extinguishing diode K22a V13 Extinguishing diode K22b V14 Extinguishing diode K25 V15 Extinguishing diode K26 V16 Extinguishing diode K31a V17 Extinguishing diode K31b V18 Extinguishing diode K32a V19 Extinguishing diode K32b V20 Extinguishing diode K33a V21 Extinguishing diode K33b V22 Extinguishing diode F9 reserve V23 Extinguishing diode F14 preheating V24 Extinguishing diode F19 heater blower, air conditioning V25 Extinguishing diode F72 reserve V29 Extinguishing diode K240/87 V30 Extinguishing diode K241/87 V31 Extinguishing diode K242/87 V32 Extinguishing diode K244/87a V32c Reversing light blocking diode V33 Extinguishing diode K244/87 V33c Reversing light blocking diode V34 Extinguishing diode K245/87a V35 Extinguishing diode K245/87 V36 Extinguishing diode K246/87a V37 Extinguishing diode K246/87 V38 Extinguishing diode K243/87a V39 Extinguishing diode K243/87 V40 Extinguishing diode K228/87a V41 Extinguishing diode K228/87 V42 Extinguishing diode K271/87a V43 Extinguishing diode K271/87
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-3 o f 3
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
F32a 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight rear left (rear hatch) F32b 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight rear right (rear hatch) F33a 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight rear left (cab door)* F33b 10 A terminal 30/15 working floodlight rear right (cab door)* F34 20 A terminal 30 refuelling pump* F35 10 A terminal 30 master control supply A15 F36 40 A terminal 30 engine control unit supply A14 LH-ECU (output) F37 40 A terminal 30 reserve F38 5 A terminal 30 engine control unit supply A14 LH-ECU (output) F39 20 A terminal 30 engine compartment lighting, auxiliary heater clock F40 20 A terminal 30 auxiliary heater control F41 20 A terminal 30 reserve F42 20 A terminal 30 reserve F43 5 A terminal 15 input module 1+2 logic F44 10 A terminal 15 input module 1 supply F45 10 A terminal 15 input module 2 supply F46 10 A terminal 15 input module 3 supply
terminal 58, 12 V socket F76 10 A terminal 30 radio + K01 Ignition starter switch relief relay terminal 15 K02 Starter solenoid relay* K03 Engine stop relay* K1 Direction indicator relay K2 Profile light, parking light relay K3 Low beam / driving light relay K3a High beam relay K5 Relay terminal 15 K8 Rear windscreen wiper and washer pump relay K9 Flashing beacon relay K10 Mirror/rear window heater relay K12 Radio / 12 V socket relay terminal 58 K22 Hazard lights relay terminal 15 K22a Relay S4 H16, H18 K22b Relay S4 H15, H17 K25 John Deere (USA) hazard light relay K26 John Deere (USA) hazard light relay K31a Left working floodlight + double beam relay, front left K31b Right working floodlight + double beam relay, front right K32a Left working floodlight + double beam relay, rear left K32b Right working floodlight + double beam relay, rear right
V44 V45 V46 V48 V49 V50 V51 V52 V53 V54 V57 V58 V59 V60 V81 V82 V83 V84 V85 V86 V87 V88 V89 V90 V99
Extinguishing diode K271 Extinguishing diode K228 Extinguishing diode K243 Extinguishing diode K246 Extinguishing diode K245 Extinguishing diode K244 Extinguishing diode K242 Extinguishing diode K241 Extinguishing diode K240 Extinguishing diode K209 Extinguishing diode K10 Extinguishing diode K9 Extinguishing diode K8 Extinguishing diode K3a Alternator excitation blocking diode Alternator excitation blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode Hydraulic quick change device blocking diode Direction indicator blocking diode
* Options
Function description Basic function
However, the other electrical and electronic components are powered via the relay and fuse board.
Working floodlight fuse function The function of the working floodlights can be selected by plugging the fuses F31A, F31B, F32A, F32B, F33A and F33B: - When the fuses are plugged to terminal 30 the working floodlights work as soon as the main switch is turned ON. - When the fuses are plugged to terminal 15 the working floodlights only work when the ignition is turned ON. You can also choose a mixed function, for example by plugging the front working floodlights to terminal 15 and the rear floodlights to terminal 30.
10.1-4 o f 3
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The relay and fuse board houses and connects the electrical components. The relay and fuse board does not have a control function.
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
Fuse test The fuses on the relay and fuse board are divided into three categories. - Fuses for power supply from terminal 30 - Fuses for power supply from terminal 15 - Fuses to protect various functions (e.g. low beam, profile lights / parking light) Each fuse has an LED and can be tested by pressing the button S1. The fuse test depends on the electrical status. Only the fuses of the activated circuit can be tested: - When the main switch is on (terminal 30) only the LEDs on terminal 30 power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed. - When the main ignition is on (terminal 15) the LEDs on terminal 30 and terminal 15 power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed. - The LEDs to protect the various functions only light up when the corresponding function is activated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
If an LED does not light up, the fuse is defective.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-5 o f 5
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
10.1.3
Main electronics (master) A15 ID no. 10223177
Technical data See section 2.1
The main electronics (master) A15 are located on the cab rear wall.
Design
Main electronics (master) A15 1 Cover fixing thread 2 Status display LEDs 3 Slot 1 (CF1) for memory card with application software 4 Memory card status LEDs
5 6 7 8 9
Slot 2 (CF2) (optional) Main electronics (master) A15 Green system status LED Ventilation and bleeder screw Cover for Compact Flash (CF) memory card slot
Function description Basic function The main electronics (master) is the “brain” of the machine control system.
The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the following time cycles: - Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules - Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data; calculate the output data - Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid valve via one of the output modules)
Memory card The application software is stored on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1). 1 128 MB capacity memory card 2 ID no. of memory card including current software 3 Current software INDEX 4 Production date Each time the system is started up (ignition switched on), the application software on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1) is tested and (if there are changes) an update is performed. 128 MB memory card
10.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or external modules.
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
The data on the memory card takes priority. The system cannot be operated without a memory card.
How the status LEDs work
Status display LEDs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Status list Status
Description
On
LED activation test
Directly after the main electronics (master) are switched on, an automatic LED test is performed. The system is started.
Off
Off
Booting
The system is started and waits for all the conditions, such as the presence of CAN modules in the system, to be met.
Flashes (1 s on, 1 s off)
Off
Running
The system is running fully in normal operation
Off
Flashes (0.2 s. on, 0.2 s. off)
Critical
Flashes (1 s on, 1 s off)
On
CAN download
On
Flashes (0.2 s. on, 0.2 s. off)
ALARM
The entire control system has been shut down due to an error with ALARM priority. The application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
Flash in time (0.2 s. on, 0.2 s. off)
FATAL
The entire control system has been shut down due to a fatal error. The application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
Flash in time (1 s on, 1 s off)
Power down
The system has been shut down due to a power down command. The machine cannot be operated.
Power off
The system has been completely shut down. The machine cannot be operated.
LED “B“ Green
LED “A“ Orange
On
Flash alternately (1 s on, 1 s off) Off
On
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error. The application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated. Download of required software to a CAN module is in progress. The application software has not yet been started. The machine cannot yet be operated.
Flash Part of the main electronics software is being updated. The machine cannot programming be operated until this has been completed. Flash erase
Part of the MASTER's internal FLASH memory is being deleted (prior to reprogramming)
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-7 o f 7
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
How the memory card LEDs work The LEDs show the status of and communication between the memory card and the control unit. - LED 1 indicates that the memory card CF1 is plugged in. - LED 3 indicates that the memory card CF2 is plugged in. - LED 2 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF1 is communicating with the control unit. - LED 4 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF2 is communicating with the control unit. Memory card status LEDs
How the system status LEDs work The LED 3 lights up to signal the power supply for the main electronics (master).
System status LED
Main electronics (master) connectors 1 2 3 4 5 6
10.1-8 o f 8
PWR_X power supply connector CAN_X CAN connector LAN 1 connector (unassigned) LAN 2 connector (unassigned) LAN 3 connector (unassigned) Main electronics (master)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7 COM1_X COM 1 connector (unassigned) 8 COM2_X COM 2 connector (unassigned) 9 COM3_X COM 3 connector (unassigned) 10 COM4_X COM 4 connector (unassigned)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Main electronics (master) connectors
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
Plug assignment 6-pin Deutsch connector 1 Earth (ground) 2 Terminal 15 from fuse F54 3 Unassigned
4 Unassigned 5 Housing earth 6 Terminal 30 from fuse F35
PWR_X connector 8-pin Deutsch connector 1 2 3 4
CAN 4 low CAN 3 low CAN 2 low CAN 1 low
5 6 7 8
CAN 1 high CAN 2 high CAN 3 high CAN 4 high
5 6 7 8 9
Earth (GND) Standby (DSR) Transmitter activation (RTS) Transmission standby (CTS) Incoming call (RI)
CAN_X connector 9-pin SUB-D connector Reception signal level (DCD) Reception data (RXD) Transmission data (TXD) Terminal operational (DTR)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
COM4_X connector
1 2 3 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-9 o f 9
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
10.1.4
Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c) ID no. 10046435
Technical data See section 2.1
The input modules are located under the left cab access and in the cab, and are arranged as follows: 1 Left rear section 2 Output module 3 A17c (optional) 3 Input module 3 A16c (optional) 4 Input module 1 A16a 5 Output module 2 A17b 6 Output module 1 A17a Input module 2 A16b in the cab on the rear wall
Module layout
Design
1 Input module 2 Ventilation and bleeder screw with Goretex membrane
3 Connector 4 Type plate
Function description The input modules have the following functions: 1 Power supply for switches and sensors 2 Converting analogue and digital signals to CAN bus messages 3 Forwarding the converted signals via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) The only difference between the input modules is their address. The input modules 1 A16a and 2 A16b must be plugged in and operational for the system to work.
10.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
Input module connector assignment
Input module connectors 1 24 V sensor supply 2 CAN interface with logic supply 3 16 analogue universal inputs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module 1 connector A16a.X1:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
4 Frequency test inputs 5 Earth 6 5 V sensor supply
Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC 1 Spare 2 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA 3 Spare 4 Emergency steering pump pressure test 5 Spare 6 Emergency steering pump pressure 7 Brake accumulator pressure 8 Control lever forward 1 9 Control lever back 1 10 Lift kick-out 11 Bucket return-to-dig 12 Spare 13 Spare 14 Spare 15 Spare 16 Logical unit supply earth 17 Spare 18 Float position 19 Ride control (LFD) 20 Quick-change device switch 21 Inch pedal angle sensor 1 22 Transmission overheating 23 Tank sensor 24 Terminal 50a 25 Gas pedal angle sensor 1 26 Spare 27 Spare 28 Spare 29 CAN end connected to pin 43 30 Terminal 30 power supply 31 Earth 32 Power supply for service brake accumulator B19
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
36 Power supply for bucket returnto-dig 37 Power supply for tank sensor 38 Power supply for lift kick-out 39 Power supply for gas pedal angle sensor 1 40 Spare 41 Spare 42 Spare 43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to CAN_Res) 44 CAN low 45 Spare 46 Hydraulic oil temperature 47 Hydraulic oil temperature 48 Spare 49 Spare 50 Spare 51 Spare 52 Spare 53 Spare 54 Spare 55 Variable displacement motor speed 1 56 Output speed 57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to CAN_Res) 58 CAN high 59 Spare 60 Spare 61 Spare 62 Spare 63 Earth for inch pedal angle sensor 1 64 Earth for lift kick-out 65 Earth for tank sensor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-11 o f 1 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
33 Spare 34 Spare 35 Power supply for inch pedal angle sensor 1
10.1-12 o f 1 1
Earth for return-to-dig Earth for gas pedal angle sensor 1 Spare Earth for variable displacement motor speed 1 70 Earth for output speed
Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC 1 Spare 2 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA 3 Spare 4 Driving light 5 High beam 6 Indicator signal 7 Spare 8 Control lever option 1 9 Control lever option 2 10 Control lever option 3 11 Warning buzzer 12 Spare 13 Spare 14 Spare 15 Spare 16 Logical unit supply earth 17 Spare 18 Control lever forward 2 19 Control lever reverse 2 20 Inch pedal angle sensor 2 21 Gas pedal angle sensor 2 22 Central lubrication system filling level signal B44 23 Particle filter (optional) 24 Particle filter (optional) 25 Joystick steering sensor 1 26 Spare 27 Spare 28 Spare 29 CAN end connected to pin 43 30 24 V power supply 31 Earth supply 32 Power supply for central lubrication system cycles inductive switch B43 33 Power supply for central lubrication system filling level inductive switch B44 34 Power supply for inch pedal angle sensor 2 35 Power supply for gas pedal angle sensor 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
36 Power supply for joystick activation 37 Spare 38 Spare 39 Spare 40 Spare 41 Spare 42 Spare 43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to CAN_Res) 44 CAN low 45 Spare 46 Spare 47 Spare 48 Spare 49 Spare 50 Spare 51 Spare 52 Spare 53 Spare 54 Spare 55 Variable displacement motor speed 2 56 Central lubrication system cycle signal B43 57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to CAN_Res) 58 CAN high 59 Earth for central lubrication system cycles B43 60 Earth for central lubrication system filling level inductive switch B44 61 Spare 62 Earth for inch pedal angle sensor 2 63 Earth for gas pedal angle sensor 2 64 Spare 65 Earth for arm rest joystick 66 Spare 67 Earth for joystick steering, left 68 Spare 69 Earth for variable displacement motor speed 2 70 Spare
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module 2 connector A16b.X1:
66 67 68 69
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
LED indication
LEDs behind the bleeder screw 1 Input module ventilation opening 2 Green LED
After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown: Status Description Green LED flashes slowly
Module ready, waiting to receive the first message on the CAN bus
Green LED flickers/lights up
CAN bus communication active, normal control
Red LED flickers/lights up
Error frames detected on CAN bus. Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring error, loose contact, no terminating resistor) Normal control may not be possible
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Module status display
3 Orange LED 4 Red LED
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-13 o f 1 3
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
Addressing the input and output modules
Ventilation and bleeder opening 1 Input module ventilation opening 2 Green LED 100s display 3 Button Addressing procedure
4 Orange LED 10s display 5 Red LED 1s display 6 5 V sensor supply
A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed. The input modules are delivered with the default address 45. The address is required in order to identify CAN bus messages. - Input module (sender) - Output module (receiver) Addressing is performed as follows: Connect the module Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master) Press the button 3 Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs start flashing
Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case, switch the module off and try again. The flashing LEDs indicate the module number (address): - The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number (1x = 100, 2x = 200) - The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number (1x = 10, 2x = 20) - The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number (1x = 1, 2x = 2) Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130 All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display. Changing the module number (address):
10.1-14 o f 1 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
• • • • •
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
Press the button again to increase the module number by one. Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with the first one again. Addressing the input modules: Address
Setting after replacement
Status function
Input module 1 A16a
45
No
Yes
Input module 2 A16b
46
Yes
Yes
Input module 3 A16c (optional)
47
Yes
No
Component
10.1.5
Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c) ID no. 10046438
Technical data See section 2.1
The output modules are located under the left cab access and are arranged as follows: 1 Left rear section 2 Output module 3 A17c (optional) 3 Input module 3 A16c (optional) 4 Input module 1 A16a 5 Output module 2 A17b 6 Output module 1 A17a
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Module layout
Output module
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-15 o f 1 5
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
1 Output module 2 Ventilation and bleeder screw with Goretex membrane
3 Connector 4 Type plate
Function description The output modules have the following functions: - Converting digital input signals (CAN bus messages) from the main electronics (master) into analogue commands. - Controlling the consumer units via terminal equipment. The power supply for the terminal equipment is divided as follows: - Activation via banks, which consist of 4 terminal devices and have a single power source (fuse). - Direct activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are powered directly by a corresponding fuse. - Indirect activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are powered by a corresponding fuse via an upstream module. This configuration is required for switching off outputs in safety-critical states.
Output module connector assignment
1 2 3 4 5
Output module 1 connector A17a.X1:
10.1-16 o f 1 6
Internal 0 Ohm jumper 24 V power supply Logic earth connection Bank 1 power outputs (1.3 A) Bank 2 power outputs (1.3 A)
6 7 8 9 10 11
Bank 4 power outputs (1.3 A) Bank 3 power outputs (1.3 A) Frequency test inputs Earth for power outputs Positive-switching outputs (8 A) CAN interface
Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC 1 Bank 1 power supply (16 A) 2 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA 3 Power earth 4 Bank 1 power output for parking brake Y10 5 Bank 1 power output for working hydraulics lockout Y14 6 Bank 1 power output for bucket return-to-dig Y9 7 Bank 1 power output for lift kick-
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Spare Spare Digital 1 power supply (8 A) Digital 1 switching output (8 A) Digital 2 power supply (8 A) Digital 2 switching output (8 A) Digital 3 power supply (8 A) Digital 3 switching output (8 A) central lubrication M6 38 Digital 4 power supply (8 A) 39 Digital 4 switching output (8 A)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module connectors
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
out Y17 8 Bank 3 power output for AVG coupling 1 Y6.1 9 Bank 3 power output for AVG coupling 2 Y6.2 10 Bank 3 power output for AVG coupling 3 Y6.3 11 Bank 3 power output for AVG modulation YMo1 12 Power earth 13 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA (reserve) 14 Bank 3 power supply (16 A) 15 Bank 2 power supply (16 A) 16 Logical unit earth 17 Power earth 18 Bank 2 power output for float position Y18 19 Bank 2 power output for cooling system fan Y13 20 Bank 2 power output for warning buzzer H40 21 Bank 2 power output for swivel restrictor Y57 22 Bank 4 power output for variable displacement motor 1 YEP1 23 Bank 4 power output for variable displacement motor 2 YEP2 24 Bank 4 power output for forward travel direction Y2 25 Bank 4 power output for reverse travel direction Y3 26 Power earth 27 Spare 28 Bank 4 power supply (16 A) 29 CAN terminating resistor to CAN_High
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module 2 connector A17b.X1:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
back-up alarm H58, H59 Earth for central lubrication M6 Spare Spare CAN low input CAN low output Spare Earth for parking brake Y10 Earth for working hydraulics lockout Y14 Earth for return-to-dig Y9 Earth for lift kick-out Y17 Earth for AVG coupling 1 Y6.1 Earth for AVG coupling 2 Y6.2 Earth for AVG coupling 3 Y6.3 Earth for modulation Mo1 Earth for back-up alarm H58, H59 Spare Spare CAN high input CAN high output Spare Earth for float position Y18 Earth for fan Y13 Earth for warning buzzer H40 Earth for swivel restrictor Y57 Earth for variable displacement motor 1 YEP 1 Earth for variable displacement motor 2 YEP 2 Earth for travel direction pump 1 Y2 Earth for travel direction pump 1 Y3 Spare Spare Spare
Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC 1 Bank 1 power supply (16 A) 2 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA 3 Power earth 4 Bank 1 power output for overspeed protection Y16 5 Bank 1 power output for option 6 Bank 1 power output for travel pump control Y15 7 Bank 1 power output for travel pump control Y15a (L586 only) 8 Bank 3 power output for forward travel direction Y2a (L586 only) 9 Bank 3 power output for reverse travel direction Y3a (L586 only) 10 Bank 3 power output for additional equipment 1 Y11 11 Bank 3 power output for additional equipment 2 Y12 12 Power earth
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
36 Digital 3 power supply (8 A) 37 Digital 3 switching output (8 A) reversing light 38 Digital 4 power supply (8 A) 39 Digital 4 switching output (8 A) back-up alarm 40 Power earth reserve 41 Power supply for 24 V sensor reserve 42 Power supply for 24 V sensor reserve 43 CAN low input 44 CAN low output 45 Power earth reserve 46 Power earth for overspeed protection Y16 47 Power earth for options 48 Power earth for travel pump 1 Y15 49 Power earth for travel pump 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-17 o f 1 6
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
13 24 V power supply, logical unit 200 mA (reserve) 14 Bank 3 power supply (16 A) 15 Bank 2 power supply (16 A) 16 Logical unit earth 17 Power earth 18 Bank 2 power output for emergency steering relay K11 19 Bank 2 power output for fan reversal Y50 20 Bank 2 power output for ride control Y20 21 Bank 2 power output for float position Y21 22 Bank 4 power output for joystick steering, left Y51 23 Bank 4 power output for joystick steering, right Y52 24 Bank 4 power output for gerotor steering (2-in-1) Y63 25 Bank 4 power output for joystick steering safety valve Y64 26 Power earth 27 Logical unit earth reserve 28 Bank 4 power supply (16 A) 29 CAN terminating resistor to CAN_High 30 Power supply for 24 V frequency sensor reserve 31 Power earth reserve 32 Digital 1 power supply (8 A) 33 Digital 1 switching output (8 A) 2 pump control 1 34 Digital 2 power supply (8 A) 35 Digital 2 switching output (8 A) 2 transmission control
Y15a 50 Power earth for travel direction pump 2 Y2a 51 Power earth for travel direction pump 2 Y3a 52 Power earth for additional equipment 1 Y11 53 Power earth for additional equipment 2 Y12 54 Power earth for reserve back-up alarm 55 Frequency input 1 reserve 56 Frequency input 2 reserve 57 CAN high input 58 CAN high output 59 Power earth reserve 60 Power earth for emergency steering relay K11 61 Power earth for fan reversal Y50 62 Power earth for LFD 63 Power earth for LFD 64 Power earth for joystick steering, left Y51 65 Power earth for joystick steering, right Y52 66 Power output for gerotor steering (2-in-1) Y63 67 Power output for joystick steering safety valve Y64 68 Power earth reserve 69 Earth for frequency input 1 reserve 70 Earth for frequency input 2 reserve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
LED indication
LEDs behind the bleeder screw
10.1-18 o f 1 7
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
1 Output module ventilation opening 2 Green LED
Module status display
3 Orange LED 4 Red LED
After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown: Status Description Green LED flashes slowly
Module ready, waiting to receive the first message on the CAN bus
Green LED flickers/lights up
CAN bus communication active, normal control
Red LED flickers/lights up
Error frames detected on CAN bus. Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring error, loose contact, no terminating resistor) Normal control may not be possible
Addressing the input and output modules
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Ventilation and bleeder opening 1 Output module ventilation opening 2 Green LED 100s display 3 Button Addressing procedure
4 Orange LED 10s display 5 Red LED 1s display 6 5 V sensor supply
A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed. The output modules are delivered with the default address 21. The address is required in order to identify CAN bus messages. - Input module (sender) - Output module (receiver) Addressing is performed as follows: • Connect the module • Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-19 o f 1 9
Electrical system
Service Manual
Electrical components
• Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master) • Press the button 3 • Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs start flashing Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case, switch the module off and try again. The flashing LEDs indicate the module number (address): - The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number (1x = 100, 2x = 200) - The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number (1x = 10, 2x = 20) - The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number (1x = 1, 2x = 2) Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130 All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display. Changing the module number (address): Press the button again to increase the module number by one. Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with the first one again. Addressing the input modules: Address
Setting after replacement
Status function
Output module 1 A17a
22
Yes
Yes
Output module 2 A17b
21
No
Yes
Output module 3 A17c (optional)
23
Yes
No
Component
10.1.6
Electrical components in the rear section
Components on the rear left of the rear section K04 B16 F01 F03
10.1-20 o f 2 0
Preglow relay Back-up alarm (optional) 100 A main fuse 200 A emergency steering pump fuse
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
F02 60 A preglow fuse F07 10 A hazard warning system fuse F010 5 A heating flange feedback fuse
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Components on the rear left of the rear section
Service Manual
Electrical system Electrical components
How the relay K04 works The relay K04 controls the intake air pre-heating flange.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The preglow system is controlled by the engine electronics A700D and depends on the following criteria: - Coolant temperature - Intake air temperature
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-21 o f 2 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Electrical components
10.1-22 o f 2 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system Battery installation
10.2 Battery installation The electrical system operates at 24 volts.
Design
Battery arrangement 1 Connecting cable from fuses to consumers 2 Fuses in the rear section 3 Connecting cable from battery to main switch 4 Connecting cable from main switch to vehicle earth 5 Main switch
6 Earth point on machine frame 7 Connecting cable from battery (+) to the consumers 8 Connecting cable from battery 1 (+) to battery 2 (-) 9 Batteries 1 and 2 in the left ballast weight 10 Electrical consumers
The batteries are installed in the left ballast weight. The two batteries are connected in series. The battery main switch S1 is installed in the rear left of the engine compartment and disconnects the battery circuit (-) from the vehicle earth. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The following components are powered directly by the battery. - M1 Starter - G3 Alternator - A4 Voltage converter - F01 100 A main fuse - F02 60 A preglow fuse - F03 200 A fuse for emergency steering pump - F07 10 A fuse for hazard lights
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.2-1 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
Battery installation
10.2.1
Batteries (ID 6002886, 613203208)
Technical data See section 2.1
Apart from the terminals, the batteries require no maintenance during normal operation.
Battery arrangement 1 Battery 2 Back-ignition protection
3 Drip catcher
The battery has a gas escape mechanism and is equipped with back-ignition protection and a drip catcher.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The free channels must be sealed with dummy plugs.
10.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
11 Transmission 11.0 Chapter contents 11
Transmission..................................................................... 11.0-1 11.0
Transmission.................................................................................11.0-1
11.1
Mechanical transmission ..............................................................11.1-1
11.2
Electronic control unit ...................................................................11.2-1 11.2.1
Main electronics (master) ...................................................11.2-1
11.2.2
Main wiring harness (including transmission) ....................11.2-4
11.2.3
Gear shifting solenoid valves .............................................11.2-5
11.2.4
Speed sensor .....................................................................11.2-6
11.3
Hydraulic control ...........................................................................11.3-1 Control valve block .............................................................11.3-3
11.3.2
Gear pump..........................................................................11.3-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
11.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30.01.2007
Transmission
11.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
11.0 Transmission Design
Main components of the transmission system 1 A11 control unit 2 Transmission 3 Gear pump
4 Oil cooler 5 Main electronics (master)
The transmission system consists of the gearbox including the control valve block, the main electronics (master), the control unit A11, the hydraulic supply system and the oil cooler. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader. The control valve block is bolted on the gearbox from above. The main electronics (master) are located on the rear wall of the cab behind the driver's seat. The control unit A11 is located on the panel in the right of the cab. The gear pump which supplies the gearbox with control and lubrication oil is connected to the wheel drive of the engine. The oil cooler is in the cooling system between the cab and the engine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Transmission
11.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Mechanical transmission
11.1 Mechanical transmission Technical data See section 2.1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Design
Cross section of the transmission (note: the drive shaft 2 with the coupling 2 is shown turned upwards to make it easier to see) 1 Transmission housing 2 Variable displacement motor 2 drive shaft 3 Coupling 2 4 Variable displacement motor 1 drive shaft
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
5 6 7 8 9 10
Coupling 3 Coupling 1 Rear axle drive shaft flange Oil strainer Power take-off shaft Front axle drive shaft flange
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
11 12 13 14 15
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Coupling 1 lube oil duct Coupling 3 lube oil duct Coupling 2 lube oil duct Oil filter Control valve block
11.1-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Mechanical transmission
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader and is driven by two variable displacement motors. The motors drive the two input shafts 2 and 4, which transfer the torque to the coupling sets 3, 5 and 6. The hydraulically actuated couplings consist of an inside-geared coupling cage, an outside-geared coupling hub, discs, piston, press plate and return springs. The outside-geared steel discs and inside-geared friction discs are arranged alternately. The outside-geared discs are connected to the coupling cage and the inside-geared discs are connected to the coupling hub in such a way that they cannot twist. The hub and the friction discs turn freely with the input shafts when the coupling is not actuated. When the travel range is shifted, oil is directed from the solenoid valve in the control valve block 15 through the appropriate duct to the coupling valve. As soon as the coupling valve is actuated, oil flows through the duct to the corresponding coupling piston. The oil pressure pushes the piston and discs against the press plate. When the steel and friction discs are pressed together, they connect the coupling cage and hub so that they turn together. When the coupling is closed, power is transmitted from the oil motor to the output shaft. The two drive shafts to the front and rear section are connected to the flanges of the output shaft 7 and 10. When the coupling is open, the return springs push the coupling piston back. The oil in front of the piston escapes through the coupling valve and holes in the coupling piston to the oil sump. The oil sump is fitted in transmission housing 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
A pump fitted to the engine draws the gear oil is through pipes out of the sump. The oil strainer 8 is fitted on the intake port of the oil sump. The gear oil is pumped back through a filter into the transmission. Some of the oil is directed through the oil cooler. The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission lubrication system.
11.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Mechanical transmission
Function description Basic function
Arrangement of shafts, gears and couplings in the transmission Motor 1 drive shaft Shaft 1 drive gear Coupling 3 Intermediate shaft power takeoff gear 5 Motor 2 drive shaft 6 Shaft 2 drive gear 7 Coupling 2 LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1 2 3 4
8 Variable displacement motor 2 input 9 Coupling 1 10 Intermediate shaft drive gear 11 Intermediate shaft 12 Variable displacement motor 1 input 13 Shaft 1 drive gear 14 Power take-off shaft
These are the basic functions of the 2plus2 transmission: – Increasing the input torque of the two variable displacement motors – Shifting gear without reducing tractive force – Increasing the speed range through 3 travel ranges – Distributing torque to the front and rear axles
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.1-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Mechanical transmission
The 3 gears 1st gear In first gear, the couplings K1 and K2 are closed. The torques from both variable displacement motors are used to provide maximum tractive force. Input shaft 1 The power from motor 1 is transferred directly via the input shaft 1 to the drive gear of the intermediate shaft 3. The closed coupling K1 transfers the torque of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4. Input shaft 2 The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via the output gears of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4. The power of both motors is accumulated in the intermediate shaft 3. The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
2nd gear In 2nd gear, the coupling K1 is opened and the motor 1 pivots to 0°. At the same time, motor 2 pivots to a wider angle. Input shaft 1 Motor 1 pivots to 0° and the coupling K1 is opened. Input shaft 2 The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via the output gears of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
11.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Mechanical transmission
3rd gear In 3rd gear, the coupling K3 is closed and the coupling K2 is opened. The full torque is transferred during shifting. Input shaft 1 The power from motor 1 is transferred via the input shaft 1 and the coupling K3 to the output gear of the input shaft 1. The power is then transferred via the output gears of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4. Input shaft 2 After the coupling K3 closes, motor 2 pivots to 0° and the coupling K2 is opened.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.1-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Mechanical transmission
11.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Electronic control unit
11.2 Electronic control unit 11.2.1
Main electronics (master) (ID 10223177) For a detailed description of the main electronics (master), see section 10.1.3.
Design The main electronics (master) are attached to the rear trim of the cab under a plastic cover and contains a flash card with the current machine software.
Main electronics (master)
Function description Basic function The main electronics (master) is the “brain” of the machine control system. The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or external modules. The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the following time cycles: – Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules – Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data; calculate the output data – Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid valve via one of the output modules) A laptop can be connected to the master via a serial interface.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Using the SCULI software, the service engineer can make settings, perform diagnosis and view operating data in the main electronics.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Electronic control unit
Block diagram of transmission Gas pedal LH control lever Input module 1 Input module 2 Main electronics (master) Display unit Control unit
8 9 10 11 12 13
Output module 1 Gear shifting solenoid valves 2plus2 gearbox Output speed sensor Thermostat Motor 2 speed sensor
14 15 16 17 18
Motor 1 speed sensor Solenoid valve Y6.1 Solenoid valve Y6.2 Solenoid valve Y6.3 Solenoid valve Y6.mo
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Electronic control unit
Selecting travel ranges When the electrical system is turned on, travel range A1-3 is automatically selected. The transmission remains in neutral until the parking brake is released and the travel direction is selected. Other travel ranges can be selected by pressing the “Shift Up” (1) or “Shift Down” (2) buttons on the control unit A11. The selected travel range is indicated on the display. The following travel ranges can be selected: A2 - 3
– Automatic travel range 2nd and 3rd gear
A1 - 3
– Automatic travel range 1st to 3rd gear
A1 - 2
– Automatic travel range 1st and 2nd gear
2
– Fixed 2nd gear
1
– Fixed 1st gear
T
– Tempomat
N
– Neutral
Gearshift strategy The controller constantly monitors the speed signals and the pump and motor positions, and selects the most suitable gear in the automatic travel ranges. The travel ranges can be changed at any speed. If the speed is too high for the new travel range, the controller slows the machine by changing the current to the pump and the variable displacement motor(s). When the speed is appropriate for the new travel range after hydrostatic braking, the travel range automatically changes. Control unit A14
Maximum speed Vmax If the task in hand required a reduced maximum speed, you can reduce the maximum speed by pressing the button 3. This function is only available when travelling forward in fixed gears 1 and 2. The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine then reaches this speed at full throttle. If the Vmax button is pressed when the machine is not moving, the minimum speed for the gear is stored. – 1st gear approx. 4 km/h – 2nd gear approx. 10 km/h The Vmax function is deactivated when you press the Vmax button again or change the travel range.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
If reverse travel direction is selected, the master shifts to automatic travel range A1-3 and the Vmax function is deactivated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Electronic control unit
Kick-down The kick-down function allows manual shifting to first gear. Kick-down shifting is used in the following situations: – Slowing the machine down when approaching the pile. The kick-down function hydrostatically brakes the machine, and it shifts down to 1st gear. – Before driving onto a steep slope, you can use the kick-down function to shift to 1st gear. – When you select the travel direction, the machine drives off in 2nd gear. If steep terrain prevents this, you can use the kick-down function to shift straight to 1st gear. When you press the lick-down button 2 on the LIEBHERR control lever 1, the machine is automatically hydrostatically braked and is shifted down to 1st gear. At high travel speeds, the machine automatically shifts to 2nd gear, and then to 1st gear. – At low travel resistance, 1st gear remains selected for 10 seconds. During acceleration, the transmission automatically shifts to 2nd gear. – While pushing into the pile, first gear remains selected as long as the resistance is high. In kick-down mode, the maximum travel speed is 10 km/h. Kick-down mode can be deactivated early by pressing the travel direction switch 3.
11.2.2
Main wiring harness (including transmission) Design The main wiring harness is connected to the right side of the transmission using a Cannon plug.
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The Cannon plug is water- and dust-tight. Five lugs around its circumference prevent it from being plugged in incorrectly.
Plug for electrical transmission control
11.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Electronic control unit
Plug assignment
11.2.3
Pin
Colour
Function
A
Red
Modulation solenoid valve
B
Green
Coupling 2 solenoid valve
C
Blue
Coupling 3 solenoid valve
D
Yellow
Coupling 1 solenoid valve
E
White
Weight
Gear shifting solenoid valves Technical data See section 2.1
Design The transmission control valves are actuated by four solenoid valves. These are installed on the left of the control valve block.
2plus2 transmission control valve block 1 Solenoid valve Y6.1 2 Solenoid valve Y6.2
3 Solenoid valve Y6.3 4 Solenoid valve Y6.mo
Function description LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Basic function Once a solenoid valve is actuated, its function is triggered by applying pressure to its associated hydraulic valve.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Electronic control unit
11.2.4
Speed sensor (ID 7009274)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design The input and output speeds of the transmission are recorded by speed sensors and monitored by the main electronics (master).
Speed sensors on the transmission 1 Variable displacement motor 2 speed sensor 2 Power take-off speed sensor
3 Variable displacement motor 1 speed sensor
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The sensors generate an AC signal with a frequency proportional to the speed and number of teeth of the corresponding gear. This signal is recorded by the main electronics (master) and converted to the speed.
11.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Hydraulic control
11.3 Hydraulic control Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Diagram of the hydraulic gearbox control unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Variable displacement motor 1 Variable displacement motor 2 Coupling 2 Coupling 3 Coupling 1 Lubrication oil supply Gear pump Filter Hydro accumulator
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Oil cooler Bypass valve filter Pressure relief valve Safety valve Cooler bypass valve Pressure reducing valve Modulation solenoid valve Y6.mo 17 Coupling modulation valve 2
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
18 Coupling modulation valve 1 and 3 19 Solenoid valve Y6.3 20 Solenoid valve Y6.1 21 Coupling valve 3 22 Coupling valve 1 23 Solenoid valve Y6.2 24 Coupling valve 2 P Test connection
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
The gear pump 7 draws up oil from the sump via a strainer. The oil sump is fitted in the transmission housing. The oil is pushed through the filter 8. The bypass valve 11 protects the filter from overload. This valve opens at a differential pressure of 4.5 bar. The hydro accumulator 9 is charged with gear oil. Some of the oil flows through the pressure reducing valve 15 to the four solenoid valves. The rest of the oil flows through the gear switching pressure relief valve 12 to the gear oil cooler 10. The pressure relief valve is set to 20±3 bar. The pressure relief valve is adjusted using discs. The operating pressure of the gearbox control unit is measured at the test point P. The pressure reducing valve 15 reduces the oil pressure for actuating the coupling valves from 20 to 9 bar. The bypass valve 14 protects the gear oil cooler from hydraulic overload. This opens at a differential pressure of 4 bar. Oil not used for lubricating the couplings flows through the lubricating oil pressure limiting valve 13 to the oil sump. The lubrication oil pressure limiting valve opens at 4 bar.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission lubrication system.
11.3-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission Hydraulic control
11.3.1
Control valve block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Design
Cross section of the control valve block
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pressure relief valve Bypass valve filter Valve piston stop Cooler bypass valve Pressure reducing valve Coupling modulation valve 1 and 3
7 Coupling valve 2 8 Coupling 2 solenoid valve Y6.2 9 Modulation solenoid valve Y6.mo 10 Canon plug 11 Coupling 1 solenoid valve Y6.1 12 Coupling 3 solenoid valve Y6.3
13 14 15 16 17
Coupling valve 3 Coupling valve 1 Separator plate Separator plate Control valve block housing
Function description Basic function The control valve block directs oil to the various consumers in the transmission. Some are hydrostatically controlled, others electrohydrostatically. The oil pressure, cooling and lubrication are hydraulically controlled. The couplings and the pressure modulation are electrohydraulically controlled. The solenoid valves receive control impulses from the main electronics (master). The solenoid valves open and direct the pressure oil to the valve of the actuated coupling and control the pressure modulation. Shifting gears
The illustration here shows the two modulation valves (the sectional view of the control valve block only shows one modulation valve). The modulation valve 2 for coupling 2 is held in place by the plug 1. Position 3 is the solenoid valve Y6.mo for the modulation. Component 4 is the modulation valve for coupling 1 and 3. Pressure modulation is required for smooth gear shifting. When a gear is selected, oil is directed to the corresponding coupling valve. The coupling valve is actuated and the oil flows unchecked through the modulation valve and the coupling valve into the coupling. This is called the rapid fill phase. During the rapid fill phase, the coupling pads should be quickly brought into contact, but without the coupling closing. This accelerates the shifting process. A few milliseconds after the solenoid valve shifts a gear, the modulation valve is energised and the oil is directed via a restrictor to the coupling. The oil flow to the coupling is metered, and the pressure in the coupling accumulates slowly and in a controlled manner. This is called the modulation phase.
The actuated variable displacement motor pivots to an angle of 0° with the required speed. The variable displacement motor is then set to the correct angle. The motor is synchronised before the torque is transferred, thus ensuring smooth shifting.
11.3-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Shortly afterwards, the modulation valve is deactivated. The coupling pressure has now exceeded the force of the coupling springs and the coupling is closed.
Service Manual
Transmission Hydraulic control
Increase in coupling pressure during gear shifting 1 Travel range preselection 2 Rapid fill phase
3 Modulation phase 4 Shifting complete
The above graph shows how the pressure changes during a gearshift. The complete shifting operation only takes around 200 milliseconds, and can therefore not be recorded using conventional test equipment.
11.3.2
Gear pump Technical data See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Components of the gear pump 1 2 3 4
Snap ring Shaft seal ring Flange Seals
5 6 7 8
Bearing bushings Gears Housing Housing cover
The gear pump is attached to the front of the engine. It is driven at a set ratio via the spur gear transmission of the engine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
Function description Basic function The gear pump draws up oil from the transmission. Depending on the speed, the oil flows from the transmission control valve block.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
A pressure relief valve in the transmission control valve block protects the system from excess pressure.
11.3-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
12 Axles, Drive shafts 12.0 Chapter contents 12
Axles, Drive shafts ............................................................ 12.0-1 12.1
Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2 ..........................................................12.1-1
12.2
Axles – L580 2plus2 .....................................................................12.2-1
12.3
Drive shafts ...................................................................................12.3-1 Front drive shaft..................................................................12.3-1
12.3.2
Rear drive shaft ..................................................................12.3-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
12.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Axles, Drive shafts
12.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
12.1 Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2 Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L566 - 460 / from 14171 L556 - 454 / from 15653; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle 1 Axle casing 2 Self-locking differential
3 Drive shaft flange 4 Wheel hubs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking differential 2, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 4. The wheel hub also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle casing 1 contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
Cross-section of the wheel hub Retaining pin Cover M75x1.5 grooved nut O-ring Wheel flange Brake piston return springs Sealing ring Brake housing Brake piston seals Brake piston
11 Screw for measuring wear on the brake discs 12 Brake discs 13 Ring gear 14 Planetary gear 15 Planetary carrier 16 Sun gear shaft 17 Axle casing housing 18 Oil drain plug
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
Sectional view of the differential 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Half shaft Axle shaft housing Housing cover Differential housing Bevel gear Pressure rings Compensating tapered gear
8 9 10 11 12 13
Axle tapered gear Compensation axle Axle input shaft Drive flange Shaft seal ring Dust protection ring
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
These are the basic functions of the axle: – Increasing and transferring the drive torque – Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly. The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-3 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
Sectional view of the differential 1 2 3 4 5
Axle input shaft Crown wheel Differential housing Output shafts Axle tapered gear
6 7 8 9
Pressure rings Compensation axle Compensating tapered gear Disc brakes
Speed balance of the left and right wheels When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances. The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each wheel is induced by the rolling condition.
The spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque from the two pressure rings 6 to the compensation axles 7, which are loosely guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
Self-locking function The disc brakes 9 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 5 counteract the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 5 and the differential housing 3 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient support from the side with poor hold. The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears.
12.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power takeoff shafts 4 via the crown wheel 2. The crown wheel drives the differential housing 3 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 8 of the differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears 5 and thus drive the output shafts 4. The compensation tapered gears 8 have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by the increased speed of the other wheel.
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub 1 2 3 4 5
Wheel flange Brake housing Brake piston Brake piston seals Brake piston return springs
6 Screw for measuring wear on the brake discs 7 Brake piston guide pin 8 Brake discs 9 Ring gear 10 Planetary carrier
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the wheel hubs. When pressure oil acts on the brake piston 3 the outer and inner discs 8 press against the limit stop of the ring gear 9. The inner discs mesh with the planetary carrier 10 so that they cannot slip. The outer discs mesh with the brake housing 2 and remain stationary. When the discs press together, the wheel torque is taken up by the brake housing. When it is not actuated, the brake piston 3 is held back by the return springs 5. The brake discs lose contact and the drag torque is minimised.
Wheel fastening The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts. They are centred by the spherical collar nuts.
Axle lubrication The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil drain plugs are fitted on the wheel hubs and differential housing. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The differential and the wheel hubs are always filled and the level checked using the filler screw on the differential housing
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-5 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Axles – L550 - L576 2plus2
12.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L580 2plus2
12.2 Axles – L580 2plus2 Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle 1 Self-locking differential 2 Axle casing
3 Wheel hub
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking differential 1, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 3. The wheel hub also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle casing 2 contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.2-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles – L580 2plus2
Cross-section of the wheel hub Ring gear Planetary gear Planetary pinion / cover Planetary bearing Thrust washer
6 7 8 10
Sun gear Press plate Hub Double seal ring with supports and O-rings
11 Axle 12 Axle casing 13 Seal holder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 2 3 4 5
12.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L580 2plus2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Sectional view of the differential 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Groove nut Shims Housing cover Differential holder Differential housing Crown wheel Pressure ring
L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Seal screw Axle tapered gears Brake discs Central element Bevel gear Tapered gear seal Grease seal
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Pressure disc V sealing ring Tapered gear nut Drive flange Seal cartridge O-ring Wear sleeve
12.2-3 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles – L580 2plus2
Function description Basic function These are the basic functions of the axle: – Increasing and transferring the drive torque – Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.
Sectional view of the differential
12.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Axles – L580 2plus2
1 2 3 4 5
Axle input shaft Differential housing Crown wheel Pressure ring Compensation axle
6 7 8 9
Compensating tapered gear Brake discs Axle tapered gears Bevel gear
Speed balance of the left and right wheels When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances. The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each wheel is induced by the rolling condition. The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power takeoff shafts 1 via the crown wheel 3. The crown wheel drives the differential housing 2 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 6 of the differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears 8 and thus drive the output shafts 1. The compensation tapered gears 6 have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by the increased speed of the other wheel.
Self-locking function The disc brakes 7 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 8 counteract the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 8 and the differential housing 2 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient support from the side with poor hold.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears. The spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque from the two pressure rings 4 to the compensation axles 5, which are loosely guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.2-5 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles – L580 2plus2
Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub 1 Axle housing 2 Plug 3 Retainer plate / outer discs
4 Inner discs 5 Return springs 6 Brake piston
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the axle casing. When pressure oil acts on the brake piston 6 the outer discs 3 and inner discs 4 press against the retainer plate 3. The inner discs mesh with the axle and turn along at high speed with the drive shaft. The outer discs 3 mesh with the axle housing 1 and remain stationary. When the discs press together, the wheel torque, reduced by the ratio of the planetary final drive, is taken up by the axle housing. When it is not actuated, the return springs 5 push back the brake piston 6. The brake discs lose contact and the braking torque is minimised.
The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts with rotating cups.
Axle lubrication The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil filler and drain plugs are fitted on the wheel hubs and differential housing.
12.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Wheel fastening
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts Drive shafts
12.3 Drive shafts 12.3.1
Front drive shaft Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft 1 2 3 4
Flange Universal joint Shaft driver Hub liner
5 6 7 8
Connector tube Pin driver Universal joint Flight ring
9 Universal joint 10 Flange
The drive shaft has one universal joint at the output of the transmission, a universal joint at the input of the front axle and a slider to compensate the length.
Function description Function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the front axle. The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the angle between the drive and the power take-off. The angle needs to be compensated due to the articulated steering. The universal joint and connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together. This compensates the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements during operation make this necessary.
Uniformity of torque transmission On drive shafts with simple universal joints, the connector tube between the two universal joints rotates unevenly. This is the case whenever the universal joint has to compensate for an angle. This occurrence is prevented by using a double cardan shaft. The connector tube turns evenly.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.3-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Drive shafts
12.3.2
Rear drive shaft Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft 1 Flange 2 Universal joint 3 Shaft driver
4 Hub liner 5 Connector tube 6 Pin driver
7 Universal joint 8 Flange
The drive shaft is equipped with two universal joints and a slider.
Function description Function The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the rear axle. The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the angle between the drive and the power take-off. The universal joint and connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
This compensates the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements during operation make this necessary.
12.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
13 Machine frame, Ballast weight 13.0 Chapter contents 13
Machine frame, Ballast weight .......................................... 13.0-1 Machine frame ..............................................................................13.1-1
13.2
Articulation bearing .......................................................................13.2-1
13.3
Oscillating axle mount...................................................................13.3-1
13.4
Articulation lock.............................................................................13.4-1
13.5
Ballast weight................................................................................13.5-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
13.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Machine frame, Ballast weight
13.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Machine frame, Ballast weight Machine frame
13.1 Machine frame Design The machine frame consists of the front section and the rear section. These are connected by the articulation bearing.
Main components of the machine frame 1 Front section 2 Rear section
3 Oscillating bearing
4 Articulation bearing
Function description LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Basic function The machine frame transfers the forces of the lift arms to the axles. The frame carries all the most important components of the machine, such as the engine, cab and transmission.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.1-1 o f 2
Machine frame, Ballast weight
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Machine frame
13.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Machine frame, Ballast weight Articulation bearing
13.2 Articulation bearing Design The articulation bearing is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the articulation bearing 1 Front section
2 Rear section
3 Articulation bearing
Main components of the articulation bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5
Pressure flange Cylinder screw Bushing Bearing cover Shims
6 7 8 9 10
Swivel bearing Cone tension element Shaft seal ring Cylinder screw Bearing pin
Function description Basic function The articulation bearing connects the front and rear sections. It allows steering of the machine by articulating the machine frame to the left or right.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.2-1 o f 2
Machine frame, Ballast weight
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Articulation bearing
13.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Machine frame, Ballast weight Oscillating bearing
13.3 Oscillating axle mount Design The oscillating axle mount is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the oscillating axle mount 1 Front section 2 Rear section
3 Oscillating bearing
4 Oscillating axle frame
Main components of the oscillating axle mount LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Pressure flange Cylinder screw Bushing Bearing cover Shims
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 7 8 9 10
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Swivel bearing Cone tension element Shaft seal ring Cylinder screw Bearing pin
13.3-1 o f 2
Machine frame, Ballast weight
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Oscillating bearing
13.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Machine frame, Ballast weight Articulation lock
13.4 Articulation lock Design The articulation lock is fitted between the front and rear sections.
Articulation lock 1 Locking bar 2 Pin
3 Spring clip
Function description Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
The articulation lock arrests the articulated joint of the machine. This means the steering is blocked, for example when transporting the machine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.4-1 o f 2
Machine frame, Ballast weight
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Articulation lock
13.4-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Machine frame, Ballast weight Ballast weight
13.5 Ballast weight Technical data See section 2.1
Design The ballast weight consist of two parts. They are bolted on the left and right sides on the back of the rear section.
Ballast weight layout 2 Right rear section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1 Left rear section
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.5-1 o f 2
Machine frame, Ballast weight
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Ballast weight
13.5-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
14 Central lubrification system 14.0 Chapter contents 14
Central lubrification system ............................................... 14.0-1 14.1
Manual central lubrication.............................................................14.1-1
14.2
LIEBHERR automatic central lubrication system (optional) .........14.2-1 Central lubrication pump EP-1 ...........................................14.2-4
14.2.2
Progressive distributor MX-F..............................................14.2-5
14.2.3
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation ....14.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
14.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrification system
14.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Manual central lubrication
14.1 Manual central lubrication Design
Lubricating rail on the front section 1 Lift arms, top left 2 Lift arms, top right 3 Tilt cylinder, top
4 Tilt cylinder, bottom 5 Right steering cylinder, base end 6 Left steering cylinder, base end
Lubricating rail on the rear section 1 Oscillating axle frame, front 2 Oscillating axle frame, rear
3 Right steering cylinder, rod end
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Function description Basic function The two central lubricating rails are for lubricating points which are difficult to access.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.1-1 o f 2
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Manual central lubrication
14.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Automatic central lubrication system
14.2 LIEBHERR automatic central lubrication system (optional) Design
Components of the central lubrication system 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Central lubrication pump Rapid fill coupling Agitator Transparent reservoir Level sensor connection Grease fitting Pressure relief valve
8 Grease fitting for manual lubrication 9 Main supply line 10 Main progressive distributor MX-F 11 Secondary progressive distributor 12 Lubricant supply lines 13 Lubrication points
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The central lubrication pump is located under the left cab access. The distributors are arranged centrally to the respective lubrication points. The central lubrication pump and the progressive distributors provide the specified quantity of grease to the connected lubrication points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-1 o f 1 0
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
Automatic central lubrication system
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Overview of lubrication points 3 Main progressive distributor 4 6x secondary progressive distributor
5 6x secondary progressive distributor
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
1 Central lubrication pump 2 Inductive switch for lubrication cycles
14.2-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Automatic central lubrication system
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
Overview of lubrication points 1 Central lubrication pump 2 Inductive switch for lubrication cycles
3 Main progressive distributor 4 6x secondary progressive distributor
5 6x secondary progressive distributor
Function description Progressive lubrication The automatic central lubrication system is a progressive system. It lubricates progressively, i.e. all lubricating points in succession.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The main distributor is fitted with an inductive switch, which signals the lubrication cycles to the main electronics (master).
Overall system The electrically powered central lubrication pump pumps the grease to the main progressive distributor, which distributes it to the secondary progressive distributors. The secondary progressive distributors pump the grease to the lubrication points. The main electronics (master) control the lubrications cycles and pauses of the central lubrication pump.
Safety function – The pressure relief valve on the central lubrication pump monitors lubrication. If a lubrication point receives no grease from the distributor, the progressive distributor is blocked. The pressure in the central lubricating system increases. If the pressure rises above the permitted limit, grease escapes from the pressure relief valve. During this time, there are no impulses (lubrication cycles) for the main electronics (master).
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-3 o f 1 0
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
Automatic central lubrication system
– If the lubrication cycles are not performed in a specified time, the main electronics (master) switch off the lubrication system. The driver is notified by the flashing LEDs on the central lubrication button and a service code.
14.2.1
Central lubrication pump EP-1 Technical data See section 2.1
1 2 3 4 5 6
14.2-4 o f 1 0
DC motor Pump housing Cam Level sensor (inductive) Transparent reservoir Agitator
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7 8 9 10 11
Strainer Transfer piston Check valve Pressure relief valve Pressure ring
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrication pump EP-1
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Automatic central lubrication system
Function description Pump action A DC motor 1 continually drives the cam 3 with a pressure ring 11. The cam raises and lowers the transfer piston 8. This provides the suction and pumping action of the transfer piston. The built-in check valve 9 prevents the pumped medium from being sucked back out of the main supply line. The agitator 6 pushes the lubricant out of the transparent reservoir 5 through a strainer 7 to the pump housing 2. This eliminates air bubbles in the grease.
Checking the grease quantity When all three LEDs on the central lubrication button light up, there is insufficient grease. This condition is reported by the level sensor. The reservoir is a transparent cylinder, in which the rubber stripper on the agitator can be seen. This allows you to check the grease level.
Filling The reservoir can be filled via the tapered grease fitting using a standard lubrication pump or via the rapid fill coupling using the grease gun.
Safety function The pressure relief valve 10, which is set to 280 bar, prevents excess pressure in the line system.
14.2.2
Progressive distributor MX-F Technical data See section 2.1
Design The progressive distributors are manufactured with variable discs. The advantage of this is that the distributors can be extended or reduced according to the number of lubrication points. The flow per stroke depends on the piston diameter. The progressive distributor needs at least three pumping elements in order to work properly.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The distributors must always be installed horizontally.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-5 o f 1 0
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
Automatic central lubrication system
Main progressive distributor 1 Start element 2 Middle element with actuator piston and inductive switch for lubrication cycles 3 Inductive switch housing
4 Middle element 5 Inductive switch for lubrication cycles 6 Inductive switch LED 7 End element
Secondary progressive distributor 1 Start element (without piston) 2 Middle element with flow engraved 3 Screw connection
4 Connecting line 5 Dummy plug 6 End element
Linkage with gears connects the elements to the distributor blocks.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
O-rings are installed as seals between the elements.
14.2-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Automatic central lubrication system
Function description Basic function
Piston positions of the progressive distributor MX-F A - C Piston positions
I - III Pistons
1 - 6 Grease duct outlets
The progressive distributors act hydraulically and distribute the lubricant in series to each outlet. The lubricant flows via the entrance of the distributor through all the distributor discs to the piston I (piston position A). The piston pushes to the left and presses the lubricant out of the left pressure chamber of the piston to the outlet 1 (piston position B). Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to the outlets 2 and 3. After piston III moves, the lubricant flows to the left side of piston I (piston position C). The piston I pushes to the right and presses the lubricant out of the right pressure chamber of the piston to the outlet 4. Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to the outlets 5 and 6. After piston II moves, the lubricant again flows to the right side of piston I (piston position A) and a new cycle of the progressive distributor begins. This function is repeated as long as lubricant is pumped to the distributor. Malfunctions Malfunctions can occur in the lubricant lines or inside the distributor. Malfunctions include: – Clogged lubricant lines – Twisted bearing casings These prevent the flow of lubricant, and thus block the distributors. LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
When the distributor is blocked, lubricant flows out of the pressure relief valve on the central lubrication pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-7 o f 1 0
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
Automatic central lubrication system
14.2.3
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation Technical data See section 2.1
Function description Basic function The central lubrication pump EP-1 is regulated by the main electronics (master). It is operated via CAN bus from the control unit to the main electronics (master) and output module 1 A17a.
Central lubrication system control 1 Central lubrication pump 2 Grease level sensor 3 Central lubrication button and LEDs 4 CAN bus connections 5 Main electronics (master)
6 7 8 9
Power supply from fuse F53 Output module 1 A17a Input module 2 A16b Inductive switch for lubrication cycles 10 Central lubrication pump power supply
If the ignition is switched off or the parking brake is engaged, the main electronics (master) stop lubrication. The remaining cycles are stored and after the engine is started or the parking brake released, lubrication is continued at the point where it was interrupted.
14.2-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The feedback from the grease level sensor 2 and the lubrication cycle inductive switch 9 comes via the input module 2 A16b to the main electronics (master).
Service Manual
Central lubrification system Automatic central lubrication system
Non-scheduled lubrication intensity (cycle settings) The following settings can be made with the central lubrication button: – Press briefly for less than 2 seconds: non-schedule lubrication – Hold down for more than 2 seconds: set lubrication intensity 75%, 100%, 125% The LEDs show the following states when the ignition is switched on. – LED 1 - 75% lubrication (light-duty operation) – LED 2 - 100% lubrication (medium-duty operation) – LED 3 - 125% lubrication (heavy-duty operation) – LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 flash & service code – system fault – LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 light up – grease has reached minimum level – LED 1 or 2 or 3 flashes – indicates lubrication intensity during operation: 75 / 100 / 125%
Adjusting the lubrication intensity Press the central lubrication button for more than 2 seconds to switch to setting mode. With each further press of the button, the mode is switch up one level; after the highest mode it returns to the first. 75% - 100% - 125% - 75%.....
Non-scheduled lubrication Using the central lubrication system button, you can perform non-scheduled lubrication at any time when the ignition is switched on, even when the parking brake is engaged (with the set lubrication and cycle time). The pump motor switches off after the set number of cycles and the set cycle time begins.
Lubrication sequences A Lubrication (cycles) 1 Light-duty lubrication sequence
2 Medium-duty lubrication sequence
3 Heavy-duty lubrication sequence
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Fault in the system (cycle error) The cycles are checked with a set time. Each completed cycle resets this time. If there is no cycle within the set time, the system is stopped – LEDs 1, 2 and 3 flash and the service code E2017 appears.
Grease reservoir level too low The LEDs in the central lubrication button light up if the grease supply in the reservoir falls too low. The all three LEDs stay on until the grease is topped up. The driver can also check the grease level by looking at the reservoir.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-9 o f 1 0
Central lubrification system
Service Manual
Automatic central lubrication system
Filling the reservoir The tapered grease fitting 3 can be used to fill the reservoir. For fast filling, the rapid filler pump 1 on coupling 2 can be used.
Fast filling with cartridge 1 Rapid filler pump
2 Quick coupling 3 Grease fitting
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Grease specifications: see the section on lubricants and fuels in the maintenance chapter.
14.2-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
15 Covering, access 15.0 Chapter contents 15
Covering, access............................................................... 15.0-1 Coverings......................................................................................15.1-1
15.2
Cab access ...................................................................................15.2-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
15.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering, access
15.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Covering, access Covering
15.1
Covering Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering components 1 Front left and right mud guards 2 Cooler hood 3 Rear left and right mud guards
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
4 Engine hood 5 Rear section 6 Rear lower covering
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
7 Front lower covering 8 Plastic lid
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-1 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
Covering
Front mud guard 1 Front mud guard
2 Front section
The two front mud guards 1 are each fastened with three bolts to the front section 2.
1 Rear right mud guard 2 Rear section
3 Rear left mud guard
The two rear mud guards 1 and 3 are each fastened with two bolts to the access, the rear section 2 and the ballast weight.
15.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Rear mud guard
Service Manual
Covering, access Covering
Engine hood and rear section 1 Cooler support 2 Engine hood 3 Rear cover
4 Rear section 5 Cooler panel
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The engine hood 2 is fastened to the cooler support 1 with two screws. The hood can be lifted up with the aid of two gas-filled springs. The rear cover 3 is fastened to the rear section of the machine 4 with four bolts.
Rear lower covering 1 Rear section 2 Cover
3 Hinge
The cover 2 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 1 with four bolts and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-3 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
Covering
Front lower covering 1 Cover 2 Rear section
3 Hinge
The cover 1 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 2 with four bolts and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
1 Cooler hood 2 Cooler support
3 Cooler panel
The cooler hood 1 is fastened with one bolt each to the cooler support 2 and the cooler panel 3.
15.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Cooler hood
Service Manual
Covering, access Covering
Cover 1 Plastic lid
2 Front section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The plastic lid 1 is fastened with four bolts to the front of the front section 2.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-5 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering
15.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Covering, access Cab access
15.2
Cab access The handrails on the cab access help you get in and out of the cab and protect you from falling off.
Design
Cab access 1 Cab access 2 Tool box
3 Cab access handrail 4 Wheel box handrail
The left side of the cab access 1 is fastened to the rear section with three bolts. The bottom rung is connected by two rubber brackets to the access. The underside of the cab access is designed to leave space for the input and output modules, and for the electric central lubrication pump (special equipment). A toolbox 2 is welded between the steps.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The handrails 3 are each fastened to the access and wheel box with four screws.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.2-1 o f 2
Covering, access
Service Manual
Cab access
Access and exit aids 1 Wheel box handrail 2 Cab access
3 Cab access handrail
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The cab access is fastened to the rear section with three bolts. The wheel box handrail is fastened with two bolts each to the access and rear mud guard. The cab access handrail is fastened to cab access with two bolts.
15.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
16 Cab, heating, air conditioning 16.0 Chapter contents 16
Cab, heating, air conditioning............................................ 16.0-1 16.0.1 16.1
Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................16.0-1 Instrument panel ...........................................................................16.1-1
16.1.1
Display unit A13..................................................................16.1-1
16.1.2
Control units A11, A18 and A22 .........................................16.1-4
16.1.3
Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11 ..........................16.1-5
16.1.4
Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22 .......................16.1-6
16.1.5
Option control unit (CAN bus) A19 .....................................16.1-6
16.1.6
Electrical control unit A18 ...................................................16.1-8
16.1.7
LIEBHERR control lever ...................................................16.1-11
16.2
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning.............................................16.2-1 16.2.1
Heating/air conditioning unit ...............................................16.2-2
16.2.2
Blower.................................................................................16.2-3
16.3
Air conditioning system.................................................................16.3-1 Air conditioning compressor ...............................................16.3-4
16.3.2
Condenser ..........................................................................16.3-5
16.3.3
Dryer collector unit..............................................................16.3-6
16.3.4
Pressure switch ..................................................................16.3-8
16.3.5
Evaporator ..........................................................................16.3-9
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
16.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Cab, heating, air conditioning
16.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning 16.0.1
Cab, heating and air-conditioning Design The cab is a safety cab which has been tested and approved according to the ROPS/FOPS specifications. It is elastically supported on the rear section. The cab is equipped with heating, ventilation and air conditioning. The cab can be accessed from the left side of the machine via the steps and the door. The right window can be used as an exit in emergencies.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
View of driver's cab 1 2 3 4 5 6
Radio speaker Sun visor Interior lights with switch Interior mirror Radio compartment Heater/ventilation/air-conditioning outlet nozzles (9 in total) 7 Inch/brake pedal with angle sensor 8 Steering column switch 9 Adjustable steering column with steering wheel
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Steering column adjustment lever Gas pedal angle sensor Adjustable LH control lever panel Display unit LIEBHERR control lever Panel adjustment pedal Window opener lever Control lever fitting for optional working functions 18 Right control panel with control units
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Socket/cigarette lighter Ashtray Ignition switch Adjustable arm rest Mechanical service hours counter Diagnostic plug Glove compartment Fuse box Driver’s seat
16.0-1 o f 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Driver's cab, outside view from right 1 Right side of cab 2 Fresh air filter 3 Heating and airconditioning housing
4 Air conditioning system expansion valve 5 Heater water connections 6 Valve and water valve control motors
Function description ROPS/FOPS strength The driver's cab complies with the ROPS/FOPS regulations. ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) takes into account mechanical rigidity in the event of the machine rolling over.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) governs the rigidity of the cab when object fall onto it.
16.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
16.1 Instrument panel All important operating, display and control elements are arranged ergonomically on the instrument panel. The display unit 2, which indicates the operating condition of the wheel loader, is located in the upper field of view, slightly to the right of centre. The LH control lever is in a separate console, which can be adjusted back and forth using a foot pedal. The controls are arranged in the right-hand control panel. The fuses are on the left behind the driver’s seat.
Design
Instrument panel 1 Electrical control unit A18 2 Main control unit CAN bus A11 3 Air conditioning control unit CAN bus A22
16.1.1
4 Additional functions control unit CAN bus (optional) A19 5 Switch for additional options
Display unit A13 The display unit A13 is on the front right A pillar.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Design The display unit A13 consists of: – LCD indicators – Symbol fields – Segment displays The LCD display 21 contains segment displays for: – Clock – Service codes – Engine speed – Service hours
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-1 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
The LCD display 26 contains segment displays for: – Tractive force adjustment – Current travel range Symbol fields for: – Warning messages – Travel direction – Travel ranges Segment fields for: – Fuel supply – Engine oil pressure – Coolant temperature – Travel speed Each symbol field is either red, yellow, green or orange. The 9-pin plug connector for communication with the electronic controller A1 (CPU) is attached to the rear.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Travel speed display P6 Emergency steering check symbol field H24 Emergency steering symbol field H8 Brake system accumulator pressure symbol field H19 Joystick steering symbol field H27 Gear oil overheating symbol field H14 Forward travel direction symbol field H3 Working hydraulics lockout symbol field H5 Reverse travel direction symbol field H9 Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field H23 Automatic travel range 2-3 symbol field H35 Automatic travel range 1-3 symbol field H34 Automatic travel range 1-2 symbol field H33 Fixed gear 2 symbol field H31 Fixed gear 1 symbol field H30 Tempomat T symbol field H29 Neutral position N symbol field H32 Parking brake symbol field H11
16.1-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19 Air filter contamination symbol field H7 20 Preglow monitor symbol field H2 21 Segment display for engine speed, time, operating hours segment and service codes P7 22 Battery charge control symbol field H6 23 High beam symbol field H12 24 Direction indicator symbol field H10 25 Stop symbol field H36 26 Display for tractive force adjustment, current travel range, fan reversal H37 27 Overspeed protection indicator H38 28 Fuel supply symbol field H1 29 Fuel supply display P2 30 Engine overheating and coolant level symbol field H13 31 Coolant temperature display P3 32 Engine oil pressure symbol field H4 33 Engine oil pressure display P5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Display unit A13
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
Function description Plug assignment Connector A13.X1
SUB-D / 9-pin male (communication with master electronics A15) Earth +24 V power supply CAN bus CAN_L CAN bus CAN_H +5 V power supply
6 7 8 9
Earth Unassigned +5 V terminal 1 Indicator signal
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1 2 3 4 5
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-3 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
16.1.2
Control units A11, A18 and A22 The control units A11, A18, A19 (optional) and A22 are fitted in the instrument panel on the right.
Design The controls consist of the following units: – Electric control unit A18 - controlled via digital connection – Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a CAN bus – Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a CAN bus – Option control unit A19 - controlled via a CAN bus. With strip inserts to show the various symbols. Backlit membrane keypads with buttons (function symbol and LEDs)
1 Electric control unit A18 - controlled via digital connection 2 Hazard warning system button S4 3 Parking light/driving light button S6 4 Flashing beacon button S9 5 Front/rear working floodlights button S8 6 Rear window heater button S55 7 Rear windshield wiper and washer system button S13 10 Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a CAN bus 11 Parking brake button S17 12 Ride control (LFD system) button S16 13 Working hydraulics lockout button S19 14 Bucket return-to-dig button S14 15 Travel range up button S27 16 Travel range down button S28 17 Increase tractive force button S32 18 Reduce tractive force button S33 19 Engine speed, clock and service hours button S30 20 Display unit brightness control button S31
16.1-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Increase fan speed button S38 Temperature down button S40 Decrease fan speed button S34 Temperature up button S39 Defrost button S47 Fresh/circulated air button S44 Central lubrication system button (optional) S50 Tempomat button S29 Emergency steering button S10 Lift kick-out button S22 Float position button S18 Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a CAN bus Blower duct selector button (footwell) S41 Blower duct selector button (head area) S43 Blower duct selector button (middle area) S42 Air conditioning ECO mode button S45 Air conditioning auto mode button S46 Spare button S??
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Control unit A11
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
Basic function The control units operate the various machine functions. The control units are connected via CAN bus and digitally to the main electronics (master) A15 and the relay and fuse board A4. The control unit A18 works as soon as the main switch is turned on (terminal 30). The buttons and switches can be programmed. The control units A11, A19 (optional) and A22 work when the ignition is turned on (terminal 15). The control units must be set to the correct CAN bus address.
Function test When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test. If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be started up. (See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
16.1.3
Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11 Function description The main function control unit A11 is connected via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The main function control unit A11 works as soon as the ignition is turned on (terminal 15). When a button is pressed, a signal is sent via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The buttons have LEDs, which can signal the following conditions: – All three LEDs on or off – button with switch function – All three LEDs only light up when the button is pressed – button with push function – The LEDs go on or off individually each time the button is pressed – button with control function The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each machine: “Operating the control units”.
Function test LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test. If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be started up. (See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-5 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment Connector A11/X1
Deutsch / 12-pin male (communication with main electronics (master) A15 1 +24 V power supply F71 (connected to pin 5) 2 Earth (connected to pin 6) 3 CAN bus CAN_High 1 4 CAN bus CAN_Low 1 5 +24 V power supply (connected to pin 1)
16.1.4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Earth (connected to pin 2) CAN bus CAN_High 2 CAN bus CAN_Low 2 Terminating resistor Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22 Function description The heating and air conditioning control unit A22 is connected via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The air conditioning control unit A22 works as soon as the ignition is turned on (terminal 15). When a button is pressed, a signal is sent via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The buttons have LEDs, which can signal the following conditions: – All three LEDs on or off – button with switch function – All three LEDs only light up when the button is pressed – button with push function The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each machine: “Operating the control units”.
Plug assignment Deutsch / 12-pin male (electrical function control) 1 2 3 4 5
Data input F71 Earth CAN_High 1 CAN_Low 1 +24 V power supply (terminal 15) - F09 6 Unassigned
16.1.5
7 8 9 10 11 12
CAN_High 2 CAN_Low 2 120 Ω terminating resistor Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
Option control unit (CAN bus) A19 Function description The option control unit A19 is connected via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The option control unit A19 works as soon as the ignition is turned on (terminal 15). When a button is pressed, a signal is sent via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15. The buttons have LEDs, which can signal the following conditions: – All three LEDs on or off – button with switch function – All three LEDs only light up when the button is pressed – button with push function
16.1-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Connector A22/X1
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each machine: “Operating the control units”. NOTE: when replacing or installing a new option control unit A19, it must be addressed. The address is required in order to identify CAN bus messages.
Plug assignment Connector A19/X1
Deutsch / 12-pin male (electrical function control) 1 2 3 4 5
Data input F71 Earth CAN_High 1 CAN_Low 1 +24 V power supply (terminal 15) - F09 6 Unassigned
7 8 9 10 11 12
CAN_High 2 CAN_Low 2 120 Ω terminating resistor Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned
Addressing a control unit The control unit must be addressed after it is installed. Addressing is performed as follows: • Connect the control unit • On the main electronics (master), unplug the PWR_X power supply connector or remove fuses F35 and F54 • Press buttons 1, 2 and 3 • Switch on the ignition and keep buttons pressed until the LEDs start flashing The flashing LEDs indicate the module number (address): – The LEDs in button 1 show the 100s (1x = 100, 2x = 200) – The LEDs in button 2 show the 10s (1x = 10, 2x = 20) – The LEDs in button 3 show the 1s (1x = 1, 2x = 2) Example: 9x LEDs in button 2, 3x LEDs in button 3 = 93 The LEDs in all three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display. Changing the address:
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Option control unit A19
Press button 3 once to increase the current address number by 1. The option control unit A19 has five selectable addresses. After you reach the highest address by pressing button 3 the control unit returns to the lowest address. Addressing the control units: Address
Setting after replacement
Status function
Main function control unit A11
97
No
Yes
Air conditioning control unit A22
93
No
No
Option control unit A19
94
Yes
No
Component
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-7 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
16.1.6
Electrical control unit A18 Function description The electric control unit A18 is digitally connected to the relay and fuse board A4. When a button is pressed, a digital signal is generated and the relays or solenoid valves are actuated. The LEDs are arranged on the buttons as shown. In the direction of travel, LED 1 at the front, LED 2 in the middle and LED 3 at the back. When a function is activated, the status is shown by one or more of the LEDs. Each button has seven function (modes), which can be set as required. The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each machine: “Operating the control units”.
Setting the button functions The mode can be set independently for the buttons/outputs 2 to 6. Electrical control unit A18
Activating the mode setting To go to the mode setting function, the following conditions must be met: – The three buttons 2, 4 and 6 must be simultaneously pressed. – The ignition (terminal 15) must be turned on and the three buttons 2, 4 and 6 pressed for at least 5 seconds. After mode setting is activated, the LEDs in the assigned buttons should indicate the modes currently used. When the keypad is in mode setting mode, all outputs are deactivated (and remain so until normal mode is restored). The following standard settings are shown (without options): Mode
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
1
4 - cannot be changed
ON
OFF
OFF
2
4
ON
OFF
OFF
3
5
ON
OFF
ON
4
4
ON
OFF
OFF
5
3
OFF
ON
ON
6
1
OFF
OFF
ON LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Button
16.1-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
The following settings are possible: Mode
Description
Function available with terminal 30
Action when terminal 15 is turned off
Action when terminal 15 is turned on
1
Switches the output OFF when the ignition is turned off, always OFF when the ignition is turned on
NO
OFF
OFF
2
Switches the output OFF when the ignition is turned off, always ON when the ignition is turned on
NO
OFF
ON
3
Act as normal switch to terminal 15
NO
OFF
Restore state when terminal 15 is turned off
4
Act as latching switch to terminal 30
YES
5
Switches output OFF when ignition is turned off, function available with terminal 30, retains terminal 30 status when ignition is turned on
YES
OFF
No reaction (terminal 30 state remains)
6
Switches output OFF when ignition is turned off, function available with terminal 30, always ON ignition is turned on
YES
OFF
ON
7
Switches output OFF when ignition is turned off, function available with terminal 30, restores switch-off state when ignition is turned on
YES
OFF
Restore state when terminal 15 is turned off
No reaction (terminal No reaction (terminal 15 state remains) 30 state remains)
Press the button to switch the current mode (increase number by one, return to lowest number after highest). The LEDs immediately indicate the altered mode. After a button is pressed to change the mode, the new configuration is immediately stored in the EEPROM. If no button is pressed within 30 seconds or terminal 15 is switched off, the keypad returns to normal mode.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The settings are indicated as follows:
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Mode
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
1
OFF
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
OFF
3
OFF
ON
ON
4
ON
OFF
OFF
5
ON
OFF
ON
6
ON
ON
OFF
7
ON
ON
ON
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-9 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment Connector A18/X1
Deutsch / 12-pin male (electrical function control) 1 +24 V power supply (terminal 15) - F71 2 Earth 3 CAN_High 1 (not used) 4 CAN_Low 1 (not used) 5 +24 V power supply (terminal 30) - F07 6 Digital input (flashing frequency)
Connector A18/X2
7 8 9 10 11
CAN_High 2 (not used) CAN_Low 2 (not used) 120 Ω terminating resistor Switching output (hazard lights) Switching output (flashing beacon) 12 Switching output (windscreen wipers)
Deutsch / 6-pin male (electrical function control) 4 Switching output (low beam) 5 Switching output (front working floodlight) 6 Switching output (rear working floodlight)
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1 Switching output (rear washer pump) 2 Switching output (heated rear window/mirror) 3 Switching output (parking light)
16.1-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Instrument panel
16.1.7
LIEBHERR control lever The LIEBHERR control lever (LH control lever) contains the switch 5 for preselecting the travel direction, the switch 2 for the kick-down function and the buttons 3 and 4 for additional functions. The LH control lever also controls the movements of the working attachment via the lift and tilt cylinders. It is connected to the main electronics (master) via input module 1 and input module 2.
Design
Control lever with switch 1 LH control lever 2 Kick-down button 3 Additional equipment button
4 Additional equipment button 5 Travel direction switch
Function description Basic function When the electrical system is switched on, the automatic travel range A1-3 is selected and the travel drive is set to neutral N. Both are indicated by the LC display (H34) and the symbol field N (H32). The travel direction switch 5 must be moved to neutral N after the parking brake is released before a travel direction can be preselected.
Switching travel direction You can switch travel direction using the button 5 on the LH control lever. LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The solenoid valves for forward and reverse travel direction can only be activated after the parking brake is released. The travel direction is shifted to neutral by closing the parking brake or shifting the travel direction switch to neutral N (middle position).
Kick-down shifting Briefly touch the Up button 2 to trigger the command to shift to 1st gear. The gear can shift up 10 seconds after the kick-down button is released.
Additional function buttons (optional) If an option is installed or retrofitted, the buttons 3 and 4 can be used to operate it.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-11 o f 1 2
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment Connector S2
12-pin Deutsch 7 Kick-down switching signal 8 Kick-down power supply (+) F9 9 Additional equipment power supply (+) F9 10 Additional equipment switching signal 11 Additional equipment power supply (+) F9 12 Additional equipment switching signal
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1 Power supply (+) F15 2 Reverse travel direction constant signal 3 Reverse travel direction switching signal 4 Forward travel direction switching signal 5 Forward travel direction constant signal 6 Earth
16.1-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
16.2 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning Technical data See section 2.1
The driver's cab is equipped with a hot water heater and an air conditioning system. Optionally, automatic air conditioning is available. The intake air is filtered through three serviceable dry filter cartridges and directed to the adjustable air flow nozzles in the cab through the heating/air conditioning unit.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Design
Heater/air conditioner 1 2 3 4 5
Fresh air filter service cover Heater/air conditioner covering Fresh air filter (pre-filter) Fresh air intake slots Fresh air filter (fine filter)
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 7 8 9
Heating/air conditioning unit Driver's cab Recirculation filter Circulated air filter cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.2-1 o f 4
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
16.2.1
Heating/air conditioning unit The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of the cab.
Design
1 Servo motor for footwell nozzles 2 Servo motor for middle nozzles 3 Servo motor for windscreen/head area nozzles 4 Flap control housing 5 Heat exchanger 6 Air-conditioning evaporator
16.2-2 o f 4
7 Heating/air conditioning blower 8 Heating/air conditioning control electronics (A21) 9 Fresh/recirculated air flap 10 Fresh/recirculated air flap servo motor 11 Water valve servo motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12 Water valve 13 Head area ventilation connection 14 Footwell ventilation connection 15 Middle ventilation connection 16 Front and side window ventilation connection
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Heating/air conditioning unit layout
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
Function description How the heater works The heating and air conditioning control electronics (A21) are connected via CAN bus to the heating/air conditioning control unit. The heat exchanger is supplied with hot water from the engine cooling system. It is regulated using an electrically controlled water valve. The water valve controls the heating power. The intake air can be controlled using the fresh/recirculated air flap. The airflow is regulated using the various blower speed levels on the heating/ air conditioning system. When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the speed levels are automatically controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
Flap control The driver can set the flaps manually as required, using the heating/air conditioning control unit. When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the flaps are automatically controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
16.2.2
Blower The blower is part of the heating and ventilation unit.
Design The blower is a 6-speed radial fan for ventilation, heating and air conditioning in the cab.
Function description Basic function The blower sucks air (axial intake) 4 through the fresh/recirculated air duct and blows it out of the radial outlet 5 to the evaporator and through the heat exchanger. The air flow is regulated by changing the blower speed. LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
It is operated and regulated using the air conditioning control unit. At level 0 the blower is switched off. Level 6 is maximum air flow.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.2-3 o f 4
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
16.2-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Air conditioning system
16.3 Air conditioning system Technical data See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Components of the air conditioning system 1 Expansion valve 2 Heat exchanger in the heating/air conditioning unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
3 Compressor (with magnetic coupling Y22) 4 Condenser
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Pressure switch B27 6 Dryer collector unit
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-1 o f 1 0
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Air conditioning system
Function description Basic cooling function
Diagram of cooling circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Air conditioning compressor Magnetic coupling Condenser Fan Pressure switch Dryer collector unit Sight glass
8 Heater/air conditioning control electronics 9 Temperature sensors 10 Condensation tray 11 Evaporator 12 Blower 13 Expansion valve
a b c d
Liquid refrigerant, high pressure Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, high pressure Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, low pressure Gaseous refrigerant, low pressure
The air conditioning compressor 1 draws in the refrigerant in gas form and increases its energy level (pressure and thermal energy).
The cooled refrigerant liquefies. This change of state further reduces the energy in it. The refrigerant, which still has bubbles in it, passes into the dryer collector unit 6, where it is filtered and dried, and then, with the bubbles removed, through the rising pipe to the expansion valve 13 on the evaporator. The liquid, pressurised refrigerant is sprayed through the expansion valve 13 into the depressurised evaporator 11.
16.3-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The heat thus generated is transferred to the condenser 3. The heat dissipation lowers the energy potential.
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Air conditioning system
This allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion reduces the pressure energy in the refrigerant and very quickly cools the evaporator. The evaporator 11 is exposed to hot air from the cab and transfers the heat to the refrigerant. This thermal exchange cools the cab air and heats the refrigerant. The heated refrigerant evaporates and turns to gas. This change of state requires additional energy from the (warm) evaporator, which further reduces the temperature.
Temperature regulation The temperature is regulated by the cyclical activation and deactivation of the magnetic coupling 2 of the air conditioning compressor during operation, or by mixing hot air from the heater, as for example in defrost mode. The frequency of switching is controlled by the temperature sensors in the evaporator and the program in the heating/air conditioning control electronics (see the technical data). The temperature is also regulated at the expansion valve. The pressure and temperature are recorded at the evaporator outlet and the injection quantity is precisely metered. These monitoring elements prevent the evaporator from icing up.
Defrost mode
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
When the windows are misted up, the cab air must be dried. This is done by operating the air conditioning and the heater at the same time. The cab air can absorb more moisture when it is heated. The air flowing past the cool evaporator releases the moisture in the form of condensation.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-3 o f 1 0
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Air conditioning system
16.3.1
Air conditioning compressor Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Sectional view of the compressor 1 2 3 4
Intake connection Discharge connection Oil filler plug Magnetic coupling
5 6 7 8
Swash plate Piston Outlet valve Inlet valve
The air conditioning compressor with its magnetic coupling 4 is attached to the engine and driven by a V-ribbed belt. The compressor is equipped with an axial piston rotary group 6, a swash plate 5 and flap valves.
Basic function The refrigerant compressor acts as a pump which draws in the gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator, compresses it and pumps it to the condenser. It is bidirectional, which means that the refrigerant compressor can be used for both directions of rotation.
16.3-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Function description
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Air conditioning system
Functions of the compressor oil There are the main functions of the compressor oil: – Reducing friction, wear and noise – Hydrostatic transmission of force to the various components of the air conditioning compressor – Dissipating heat – Increasing density – Lubricating the drive components (piston, shaft seal, bearing)
Magnetic coupling The pulley runs freely on the compressor shaft and is permanently driven by the V-ribbed belt. The power transmission between the pulley and the compressor shaft is controlled by a magnetic coupling 4. This is activated by the temperature switch in the evaporator or the pressure switch on the dryer collector unit. By periodic activation of the compressor, the evaporator is kept at a temperature of between +1 °C (uncoupling) and +4 °C (coupling), this preventing the air conditioning unit from icing up. If the pressure rises above 24 bar or below 2 bar on the pressure side of the compressor, it is also uncoupled.
16.3.2
Condenser Technical data See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The condenser is part of the cooling system.
Condenser with connections 1 Intake 2 Outlet 3 Retaining frame
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Condenser 5 Cleaning access cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-5 o f 1 0
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Air conditioning system
Function description Basic function The forced ventilation condenser directs the heat output of the refrigeration circuit to the ambient air and in the process condenses the gaseous refrigerant. When the air conditioning system is switched on, the cooling system fan speed is automatically increased.
16.3.3
Dryer collector unit Technical data See section 2.1
Design The dryer collector unit is located under the left cab access. It is connected to the outlet of the condenser and the intake of the evaporator.
Cross section of the dryer filter 3 Filter element 4 Dryer granules
Function description Basic function The refrigerant, which is cooled but still has bubbles in it, passes from the condenser to the dryer collector unit. The circulation pressure forces the refrigerant inside through the filter element 3 and the dryer granules 4. The bubbles are removed from the refrigerant and it passes through the rising pipe 2 to an outlet port connected by a hose to the expansion valve of the evaporator.
16.3-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
1 Sight glass with indicator beads 2 Rising pipe
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Air conditioning system
Sight glass
Sight glass 1 White filling level bead
2 Orange moisture indicator bead
The sight glass is located in the upper third of the dryer collector unit. The sight glass has the following purposes: – Checking when filling the system – Checking the refrigerant level during operation – Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant – Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit Sight glass functions
Checking when filling the system – When completely filling the system, it is necessary to top up with gaseous refrigerant on the intake side when the system is switched on. When doing this, watch the level indicator bead 1 in the sight glass. As soon as it floats on the refrigerant to the top of the sight glass, stop adding refrigerant. Checking the refrigerant level during operation – Once the system has been running for about five minutes (to allow the refrigerant to distribute), the white level indicator bead should be near the top of the sight glass. As the engine speed increases, the level rises slightly. The refrigerant should flow through the sight glass with no visible bubbles during operation. If gas bubbles appear, it is normally due to insufficient refrigerant in the system. Sometimes the refrigerant is not sufficiently condensed due to insufficient heat extraction at the condenser (contamination), which can result in bubbles in the sight glass. Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant – There is a small orange indicator bead 2 in the sight glass. If it turns light grey, there is too much moisture in the system.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
In this case the system must be completely drained and evacuated. The oil in the compressor must also be replaced. The entire dryer collector unit must be replaced too. Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit – A sudden change of colour in the sight glass indicates a problem in the system. A change in colour is normally caused by overheating in the refrigerant circuit. This is normally due to internal or external contamination.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-7 o f 1 0
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
Air conditioning system
16.3.4
Pressure switch (ID 10014164)
Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Dryer 1 Pressure switch
2 Dryer collector unit
The pressure switch is attached to the dryer collector unit in the air conditioning circuit.
Function description Basic function The pressure switch monitors the pressure in the cooling circuit. It deactivates the magnetic coupling and therefore the compressor if the pressure is too low or too high. This prevents the compressor from running dry if there is too little refrigerant (insufficient pressure).
Excess pressure may be caused by: – Too much refrigerant in the circuit – Excess temperature due to a dirty condenser or defective fan control – The filter in the dryer collector unit may be very dirty – The expansion valve may be iced up (too much moisture in the refrigerant) or dirty (blocked).
16.3-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Deactivation is also necessary when the pressure is too high. This prevents damage to components in the system.
Service Manual
Cab, heating, air conditioning Air conditioning system
16.3.5
Evaporator Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Evaporator with expansion valve 1 Hose fitting holder 2 Expansion valve
3 Air conditioning system sealing rings 4 Evaporator
The evaporator is fitted in the heater/air conditioner and is part of the refrigerant circuit. The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of the cab.
Function description Basic function The evaporator is a heat exchanger which cools the cab air.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The pressurised refrigerant, which is cooled and liquefied by the condenser, is sprayed through the expansion valve 2 into the evaporator 4, where there is a vacuum. The drop in pressure allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion causes a great drop in the thermal energy. The refrigerant is cooled. The thermal energy taken from the cab air via the fins on the evaporator 4 evaporates the refrigerant.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-9 o f 1 0
Cab, heating, air conditioning
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Air conditioning system
16.3-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
17 Lift arms and quick-change device 17.0 Chapter contents 17
Lift arms and quick-change device.................................... 17.1-1 17.1
Lift arms ........................................................................................17.1-1
17.2
Pin bearing....................................................................................17.2-1 Standard bearing ................................................................17.2-1
17.2.2
Bucket bearing....................................................................17.2-2
17.2.3
Removing the pin bearings.................................................17.2-3
17.2.4
Changing the bushings.......................................................17.2-4
17.2.5
Assembling the bucket bearing ..........................................17.2-5 Quick change device (optional) ....................................................17.3-1
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
17.3
17.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Lift arms and quick-change device
17.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Lift arms
17.1 Lift arms Technical data See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the Z lift arms 1 Connecting link 2 Linkage 3 Contact face for linkage
4 Bucket return-to-dig proximity switch 5 Tilt cylinder 6 Bucket arm
7 Lift cylinder 8 Bucket stops 9 Bucket bearing
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The lift arms are fitted on the front section of the machine. The lift arms are designed with Z-bar kinematics. This means that the tilt cylinder, linkage and connecting link form a Z shape. The Z shape can be seen from the right side. Parallel load movement is not guaranteed with lift arms with Zkinematics. Two lift cylinders and a tilt cylinder are attached to the lift arms.
Z kinematics
The lift arms are bolted to the front section via the bucket arm bearings and the cylinder bearings on the base of the cylinder. The bearing points on the lift arms have seals to protect them against dirt and corrosion. The lift cylinders are mounted at the piston rod end on the bucket arm and at the cylinder base end on the front section. The tilt cylinder is mounted at the piston rod end on the linkage and at the cylinder base end on the front section. The mechanical bucket return-to-dig device is mounted on the tilt cylinder.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.1-1 o f 2
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
Lift arm
Function description Basic function Movements of the bucket arm
The lift arms bear and move the attached equipment or implement.
Bucket arm movement The bucket arm is raised or lowered by extending or retracting the lift cylinders. You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics. Movements of the working attachment
Bucket movement The bucket is tilted in or out by extending or retracting the tilt cylinder.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics.
17.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Pin bearing
17.2 Pin bearing 17.2.1
Standard bearing Design The standard bearings on the lift arms have a pin bearing seal. The following section describes the standard bearing sealing on the lift arms.
Main components of the standard bearing 4 Welded threaded bushing 5 Pin fastening screw 6 Pin fixing disc
7 Pin with lug 8 Bearing bushing 9 Radial seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Bucket arm 2 Grease fitting 3 Front section
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-1 o f 8
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
Pin bearing
17.2.2
Bucket bearing Design
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing 4 Welded threaded bushing 5 Pin fastening screw 6 Pin fixing disc
7 Pin with lug 8 Bearing bushing 9 Special radial seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Bucket arm 2 Grease fitting 3 Bucket bearing plate
17.2-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Pin bearing
Function description Basic function The bucket base and bushings are protected from corrosive or abrasive material by a special radial sealing ring. If this material penetrates the bearing it can increase wear and enlarge the play. If the bearing is loose, the friction will cause increased wear despite lubrication. The radial seal is installed on both sides of the bushing between the bucket arm and bearing plates. The radial seal is held in place by the bearing pin. The steel ring is positioned parallel to the contact faces of the bucket arm and bearing plate and prevents the lip seal ring from being damaged by the forces acting on the bucket bearing. Axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket arm and the bearing plate ensures that the bearing moves smoothly and is perfectly sealed.
17.2.3
Removing the pin bearings Design
Extractor hammer
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
There are many ways to remove a pin. One tried-and-tested method is to use the extractor hammer shown above. The tool is easy to make and the pin is not damaged when removed. The extractor hammer consists of a round rod with an M36 thread on both ends, two machined faces for an open-ended wrench, the hammer head and two nuts. The first nut has a flange to prevent damage to the nuts.
Procedure • Put the machine in maintenance position 1. • Screw the round rod into the extractor thread of the pin. • Push the hammer onto the rod and tighten the nuts. • Remove the retaining screw. • Knock out the pin.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-3 o f 8
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
Pin bearing
17.2.4 Welding processes
Changing the bushings This section describes how to change the bushings on the bucket bearing. The method for other bearings is similar.
Procedure • Put the machine in maintenance position 1. • Remove the pin as described in 17.2.3. • Start the machine and drive in reverse. • Drive the machine to a suitable place for repairs. • Slightly raise the lift arms and securely support them. • Switch off the engine and pull out the key. • Turn off the battery main switch. To make it easier to remove the steel bucket bushings, we recommend welding several lengthways seams around the bushing. The advantage of this is that when the bushing cools down it becomes smaller in diameter and thus easier to push out of the hole. • Perform the welding in accordance with the safety instructions for welding on the machine (see the operating manual). • Attach the earth lead of the welding equipment as close as possible to the welding position. • Weld on the inside of the bushing. Leave a distance of 10 mm between the ends of the bushing and the welds (see illustration).
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
• Let the bushing cool down after welding.
17.2-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Pin bearing
Pushing out the bushing using the extraction device
You can push out all the bushings on the lift arms using the appropriate pushing tool. Position a steel washer in the bushing, flush and slightly below centre. Use a threaded rod and a hydraulic ram to push the bushing out of the hole.
Procedure • Assemble the hydraulic ram 1, the pusher 2, the threaded rod 3 and the pushing washer 6 (illustrated).
Pushing tool • Fix the threaded rod with a nut. • Carefully push the bushing out of the hole. There are two ways to fit a new bushing: – Using a press – By shrinking it using liquid nitrogen Caution Be very careful when handling liquid nitrogen. If using liquid nitrogen, carefully follow the safety instructions for handling it. ! Read and follow the safety instructions.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
17.2.5
Assembling the bucket bearing Make sure that: – The holes in the bucket are lined up with the holes in the arm – All parts to be assembled are clean
Procedure • Prepare the pin bearing seal.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-5 o f 8
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
Pin bearing
Main components of the pin bearing seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Steel ring 4 Mounting screw 2 Lip seal ring 5 O-ring 3 Protection and installation ring Mz Assembly condition • Screw in the mounting screw 4. This moves the protection and installation ring 3. • Using a screwdriver, push the lip seal ring 2 (see illustration Mz) into the grooves of the protection and installation ring 3. • Grease the O-ring 5 well.
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing 1 Bucket arm 2 Bucket bearing plates
17.2-6 o f 8
3 Pin with lug 4 Retaining pin with washer
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5 Radial sealing rings
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Pin bearing
• Grease the pins, bushings and holes. • Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the hole. • Push the pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the bucket arm and the bucket bearing plate. • Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the bucket arm. • Push the second pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the bucket arm and the bucket bearing plate. • Drive the pin completely through the bearing hole. • Remove the mounting screws from the sealing rings and free the sealing lips by moving the mounting rings. • Push the bucket to the left or right using a crowbar. • Check that the axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket arm and bucket bearing plate is 3.2 mm. • Secure the pin with the pin fixing screw 2 and washer 1.
Pin fastening
The illustration shows gaps between the pin lug 4 and the disc 1, and between the pin lug and the bushing 3. This allows the pin to move slightly, preventing it from jamming in the fixed bearing (steel to steel).
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Caution Dirt, water and other corrosive substances may wear or corrode the bearing pin, surfaces or hole. Wear and corrosion will irreparably damage the bearing. ! Before you install the pin bearing seal, check the maximum axial clearance!
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-7 o f 8
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Pin bearing
17.2-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Lift arms and quick-change device Quick change device (optional)
17.3 Quick change device (optional) Technical data See section 2.1 The quick-change device is fitted to the lift arms of the machine. It is used for quickly changing the various attachments on the lift arms. The different versions are operated differently. You can find detailed operating instructions in the operating manual.
Design
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Main components of the quick-change device 1 Hydraulic quick-change device 2 Grease fitting 3 Left locking pin
4 Hydraulic lines 5 Hydraulic cylinder 6 Right locking pin
7 Mechanical indicator 8 Cover
The quick change device also has brackets for attaching and holding the working attachment. The hydraulic lines 4 lead to the hydraulic cylinder 5 via bulkhead fittings. The hydraulic cylinder and the locking pins are fitted in a bracket and protected from dust and damage by a cover 8.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.3-1 o f 2
Lift arms and quick-change device
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Quick change device (optional)
17.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
18 Equipment and accessories 18.0 Chapter contents 18
Equipment and accessories .............................................. 18.0-1 18.1
Loading bucket .............................................................................18.1-1
18.2
Forklift ...........................................................................................18.2-1
18.3
Connection sizes – L550 / L556 ...................................................18.3-1 18.3.1
Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.3-2
18.3.2
Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.3-3
18.3.3
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.3-4
18.4
Connection sizes – L566 / L576 / L580 ........................................18.4-1 Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.4-2
18.4.2
Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.4-3
18.4.3
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.4-4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Equipment and accessories
18.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Bucket
18.1 Loading bucket Technical data See section 2.1 The loading bucket is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to the lift arms. The bucket is normally fitted directly to the lift arms. If the lift arms are fitted with an optional quick change device, the bucket is attached to that. The following section describes the loading bucket with teeth.
Design The bottom cutting edge varies according to the application. The various designs include: – Welded tooth holder with plug-in teeth – Four-section, reversible undercut blade
Bucket with teeth 1 Tooth 2 Tooth holder
3 Bottom cutting edge 4 Locking pin
The tooth 1 is plugged into the holder 2 and secured with a crosswise locking pin 4.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
The tooth holder 2 is welded to the bottom cutting edge 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.1-1 o f 2
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Bucket
18.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Forklift
18.2 Forklift Technical data See section 2.1 The forklift is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to the lift arms. The forklift is mounted either directly on the lift arms or onto the optional quick change device. The following section describes the forklift with adjustable prongs.
Design The forklift consists of the fork carrier and adjustable fork prongs.
Forklift 1 Fork carrier
2 Fork prongs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
The fork prongs 2 are attached to the fork carrier 1 and are secured against slipping with the fork lock on the upper fork hook.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.2-1 o f 2
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Forklift
18.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Connection sizes
18.3 Connection sizes – L550 / L556 General information: The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied by Liebherr. This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr. Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with the machines. This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the best manner. Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage caused by equipment which it does not supply. When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474 is maintained. Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see the type plate) may not be exceeded.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.3-1 o f 4
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
Connection sizes
Buckets - direct attachment
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
18.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.1
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Connection sizes
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.2
Buckets - quick-change device
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.3-3 o f 4
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
Connection sizes
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
18.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.3
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Attachment handbook
18.4 Connection sizes – L566 / L576 / L580 General information: The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied by Liebherr. This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr. Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with the machines. This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the best manner. Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage caused by equipment which it does not supply. When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474 is maintained. Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see the type plate) may not be exceeded.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.4-1 o f 4
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
Cab access
Buckets - direct attachment
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
18.4-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.1
Service Manual
Equipment and accessories Attachment handbook
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.2
Buckets - quick-change device
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.4-3 o f 4
Equipment and accessories
Service Manual
Cab access
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law. All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
18.4-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.3
19 Service Codes, Diagnose Chapter contents 19
Service Codes, Diagnose ................................................... 19.0-1 19.0
Malfunctions...................................................................................19.0-1 Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13) .................19.0-1
19.0.2
Audible and visual warning signals.......................................19.0-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
19.0.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-1 o f 2
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
19.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
19.0 Malfunctions Warning and error messages – Various faults are indicated by the corresponding symbol fields (visually) or by display instruments on the instrument panel. – Some warning functions are accompanied by audible warning signals. Finding and eliminating errors and malfunctions – Faults can often be traced back to incorrect operation or servicing of the machine. Therefore, carefully read the appropriate section of the operating manual each time a fault occurs. – Analyse the cause of the fault and correct it immediately.
19.0.1
Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13) The main electronics (master) monitor many of the machine’s functions. It monitors for short circuits, cable rupture, external voltage and incorrect input and output signals. In addition, the main electronics (master) continuously check the program sequence and communication with the display unit.
Display unit Service code display
STOP indicator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
If a fault occurs while you are setting up or operating the machine, it is shown on the display unit and stored in the error memory.
Error indicator
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-1 o f 2
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Service code display The service codes are classed in the following groups: – CRITICAL: This is a fault which only concerns the main electronics (master). – ERROR: This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring. – ERROR Motor This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring. – WARNING: This is information on the condition of the power supply, CAN bus or diesel engine. The following must be taken into account: – The service codes “CRITICAL” and “ERROR” are shown in segment field 1 of the display unit and stored in the service code memory. – The service codes “ERROR Motor” and “WARNING” are not shown in the display unit but are stored in the service code memory. – A warning tone accompanies all service codes (CRITICAL and ERROR)
Effects of a fault Every malfunction has a defined effect. This is specified in the “Effect” column of the service code table. If errors occur which can damage the machine, the entire machine is shut down. Neutral travel direction is automatically selected and the machine coasts to a halt. Make a note of the service code, as it may disappear from the segment field of the display unit when the ignition is switched off. Analyse and rectify the fault.
List of abbreviations LFD LH-ECU PWM RAM REF sec t
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Ubat V
Liebherr ride control system Liebherr engine control unit (A700D) Pulse width modulated outputs (proportional solenoid) Memory Reference (comparison) Seconds Fault time; how long a fault must be active to trigger a service code Battery power supply (terminal 30) Volts
19.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C1002 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C1003 has been shut down due to a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C1004 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C1005 has been shut down due to a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C100E has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C1014 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C101C has been shut down due to a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C101F has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1025 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1033 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C103E has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104A has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104B has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104C has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104D has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104E has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C104F has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1050 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-3 o f 3
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1051 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1052 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1053 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1054 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1055 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1056 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1057 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1058 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1059 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C105A has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C105C has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C105E has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C105F has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1060 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1061 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1063 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1064 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1065 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1066 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error.
19.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Malfunctions
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C106D has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C106E has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1070 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1071 has been shut down due to a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1072 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1073 has been shut down due to Invalid boot card (CF1) the card again a critical error. The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C1074 has been shut down due to the card again a critical error. Invalid boot card (CF1) The entire control system Check that the CAN modules and C2002 has been shut down due to software board have the right ID Invalid CAN module type a critical error. numbers Two CAN modules with the same module number but different serial numbers have been detected on a C200E The entire control system has been shut down due to CAN bus; CAN module production a critical error. Replace the CAN module error Check the power supply to the The entire control system CAN module F35, check the C200F has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has not CAN wiring; then replace the a critical error. reported on the CAN bus CAN module The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2010 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Check the CAN bus connection, C2011 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the a critical error. have reported on the CAN bus modules The entire control system Check the CAN bus connection, C2012 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the have reported on the CAN bus a critical error. modules The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2014 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C2015 has been shut down due to a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2017 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2019 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C201A has been shut down due to a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-5 o f 5
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C202A has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Check that the CAN modules and C202B has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID bus from an undefined CAN module numbers a critical error. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C202C has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. Check the power supply to the The entire control system CAN modules F24, F38, F43, C202D has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has failed F71, check the CAN wiring; then a critical error. on the CAN bus replace the CAN module The entire control system Check that the CAN modules and C2033 has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID bus from an undefined CAN module numbers a critical error. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2034 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2039 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C203D has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. System fault contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Check the CAN bus connection, C203E has been shut down due to All the modules on a CAN line have check the power supply to the failed during operation. a critical error. modules The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2040 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, System fault a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system An attempt was made to reactivate a C2043 has been shut down due to CAN module during a timeout; this is a critical error. not permitted Turn the ignition off and on again Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C205A has been shut down due to A critical error in a CAN module replace the CAN module a critical error. caused the system to shut down. according to the error stack. Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C205C has been shut down due to A critical error in a CAN module replace the CAN module a critical error. caused the system to shut down. according to the error stack. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C205D has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C205E has been shut down due to a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2062 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. a critical error. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2063 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C2064 has been shut down due to a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer.
19.0-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Malfunctions
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Copy software (see label) onto C2065 has been shut down due to A CAN download file could not be found on the boot card. the card again a critical error. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C2067 has been shut down due to a critical error. Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C2069 has been shut down due to again; if the problem persists, Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer. a critical error. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3003 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C3004 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3005 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C3009 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system replace the main electronics a critical error. error (master). The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C300A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C300B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system replace the main electronics a critical error. error (master). The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3015 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C3016 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3017 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C3018 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3022 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C3023 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system replace the main electronics a critical error. error (master). Turn the ignition off and on The entire control system again; if the problem persists, C3024 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system replace the main electronics a critical error. error (master). The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C3028 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-7 o f 7
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
CA024
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Turn the ignition off and on Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum memory. is automatically corrected.
CA029
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Turn the ignition off and on Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum memory. is automatically corrected.
CA02A
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Turn the ignition off and on Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum memory. is automatically corrected.
CA02B
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Turn the ignition off and on Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum memory. is automatically corrected.
CA02C
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Turn the ignition off and on Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum memory. is automatically corrected.
19.0-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C3029 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C302A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C302B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C302C has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, C302D has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on C6021 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, CA002 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on CA005 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on CA008 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, CA009 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on CA00A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, error a critical error. contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on CA00B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system again; if the problem persists, a critical error. error contact the manufacturer. The entire control system Turn the ignition off and on again; the correction file is CA01E has been shut down due to Invalid correction file found on the boot card a critical error. generated correctly.
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
CRITICAL This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code CA047
CA048
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error. The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
Invalid correction check sum Invalid retain value check sum
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
A critical error in a CAN module caused the system to shut down.
C205C
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error.
A critical error in a CAN module caused the system to shut down.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
C205A
Turn the ignition off and on again; the correction check sum is automatically corrected. Turn the ignition off and on again; the retain variable check sum is automatically corrected. Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the CAN module according to the error stack. Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the CAN module according to the error stack.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-9 o f 9
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E2003
E2013
E2016
E2017
E2018 E201A
E201B
E201C E201D E201E
E201F E2020
Emergency steering: Emergency steering pump pressure switch check closed without check
No emergency steering function The output of the travel pump is reduced Brake system accumulator pressure symbol field H19 lights up, after 2 minutes warning beep sounds constantly, travel direction cannot be selected All three LEDs on the control unit switch light up, central lubrication system does not work
Check emergency steering pressure switch B3 and wiring Check emergency steering pressure switch B3 and wiring Check emergency steering pressure switch B3a and wiring
Hydraulic oil temperature: temperature above 95 °C
Check emergency steering pressure switch B3a and wiring Clean cooling system, check fan pressure (fan speed), hydraulic oil temperature switch B8 (at 20 °C - 1112 Ω)
Brake accumulator pressure: pressure too low
Check accumulator pressure switch B19 (switching point 120 bar), wiring, accumulator charge valve, gear pump
Central lubrication system: electrical fault at output (cable rupture) of grease line fault Gyrator steering (2 in 1 steering): Signal at output does not correspond to the activation (fault current)
Gyrator steering (2-in-1) deactivated Enabled options have no Incorrect options enabled function Variable displacement motor 1 (YEP1), variable displacement motor 2 (YEP2), forward travel direction (Y2), reverse travel Output module 1 / bank 4: no power direction (Y3) have no function supply. Wiring or fuse defective No travel range function
Remedy
Check distributor, grease lines and lubrication points
Check the wiring Enable correct options
Check fuse F59 or wiring
Output module 1 / bank 3: no power supply. Wiring or fuse defective
Check fuse F60 or wiring
Output module 2 / bank 4: no power supply. Wiring or fuse defective
Check fuse F51 or wiring
No joystick gyrator steering (2-in-1) function Travel direction and additional equipment do not work (driving only possible at reduced speed) Parking brake, working hydraulics lockout, bucket return-to-dig and lift kick-out do not work
Output module 2 / bank 3: no power supply. Wiring or fuse defective
Check fuse F52 or wiring
Output module 1 / bank 1: no power supply. Wiring or fuse defective
Check fuse F47 or wiring
Float position and cooling system fan do not work
Output module 1 / bank 2: no power supply. Wiring or fuse defective
Check fuse F48 or wiring
19.0-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause code Emergency steering pressure switch E2000 No emergency steering is closed even though the engine is function not running Emergency steering pressure switch E2001 No emergency steering does not switch after the engine function starts Emergency steering: Check failed (B3a emergency steering pump E2002 No emergency steering check pressure switch did not function switch)
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause code Emergency steering, fan E2022 reversal, ride control and Output module 2 / bank 2: no power float position do not work supply. Wiring or fuse defective Output module 1: return voltage measured at an output (bank 3) E2023 although it is not activated - wiring or No travel range function module 1 defective E2024 No travel direction function
Check fuse F56 or wiring
Output module 1, check wiring to gearbox Y6.1, Y6.2, Y6.3, YMo1 or check output module 1 Output module 1, check wiring to Output module 1: return voltage variable displacement pump Y2, measured at control output (bank 4) Y3 or wiring to variable although it is not activated - wiring or displacement motors YEP1, module 1 defective YEP2 or output module 1 Output module 2, check wiring to Output module 2: return voltage variable displacement pump Y2a, measured at an output (bank 3) Y3a or wiring to additional although it is not activated - wiring or equipment Y11, Y12 or output module 2 defective module 2
E2025
No travel direction and additional equipment function
E2026
No joystick gyrator steering (2-in-1) function
Output module 1, check wiring to module 2 or output module 1
E2048
The ride control system does not work
Enable correct option Joystick steering pressure switch B201; check wiring or input module 3 Ride control: set activation and deactivation speeds correctly (SCULI)
E2049
Automatic lighting shutdown Faulty activation of power supply does not work terminal 15 (optional) - fault current
Check output module 3, wiring or relay K246
E204A
Functions activated via terminal 15 do not work
Faulty activation of power supply terminal 15 (optional) - interruption
Check output module 3, wiring or relay K246
E204B
All three LEDs on the control unit switch light up STOP symbol field H24 flashes, no emergency steering function available STOP symbol field H8 flashes, no emergency steering function available Brake system accumulator pressure symbol field H19 lights up, condition of the service brake cannot be detected
Central lubrication system: filling level low
E2046 E2047
E3000 E3001 LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
E3002
E3003 E3004 E3005
Output module 1: fault current/short circuit at output 33 (bank 4,) - wiring or module 2 defective Back-up alarm: options incorrectly No back-up alarm function enabled, more than one option available enabled per output Joystick steering: pressure switch check failed; fault in pressure switch No joystick steering function or wiring Ride control: speed limits incorrectly set
Emergency steering pump check pressure switch: shorted to earth Emergency steering pump pressure switch: shorted to earth
Brake accumulator pressure switch: shorted to earth
No float position available
Bucket float position pressure switch: shorted to earth
None
Inching angle sensor: channel 1 over current >20 am
None
Inching angle sensor: channel 1 undercurrent 20 am Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 1 undercurrent 20 am
None
Inching angle sensor: channel 2 undercurrent 20 am
None
Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 2 undercurrent (20 am module 2 Joystick steering signal encoder Joystick steering signal encoder: left B202; check wiring or input signal undercurrent 20 am module 3 Joystick steering signal encoder Joystick steering signal encoder: B202; check wiring or input right signal undercurrent 2500 rpm
E600C
Calculation error depends on the fault
Always given for an additional service code
E600D E600E E600F
Engine shuts down Engine not running smoothly Engine shuts down
E6010 Engine has reduced power E6011 E6012 E6016
E6017
EA005 EA006 EA007
Engine has reduced power
Check coolant level, check coolant level sensor B13, check power supply F36 Brake machine while driving downhill Depends on the fault. - (see additional code in the error memory)
Emergency engine shutdown: speed sensors 1 and 2 defective Check speed sensor B711, B712 Faulty injector (pump element Check injector (pump element solenoid) solenoid), wiring Check engine control unit, check Engine electronics detected internal wiring, check power supply F36 error Power reduction can be triggered by: coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature, altitude Engine power reduction active (atmospheric pressure) Engine altitude power reduction active (from 2250 m above sea level) None Depends on the fault. - (see Always given for an additional additional code in the error service code memory)
Calculation error depends on the fault Charge control symbol field (H6) lights up, parking brake Alternator not supplying power cannot be released Calculation error, engine module sent internal error code. - This is Calculation error depends shown in the display unit instead of on the fault the engine service code CAN bus: display unit timeout , hardware defective, fault in CAN No display unit function wiring CAN bus: air conditioning controller Air conditioning controller timeout, hardware defective, fault in does not work CAN wiring CAN bus: output module 3 timeout, Output module 3 does not hardware defective, error in CAN work wiring
19.0-22 o f 2 2
Drain water from fuel pre-filter, check pre-filter water detector B710 Check oil level, engine oil pressure (2 bar at 1000 rpm, 3 bar at 2100 rpm), pressure relief valve, engine oil pressure sensor B701, wiring Replace/clean air filter, check air filter contamination vacuum switch B4, wiring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Check alternator G3 or wiring Depends on the fault. - (see additional code in the error memory) Check display unit A13 power supply F11 or CAN wiring Check air conditioning controller A21 power supply F19, F19a or CAN wiring Check output module 3 (A17c) or CAN wiring
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E6006
Remedy
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause code CAN bus: input module 3 timeout, EA008 Input module 3 does not hardware defective, error in CAN work wiring CAN bus: air conditioning control EA010 Air conditioning control unit unit timeout, hardware defective, does not work fault in CAN wiring CAN bus: option control unit timeout, EA011 Option control unit does not hardware defective, fault in CAN work wiring EA020
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA021
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA023
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA024
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA025
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA026
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA027
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA028
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA029
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA02A
Calculation error depends on the fault
EA02B
Calculation error depending on the fault
EA02C
Calculation error depending on the fault
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Remedy Check input module 3 (A16c) or CAN wiring Check air conditioning control unit A22 power supply F9or CAN wiring
Check option control unit A19 or CAN wiring Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, option input additional code in the error module 1 sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, option output additional code in the error module 1 sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, option keypad additional code in the error module sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, main keypad additional code in the error module sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, display unit additional code in the error module sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, output module 2 additional code in the error sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, output module 1 additional code in the error sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, input module 2 additional code in the error sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, input module 1 additional code in the error sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - (see Calculation error, master unit additional code in the error module sent an internal error code memory) Depends on the fault. - Check power soppy F36 (see additional CAN module calculation error code in the error memory) Depends on the fault. - (see additional code in the error General calculation error memory)
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-23 o f 2 3
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4976C
No direct effect
CAN communication was resynchronised CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4976D
No direct effect
CAN communication timeout CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49638
Construction machine CAN timeout Emergency operation: engine when requesting global process running at lower idle speed CAN bus connection problem or master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E49639
Construction machine CAN timeout Emergency operation: engine receiving total output data CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4963A
Construction machine CAN timeout Emergency operation: engine while sending messages running at lower idle speed CAN bus connection problem or master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4963B
Construction machine CAN Emergency operation: engine passive error CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4963C
Construction machine CAN bus off Emergency operation: engine CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4969C
CAN AMET timeout while requesting Emergency operation: engine global process running at lower idle speed CAN bus connection problem or master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4969D
CAN AMET timeout receiving total Emergency operation: engine output data running at lower idle speed CAN bus connection problem or master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4969E
CAN AMET timeout while sending Emergency operation: engine messages CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E4969F
CAN AMET passive error Emergency operation: engine CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E496A0
CAN AMET bus off Emergency operation: engine CAN bus connection problem or running at lower idle speed master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E49764
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN A cannot connect at 125kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49765
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN A cannot connect at 250kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
19.0-24 o f 2 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E49766
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN A cannot connect at 500kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49767
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN A cannot connect at 1MB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49768
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN B cannot connect at 125kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49769
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN B cannot connect at 250kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4976A
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN B cannot connect at 500kB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4976B
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN B cannot connect at 1MB CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
CAN communication – could not detect actual CAN A baud rate
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit Master unit A15 Input module 1 Output module 1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4976E
No direct effect
E4976F
No direct effect
CAN communication – could not detect actual CAN B baud rate
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit Master unit A15 Input module 1 Output module 1
E497C8
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Internal error – stack overflow Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497C9
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Internal error – exception Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497CA
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Internal error – program test Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497CB
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Internal error – RAM test Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497CC
No direct effect
Turn the ignition off and on again; Internal error – error memory overflow if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497CD
No direct effect
Internal error – computing time test
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-25 o f 2 5
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E497CE
The error that occurred cannot be displayed
Internal error – error index too high
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E4982C
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Error accessing EEPROM Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E4982D
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Parameter memory check sum fault Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E4982E
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Invalid parameter memory in EEPROM Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E4982F
No direct effect
ECU page check sum fault Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49830
No direct effect
NMI page check sum fault Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49831
No direct effect
Work data page check sum fault Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49832
No direct effect
Load collective check sum fault Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49833
No direct effect
Load collective structure value has changed Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49834
No direct effect
EEPROM does not have enough space for the load collective Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49835
No direct effect
Permanent data check sum fault
Turn the ignition off and on again; if the problem persists, replace the ECU A700D engine control unit.
E49890
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
Supply voltage too low (33V) Communication only possible with diagnostic tools
Check the on-board circuit (battery, alternator, wiring, connectors)
E49892
Engine shutdown Digital output shorted to supply Communication only possible voltage with diagnostic tools Defective line or component
Check the wiring and ECU A700D engine control unit If the problem cannot be rectified: Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
19.0-26 o f 2 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
E49893
E49894
Engine cannot be started, or engine shut down
E49895
Engine shutdown 12V reference fault: voltage too low Communication only possible (14V) with diagnostic tools Defective line or component
Check the on-board circuit (battery, alternator, wiring, connectors) with reference to PS1
E499BD
Power curve internally restricted
Offset on full-load curve Internal engine control unit error
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E499BF
Injector class 3 is used as a replacement
Incorrect pump code (pump code is wrong on at least one element) Internal engine control unit error
Check and modify pump code
E49B4C
Higher speed is used
Speed recording error Check the ECU A700D wiring to Maximum speed difference between the speed sensor and check the transmission and odometer is too high speed sensor
No direct effect
Insufficient alternator voltage when engine is not running Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Excess alternator voltage when engine is not running Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Insufficient alternator voltage when engine is running Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Excess alternator voltage when engine is running Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Alternator voltage insufficiently different to supply voltage Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E49BB0
E49BB1
E49BB2 LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Check the wiring and ECU A700D engine control unit If the problem cannot be rectified: Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
Error releasing power outputs Engine shutdown Power outputs cannot be activated or All digital outputs switched off deactivated
E49BB3
E49BB4
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
Error on PS1 Engine control unit supply voltage PS1 defective
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the on-board circuit (battery, alternator, wiring, connectors) with reference to PS1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-27 o f 2 7
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E49BB5
No direct effect
Alternator voltage excessively different to supply voltage Defective wiring from engine control unit to alternator, defective alternator or broken V belt
E49ED0
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49ED1
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49ED2
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback value
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49ED7
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49EDB
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault EGR open without activation “Open” status is read even without activation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49EDC
External exhaust gas recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault EGR closed without activation “Closed” status is read even without activation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49ED3
E49ED4
E49ED5
E49ED6
19.0-28 o f 2 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Check the wiring from the ECU A700D engine control unit to the alternator and check the ECU A700D engine control unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback value
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49F3B
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, air flap, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A060
Engine cannot be started
Starter fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, starter, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A061
Engine cannot be started
Starter fault Shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring harness, connectors, starter, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A18C
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E49F34
E49F35
E49F36
E49F37
E49F38
E49F39
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E49F3A
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-29 o f 2 9
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4A18D
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A18E
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback status
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault No voltage in heating element A low level is read despite activation – the external relay has not switched correctly
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A198
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault Voltage in heating element A high level is read despite no activation – the external relay has not switched correctly
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A1F0
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A18F
E4A190
E4A191
E4A192
E4A193
E4A197
19.0-30 o f 3 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4A1F1
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A1F2
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback status
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault No voltage in heating element A low level is read despite activation – the external relay has not switched correctly
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Preglow and afterglow phases fail
Heating flange 2 fault Voltage in heating element A high level is read despite no activation – the external relay has not switched correctly
Check the wiring harness, connectors, heating flange/glow plug unit, external relay, ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A1F3
E4A1F4
E4A1F5
E4A1F6
E4A1F7
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4A1FB
E4A1FC
E4A254
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-31 o f 3 1
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback status
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A25B
Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2B8
Turbocharger fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Turbocharger is not activated Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2B9
Turbocharger fault Shorted to supply voltage Turbocharger is not activated Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2BA
Turbocharger fault Hardware fault Turbocharger is not activated Transistor status does not match feedback status
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2BB
Turbocharger fault Negative control deviation Turbocharger is not activated Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A255
E4A256
E4A257
E4A258
E4A259
E4A25A
19.0-32 o f 3 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
E4A2BC
Turbocharger fault Positive control deviation Turbocharger is not activated Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2BD
Turbocharger fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted Turbocharger is not activated minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2BE
Turbocharger fault Current too low (activated state) – Turbocharger is not activated current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A2BF
Turbocharger fault Current too high (activated state) – Turbocharger is not activated current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, turbocharger solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A31C
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A31D
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A31E
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Hardware fault Transistor status does not match feedback value
Check the ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Negative control deviation Target less than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards minimum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Positive control deviation Target greater than actual value, controlled PWM goes towards maximum
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too high (switched off) – current higher than permitted minimum value although not energised Threshold violation when switched off
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4A31F
E4A320
E4A321
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-33 o f 3 3
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too low (activated state) – current less than permitted minimum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A323
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault Current too high (activated state) – current higher than permitted maximum value Threshold violation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A327
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault EGR open without activation "Open" status is read even without activation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A328
External exhaust gas recirculation 2 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault EGR closed without activation “Closed” status is read even without activation
Check the wiring harness, connectors, EGR valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Engine speed output fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, connected module
E4A705
No direct effect
Engine speed output fault Shorted to supply voltage Output and feedback values do not match
Check the wiring harness, connectors, connected module
E4A768
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A769
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder A1 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4A76A
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A76B
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A76C
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A76D
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A76E
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A76F
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A322
E4A704
19.0-34 o f 3 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4A770
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7CC
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7CD
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder A2 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4A7CE
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7CF
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7D0
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7D1
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7D2
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7D3
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A7D4
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A830
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A831
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder A3 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4A832
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A833
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A834
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A835
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A836
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-35 o f 3 5
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4A837
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A838
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A894
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A895
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder A4 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4A896
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A897
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A898
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A899
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A89A
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A89B
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4A89C
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA88
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA89
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder B1 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4AA8A
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA8B
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA8C
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA8D
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
19.0-36 o f 3 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4AA8E
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA8F
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AA90
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAEC No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAED No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder B2 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4AAEE No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAEF
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAF0
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAF1
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAF2
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAF3
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AAF4
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB50
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB51
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder B3 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4AB52
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB53
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB54
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-37 o f 3 7
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4AB55
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB56
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB57
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AB58
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABB4
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Incorrect current measurement or cable rupture
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABB5
No direct effect
Check the wiring harness, Cylinder B4 fault connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current (earth switch) A700D engine control unit
E4ABB6
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Excess high side current (positive switch)
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABB7
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Excess high side current on free wheel cylinder
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABB8
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault No flight time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABB9
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Flight time too short
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABBA No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Flight time too long
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABBB No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault No rise time measured
Replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4ABBC No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault Rise time too long
New data record or replace the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AED4
Engine shutdown
Injection system fault Cylinder fault More than the permitted number of solenoid valves have failed
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
Engine shutdown
Injection system fault Injection overlap to bank A Distance between the current tooth and the next tooth on bank A is more than 540° crankshaft angle
Check the start and duration of injection
E4AED5
19.0-38 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Engine shutdown
Injection system fault Injection overlap to bank B Distance between the current tooth and the next tooth on bank A is more than 540° crankshaft angle
No direct effect
Injection system fault High side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness, A connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess high side PWM current on all A700D engine control unit injectors on bank A
No direct effect
Injection system fault High side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness, B connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess high side PWM current on all A700D engine control unit injectors on bank B
No direct effect
Injection system fault High side short circuit to supply voltage on bank A Excess high side FREEcurrent on all injectors on bank A
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AEDA No direct effect
Injection system fault High side short circuit to supply voltage on bank B Excess high side FREEcurrent on all injectors on bank B
Check the wiring harness, connectors, solenoid valve, ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AEDB No direct effect
Injection system fault Low side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness, A connectors, solenoid valve, ECU On at least one injector on bank A A700D engine control unit Rise time too long or cannot be measured
E4AEDC No direct effect
Injection system fault Low side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness, B connectors, solenoid valve, ECU On at least one injector on bank B A700D engine control unit Rise time too long or cannot be measured
E4AEDD No direct effect
Injection system fault Low side short circuit to supply voltage Check the wiring harness, on bank A On at least one injector on bank A connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current, excess high A700D engine control unit side free current on all other injectors in this bank
E4AEDF No direct effect
Injection system fault Low side short circuit to supply voltage on bank B Check the wiring harness, On at least one injector on bank B connectors, solenoid valve, ECU Excess low side current, excess high A700D engine control unit side free current on all other injectors in this bank
E4AED6
E4AED7
E4AED8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4AED9
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the start and duration of injection
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-39 o f 3 9
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Engine shutdown
Overspeed fault Overspeed from speed sensor 2 – safety limit exceeded
Check engine operation (overspeed due to thrust mode), check ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Overspeed fault Overspeed from speed sensor 1 – warning limit exceeded
Check engine operation (overspeed due to thrust mode), check ECU A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Overspeed fault Overspeed from speed sensor 2 – warning limit exceeded
Check engine operation (overspeed due to thrust mode), check ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AF3A
Engine shutdown
Overspeed fault Overspeed from speed sensor 1 – safety limit exceeded
Check engine operation (overspeed due to thrust mode), check ECU A700D engine control unit
E4AF9C
Engine cannot be started
Synchronisation error Turn the ignition off and on again; Synchronisation lost while engine was check the engine speed and phase running; gap not detected sensor
Engine cannot be started
Synchronisation error Distance between gap (engine speed sensor) and phase sensor signal too great
Turn the ignition off and on again; check the engine speed and phase sensor
E4AF9E
Engine cannot be started
Synchronisation error Incorrect number of teeth – during the synchronisation phase, the number of teeth measured between successive gaps is not as specified
Turn the ignition off and on again; check the engine speed sensor
E4AF9F
Engine cannot be started
Synchronisation error Synchronisation not possible – speed too low during synchronisation phase
Turn the ignition off and on again; check the engine speed and phase sensor
E4AFA0
Engine cannot be started
Synchronisation error Faulty camshaft wheel index counter – Turn the ignition off and on again; the additional tooth of the Bosch check the engine speed and phase camshaft wheel is not measured at sensor the right place
E4B000
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Signal from impulse recorder lost
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B001
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Engine speed sensor does not provide a signal
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4AEFB
E4AF38
E4AF39
E4AF9D
19.0-40 o f 4 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
E4B002
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Invalid signal difference – engine speed measurement gradient too steep
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B003
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Frequency too high (implausible value)
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B004
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Impulse sensor polarity reversed – engine speed sensor incorrectly fitted or wrongly configured in the ECU A700D engine control unit
Check the installation of the engine speed sensor; check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4B005
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault Incorrect measurement (different measurement to the other sensor)
Check the installation of the engine speed sensor; check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4B064
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Signal from impulse recorder lost
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B065
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Engine speed sensor does not provide a signal
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B066
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Invalid signal difference – engine speed measurement gradient too steep
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
E4B067
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Frequency too high (implausible value)
Check distance of engine speed sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to engine speed sensor, check engine speed sensor
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-41 o f 4 1
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B068
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Impulse sensor polarity reversed – engine speed sensor incorrectly fitted or wrongly configured in the ECU A700D engine control unit
Check the installation of the engine speed sensor; check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4B069
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Engine speed sensor 2 fault Incorrect measurement (different measurement to the other sensor)
Check the installation of the engine speed sensor; check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4B0C8
No effect when engine is running
Phase sensor fault Signal from impulse recorder lost
Check distance of phase sensor to flywheel (0.5 – 2.0 mm), check wiring to phase sensor, check phase sensor
E4B0CC
No effect when engine is running
Phase sensor fault Phase sensor polarity reversed – Check the installation of the engine phase sensor incorrectly fitted or speed sensor; check the ECU wrongly configured in the ECU A700D A700D engine control unit engine control unit
E4B0CD
Emergency shutdown at the same time as redundant sensor (1 or 2) fails; otherwise engine speed recorded by redundant sensor
Phase sensor fault Incorrect measurement (different measurement to the other sensor)
Check the installation of the engine speed sensor; check the ECU A700D engine control unit
E4B1F4
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant level sensor fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B1F5
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant level sensor fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B1F6
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant level sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B1F7
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant level sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B1F8
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Coolant level sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B1F9
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Coolant level sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
19.0-42 o f 4 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4B44C
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B44D
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B44E
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B44F
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B450
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B451
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
E4B4B0
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air pressure sensor fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B4B1
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air pressure sensor fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B4B2
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B4B3
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B4B4
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Charge air pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B4B5
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Charge air pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
E4B514
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil pressure sensor fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-43 o f 4 3
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B515
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil pressure sensor fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B516
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B517
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B518
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Oil pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B519
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Oil pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
E4B5DC
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B5DD
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B5DE
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B5DF
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B5E0
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B5E1
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Air filter pressure sensor 1 fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
E4B708
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Ambient pressure sensor fault Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B709
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Ambient pressure sensor fault Sensor signal: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
19.0-44 o f 4 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4B70A
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Ambient pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture or shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B70B
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Ambient pressure sensor fault Sensor supply voltage: shorted to supply voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B70C
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Ambient pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 1) problems
E4B70D
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range Ambient pressure sensor fault violation; repair any mechanical Signal outside permitted range (limit 2) problems
E4B76C
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault Signal line shorted to earth
E4B76D
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
E4B76E
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B76F
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault, signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B770
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B771
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Air filter pressure switch 2 fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B7D0
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B7D1
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-45 o f 4 5
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B7D2
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B7D3
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault, signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B7D4
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B7D5
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Air filter pressure switch 1 fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B834
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Water in fuel filter sensor Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B835
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Water in fuel filter sensor Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken
E4B836
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Water in fuel filter sensor Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B837
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Water in fuel filter sensor Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B838
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Water in fuel filter sensor Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B839
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Water in fuel filter sensor Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B898
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B899
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
19.0-46 o f 4 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4B89A
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B89B
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B89C
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B89D
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Exhaust temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B8FC
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B8FD
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
E4B8FE
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B8FF
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Oil temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B900
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Oil temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B901
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Oil temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B960
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Fuel temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B961
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Fuel temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-47 o f 4 7
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B962
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Fuel temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B963
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Fuel temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B964
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Fuel temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B965
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Fuel temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B9C4
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B9C5
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken
E4B9C6
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B9C7
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Charge air temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B9C8
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Charge air temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4B9C9
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Charge air temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4BA28
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA29
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
19.0-48 o f 4 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code E4BA2A
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA2B
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Coolant temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA2B
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Coolant temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4BA2C
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Coolant temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4BA8C
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Internal temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to earth
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA8D
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Internal temperature sensor fault Check the wiring and the ECU Short circuit to supply voltage or signal A700D engine control unit / sensor line broken.
E4BA8E
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Internal temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA8F
Replacement sensor value is used. The error disappears when the measured value is in the defined range
Internal temperature sensor fault Signal line shorted to supply line voltage
Check the wiring and the ECU A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4BA90
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Internal temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
E4BA91
Reduced power or no reaction, depending on the configuration and sensor
Internal temperature sensor fault Monitoring threshold 2 exceeded or fallen below; medium no longer in normal operating state
Check the medium for range violation; repair any mechanical problems
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-49 o f 4 9
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
WARNING This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone The service codes are not shown on the display unit. Service Effect Cause code L550 - L580 no travel E2019 function, L586 restricted Machine type not defined - L566 selected by default travel
E2028 E2029 E202A E202B E202C E202D E202E E202F E2030 E2031 E2032 E2033 E2034 E2035 E2036 E2037 E2038 E2039 E203A
Selecting machine type Check output module 1, Parking brake: faulty activation (fault Greeneville central lubrication current) system or wiring
Note! The parking brake cannot be activated Note! The working hydraulics lockout cannot be Working hydraulics lockout: faulty activation (fault current) activated
Check output module 1 or wiring
Note! Bucket return-to-dig is permanently activated Note! Lift kick-out is permanently activated Note! Float position is permanently activated Note! Fan turns at incorrect speed Note! Warning buzzer is permanently activated Note! Swivel angle restriction is permanently activated Note! Coupling 1 is permanently activated Note! Coupling 2 is permanently activated Note! Coupling 3 is permanently activated Note! Modulation solenoid valve is permanently activated Note! Variable displacement motor 1 proportional valve is permanently activated Note! Variable displacement motor 2 proportional valve is permanently activated Note! Forward travel direction (pump 1) is permanently activated Note! Reverse travel direction (pump 1) is permanently activated
Bucket return-to-dig: faulty activation (fault current) Check output module 1 or wiring Lift kick-out: faulty activation (fault Check output module 1 or wiring current) Float position: faulty activation (fault Check output module 1 or wiring current)
Note! Overspeed protection is permanently activated Note! Control pressure proportional valve (pump 1) is permanently activated Note! Control pressure proportional valve (pump 2) is permanently activated
Fan: faulty activation (fault current) Warning buzzer: faulty activation (fault current) Swivel angle restriction: faulty activation (fault current) Coupling 1: faulty activation (fault current) Coupling 2: faulty activation (fault current) Coupling 3: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring Check output module 1 or wiring Check output module 1 or wiring Check output module 1 or wiring Check output module 1 or wiring
Modulation: faulty activation Yom (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring
Variable displacement motor 1: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring
Variable displacement motor 2: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring
Forward travel direction (pump 1): faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring
Reverse travel direction (pump 1): faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 1 or wiring
Overspeed protection: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
Control pressure (pump 1): faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
Control pressure (pump 2): faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
Note! Emergency steering is Emergency steering: faulty permanently activated activation (fault current)
19.0-50 o f 5 0
Check output module 1 or wiring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Check output module 2 or wiring
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E2027
Remedy
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
WARNING This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone The service codes are not shown on the display unit. Service Effect Cause code Note! Fan reversal is Fan reversal: faulty activation (fault E203B permanently activated current) Note! Ride control is Ride control: faulty activation (fault E203C permanently activated current) Note! Ride control / float E203D position is permanently Ride control / float position: faulty activation (fault current) activated Note! Forward travel E203E direction (pump 2) is Forward travel direction (pump 2): faulty activation (fault current) permanently activated Note! Reverse travel E203F direction (pump 2) is Reverse travel direction (pump 2): permanently activated faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring Check output module 2 or wiring Check output module 2 or wiring Check output module 2 or wiring Check output module 2 or wiring
E2040
Note! Additional equipment 1 is permanently activated
Additional equipment 1: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2041
Note! Additional equipment 2 is permanently activated
Additional equipment 2: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2042
Note! Joystick steering left is permanently activated
Joystick steering, left: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2043
Note! Joystick steering right is permanently activated
Joystick steering, right: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2044
Note! Gyrator steering (2-in- Gyrator steering (2-in-1): faulty 1) is permanently activated activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2045
No joystick steering available
Joystick steering safety shutdown: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 2 or wiring
E2058
Additional equipment 3 cannot be activated
Additional equipment 3: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 3 or wiring
E2059
Additional equipment 4 cannot be activated
Additional equipment 4: faulty activation (fault current)
Check output module 3 or wiring
E5023
Engine does not take up fuel
Gas pedal angle sensor: synchronisation not completed
Synchronise gas pedal angle sensor R5
E5024
No inching function available
Inch pedal angle sensor: synchronisation not completed
Synchronise inching angle sensor R1
Couplings open --> driving is not possible, no hydrostatic brake effect No inching function available
Variable displacement motor synchronisation not completed or not concluded with parameters Inch function was deactivated using parameters Variable displacement motor 2 overspeed (in 3rd gear) - motor 2 runs at over 1500 rpm although coupling 2 is open in 3rd gear Variable displacement motor 1 overspeed (in 2nd gear) - motor 1 runs at over 1500 rpm although coupling 1 or 3 is open in 2nd
Finish variable displacement motor synchronisation, reset parameters
E5025
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
E502D E502E
None E502F
E5030 E5031
Inching function activation Check variable displacement motor 2 speed Check variable displacement motor 1 speed
None Machine switches to neutral, driver can select travel Motor protection active: speed direction again after speed is reduced sensor overspeed
Check conditions of use - check fault in speed sensor B2a or B2b or wiring
Machine switches to neutral, Variable displacement motor 2 driver can select travel speed sensor: overspeed
Check conditions of use, variable displacement motor 1 speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-51 o f 5 1
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
WARNING This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone The service codes are not shown on the display unit. Service Effect Cause code direction again after speed is reduced E5032
E5033 E6009 E600A E6018 E6026
Machine switches to neutral, driver can select travel direction again after speed Variable displacement motor 1 is reduced speed sensor: overspeed Overspeed - engine/pump damage Batteries overheating, electrical components may fail Engine difficult to start CAN failure Battery charge symbol field (H6) lights up
Engine speed too high On-board voltage too high On-board voltage too low CAN failure due to insufficient battery voltage, below 8 V for longer than 100 ms Battery voltage below 25 V despite engine running longer than 5 minutes
Remedy sensor B2a or wiring
Check conditions of use, variable displacement motor 1 speed sensor B2 or wiring Check conditions of use, instruct driver on driving on slopes, check engine speed Check alternator or engine electronics Check battery, wiring or engine electronics, check power supply F36 Check battery voltage Check the alternator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
WARNING diesel engine This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone Service Effect Cause Remedy code Batteries overheating, Check alternator or engine E6009 electrical components On-board voltage too high electronics may fail Check battery, wiring or engine E600A Engine difficult to start On-board voltage too low electronics
19.0-52 o f 5 1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Service Codes, Diagnose Malfunctions
19.0.2
Audible and visual warning signals The following table contains the warning signals which have an additional audible tone or which are only displayed visually, along with their causes and remedies. There are four different audible warning signals: – – – –
Continuous tone Interval tone 1/10 (1 second tone followed by 10 second pause) Interval tone 2/3 (2 second tone followed by 3 second pause) Single 1 second beep
Warning signal Service code E A02A Interval tone 1/10 Coolant temperature symbol field (H13) flashes Service code E A02A, E 6000, E 6012 Coolant temperature symbol field (H13) flashes, STOP symbol field lights up Continuous warning buzzer
Cause
Remedy
Coolant temperature above 97 °C (B708)
Cleaning the cooling system Check the fan speed
Coolant temperature above 104 °C (B708)
Cleaning the cooling system Check the fan speed
Error in the cooling or electrical system
Check the temperature sensor B708, 2500 Ω at 20 °C check the diesel engine thermostat
Service code E 6008, E6012 Coolant temperature symbol field (H13) lights up The STOP symbol field lights up Continuous warning buzzer
Coolant level too low (B710)
Checking the coolant level
Fault in the electrical system
Check the coolant level transmitter B710
Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field Hydraulic oil temperature above 90 °C Cleaning the cooling system (H23) lights up (B8) Check the fan speed
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Hydraulic oil temperature above 95 °C Cleaning the cooling system (B8) Check the fan speed Service code E A02A Check the temperature sensor B8, Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field 1112 Ω at 20 °C (H23) lights up Check the wiring Interval tone 1/10 Fault in the cooling / hydraulic / Check the working hydraulics pressure The output of the travel pump is electrical system relief valves (control valve block) reduced Check the travel hydraulics pressure relief valves (variable adjustment pump)
Service code E 2002 Emergency steering check symbol field (H24) lights up
Emergency steering pump check not successfully completed (B3a) Error in the electrical / hydraulic system
Check the emergency steering pump Check the pressure switch B3a Check the wiring Check the emergency steering pump pressure
Emergency steering function activated Check the steering pump due to failure of steering pump (B3) Service code E 2001 Emergency steering symbol field (H8) lights up Error in the electrical / hydraulic Warning buzzer 40 second tone system
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653 L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the pressure switch B3 Check the steering pump standby pressure
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-53 o f 5 3
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Warning signal Service code E 6004, E 5034, E A02A, E 6012 Engine oil pressure symbol field (H4) lights up Stop symbol field (H36) lights up After 10 seconds continual warning buzzer Service code E 5028 Gear oil overheating symbol field (H14) lights up Driving is only possible at reduced speed (approx. 20 km/h)
Cause Remedy Insufficient engine oil pressure (B701) Check the oil level Error in the diesel engine lubricating Check the pressure relief valve oil supply Fault in the electrical system
Check the pressure switch B701 Check the wiring
Gear oil temperature over 120 °C (B14) Oil level too high
Clean the gear oil cooler Check the fan speed Correct the oil level
Fault in the electrical system
Check the thermo switch B14 Check the wiring Start the engine: the brake accumulators are filled while the engine runs Check the pressure switch B19 Check the wiring Check the accumulator charge valve Check the gear pump
Service code E 2016 Accumulator charge pressure symbol field (H19) lights up No travel direction can be selected after 2 minutes continual warning buzzer
Brake accumulator pressure too low (B19)
Service code E 6016 Battery charge symbol field (H6) lights up The parking brake cannot be released
Torn V-belt
Fit a new V-belt
Defective alternator
Service the alternator Check the wiring to the main electronics
Error in the electrical / hydraulic system
Service code segment display (P7) shows the service code, single 1 second beep
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
See the service code tables
19.0-54 o f 5 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978 L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171 L576 - 457 / from 14171 L580 - 459 / from 14171
View more...
Comments
